Organizational Maintenance Manual For Engagement Control Station, Guided Missile, Truck Mounted AN/MSQ-104 - TM 9-1430-600-20-2
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL FOR ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION, GUIDED MISSILE, TRUCK MOUNTED: AN/MSQ-104, VOLUME 2 (P
120 51 161MB
English Pages 1046 Year 1984
Recommend Papers
File loading please wait...
Citation preview
WILS GOVU
1
D 101.11 : 9-1430-600-20-
H
.11 : 9-1430-600-20-1 TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
TABLE OF ENGAGEMENT
CONTROL
CONTENTS
HOW TO USE
STATION ,
THIS MANUAL MISSILE ,
GUIDED
TRUCK INTRODUCTION
MOUNTED : LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
AN / MSQ - 104
VOLUME
1 PM CHECKS AND SERVICES
FAULT ISOLATION
UNIVERSITY OF T INNESOTA LIBRARY
IO ATR
P
AUG
6 1985
DEPOSITORY PUBN. U.S.-G. P. O. - D.295 GOVERNMENT PUBLICATIONS DIVISION
1
PATRIOT AIR DEFENSE GUIDED
MISSILE SYSTEM
HEADQUARTERS , DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
MAY 1984
/
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RECORD OF CHANGES
CHANGE NO.
DATE
TITLE OR BRIEF DESCRIPTION
ENTERED BY
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WARNING
HIGH CURRENT
is used to operate this equipment
DEATH ON CONTACT OR SEVERE BURNS
may result if safety precautions are not observed .
Never work on electronic equipment unless there is someone nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment and who is able to give first aid . When the technician is aided by operators , he must warn them about dangerous areas . When possible , shut off power to equipment . Remove all jewelry from hands and wrists before beginning work on the equipment .
Be careful not to contact high - current connections when installing or operating this equipment . When possible , keep one hand away from the equipment to reduce hazard of current flowing through the vital organs of the body.
Le WARNING
X- RAY RADIATION
Turn off power to the display and control group during maintenance when power is not required minimize exp osure of personnel to X-ray radiation from the sfor nt idechec spadju ntand he dior lay astme s of tkout nd co ol grto oup catho de ray tubes .
a ..
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
INSTRUCTIONS FOR ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION (Extracted (with modifications ) from FM 21-11 , First Aid for Soldiers)
a.
Take a deep breath ,
open your mouth wide ,
and
make
an
airtight seal around the
casualty's nose , using one of the techniques shown in the figure .
b.
With your eyes focused on the casualty's chest , blow forcefully into the airway ( mouth or nose). Rising of the casualty's chest indicates that the air is reaching the lungs . In this case , the procedure is continued . If the chest does not rise , corrective action must be taken. First , hold the jaw up more forcefully and blow harder , making sure that the air is not leaking from the mouth or nose . If the chest still does not rise , recheck the mouth for foreign matter. If necessary, turn the casualty on one side . Strike the casualty between the shoulders with considerable force , repeatedly if necessary , to dislodge obstruction in the airway; then resume attempts to inflate lungs .
C.
Remove your mouth from the casualty's airway opening and listen for the return of air . If the casualty's exhalation is noisy , elevate the jaw more .
d.
After each exhalation of air from the casualty's lungs , blow another deep breath into the airway. Make the first five to ten breaths deep and give them at a rapid rate in order to provide fast reoxygenation . Thereafter , give the breaths at a rate of 12 to 20 per minute until the casualty is able to breathe satisfactorily or until you are positive life is gone . A smooth rhythm is desired but split- second timing is not essential . As the casualty attempts to breathe , adjust the timing of your efforts to assist .
WARNING
After a period of resuscitation , the casualty's abdomen may bulge indicating that some of the air is going into the stomach . Since inflation of the stomach makes it more difficult to inflate the lungs, apply gentle pressure to the abdomen with your hand between inflations . If your breathing at the start has been very deep and rapid , you may become faint , tingle , or even lose consciousness if you persist. After administering the first five to ten deep , rapid breaths , you should adjust your breathing to a rate of 12 to 20 times a minute , with only moderate increase in normal volume so that you will be able to continue to give artificial respiration for a long period without temporary ill effects .
b
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
rs)
a
bund
mouth
s. In t must
air is
outh veent
on in
ir. If
into Orde
b
mir
Jone tem
2 =
at it
th
e
f
t
a. NOSE SEALED WITH THUMB AND FINGER .
b. NOSE SEALED WITH CHEEK.
MOUTH-TO-MOUTH ARTIFICIAL RESPIRATION .
с
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
Le
WARNING
RADIO - FREQUENCY RADIATION HAZARD
Radio- frequency (rf) radiation from radar set ( RS ) antennas and associated equipment is not cumulative , but it can be hazardous . It heats the body tissues , and , if the radiation intensity is sufficiently high , will permanently damage tissue . This damage is not immediately apparent .
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS Observing the following precautions will insure that no one is exposed to hazardous levels of rf radiation . Stay out of the area within 120 meters in front of RS and within maximum angular track limits . Stay at least two meters from sides of the RS. Stay out of buildings , shelters , and vehicles between RS and denied occupancy zone .
Stay offthe roof and ladder of RS. Stay out of the door - platform area of RS . Operational personnel shall conduct routine functional tests of all warning devices and interlock systems and maintain a log book of all such tests .
Give audible signals to alert personnel that RS is going on the air. •
Conduct initial and routine briefings on system hazards and the radiation protection program for all site personnel . Stop RS radiating immediately when a fixed beam condition such as clutter or target dropout is indicated .
Before radiating or going to remote operation insure that all crew members have vacated the RS roof and area .
Place a placard at the fire control operator console indicating the prohibited azimuths , computer tapes , and power levels for each primary target line and secondary target line .
d
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
PRIMARY TARGET LINE ( PTL) AZIMUTH
ent is n tensity rent. MAXIMUM TRACK LIMIT = AX2
vels of
DENIED OCCUPANCY ZONE 120
CW TRAIN
METERS
AZ LIMIT FOR SECONDARY
ancy
TARGET LINE (STL) RS
2 METERS
A تالمالية EPP ECS
A
CCW TRAIN AZ LIMIT FOR SECONDARY
石 AMG
TARGET LINE (STL)
ve
RADIATION CUT-OFF ZONE
AMG - Antenna Mast Group AZ - Azimuth CCW - Counterclockwise CW - Clockwise ECS - Engagement Control Station EPP - Electric Power Plant
RS- Radar Set RF RADIATION CUT- OFF ZONE ( EXAMPLE OF TYPICAL FIELD EMPLACEMENT)
e
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WARNING
DANGEROUS VOLTAGE
is used to operate this equipment .
DEATH ON CONTACT
may result if safety precautions are not observed .
Never work on electronic equipment unless there is someone nearby who is familiar with the operation and hazards of the equipment and is able to give first aid . When the technician is aided by operators , he must warn them about dangerous areas .
When possible , shut off power to equipment before beginning work on equipment . Ground every capacitor likely to hold a dangerous potential . When working inside equipment , after power has been turned off, always ground every part before touching it.
Be careful not to contact high - voltage connections when installing or operating this equipment . When possible , keep one hand away from equipment to reduce the hazard of current flowing through the vital organs of the body.
EXTREMELY DANGEROUS POTENTIALS
greater than 500 volts exist in the listed units of system major items .
Major Item
Synthetic Display Indicator Synthetic Display Indicator
Operating Voltage
Ref. Desig .
500V / 14kV
A54
500V/ 14kV
A73
Le Do not be misled by the term ' low voltage . ' Under adverse
WARNING
f
conditions potentials as low as 50 volts may cause death .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WARNING
Maintenance aisle and utility lighting may fail without warning . The technician furthest from the access door should attach a flashlight from the maintenance tool kit to his belt.
EMERGENCY EXIT
When emergency exit is required , proceed as follows .
with the
nician is
Return equipment extended from the racks to the racks and close all cabinets .
• The technician with the flashlight lights the way to the access door.
d every ver has
•
Personnel leave the compartment in the order of their nearness to the door. The person closest to the door makes a best effort to clear the aisle and exits first, followed by the person next closest to the door.
ment.
flowing
• All personnel meet in front of the shelter prime mover for a head count and further direction .
•
Notify command echelons of equipment operational status at the time of abandonment .
WARNING hhhhhhl HIGH TEMPERATURE
This equipment contains items which operate at temperatures above maintenance is required when equipment is hot , wear protective gloves .
140 ° F
( 60 °C) .
g
If
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WARNING
COLD WEATHER HAZARDS
Failure to comply with the content of this warning could result in serious injury .
PROTECTING THE HANDS IN COLD WEATHER OPERATIONS
Observe normal precautions for cold weather operations and wear proper clothing as described in FM 31-70. For certain mechanical tasks , observe the following measures .
If hands feel numb or painful , stop work . Immediately take measures to re - warm .
Do not touch metal with bare ( ungloved ) hands at temperatures below + 32 ° F (0 ° C ) .
At temperatures approaching -50 ° F ( -45 ° C ) , with
no wind , glove liners , without arctic
mittens , may be worn to perform certain tasks for periods of no more than three minutes . After these brief exposures , re -warm the hands with vigorous exercise and / or return to a heated area. Do not remove the arctic mittens under windy conditions .
In the event of injury from cold or frostbite , immediately perform first aid / recovery methods as described in FM 21-11 .
Le WARNING
HIGH NOISE LEVEL
When the radar set , engagement control station , electric power plant , electric power unit, communications relay group , and launching station are operating , potentially dangerous noise levels exist . Without protection , long exposure to this noise may cause a hearing loss . Use ear protectors when working within 10 meters of any of the equipment . See AR40-5 for additional information .
h
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
Le WARNING
WORK TIME LIMITS IN HOT WEATHER OPERATIONS If heat exhaustion ,
cramps ,
heatstroke
or
occur,
immediately perform first aid / recovery
procedures described in FM 21-11 .
Observe normal precautions for hot /humid weather operations and wear proper light clothing
escribe as described in TM 10-276 . For the temperature - humidity combinations listed in the attached table, limit continuous work to the times shown with appropriate rest / recovery periods and fluid replacement for tasks which take longer than the recommended time .
NOTE
Iarcti
s. Afte heate
Recommendations are approximately one - half the heat tolerance time values given in MIL-STD - 1472 .
ds & TEMP RELATIVE HUMIDITY (%)
(°F)
140
130
120
(°C)
10
30
60
30 MIN
54
1 HR
49
2 HRS
1 HR
6 HRS
2 HRS
50
70
90
100
NO WORK RECOMMENDED
unit
oist
110
43
1 HR
30 MIN
ea
ona
100
38 6 HRS
90
32
2 HRS
1 HR
30 MIN
NO LIMIT - WITH PRECAUTIONS
15 MIN
2 HRS 6 HRS❘ 3 HRS
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
Le WARNING
TOXIC MATERIALS
This equipment contains toxic materials : Nomenclature
Part No.
Toxic Material
Synthetic Display CRT
11440587
P-31 Phosphor on inside of face plate
Toxic material is used in the display and control console cathode ray tubes . Use care whe handling these items to avoid breaking . If breakage occurs ,
avoid contact with skin and
inhalation of small particles of the toxic materials . If contact occurs , quickly wash the affecte parts with a soap solution , rinse , and dry thoroughly .
CLEANING SURFACES ON WHICH TUBES HAVE BEEN BROKEN
Wet Method . Wear rubber or plastic gloves . Pick up large fragments with forceps , then wipe across the area with a wet cloth . Make one wipe at a time and fold cloth in half, using the clear side for wiping each time . When cloth becomes too small , discard and start again with a clear piece of cloth . Be careful not to rub the radioactive particles into the surface being cleaned; d not use a back and forth motion . Until cleanup is completed , no one should be allowed on the downwind side of debris . Clean from the windward side of the debris . Seal all debris and cloths used for cleaning in a container such as a plastic bag , metal can , or glass jar for disposal .
If bag is used be careful not to squeeze it quickly , causing small particles to puff into the air. Disposal . Material must be disposed of in accordance with local SOP for disposal of toxic pollutants .
WARNING
Exercise care when a handling cathode ray tube (CRT) to avoid breakage . If breakage occurs wear gloves : pick up large glass fragments first . Brush remainder into suitable container Examine surfaces to ensure all particles have been removed .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WARNING
MECHANICAL HAZARDS e plate
Rotating equipment (blower fans ) is used in the operation of this equipment . When performing maintenance , know the location and status (operating /off) of the rotating equipment . Disable all
= care -h skin rotating equipment before performing maintenance .
he affe
rods to prevent tripping injuries and possible damage to equipment connectors. -
N
Avoid power, data , and control cables interconnecting emplaced equipment, and driven ground
Site survey reference stakes are driven into the ground in the emplacement area . They are a
then the
ith al eane ed
and sal.
ཆ
eair
ос
nti
tripping hazard and if dislodged or moved could affect alinement of the fire platoon during emplacement .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WARNING
The maintenance aisle in the radar set has limited headroom . Wear protective headgear .
Le WARNING SAFETY SUMMARY The following general safety precautions are not related to any specific procedures and do not appear in this technical manual . They are recommended precautions that personnel must understand and apply during many phases of operation and maintenance .
THERE ARE ELECTRICAL CONDITIONS OF VOLTAGE AND CURRENT IN THIS EQUIPMENT WHICH CAN CAUSE DEATH . USE EXTREME CAUTION WHEN SERVICING EITHER THE POWER SUPPLIES OR THEIR LOAD COMPONENTS .
KEEP AWAY FROM LIVE CIRCUITS
Operating
personnel
must observe every safety
regulation
at all times .
Do
not
replace
components or make adjustments inside the equipment with the high voltage supply turned on. Dangerous potentials may exist under certain conditions when the power control is in the off position because of charges retained by capacitors . Avoid casualties by always removing power and discharging and grounding a circuit before touching it .
DO NOT SERVICE OR ADJUST ALONE
Never reach into or enter an enclosure to service or adjust the equipment except with someone who can render aid .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HEADQUARTERS DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
TECHNICAL MANUAL ) ) 0-1 00-2 30-6 ) 9-14 TM
Washington, D.C., 1 May 1984 ORGANIZATIONAL MAINTENANCE MANUAL
ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION , GUIDED MISSILE , TRUCK MOUNTED :
AN/MSQ - 104
gear.
PATRIOT AIR DEFENSE GUIDED MISSILE SYSTEM
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can help improve this manual . If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the procedures , please let us know. Mail your letter , DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications and Blank Forms) or DA Form 2028-2 , located in back of this manual , direct to :
Commander
dont
U.S. Army Missile Command Attn : DRSMI -SNPM
I mus
Redstone Arsenal , AL 35898
A reply will be furnished to you .
TABLE OF CONTENTS
VOLUME 1 Paragraph
Page
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
CHAPTER
оп
1
INTRODUCTION Scope .
1-1
Maintenance Forms , Records , and Reports
1-2
1-2
Destruction of Army Materiel to Prevent Enemy Use
1-3
1-2
Administrative Storage
1-4
1-2
Reporting of Equipment Quality Deficiencies
1-5
1-3
Nomenclature Cross - Reference .
1-6
1-4
Differences Between Models
1-7
1-5
1-8
1-5
1-1
in:
Equipment Description ...
i
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Paragraph
CHAPTER
2
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE Lubrication Instructions
Section
Section
Page
II
Repair Parts , Special Tools , Test , Measurement , and Diagnostic Equipment (TMDE ) , and Support Equipment
Section
Section
CHAPTER
|||
IV
3
Common Tools and Equipment . .
2-1
2-1
Special Tools , TMDE , and Support Equipment
2-2
2-1
Repair Parts .
2-3
2-1
Scope ..
2-4
2-1
General Service .
2-5
2-2
2-6
2-2
Service Upon Receipt .
General ..
2-7
2-3
Responsibility .
2-8
2-3
Intervals
2-9
2-3
General Procedures for All Services and Inspections .
2-10
2-3
Electro- Mechanical Linear Actuator A123 Lubrication ..
2-11
2-4
Data Link Terminal Master Oscillator Adjustment .
2-12
2-5
Door Assembly Lubrication ..
2-13
2-9
General ...
3-1
3-1
Automatic Diagnostic Tests
3- 2
3-1
Fault Indicator Table .
3-3
3-2
Antenna Map Interpretation .
3-4
3-14
3-5
3-31
Method for Running an Antenna Map
Beam Steering Processor 070 Output Storage and Timing Module Test
3-6
3-35
Beam Processor Module Fault Isolation 01 .
3-7
3-36
3-8
3-41
Zero Test Failures Fault Isolation ..
3-9
3-45
Standard Zero Test Failure Fault Isolation
3-10
3-49
Divide- by-Two Resetting Element Fault ...
3-11
3-50
Divide- by-Two Multiple Resetting Equipment Fault Isolation .
3-12
3-56
126 Fault Isolation ...
3-13
3-69
Divide-by-Two Multiple Resetting Element General Fault Isolation . .. . . Voice Communications Engagement Control Station to Radar Set Fault Isolation
3-14
3-74
Radio Relay Terminal 1 , 2 , or 3 Secure Power Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation .
3-15
3-76
Service Upon Receipt
Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
FAULT ISOLATION
H
Divide- by-Two Multiple Resetting Element BITE LINE 26 , 51 , 101 , or
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Page Paragraph
CHAPTER
2-1 2-1
2-1
2-1
3
Page
-Continued Radio Relay Terminal 1 , 2, or 3 Not Secure Power Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation.
3-16
3-83
Power Supply A25 Circuit Breaker A87 RT-524 and KY-57 Tripped Fault Isolation ..
3-17
3-93
Power Supply A25 , Circuit Breaker A88 RT- 524 and KY-57 Tripped Fault Isolation ...
3-18
3-95
Power Supply A25 Circuit Breaker DLT Tripped Fault Isolation ...
3-19
3-100
Power Supply A25 Circuit Breaker UHF ANT CONT Tripped Fault Isolation
3-20
3-103
نه
-2 -2
Power Supply A39 Fault Indication Fault Isolation BITE Indicator Panel A51 LAMP TEST Indicator Fault Isolation ..
/ 3-21
3-107
3-22
3-117
BITE Indicator Panel A51 D & C STATUS Indicator Fault Isolation.
3-23
3-121
BITE Indicator Panel A51 LAMP BRIGHTNESS Control Fault Isolation ..
3-24
3-136
BITE Indicator Panel A51 EXT ALERT Fault Isolation ...
3-25
3-138
-3
3
3 FP Status Indicator Panel A61 LAMP BRIGHTNESS Control Fault Isolation
3-26
3-140
Prime Power Outage Fault Isolation . .
3-27
3-141
3-28
3-144
3-29
3-153
3-30
3-155
3-31
3-159
3-32
3-166
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
3-33
3-170
Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR- RWCIU Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation ..
3-34
3-173
Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR- RLRIU Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation ...
3-35
3-177
3-36
3-182
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
3-37
3-184
Ambient Air Control Panel A72 STATUS 28V ON Lamp Off Fault Isolation
3-38
3-198
Weapon Control Computer A95 Fault Isolation . . .
3-39
3-202
Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR- COMPUTER Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation . . . . Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR- GAS FILTER UNIT Circuit Breaker
Tripped Fault Isolation .... Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR-TELEPHONE CONVERTER Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
....
3
Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR -VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation ... Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- ROADSIDE HEATERS Circuit
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- INTERNAL- EXTERNAL UTILITY POWER 120 VAC 400 HZ Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation ... Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- LIGHT CONTROL Circuit
iii
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Paragraph
CHAPTER
3
Page
- Continued
Weapon Control computer A95 , MMU1 and MMU2 Manual Fault Isolation ...
3-40
3-299
Weapon Control Computer Manual Battery Replaceable Unit Replacement Sequence Fault Isolation .
3-41
3-303
Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 Manual Fault Isolation . .
3-42
3-364
3-43
3-368
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 1 ...
3-44
3-369
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 2 . •
3-45
3-370
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 3 .
3-46
3-373
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 4 .
3-47
3-374
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 5 .
3-48
3-375
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 6 . •
3-49
3-376
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 7 .
3-50
3-377
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 8 ..
3-51
3-378
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 9 ..
3-52
3-380
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 10 .
3-53
3-382
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 11 .
3-54
3-384
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 12.
3-55
3-386
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 13 .
3-56
3-388
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 14.
3-57
3-390
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 15 .
3-58
3-393
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 16 .
3-59
3-395
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 17 .
3-60
3-397
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 18.
3-61
3-399
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 19 .
3-62
3-401
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 20..
3-63
3-403
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 21.
3-64
3-405
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 22 .
3-65
3-407
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 23..
3-66
3-409
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 24..
3-67
3-411
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 25 .
3-68
3-412
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 26.
3-69
3-414
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 27.
3-70
3-417
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 28.
3-71
3-420
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 29 .
3-72
3-421
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 30 ..
3-73
3-421
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 31 .
3-74
3-422
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 32 .
3-75
3-423
Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 33 .. Computer Maintenance Panel Test Routine No. 34 ..
3-76
3-424
iv
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Page
Paragraph CHAPTER
3
Page
-Continued
3-299 Hard Copy Unit Self-Test ...
3-77
3-425
3-78
3-427
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR-DATA LINK TERM Circuit
3-303
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation ...
3-364
Distribution Box A66 EPP INPUT PWR-AIR COND CURBSIDE or
3-368
ROADSIDE Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation .... Ambient Air Control Panel A72 EQPT-AIR FLOW TEMP -HIGH / LOW
3-79
3-436
Lamp On Fault Isolation ....
3-80
3-438
Communications Status Fault Isolation .
3-81
3-455
BITE Indicator Panel A51 Display and Control STATUS- MS3 Fault Lamps Fault Isolation
3-82
3-463
3-83
3-481
3-84
3-485
3-85
3-490
3-86
3-495
3-87
3-500
3-88
3-509
3-369 3-370
3-373
3-374 3-375
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- ROADSIDE FANS-FWD Circuit
3-376
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
3-377
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- ROADSIDE FANS-AFT Circuit
3-378
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
3-380
3-382
3-384
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- CURBSIDE FANS-FWD Circuit
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- CURBSIDE FANS-AFT Circuit
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
3-386 Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR- DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE
3-388 8 8 2 8 8
Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
-390
Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR- DISPLAY/CONTROL- CURBSIDE
-393
Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
-395
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC- DISPLAY /CONTROL Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
3-89
3-518
-397
Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR- PRINTER Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation ...
3-90
3-525
SPLY Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation .
3-91
3-529
Roadside , Aft Control Fault Isolation .
3-92
3-534
Total Power Failure MS1 and MS3 Fault Isolation .
3-93
3-537
Total Power Failure MS1 Fault Isolation
3-94
3-542
Total Power Failure MS3 Fault Isolation
3-95
3-550
MS1 Power Supplies Fault Isolation ...
3-96
3-558
MS3 Power Supplies Fault Isolation ....
3-97
3-575
AMG ENABLE Light Off Fault Isolation . . .
3-98
3-591
Circuit Breaker AC Power Output Fault Isolation Distribution Box A66 28 VDC- POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1 /PS2
3-99
3-596
Fault Isolation . . . .
3-100
3-602
Receiver-Transmitter RT-524 A87 Input Power Fault Isolation
3-101
3-607
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC- PWR DIST UNIT PWR
403
11
2
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT
V
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Paragraph
CHAPTER
3
Page
-Continued
3-102
3-611
3-103
3-614
3-104
3-619
3-105
3-623
A7 Power Fault Isolation
3-106
3-627
Routing Logic Radio Interface Unit A46 Input Power Fault Isolation .
3-107
3-631
Power Output Fault Isolation ..
3-108
3-636
Deleted ..
3-109
Deleted .
3-110
Receiver-Transmitter RT- 524 A88 Input Power Fault Isolation Power Supply A 100 Input Power Fault Isolation
Weapon Control Computer Prime Power Fault Isolation . VHF Blower B1 Inoperative Fault Isolation ....
Radio Relay Terminal -1 , -2 , or -3 Radio Transmitter T- 983 A32 , A 19, or
Radio Relay Terminal - 1 , -2 , or -3 Distribution Box A66 Not Secure
Radio Relay Terminal - 1 , -2 , or -3 Distribution Box A66 Secure Power 3-641
Output Fault Isolation .
3-111
Deleted .
3-112
Deleted ..
3-113
Routing Logic Radio Interface Unit Power Control Fault Isolation ..
3-114
3-645
Radio Relay Terminal Not Secure Power Control Fault Isolation ...
3-115
3-651
Power Supply A25 UHF ANT CONT DC Output Power Fault Isolation ...
3-116
3-654
Radio Relay Terminal -1 , -2 , or -3 Multiplexer TD- 660 A36 , A23 , or A11 Power Fault Isolation .
3-117
3-659
Deleted ..
3-118
Radio Relay Terminal - 1 , -2 , or -3 Data Buffer TD- 1065 A35 , A22 , or A10 Power Fault Isolation .
3-119
Deleted ..
3-120
Deleted ..
3-121
3-663
Radio Relay Terminal - 1 , -2 , or -3 Key Generator TSEC / KG - 27 A8 , A20
3-667
or A33 Power Fault Isolation ...
3-122
Deleted .
3-123
Deleted ..
3-124
Deleted .
3-125
Deleted ..
3-126
3-127
3-671
Operational Mode Prime Power Outage Fault Isolation
3-128
3-678
Emplacement Mode Prime Power Outage Fault Isolation ..
3-129
3-694
Data Link Terminal Mast Raise- Lower Fault Isolation ..
3-130
3-708
Distribution Box A66 Power Supply PS1 DC Output Fault Isolation ...
3-131
3-717
3-132
3-728
Distribution Box A66 28VDC Output Fault Isolation
Radar Weapon Control Interface Unit Power Fault Isolation
3-133 Generator Control A64 Fault Isolation
vi
3-735
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Page
Paragraph
CHAPTER 3-611
3
Page
-Continued Data Link Terminal Intialization Fault Isolation ...
3-134
3-742
3-619
Radio Relay Terminal - 1 , -2, or -3 Radio Receiver R- 1329 A6, A18, or A31 Power Fault Isolation .
3-135
3-756
3-623
Deleted ..
3-136
Deleted ..
3-137
Deleted ..
3-138
3-614
3-627
3-631
Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- 28VDC- COMMO PWR SPLY 3-139
3-760
Single Radio Relay Terminal Fault Assessment
3-140
3-765
Power Supply A25 WCC Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation ......
3-141
3-768
WCC Status Lights Fault Isolation ..
3-142
3-774
Hard Copy Unit A65 AC Power Fault Isolation .
3-143
3-793
Power Supply A52A1 Fault Isolation
3-144
3-798
Power Supply A62A1 Fault Isolation
3-145
3-806
Distribution Box A66 LAMP TEST Fault Isolation
3-146
3-814
Compartment Lighting Fault Isolation...
3-147
3-817
Hood Status and Fan Lights Fault Isolation ..
3-148
3-836
Roadmarch DC Power Fault Isolation.
3-149
3-906
Test Fault Isolation
3-150
3-924
Shelter Interior Temperature Too Hot /Cold Fault Isolation
3-151
3-931
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
3-152
3-936
Antenna Control Unit A41 Input Power Fault Isolation ..
3-153
3-940
On -Line Secure Power (Red ) Fault Isolation ..
3-154
3-946
Off-Line Secure Power (Red) Fault Isolation ..
3-155
3-948
On - Line Not Secure Power (Black) Fault Isolation ..
3-156
3-951
Off-Line Not Secure Power (Black) Fault Isolation .
3-157
3-955
Antenna Control Unit A41 POWER Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
3-158
3-958
Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation ...
3-159
3-963
Routing Logic Radio Interface Unit Fault Assessment .
3-160
3-965
Data Link Terminal Fault Assessment .
3-161
3-969
Power Supply A58CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation . . . . .
3-162
3-973
Power Supply A77 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation .
3-163
3-979
Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation 8-636
-641
545
551
554
59
Ambient Air Control Panel A72 /Generator Control Panel A64 Lamp
333
Distribution Box A66 EPP INPUT PWR-BATTERY POWER Circuit
Distribution Box A66 EPP INPUT PWR-UHF AMS PWR AMPL Circuit
vii
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Paragraph
Page
VOLUME 2
CHAPTER
4
CORRECTIVE MAINTENANCE General ..
4-1
4-1
Fan Door Assembly A1 , A56, A75 , or A110 Replacement
4-2
4-2
Resilient Mount Replacement ..
4-3
4-6
Fan Door Assembly A1 , A56, A75 , or A110 Relay K1 Replacement
4-4
4-10
Fan Door Assembly A1 , A56 , A75 , or A110 Switch S1 Replacement
4-5
4-12
4-6
4-15
Stationary Duct-Type Heater A2 Replacement ..
4-7
4-18
4-8
4-23
4-9
4-25
4-10
4-27
4-11
4-29
4-12
4-34
Radio Receiver R - 1329 / GRC- 103 (V) A6 , A18 , or A31 Replacement
4-13
4-38
Radio Transmitter T- 983 / GRC - 103 (V) A7 , A 19 , or A32 Replacement ...
4-14
4-42
Electronic Key Generator TSEC / KG- 27 A8 , A20 , or A33 Replacement . High-Speed Data Buffer TD- 1065 A 10 , A22 , or A35 Replacement .....
4-15
4-45
4-16
4-50
4-17
4-54
Thermostatic Switch Assembly A14 Replacement ..
4-18
4-56
Mass Storage Unit A15 Circuit Card A5 or A6 Replacement
4-19
4-59
Fan Door Assembly A1 , A56 , A75 , or A110 Vaneaxial Fan B1 or
Inlet /Outlet Air Door Assembly A3 , A50 , A60 , A68 , A79 , or A112 Replacement Inlet/Outlet Air Door Assembly A3 , A50 , A60 , A68 , A79 , or A112 Plunger Switch S1 Replacement .
Large Inlet /Outlet Air Door Assembly A3 or A112 Thermostatic Switch S2 Replacement .... Inlet /Outlet Air Door Assembly A3 , A50, A66 , A68 , A79 , or A112 Terminal Board TB1 Replacement Order Wire Receiver-Transmitter RT-773 / GRC - 103 A5 , A16, or A27 Replacement
Multiplexer TD- 660 A11 , A23 , or A36 Replacement .
Mass Storage Unit A15 Chassis or Tape Transport Cartridge Replacement
Deleted ...
4-20 4-21
4-64
Mass Storage Unit A15 Power Supply Assembly PS1 Replacement ..
4-22
4-66
Toggle Switch With Bracket A17 Replacement ..
4-23
4-68
4-24
4-70
Toggle Switch With Bracket A17 Switch S1 Replacement . ·
4-25
4-72
28VDC Power Supply Assembly A25 Replacement 28VDC Power Supply Assembly A25 Power Supply PS1 or PS2 Replacement ..
4-26
4-75
4-27
4-78
Replacement
4-28
4-81
28VDC Power Supply Assembly A25 Terminal Board TB1 Replacement
Toggle Switch With Bracket A17 Connector J3 Replacement .
28VDC Power Supply Assembly A25 Diode CR1 , CR2 , CR3 , or CR4
viii
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Paragraph
Page
Page CHAPTER
4
-Continued
28VDC Power Supply Assembly A25 Terminal Board TB2 orTB3 Replacement
4-29
4-83
4-1
28VDC Power Supply Assembly A25 Chassis Replacement 4-30 ......
4-30
4-85
4-2
Distribution Box A26 Replacement ...
4-31
4-89
Electrical Dummy Load A28 Replacement .
4-32
4-92
Electronic Frequency Converter CV2500 / GRC A29 Replacement ..
4-33
4-94
4-6 4-10
Radio Frequency Filter Assembly A30, A96 , or A 107 Filter
4-12
Replacement
4-34
4-96
4-15
Telephone Signal Converter A38 CV- 1548 / G Replacement
4-35
4-98
--18
Power Supply Assembly A39 BITE Circuit Card A1 or Regulator Circuit Card A2 Replacement .
4-36
4-101
Power Supply Assembly A39 Vaneaxial Fan B1 Replacement
4-37
4-104
PS1 Replacement
4-38
4-107
Power Supply Assembly A39 Chassis Replacement
4-39
4-109
Remote Control A40 Replacement ...
4-40
4-113
Replacement .
4-41
4-115
Communication Patching Panel A42 Chassis or Circuit Card A1 through A 13 Replacement
4-42
4-118
Electrical Filter Assembly A43 Replacement
4-43
4-122
Communications System Control A44, A47 , A82, or A86 Replacement .
4-44
4-125
Intercommunication Station A45 Replacement .
4-45
4-127
4-46
4-129
4-47
4-132
4-48
4-135
TEST Switch S1 Replacement
4-49
4-138
Communications Digital Data Processor A46 Chassis Replacement . ..
4-50
4-141
Replacement
4-51
4-145
Light Panel Assembly A49 or A85 Replacement .
4-52
4-148
BITE Indicator Panel A51 Replacement .
4-53
4-150
Power Supply A52 or A62 Mounting Chassis Replacement .
4-54
4-153
Power Supply A52A 1 , A52A2 , A62A1 , or A62A2 Replacement .
4-55
4-155
....
-23 Power Supply Assembly A39 Power Supply Analog 1 PS2 or Analog 3
25
27 Antenna Control A41 Chassis or ANTENNA POSITION Indicator A1
29
8
2 5 Communications Digital Data Processor A46 Circuit Card A1 through
A34 Replacement Communications Digital Data Processor A46 Control Panel A36 Replacement Communications Digital Data Processor A46 Power Supply PS1 Replacement
Communications Digital Data Processor A46 Control Panel A36 LAMP
Communications Digital Data Processor A46 Tubeaxial Fan B1
ix
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Paragraph
CHAPTER
4
Page
-Continued
Computer Data Input / Output Control A53 or A63 Circuit Card or Circuit Card Rack Replacement ...
4-56
Deleted ...
4-57
4-158
Synthetic Display Indicator A54 or A73 Chassis or Indicator A1 Replacement
4-58
4-167
Cathode Ray Tube A54 or A73 Power Supply A5 Replacement .
4-58.1
4-174.1
Control Indicator A55 or A74 Replacement ...
4-58.2
4-174.5
Control -Keyboard Assembly A57 or A76 Circuit Card A4 Replacement .
4-59
4-175
4-60
4-178
Control - Keyboard Assembly A57 or A76 Chassis Replacement ... Control - Keyboard A57 or A76 Keyboard Transmitter A1 Replacement
4-60.1
4-182.2
Control- Keyboard A57 or A76 Signal Data Converter A3 Replacement .
4-60.2
4-182.7
4-61
4-184
Power Supply Assembly A58 or A77 Subassembly Replacement ..
4-62
4-188
4-63
4-191
4-64
4-194
4-64.1
4-198.1
4-65
4-198
4-66
4-200
4-67
4-202
4-68
4-205
4-69
4-208
4-70
4-211
4-71
4-214
4-72
4-219
Distribution Box A66 Relay Assembly A2 Replacement . • Distribution Box A66 Relay Assembly A3 or Relay K1 or K2 Replacement ....
4-73
4-221
4-74
4-224
4-75
4-226
4-76
4-229
4-77
4-231
Distribution Box A66 Filter FL4 , FL5 , FL6 , or FL7 Replacement ..
4-78
4-233
Distribution Box A66 Filter FL8 , FL9 , FL 10 , or FL 11 Replacement ... Distribution Box A66 Receptacle Connector J29 Replacement .
4-79
Deleted ...
4-80
Power Supply A58A1 or A77A1 Replacement . Electronic Marker Generator A59 or A78 Circuit Card Replacement
Electronic Marker Generator A59 or A78 Circuit Card Holder Replacement FP Status Indicator Panel A61 Replacement .
Fire Platoon Status Indicator Panel A61 Audible Alarm DS1 Replacement Generator Control A64 Replacement . Generator Control A64 Meter M1 Replacement Generator Control A64 Switch S1 Replacement . Generator Control A64 LAMP TEST Switch S2 Replacement Hard Copy Unit A65 Replacement Distribution Box A66 Relay Assembly A2 Replacement .
Distribution Box A66 Tubeaxial Fan B1 Replacement Distribution Box A66 Filter FL1 or FL3 Replacement Distribution Box A66 Filter FL2 Replacement . . .
4-235
Distribution Box A66 Circuit Breaker CB1 , CB2 , CB4 , CB5 , CB9 , CB 10, CB11 , CB12 , CB14 , CB16 , CB17 , CB 19 , CB20 , CB21 , CB26 , CB28 ,
4-239 CB32 , or CB33 Replacement
X
4-81
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued Page
Paragraph CHAPTER
4
Page
-Continued Distribution Box A66 Circuit Breaker CB3 , CB6 , CB7 , CB8, CB13,
4-82
4-243
4-83
4-246
Replacement
4-167
4-84
4-248
Distribution Box A66 Time Meter M1 , M2 , M3, or M4 Replacement ...
4-174.1
4-85
4-251
Distribution Box A66 Power Supply PS1 Replacement ..
4-174.5
Distribution Box A66 Switch S1 Replacement ...
4-86
4-253
4-87
4-255
Distribution Box A66 Interlock Switch S2 Replacement ..
4-158
CB 15, CB 18, CB22 , CB23 , CB24 , CB27 , or CB29 Replacement .. Distribution Box A66 Circuit Breaker CB25 , CB30 , CB31 , or CB34
4-175 4-178
Distribution Box A66 Terminal Board TB1 or Terminal Board Link
4-182.2
Replacement
4-88
4-257
4-182.7
4-89
4-259
Distribution Box A66 Terminal Board TB3 or TB4 Replacement
4-184
Air Conditioner Control A69 or A70 Replacement .
4-90
4-261
-188
Lighting Control Panel A71 Replacement
4-264
-191
Lighting Control Panel A71 Switch S1 Replacement
4-92
4-267
199
4-91
4-93
4-270
Lighting Control Panel A71 Terminal Board TB1 or TB2 Replacement ..
Ambient Air Control Panel A72 Replacement
4-94
4-274
Ambient Air Control Panel A72 LAMP TEST Switch S2 Replacement ...
4-95
4-276
AC Interlock Connector A80 or A81 Replacement
4-95.1
4-276.2
Interconnecting Box A83 or A84 Replacement
4-96
4-278
Receiver-Transmitter Radio RT- 524A / VRC A87 or A88 Replacement ..
4-97
4-281
-194
198.1
198 00
02 Speech Security Unit TSEC / KY- 57 A91 or A93 , or Vehicular Power
05
Supply HYP- 57VPS PS1 or PS2 Replacement
4-98
4-284
38
Weapon Control Computer A95 Upper Fan Assembly A1 Replacement .
4-99
4-287
1
Weapon Control Computer A45 Upper Fan Assembly A1 Tubeaxial Fan B1 , B2, or B3 Replacement ...
4-100
4-289
4-101
4-292
Replacement
4-102
4-297
Weapon Control Computer A95 Lower Fan Assembly A4 Replacement .
4-103
4-299
B1 , B2, or B3 Replacement ..
4-104
4-302
Weapon Control Computer A95 Signal Data Recorder- Reproducer Set A6 Replacement ...
4-105
4-305
4-106
4-307
Replacement
4-107
4-310
Weapon Control Computer A95 Power Distribution Box A8 Relay K1 Replacement
4-108
4-314
4
Weapon Control Computer A95 Memory Unit A2 or A3 Electrical Rack Replacement .. Weapon Control Computer A95 Memory Unit A2 or A3 Circuit Card
Weapon Control Computer A95 Lower Fan Assembly A4 Tubeaxial Fan
Weapon Control Computer A95 Signal Distribution Box A7 Replacement ..
Weapon Control Computer A95 Power Distribution Box A8
xi
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Paragraph
CHAPTER
4
Page
—Continued Weapon Control Computer A95 Central Processor Unit A9 or A 10 4-109
4-318
4-110
4-324
4-111
4-327
Replacement
4-112
4-330
Weapon Control Computer A95 Digital Computer Input/Output Processor A 13 Chassis Replacement ..
4-113
4-333
Weapon Control Computer A95 Digital Computer Input / Output Processor A13 Power Supply PS1 Replacement
4-114
4-339
4-115
4-342
Unit A 14 Replacement .
Weapon Control Computer A95 Line Terminating Network A 16 , A17, A18 , or A 19 Replacement ..
4-116
4-347
4-117
4-350
4-117.1
4-356.1
4-118
4-357
Power Supply Assembly A100 Chassis Replacement Power Supply A 100 Power Supply PS1 , PS2 , PS3 , PS4, or PS5 Replacement
4-118.1
4-364.1
4-119
4-365
4-120
4-369
4-120.1
4-372.1
4-121
4-373
4-122
4-377
4-123
4-379
4-124
4-382
4-125
4-384
4-126
4-387
Electrical Rack Replacement ... Weapon Control Computer A95 Central Processor Unit A9 or A10 Input/Output Central Unit A 13, or Peripheral Control Unit A 14 Circuit Card Replacement . . .
Weapon Control Computer A95 Central Processor Unit Power Supply A9PS1 or A 10PS1 , or Peripheral Control Unit Power Supply A14PS1 Replacement Weapon Control Computer A95 Computer Maintenance Panel A 12
Weapon Control Computer A95 Digital Equipment Peripheral Control
Computer-to- Communications Interface Processor A99 Chassis A13 Replacement Computer-to-Communications Processor A99 Power Supply PS1 or PS2 Replacement ..
Power Supply Assembly A 100 Terminal Board TB1 , TB2, TB3, TB4 or TB5 Replacement Electrical Equipment Drawer A 103 Replacement
Radio Frequency Amplifier A105 Power Supply PS1 or PS2 Replacement . Radio Frequency Amplifier A 105 Terminal Board TB1 Replacement .... Cable Link Processor A 106 Replacement . Transformer Assembly A111 Replacement External Horn or Horn Bracket A113 or A114 Replacement . Antenna Base A115 or A117 Replacement
Air Conditioner A118 or A120 Replacement Data Link Antenna A121 Very High Frequency Dual Dipole Antenna A2 or Boot Replacement ..
4-127
4-128 Data Link Antenna A 121 , Cable W2 Replacement Data Link Terminal Mast Erection Control A 122 Replacement
4-129
4-393 4-400 4-404 4-406
4-130 Electro- Mechanical Linear Actuator A 123 AC Motor B1 Replacement ..
xii
-20-1
TM 9-1430-600
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Page
Paragraph CHAPTER
4
Page
-Continued
4-131
4-408
4-132
4-411
4-133
4-414
4-134
4-417
Antenna Mast Monitor Panel A 139 Replacement
4-135
4-419
Local Control Radio Set C2329 /GRA- 39 A 142 Replacement . Remote Control Radio Set C2328 / GRA- 39 A 143 Replacement
4-136
4-421
5-1
5-1
Replacement
5-2
5-2
Deleted ...
5-3
Electro- Mechanical Linear Actuator A 123 Replacement ..
4-318 Corner Reflector A 133 or A134 Reflector Assembly Replacement ...
Corner Reflector Mast Clamp Replacement 4-324
4-327 CHAPTER
5
GENERAL MAINTENANCE
General .. 4-330
Fan Door Assembly A1 , A56 , A75, or A110 Access Door Gasket
4-333
4-339
Inlet/Outlet Air Door Assembly A3, A50, A60, A68 , A79 , or A112
5-4
5-7
5-5
5-10
Weather Shield Replacement ..
5-6
5-13
Inlet /Outlet Air Door Assembly A3, A50, A60 , A68, A79, or A112 Electronic Shielding Gasket Replacement
5-7
5-15
5-8
5-17
Element Replacement .
5-9
5-19
Deleted ..
5-10
Bail Handle Replacement
5-11
Deleted ...
5-12
Flexible Side Panel Replacement .
4-342
Inlet/Outlet Air Door Assembly A3 , A50, A60, A68 , A79 , or A112 Rubber Seal Replacement
-347
-350
Inlet /Outlet Air Door Assembly A3, A50 , A60, A68 , A79, or A112
-356.1
Inlet /Outlet Air Door Assembly A3, A50, A60, A68 , A79, or A112
357
Electronic Shield Replacement.. Inlet /Outlet Air Door Assembly A3, A50, A60, A68 , A79, or A112 Filter
64.1
65 5-23
28VDC Power Supply Assembly A25 Electronic Shielding Gasket
2.1
3
Replacement
5-13
Deleted ...
5-14
5-25
Electronic Frequency Converter CV2500 / GRC A29 Test Set Bracket Replacement
5-15
5-27
Deleted ..
5-16
Deleted ...
5-17
Communication Patching Panel A42 Retainer Replacement
5-18
Deleted ..
5-19
Communications Digital Data Processor A46 Access Cover Card Retainer Pad Replacement ...
5-20
5-35
Light Panel Assembly A49 or A85 Incandescent Lamp Replacement ...
5-21
5-38
Bow Handle Replacement .
5-22
5-40
5-31
xiii
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Paragraph CHAPTER
5
Page
-Continued Computer Data Input / Output Control A53 or A63 Access Cover Cushion Replacement .
5-23
Deleted ..
5-24
Control -Indecator A55 or A74 Gasket Replacement.
5-25
Deleted ..
5-26
Deleted .
5-27
Deleted ..
5-28
5-41
5-45
Weapon Control Computer A95 Upper Fan Assembly A1 Gasket 5-29
5-51
5-30
5-55
Replacement
5-31
5-57
Computer-to-Communications Interface Processor A99 Power Supply Cover Gasket Replacement
5-32
5-60
Deleted ...
5-33
Receiver-Transmitter A 102 Top Access Cover Pads Replacement
5-34
Deleted .
5-35
Deleted ..
5-36
Deleted
5-37
Data Link Antenna A 121 Knob Replacement .
5-38
5-69
Replacement
5-39
5-71
Remote Control Radio Set C2328 / GRA- 39 A143 Cab Mounting Bracket Replacement
5-40
5-72
Cable Feedthrough Seal Replacement
5-41
5-74
Captive Screw or Spring Replacement
5-42
5-76
Catch Strike Replacement
5-43
5-79
Clevis Hinge Replacement
5-44
5-81
Conductive Gasket Replacement .
5-45
5-84
Detachable Shelf Replacement ..
5-46
5-86
Distribution Box Dummy Receptacle Shell Replacement .
5-47
5-88
Distribution Box Terminal Board Replacement
5-48
5-91
Door Stay or Door Stay Bracket Replacement
5-49
5-94
5-50
5-96
Drawer Slide Replacement ..
5-51
5-105
Electrical Equipment Stop Panel Replacement .
5-52
5-113
Fastener Replacement Handle Support or Tube Replacement .
5-53
5-116
5-54
5-118
Switch Indicator Lamp or Indicator Lamp Replacement .
Replacement Weapon Control Computer A95 Upper Fan Assembly A1 Metal Grille Replacement Weapon Control Computer A95 Lower Fan Assembly A4 Gasket
5-63
Local Control Radio Set C2329 / GRA- 39 A 142 Mounting Bracket
xiv
-20-1
TM 9-1430-600
TABLE OF CONTENTS - Continued
Paragraph
ph Page
5
CHAPTER
Page
-Continued
5-55
5-119
5-56
5-121
5-57
5-124
5-58
5-125
5-59
5-127
Shelter Repair
5-60
5-128
Shelter Door Handle Replacement .
5-61
5-129
Structural Shelter Door Gasket Replacement .
Switch Indicator Replacement ·
5-62
5-131
Hard Copy Unit A65 Service
5-63
5-132
5-55
Communication Equipment Access Door Fan B1 Replacement .
5-64
5-137
5-57
Replacement
5-65
5-139
Actuator Switch S1 Replacement .
5-66
5-141
Blackout Switch $2 Replacement
5-67
5-143
Electrical Cable W454 , W457, or W460 Replacement ..
5-68
5-145
Cable W462 Replacement
5-69
5-147
Panel Retainer Spring Replacement.
5-41
Push-Pull Control Assembly Replacement .
Rim Latch Replacement
5-45
Ring Bolt Replacement
5-51
Engagement Control Station Shelter Lamp DS1 , DS2, DS3, DS4, or DS5
5-60
5-63 APPENDIX
A
REFERENCES
A- 1
APPENDIX
B
MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
B- 1
C
EXPENDABLE SUPPLIES AND MATERIALS LIST
C- 1
APPENDIX
5-69 GLOSSARY
Glossary 1
INDEX
Index 1
5-71
5-72 -74 -76 79
81
8
1
5
xv (xvi blank)
-20-1
TM 9-1430-600
HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
As a crew member of the Engagement Control Station ( ECS ) , you are responsible for maintaining and repairing the equipment . During your training cycle , you are taught to use the manual to insure the safest and best way of doing the job.
1. What should you know ? You, as an organizational maintenance technician , should know what repair parts are required to do your job , when to perform preventive maintenance , and how to isolate and repair any faults that occur in your equipment .
2.
Do you know what repair parts are required and when to perform scheduled maintenance? You can find out by opening your Manual to Chapter 2.
3. How do you isolate and correct any faults that may occur in your equipment? You can isolate any faults that occur if you go to chapter 3 of your manual and to chapters 4 and 5 for corrective or general maintenance .
xvii ( xviii blank)
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
CHAPTER 1 INTRODUCTION
1-1 .
SCOPE
This Manual describes scheduled maintenance , fault isolation , corrective and general maintenance of the Engagement Control Station ( ECS) AN/ MSQ - 104. It also contains a maintenance allocation chart and expendable supplies and materials list. This is one of a series of manuals for the PATRIOT missile system . A list of PATRIOT Technical Manuals (TMS ) is on the back cover of each TM .
SQ( J D N Q 1-1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
1-2 .
MAINTENANCE FORMS , RECORDS, AND REPORTS
Department of the Army forms and procedures used for equipment maintenance will be those prescribed by TM 38-750 , The Army Maintenance Management System (TAMMS) .
TM 38-750 TECHNICAL MANUAL
THE ARMY MAINTENANCE MANAGEMENT SYSTEM (TAMMS)
HEADQUARTERS ,
DEPARTMENT OF
THE
ARMY
MAY 1982
1-3.
DESTRUCTION OF ARMY MATERIEL TO PREVENT ENEMY USE
The destruction of Army materiel to prevent enemy use will be undertaken by the user upon orders and policies established by the Army Commander. Procedures for destruction of the engagement control station are contained in TM 43-0002-23.
1-4.
ADMINISTRATIVE STORAGE
Administrative storage instructions shall be provided by the procuring activity in accordance with Shipment and Limited Storage Instructions Manual TM 9-1425-609-15.
1-2
"
ance will:
MS) .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
1-5.
REPORTING OF EQUIPMENT QUALITY DEFICIENCIES
If your engagement control station ( ECS) equipment needs improvement let us know . Send an SF 368 ( Quality Deficiency Report) . You the user, are the only one who can tell us what us you don't like about your equipment . Let us know why you don't like the design or performance . Tell us why a procedure is hard to perform . Put it on a SF 368. Instructions for preparing the forms are provided in TM 38-750 , TAMMS . Forms should be mailed directly to : Commander
U.S. Army Missile Command ATTN : DRSMI - SNEM Redstone Arsenal , AL 35898
A reply will be sent directly to you .
DO NOT DETACH THIS STUB ON COPIES FORWARDED TO SCREENING AND ACTION POINTS Carbon paper not required to completethis side.
10. From Originating paint)
QUALITY DEFICIENCY REPORT (Category 11) SECTION ! 20. Te Screening point
1b. Typed Nee, Duty Phone end.Signature 2h. Typed Name, Duty Phone and Signature 3. Report Control No. Deficiency Netlanel Stock No. 4. Dale 5. (NSN) 6. Namenclature Discovered 7. Manufacturer Mfg. Code Shipper 3. Mig. Part No. 9. Serial/Let Batch No. 10. Contract/PO/Document No. 11. hem Manufact ured/ Dare 12. Operating Failure Time at 13. Now Repaired Overhauled 14. Government Furnished Material Yes No a. Received 15. Quantity b. Inspected c. Deficient d.In Stock End Item a.(Aircraft Series ( )Type/Model 1 , (2)Serial No. Delicient tank, ship, 16. Item howitzer ,etc.) Works National Stock No. (NSN) (2) Nomenclature On With b. Neat [(3) Part No. (2)Serial No. Let No. Higher Assembly 17. Dollar Value 18. Est. Correction Cas 19. Item Under Warranty 20. WerkUnit Code EIC (Navy and AirForce Yes No Unknown only) 21, Action Disposition Holding Exhibit for doys Release for dation Returned Stack/ to OtherItem'Explain Investig Repaired Dispose taken priord ofInclude why, circumstances to difficulty, how andwithrelated Inaction what is wrong, Describe,disposition, to best ability, 22. Details Including documents.cause, supportingofdifficulty, recommendation Continue and listdescription item number. on 22) s. Identify separate sheet .) if necessary
гир of th
y
23.To(Action Point!
SECTION !! 240. To (Support Point) (Use frems 25 and26 ifmore than one)
23b. Typed Name, Duty Phone and Signature 24b. Typed Name, Duty Phone and Signature
25. Te Support Point !
26e. To (Support Paim!
25b. Typed Name, Duty Phone and Signature 26b. Typed Name, Duty Phone and Signature
368-101 STANDARD FORMAdministration 368, April 1974FFMH 101-26-71 General Services
1-3
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
1-6 .
NOMENCLATURE CROSS-REFERENCE Engagement Control Station ( ECS) equipment cross- references are listed in the table
below. Common names of the equipment are listed in ref des order in the first column . Equipment reference designations are in the second column . The third column is a list of the official nomenclature . In this manual , equipment is referred to by the common name or reference designation . Engagement Control Station Nomenclature Cross - Reference List
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
COMMON NAME
Engagement Control Station
OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE
1
Engagement Control Station , Guided Missile, Truck Mounted : AN / MSQ - 104
A5 , A 16 , A27
Order Wire Receiver-Transmitter RT- 773 /-
(ECS ) Communications Group
Order Wire RT- 773
GRC- 103 (V)
Radio Receiver R - 1329
A6, A 18 , A31
Radio Receiver R- 1329 (P) / GRC - 103 (V)
Radio Transmitter T- 983
A7, A19 , A32
Radio Transmitter T- 983 (P ) / GRC - 103 (V)
Key Generator TSEC /-
A8, A20, A33
Electronic Key Generator TSEC / KG -27
A10 , A22 , A35
High Speed Data Buffer TD - 1065 (XE - 1 ) / G
Multiplexer TD-660
A11 , A23 , A36
Multiplexer TD - 660 A/G
Loopback Test Switch
A17
Toggle Switch with Bracket
Dummy Load
A28
Electrical Dummy Load
Loopback Test Set
A29
Waveform Converter Loopback Test Set
Tunable Filter
A30 , A96 , A107
Radio Frequency Filter
Telephone Signal
A38
Telephone Signal Converter CV- 154
Power Supply
A39
Power Supply Assembly
Telephone Set Receiver-Transmitter
A67
Telephone Set Assembly
A87, A88
Receiver-Transmitter RT-524 Mount MT- 1029
VHF Antenna
A115 , A117
Antenna AS- 1729 /VRC
Corner Reflector
A133, A 134
Antenna AS- 1854 / GRC- 103 (U)
Radio Set C-2329
A142
Local Control Radio Set C-2329 / GRA-39
A 143
Remote Control Radio Set C- 2328 / GRA- 39
A 100
Power Supply Assembly
A103
Electronic Key Generator , Full Duplex ,
KG- 27
Data Buffer TD- 1065
Converter
RT- 524
Radio Set C-2328 Data Link Terminal (DLT) Power Supply Electronic Key Generator
Tactical : KG - 30-24
KG -30 Display and Control Group Power Supply Cathode Ray Tube (CRT)
Control -Keyboard
1-4
A52 , A58 , A62 , A77
Power Supply Assembly
A54, A73
Synthetic Display Indicator
A57 , A76
Control - Keyboard Assembly
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
1-6.
NOMENCLATURE CROSS- REFERENCE- Continued
in theta
Engagement Control Station Nomenclature Cross - Reference List - Continued
n. Equip f the off
REFERENCE DESIGNATION
COMMON NAME
or refere
OFFICIAL NOMENCLATURE
Power Distribution System
Power Supply
A25
28VDC Power Supply Assembly
Shelter Air Door
d Missile
A3, A112
Large Inlet - Outlet Air Door
Connecting Panel
A26
Antenna Mast Group Junction Box
Electrical Filter
A43
Electrical Filter Assembly
Air Door A50, A60, A68, A79
Small Inlet-Outlet Air Door
A 108
Protective Entrance
A113, A114
External Alarm Horn
Protective Entrance (PE) -773-
Horn
Miscellaneous Equipment
3(V)
Heater
3(V)
Thermostatic Switch
A2
27
A14
Stationary Duct Type Heater Thermostatic Switch Assembly
A15
Recording Set Subassembly
A40
Remote Control Assembly
A46
Communications Digital Data Processor
A49, A85
Light Panel Assembly
Mass Storage Unit ( MSU)
Remote Control
-1 )/G
Routing Logic Radio Interface Unit (RLRIU) Light Panel
Hard Copy Unit ( HCU) ·
A65 Teleprinter
et
Weapon Control Computer (WCC)
A95
Weapon Control Computer
Recovery Storage Unit (RSU)
A95A6
Signal Data Recorder- Reproducer Set
A 106
Cable Link Processor
A119
Gas Particulate Filter Unit
Radar Weapon Control Interface Unit ( RWCIU) Gas Particulate Filter
1029
Unit (GPFU)
9
1-7.
DIFFERENCES BETWEEN MODELS
There are no differences between models for the engagement control station .
1-8.
EQUIPMENT DESCRIPTIO
N
statio Refer to TM 9-1430-600-10-1 n.
for the equipment description of the engagement control
1-5 ( 1-6 blank)
18
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
CHAPTER 2 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Section I.
LUBRICATION INSTRUCTIONS
Lubricate and check the frequency of the data link terminal ( DLT) items as indicated in the preventive maintenance checks and services table and Lubrication Order LO 9-1430-600-14.
Section II.
REPAIR PARTS, SPECIAL TOOLS , TEST, MEASUREMENT , AND DIAGNOSTIC EQUIPMENT ( TMDE ) , AND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
2-1 .
COMMON TOOLS AND EQUIPMENT
Refer to the Battalion Supply and Maintenance Equipment ( BSME) Manual , TM 9-4935-60014 for a list of common tools and equipment required .
2-2 .
SPECIAL TOOLS , TMDE , AND SUPPORT EQUIPMENT
Refer to Repair Parts and Special Tools List ( RPSTL) Manual TM 9-1430-600-24P for special tools , TMDE , and support equipment required .
REPAIR PARTS
2-3.
Refer to RPSTL Manual TM 9-1430-600-24P for repair parts required .
Section III .
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT
SCOPE
2-4.
a. This section covers the services to be performed when a new or replacement engagement control station ( ECS) is received .
b. Inspect the ECS to determine if the equipment has been properly prepared for use , and is fully capable of performing its mission prior to placing it into service .
2-1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
2-5.
GENERAL SERVICE TM 38-750 shows the forms , records , and reports to be used for inspection and recording
of any defects or deficiencies found from performing the following general service checks . a.
Check that the M - 814 truck and engagement control station ( ECS ) serial numbers are
the same as those shown in the logbooks that came with the equipment , to insure that assigned equipment has been received . b.
Check logbooks for general maintenance history of the truck and ECS to insure that
preventive maintenance schedules , modification work orders (MWO) , and other technical bulletins have been complied with .
Check all tags and other notices attached to the equipment for information regarding
C.
use , reconditioning , or changes to the equipment . Record this type of data into the logbook and appropriate manual immediately . d.
Check equipment overall noting any damage or deficiencies.
SERVICE UPON RECEIPT
2-6.
a. The engagement control station ( ECS ) will be processed for shipment and storage at the time of manufacture . b.
On the ECS , remove all shipping and protective covering , straps , pressure sensitive
tape , and preservatives . Clear vent openings , and check exterior for any defects or deficiencies.
Make a visual inspection of the M -814 truck for any damage to body , cracked glass ,
C.
worn or cracked hoses , and missing knobs and broken gages on panels . For detailed service upon receipt procedures , and basic issue items , refer to TM 9-2320-260-10 . When the ECS is received , be sure to perform the general service checks shown in
d.
para 2-5 before going on to the following checks which must be accomplished prior to operating the ECS.
(1 )
Inventory all items received against bill of lading or basic issue items to insure their
receipt .
(2)
Remove tape from all glass surfaces such as meters , reflectors , instrument dials ,
and lights . (3)
Inspect all panels for missing knobs , dials , meters , and indicators.
(4) If electrical connections are taped , remove tape from exposed ends of cables , harnesses , plugs , sockets , receptacles , terminals , junction boxes , and electrical openings .
(5 )
Check exposed wires and cables for frayed or cracked insulation .
(6)
Check connectors and receptacles for broken or bent pins .
(7)
Check that exposed wires and cables are properly supported . Wire and cable
lengths should have only enough slack to take the load off connections .
(8)
2-2
Verify full operational capability per TM 9-1430-600-10-1 .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
Section IV .
n and reco 2.7. e checks.
al numbers:
that ass
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES
GENERAL
Preventive maintenance checks and services ( PMCS) for the engagement control station (ECS) are considered general maintenance tasks . A PMCS schedule for lubrication of the ECS is in table . Procedures necessary to perform service requirements are also in table . The table contains a PMCS schedule for checking the frequency of the data link terminal master oscillator
insurethe and the procedure necessary to perform this check . chnical
2-8.
On regard logbook:
RESPONSIBILITY
PMCS tasks shall be performed by the operator using tools and equipment specified in the PMCS procedures .
2-9.
INTERVALS
Operating hours and roadmarch determine the frequency of PMCS. The frequency of PMCS indic ated in the table . However, when operating under adverse conditions, such as stormy is storage: weather or temperature extremes, the interval between PMCS may be reduced . sensiti
W-Weekly
ed glass service
ITEM
Ownit
1
NO.
INTERVAL MQSA W
M- Monthly
Q- Quarterly
S- Semiannually
A- Annually
ITEM TO BE CHECKED PROCEDURE
EQUIPMENT NOT READY/AVAILABLE IF:
DATA LINK TERMINAL ( DLT) ANTENNA ACTUATOR
opera
Inspect sight gage on side of actuator for oil level. (Refer to lubrication plate in actuator for proper level . )
Sureth
2
tdials
Lubricate per para 2-11 . ( For arctic operation , refer to FM 9-207) .
DLT MASTER OSCILLATOR Check frequency of DLT master oscillator per 355
para 2-12.
es,
3
gs.
DOOR ASSEMBLY Lubricate padlock, door hinges , and latches as necessary per para 2-13 .
e
2-10 .
GENERAL PROCEDURES FOR ALL SERVICES AND INSPECTIONS
To determine lubrication needs of Electro Mechanical Linear Actuator A123 or door oassemb scillatly or. see table . Check table for calibration requirements of data link terminal master
2-3
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
2-11 .
ELECTRO MECHANICAL LINEAR ACTUATOR A123 LUBRICATION
Tools and Equipment Required . Oil , Gear ( MIL - L - 7870) Grease , Gear and Actuator Screw ( MIL - G - 23827) Wrench , Open End Adjustable , 8 In . Grease Gun , Hand Cloth
1
Clean fittings before lubricating . GREASE FITTING
2
At actuator gear box , drain gear box and fill to center of sight gage with gear oil.
ACTUATOR ARM
FILL
3
At actuator arm , grease fitting with gear and actuator screw grease . SIGHT GAGE DRAIN
ACTUATOR GEAR BOX
2-4
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 2-12.
DATA LINK TERMINAL MASTER OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT
COMPUTER- TOCOMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A99
DE
BSI
CUR
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In . Key, Socket Head , Hexagon 3/32 In . Frequency Counter ( AN / USM - 326A) Coaxial Cable ( part of frequency counter) Coaxial Cable W16F ( 1145033-6) Adapter, A49 , BMC ( F ) to BNC ( F ) ( M55339 / 16-00914) Adapter, A 18 , SMA ( M ) to BNC ( F ) ( M55339 / 47-00001 ) Pliers , Slip - Joint 8 In .
WARNI
NG DATA LINK TERMINAL ACCESS DOOR IS LARGE . TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO REMOVE OR INSTALL DOOR .
At data link terminal ( DLT ) access door , remove three hinge pins . Remove door .
2
Turn on frequency counter .
3
Perform DLT turn on procedure per TM 9-1430-600-10-1 . Allow approximately 30minute warm up before attempting master oscillator (MO) adjustment . CONTINUED
2-5
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DATA LINK TERMINAL MASTER OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT-Continued
2-12 .
Connect frequency counter coaxial cable to frequency counter input connector .
4
LO
5
At other end of coaxial cable , connect Adapter A49 .
6
At other end of Adapter A49 , connect Coaxial Cable W 16F.
7
At computer-to - communications interface processor CCIP ( fig . A) , connect Adapter A 18 to OSC OUT.
O
+ FAIRT KEYGEN 011 TIME OFDAY SUMMARY FAULT FAULT TEST DIT HOUR TEST AG BY O D RESET O Θ NORMAL MORE TIMESES BAY HOUR PROCESSORCONTRO 281 TH TROY HATEOSCCH
G8Y
ECS
PROPAGATION DELAYREQUEST ECSC
SEC
0 ALTERNATE MASTER SYNC
AUTOSTRO
BEFIN ascour LOADWES TIMECONTROL OPERATE
055 055 RADIOSD 15/8 ECSC ECS 13/A 1 + ISA
OFF
O
FIGURE A
8
At Adapter A 18 , connect Coaxial Cable W 16F.
9
At frequency counter, adjust control to measure a 22.1 Megahertz (MHz ) frequency. Use range A, manual resolution , and a 10- second gate .
Le
WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 208VAC) IS PRESENT IN CCIP . USE CARE TO AVOID ELECTRICAL CONTACT WITH TOOLS .
DAMAGE TO DATA LINK TERMINAL EQUIPMENT CAN OCCUR IF COMPUTER-TO- COMMUNICATIONS COOLING FANS DO NO OP ERATE. T PUSH ASSEMBLY BACK INTO RACK IF FANS FAIL TO TURN ON WHEN DRAWER IS EXTENDED . CAUTION
10
At CCIP (fig . B) , loosen four captive screws (6) and slide CCIP assembly fully out. CONTINUED
2-6
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 ued
DATA LINK TERMINAL MASTER OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT - Continued
2-12. nector.
11
12
At rear of CCIP drawer , verify that 400 Hz interlock switch (3) is out and CCIP service fans are operating .
Loosen 24 captive screws ( 1 ) and remove CCIP top
cover (2).
ct Adaple 13
At FINE ADJ (4 ) and COARSE ADJ (5 ) controls remove
2
access screws .
4
1 3
5
quen
FIGURE B
14
Calibrate frequency as follows :
RET
a. Set CCIP FINE ADJ (4) control for a counter frequency indication of 22,118,400 Hz ± 0.1 Hz . b. If frequency is within limits , replace screw over COARSE ADJ (5) and FINE ADJ (4) controls .
ERAT
c. If frequency adjustment cannot be made within limits , readjust as follows :
( 1 ) Set FINE ADJ (4) control to the approximate center of its rotation . (2) Adjust COARSE ADJ (5) and FINE ADJ (4) controls for 22,118, 400 Hz ± 0.1 Hz . (3) Secure screw over COARSE ADJ (5) and FINE ADJ (4 ) controls .
15
Install and secure CCIP top cover ( 2) with 24 captive screws ( 1 ) . CONTINUED
2-7
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
2-12 .
2-8
DATA LINK TERMINAL MASTER OSCILLATOR ADJUSTMENT - Continued
16
Slide CCIP assembly into equipment rack .
17
Verify that CCIP service fans go off.
18
Secure CCIP in rack with four captive screws (6 ) .
19
Shut off frequency counter .
20
At Adapter A18, disconnect Coaxial Cable W 16F.
21
At CCIP (fig . A) , disconnect Adapter A 18 from OSC OUT .
22
At other end of Coaxial Cable W 16F , disconnect Adapter A49 .
23
At other end of Adapter A49 , disconnect coaxial cable of frequency counter .
24
Disconnect coaxial cable from frequency counter input connector.
25
Remove test equipment from engagement control station .
26
Install DLT access door and secure with three hinge pins .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 ed
2-13 .
DOOR ASSEMBLY LUBRICATION
СГ
Г
Tools and Equipment Required . Oiler, Hand
Oil , Lubricating (VV- L- 800 )
DOOR ASSEMBLY LUBRICATION At shelter door , lubricate padlock (3) , latches (2 and 4) , and hinges ( 1 ).
2
59
A
920 3
A-
2-9 ( 2-10 blank)
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
CHAPTER 3 FAULT ISOLATION
3-1 .
GENERAL
This chapter contains fault isolation procedures for the engagement control station . These procedures are used when directed by Software User Guide procedures , Display Aided Maintenance procedures , or Emplacement and Road March procedures .
ECCCI
3-2.
AUTOMATIC DIAGNOSTIC TESTS
Procedures for performing Automatic Diagnostic Tests are contained in TM 9-1425-602-12 , Fire Platoon Fault Isolation and Operating Procedures .
CONTINUED
3-1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UND 3-3.
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE The fault indicator table is used when the operator at the display and control (D & C)
console observes a fault indication on an indicator panel . The corrective procedure referenced in the table is then performed . Most of the faults listed indicate a power control or interlock
AN hardware failure . These types of faults will register on one or more of the indicator panels listed .
SATR Since these faults result in one or more subsystems being inoperative , the operator should look at all panel fault indications to determine which procedure to perform . The operator should observe the following rules to determine which procedure to perform first:
1.
For Crash -Type Prime Power Failures : Generator Control Panel A64 and Distribution Box A66 corrective procedures should be performed first.
2. For Control and Interlock Failures : Distribution Box A66 and Ambient Air Control Panel A72 corrective procedures should be performed first . 3. For Non-Crash -Type Computer and Display Failures : BITE Indicator Panel A51 corrective procedures should be performed first .
Before starting the corrective procedure referenced in the table , the operator NOTE
should check for open drawers , open blackout curtains , or any other nonstandard operating condition .
0
PRESSURIZED ENTRANCE CONTROL PANEL A108
RO
AD
SI
DE
CONTINUE
3-2
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3. FAULT INDICATOR TABLE - Continued
D &0 renced
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
terlock listed
Id look
FP STATUS INDICATOR PANEL A61 LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL A71
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41
should
Fon
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROLS A69, A70
J
ator
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72
[
RO
AD
SI
DE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64
POWER SUPPLY A39
POWER SUPPLY A25
LIGHT PANELS A49 (ROADSIDE ) A85 (CURBSIDE )
A51 A5:
-A48 A49
A53
COMPARTMENT
FIRE EXTR
CONTROL MODULE A48 A54 A82
A55 A57 A58 A59
CONTINUED
3-3
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3.
A
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE-Continued
At Power Supply A25 (table A , fig . A) :
TABLE
FAULT INDICATOR
A
FAULT INDICATION
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
1. A87- RT-524 AND KY57 Tripped
Para 3-17
Tripped
Para 3-141
Tripped
Para 3-18
Tripped
Para 3-19
Tripped
Para 3-20
2. WCC 3. A88- RT- 524 AND KY57 4. DLT 5. UHF ANT CONT
A87 RT-524 AND KY57 WCC ON ON OFF A88 RT-524 KY57 AND ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
UHF DLT ANT CONT ON ON OFF
の FIGURE A B
At Power Supply A39 (table B , fig. B):
TABLE FAULT INDICATOR
1. POWER SUPPLY FAULT + 12.6VDC
B
FAULT INDICATION
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
On
Para 3-21 2. POWER SUPPLY FAULT - 12.6VDC
On
Para 3-21 3. POWER SUPPLY FAULT + 5VDC
On Para 3-21
POWER SUPPLY FAULT 1 + 5VDC + 12.6VDC -12.6VDC O TEST
RESET
CONTINUED
FIGURE B
3-4
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3.
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE -Continued
C At Antenna Control Unit A41 ( table C , fig . C) :
TABLE
FAULT INDICATOR
URE
C
FAULT INDICATION
1. ANTENNA POSITION control
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
No AMG antenna
TM 9-1430-603-20 . AMG
movement
Antenna Rotation Control Circuits Fault Isolation Procedure
2. ANTENNA STOW lamp
Off when antenna is
TM 9-1430-603-20 . AMG Antenna Stow Position
stowed
Indicators Fault Isolation Procedure
3. AC lamp
4. DC lamp
Off
Para 3-153
Off
Para 3-153
Tripped
Para 3-158
5. POWER circuit breaker
08
ANTENNA
ANTENNA POSITION AC
DC О POWER
ANTENNA SELECT BITE TE! 884
STO
P
H AMS EADING
ANTENNA STOW2 3 STOP
FAULT
ROTATE CCWCW AMS HEADING
FIGURE C
D At Compartment Control Module A48 ( table D , fig . D ) :
TABLE
D
FAULT INDICATOR FAULT INDICATION
1. WARNING ENTRANCE LOWPRESSURE
On
ISOLATION PROCEDURE TM 9-1430-600-10-1 Protective Entrance Entry/Exit
2. WARNING ENTRANCE - OCCUPIED Off when shelter
Same as item 1
protective entrance is occupied
CONTINUED
3-5
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3. D
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE -Continued
-Continued TABLE
D - Continued
FAULT INDICATOR
FAULT INDICATION
3. WARNING COMPARTMENT -MASK
On
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
TM 9-1430-600-10-1 Protective Entrance Entry /Exit
4. ALARM HORN
Does not sound when WARNING ENTRANCE
Same as item 3
LOW PRESSURE is on 5. SERVICE INDICATORS - DUST FAN
On
Same as item 3
On
Same as item 3
DEFECT 6. SERVICE INDICATORS - PRIMARY UNIT CHANGE FILTER
SERVICE CIRCUIT BREAKERS MAIN COMPARTMENT PRESSURE : FAN
WARNING COMPARTMENT
POWER
MASK INDICATORS
ENTRANCE PRESSURE
HORN OFF
OFF
ENTRANCE
INDICATORS DUST PRIMARYUNIT DEFECTFAN CHANGEFILTER
LOW PRESSURE
OCCUPIED
FIGURE D E
At Light Panel A49 or A85 ( table E , fig . E ) :
TABLE FAULT INDICATOR
E
FAULT INDICATION
Swivel lamps
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
Off
Para 3-147
00
SE
EA
R NC
O
I
00
FIGURE E
3-6
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3. FAULT INDICATOR TABLE- Continued F
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (table F , fig . F):
TABLE
F
URE FAULT INDICATOR
FAULT INDICATION
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
1. COMPUTER STATUS- COMP P/ S
On
Para 3-39
2. COMPUTER STATUS MEM ERR
On
Para 3-39
3. COMPUTER STATUS MEM
On
Para 3-39
4. COMPUTER STATUS- INIT ERROR
On
Para 3-39
5. COMPUTER STATUS PROG ALERT
On (steady)
Para 3-39
6. COMPUTER STATUS PERI
On
Para 3-39
On
a. WCC hardcore fault
7. COMPUTER STATUS CUG P/ S
Para 3-39 b. TM 9-1425-602-12 Operator Diagnostic Selection
8. D & C STATUS CRT DISPLAY MS1/ MS3
Para 3-23 or 3-82
5 5
9. D & C STATUS P & S OUT DATA Para 3-23 or 3-82
MS1/ MS3 10. D & C STATUS BASKET 1 POWER MS1/ MS3
Para 3-23 or 3-82
11. D & C STATUS BASKET 1 CLOCK MS1 / MS3
Para 3-23 or 3-82
12. D & C STATUS BASKET 2 POWER MS1 GOOD
Off
Para 3-23
13. D & C STATUS BASKET 2 POWER MS3
On
Para 3-82
14. D & C STATUS BASKET 2 CLOCK MS1 / MS3
On
Para 3-23 or 3-82
External alarm does not
Para 3-25
15. EXT ALERTSwitch sound when pressed
16. LAMP TEST Switch
17. LAMP
BRIGHTNESSCont
No front panel indicators on when pressed
Para 3-22
Lamp brightness does not
Para 3-24
rol change when turned
CONTINUED
T
3-7
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3. F
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE -Continued -Continued
D&CSTATUS MS1 COTDISPLAY P&S OUTDATA
EXT ALERT
BASKET 1POWER
COMPUTERCONTROL LANDDEVICESELECT MASS STORAGE MASS STORAGE ISHIT 1 UNIT 2 RECOVERT NONSTORAGE TACTICAL MONTRESS OOTI PERIPHERALS
BASKET 1CLOCK GOOD
BASKET2 POWER
BASKET 2 CLOCK COMPUTERSTATUS KEE
ALERT PER P/3
FIGURE F
1.
Several FP status indicators are not fault related . If any status indicator malfunction is suspected , go to TM 9-1425-602-12 Operator Diagnostic Selection and select DIAGNOSTIC AREA 1 .
2.
EQUIP indicator is off during radar reorientation .
NOTE
G
At FP Status Indicator Panel A61 ( table G , fig . G ) :
TABLE FAULT INDICATOR
G
FAULT INDICATION
1. COMMO
On- Red /Yellow
2. EQUIP
On-Red /Yellow
ISOLATION PROCEDURE See Note 1 TM 9-1425-602-12 FP Alert Response Requirements
3. LS1 -LS8 OPER
On- Red /Yellow
4. LS1- LS8 FUEL
On-Yellow
5. LS1 - LS8 DDL
On - Red /Yellow
Alert LS operator Alert LS operator See Note 1 6. LAMP BRIGHTNESS control
Indicator brightness does
Para 3-26
not change when turned
TIME OF DAY
WEAPON DEFCON ALERT STATE METHOD CONTOL CONTROL FP
LS1 LS2 LAMP BRIGHTNESS о
LS3 LS4 LS5 LS6 LS7 LSB
OPER OPER FUEL STAY OPEN OPER FUEL STBY OPER OPER FUEL STBY OPER STSY OPER FUEL OPER STBY OPER FUEL OPER OPER FUEL STBY OPER STRY OPER FUEL OPER STBY OPER FUEL
FIGURE G
3-8
MSL INVENTORY EQUIP COMMD
ATTACK WARNINGS ADW ATTK MSL CB
ODL COL DDL ODL DOL DOL DOL DOL
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3. FAULT INDICATOR TABLE-Continued
NOTE
H
BATTLE SHORT may be on or off depending on system operation .
At Generator Control Panel A64 ( table H , fig . H):
TABLE FAULT INDICATOR
H
FAULT INDICATION
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
tor
tic
1. OVER VOLTAGE FAULT RESET switch
On
Para 3-27
Lights when fuel is low
Notify EPP crew
Off
Para 3-127
2. FUEL GEN/ TRLR 3. GENS ON LINE NO. 1 / NO. 2indicator light
4. BATTLE SHORT lamp
BATTLE SHORT
5. VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL meter
Off when battle short is
TM 9-1425-602-12
commanded
ECS /MSU Fault Isolation
Does not indicate
Para 3-133
120VAC
6VAC when
switch is set to PHASE A PHASE B OR PHASE C
6. SUM FAULT SUM FAULTindicator light
When lit, indicates
Notify EPP crew
generator fault
7. LAMP TEST Switch Para 3-150
All front panel indicators off when switch is set to LAMP TEST
BATTLE SHORT BATTLE SHORT
COMM
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL
VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL PHASE B PHASE PHASE A C OFF G
SUM FAULT OVERVOLTAGE SUM FAULT FAULT RESET
GENS ON LINE NO 1 LAMP NO Z TEST
FUEL GEN TALR
GENERATOR POWER RADAR ECS TURBINES OFF OFF OFF COMM
ON
ON
ON
FIGURE H
CONTINUED
3-9
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3.
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE- Continued At Distribution Box A66 ( table I , fig . 1 ) :
|
TABLE I
FAULT INDICATOR
FAULT INDICATION
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
1. 28 VDC- POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1
On
Para 3-100
2. 28 VDC POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS2
On
Para 3-100
3. 28 VDC- BATTERY POWER
Off when BATTERY POWER is set to ON
Para 3-149
4. RUNNING TIME- SYS meter
Stopped
Call Intermediate Maintenance
5. RUNNING TIME- RRT- 1, -2, -3
Stopped
Para 3-15
6. BATTERY POWER
Tripped
Para 3-152
7. RADIO RELAY TERM- 1 ,-2,-3 (SECURE PWR
Tripped
Para 3-15
8. DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE
Tripped
Para 3-87
9. DISPLAY /CONTROL- CURBSIDE
Tripped
Para 3-88
10.
RWCIU
11. RLRIU 12. COMPUTER
13.
VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY
14. PRINTER
Tripped
Para 3-34
Tripped
Para 3-35
Tripped
Para 3-28
Tripped
Para 3-31
Tripped
Para 3-90
15. ROADSIDE FANS- FWD 16. ROADSIDE FANS- AFT 17. CURBSIDE FANS- FWD
Tripped
Para 3-83
Tripped
Para 3-84
Tripped
Para 3-85
18. CURBSIDE FANS- AFT
Tripped
Para 3-86
19. RADIO RELAY TERM- 1 , -2, -3 (NOT SECURE PWR)
Tripped
Para 3-16
20. 28 VDC- PWR DISTR UNIT PWR SPLY
Tripped
Para 3-91
Tripped
Para 3-89
Tripped
Para 3-139
Tripped
Para 3-33
24. LIGHT CONTROL
Tripped
Para 3-37
25. UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT
Tripped
Para 3-32
26. TELEPHONE CONVERTER
Tripped
Para 3-30
27. DATA LINK TERM
Tripped
Para 3-78
28. DLT MAST ERECT
Tripped
Para 3-129
21. 28 VDC- DISPLAY /CONTROL 22. 28 VDC- COMMO PWR SPLY 23. ROADSIDE HEATERS
29. GAS FILTER UNIT
Tripped
Para 3-29
30. UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400HZ INTERNAL
Tripped
Para 3-36
31. UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ EXTERNAL
Tripped
Para 3-36 CONTINUED
3-10 T
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3.
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE - Continued -Continued
TABLE
I - Continued
FAULT INDICATOR
FAULT INDICATION
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
E 32. AIR COND ROADSIDE
Tripped
Para 3-79
33. AIR COND CURBSIDE
Tripped
Para 3-79
34. 28 VDC-LAMP TEST switch
All front panel indicators off when set to ON
Para 3-146
35. UHF AMS PWR AMPL
Tripped
Para 3-159
ance
AIR COND CURBSIDE
LSTERY POWER
ON ON OFF 014 COMPUTER MODEMS To-To OFF CAS 014 VOICE UNIT Pat SPLY FILTER ON ON OFT
ZAVDC RUSHINGTIME LATERY POWER SUPPLY TESTAMP 613 -་ ་ POWER DA RET7 O U O OFF O PAP MOT SECURE ROADSID CURSDE FRD FLS MT มา FWD OLM O RADIO ZAYDCOFF сомо PWADIST DISPL ALLAYTERM J SPLY CONTROL FWASPLT OF on OFF ~ ROADSIDELIGHT CONTROL CONVERTER TEAM WEATERS CONTROL UNIT TELEPHONE OW 04 D OFA UTILITYPOWER 170C400×7 MAST FRICT EXTERNAL INTERNALON ON CN 110
AIRCOND ROADSIDE
SECUREPWR PRINTER RELAKLADIOTERM ON ON OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIDE CURSIONON OFF OFF
ND
EPPIRPETPRS UNFAMS
DANGER 208 VOLTS MICHARICAL WEIGHT 170L(11 FIGURE I
JAt Air Conditioner Controls A69 and A70 ( table J , fig . J):
TABLE
FAULT INDICATOR
J
FAULT INDICATION
POWER RUN INDICATOR LIGHT
Off when MODE SELEC-
ISOLATION PROCEDURE Para 3-151
TION SWITCH is set to COOL, LOW HEAT, or HIGH HEAT position
AIR CONDITIONER HEATER CONTROLS COOL OFF
LOW POWER HEAT RUN INDICATOR HIGH LIGHT HEAT WARMER COOLER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
MODE SELECTION SWITCH
FIGURE J
CONTINUED
3-11
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3. K
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE -Continued
At Lighting Control Panel A71 (table K, fig . K) : TABLE
FAULT INDICATOR
K
FAULT INDICATION
POWER ON
Off
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
Para 3-147
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE
O POWER ON MIN
MAX AISLE LAMPS FIGURE K
L
At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 ( table L, fig . L):
TABLE
L "
FAULT INDICATOR
FAULT INDICATION 55
1. STATUS HOOD CLOSED
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
On Para 3-148
2. STATUS -28V ON
Off
3. FANS ROADSIDE -FWD
On
4. FANS ROADSIDE -AFT
On
Para 3-38
5
Para 3-148
5
Para 3-148
5
5. FANS -CURBSIDE - FWD
On
6. FANS -CURBSIDE - AFT
On
7. EQPT -AIR FLOW TEMP -HIGH
On
8. EQPT -AIR FLOW TEMP -LOW
On
9. LAMP TEST switch
All front panel indicators
Para 3-148 5
Para 3-148
5
Para 3-80
Para 3-80 Para 3-150
off, except STATUS 28V ON when set to LAMP TEST
STATUL HOOD CLOSED
O AMBIENT AIR CONTROLPANEL O EOPT TEMB BATLON HARVALV SALLYCLOSED OPEN STAIC WHENOUTSIDE ADV STEMASINGORBELOW
O CURBSIDE FND
O O
TESTPOINTS
TEST
о CONTINUED
FIGURE L
3-12
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-3.
FAULT INDICATOR TABLE-Continued
M At Pressurized Entrance Control Panel A 108 ( table M , fig . M ): TABLE
URE
ISOLATION PROCEDURE
FAULT INDICATION
FAULT INDICATOR
1. PURGE
M
Off when TIMER is
TM 9-1430-600-10-1
activated
Protective Entrance Entry/Exit
2. WARNING LOW PRESSURE
On
Same as item 1
3. Dome light
Does not operate
Same as item 1
correctly 4. Miscellaneous Inoperative
Para 3-147
ECS Compartment Temperature
Temperature too hot or too cold
Para 3-151
ECS Voice Commo with EPP
Inoperative or distorted
Para 3-81
ECS Voice Commo with RS
Inoperative or distorted
Para 3-14
ECS Compartment Lighting (including blackout lights )
TIMER 0
RED OFF WHITE
5
WARNING PURGE CONTROL MODULE PROTECTIVE ENTRANCE
LOW PRESSURE
FIGURE M
3-13
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4.
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION
ANTENNA GROUP A150
MAIN ARRAY A150A1
wwwwwwwwwww
A6
D TRACK
D D
A7.
D
VIA MISSILE ARRAY A 150A2
ROA
DSI
A5
DE
a.
General.
A4
A3
(INACTIVE )
( INACTIVE )
(INACTIVE )
SIDE LOBE
CANCELLER
ARRAYS A 150
The antenna map is a computer printout showing antenna element test
results in a special format .
The Antenna Group A 150 on the radar set has seven arrays ; the main array, track - viamissile (TVM ) array, and five side lobe canceller ( SLC ) arrays . The arrays consist of individual phase shifting radar elements - 5463 active and 204 unused . The antenna element test uses a computer and 212 BITE lines to insure these elements are working properly. Each element is 337.5 degree tested and , simultaneously , each BITE line is zero degree tested . The results generated are sent from the beam steering processor ( BSP) to the control unit group input output control ( CUGIOC) in the form of 312 24- bit words. A reformatting program is used to change this data into a more useful form . This program analyzes the 312 words and produces a pass /fail score for each element and BITE line . These results are printed in a standard format which represents the front views of the seven arrays. Each of the 5667 elements has a character print position representing its actual location in its particular array. The element's test result is printed in its assigned position with an asterisk ( * ) for pass and a character (0) for fail . The BITE line scores are printed the same way under the heading ZERO TEST . This output from the hard copy unit ( HCU ) is called the antenna map (fig . A and fig . B) .
CONTINUED
3-14
"
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4. ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION -Continued b.
Purpose. The purpose of the antenna map is: (1 ) To visually display the location of those elements in the main array, TVM array, and
SLC- 5 array that have failed their 337.5 degree test , (2)
To display the results of the zero degree BITE Line test,
(3) To provide the means for detecting at least three types of antenna faults :
6 (a)
Defective beam steering shift registers ( BSSR) module output buffers (24 per
(b)
Defective row /column driver ( RCDR) module input buffers (30 per module) ,
module),
RACK
VIA SSILE RRAY 50A2
(c) Defective beam steering control module ( BSCM ) ( 36 input line receivers per module), and (4)
To provide verification of failed battery replaceable units ( BRUS ) reported in
dynamic tests , such as :
VE) 150
c.
(a)
Output storage and timing module (OSTM) zero degree test BSP070 ,
(b)
OSTM 337.5 degree test BSP070,
(c)
Power supply failures BSP040-002 , and
(d)
RCDR failures BSP040-002 .
Antenna Map .
(1 )
Printout. The antenna map arrays use 133 character print positions to display
their data . The HCU can only print 80 character positions so the map is divided into sections . These sections must be assembled to create an entire antenna array. To assemble , the five sheets (fig . B) marked main array left side must be overlapped by the five sections marked main
al array right side . The columns will overlap near the center of the array . Rows do not overlap and
1 have to be positioned in proper order to present a correct map . The TVM and SLC (fig . C and D) arrays are each printed on two sheets which also have to be assembled . The referenced figures show how the completed maps should appear.
(2)
Antenna Quadrants .
The main array antenna map shows 5161 element locations .
It is divided into four sections ( fig . E ) ; Quad 1 ( upper left) , Quad 2 ( upper right) , Quad 3 (lower right), and Quad 4 (lower left) . (3)
Antenna Rows .
There are 149 element rows arranged horizontally and identified
by numbers to the left and right of the element locations . The rows in Quads 1 and 2 run from +74to 0. The rows in Quads 3 and 4 run from 1 to -74. (4)
Antenna Columns .
There are 85 element columns arranged vertically and
identified by numbers at the top and bottom of the element locations . The columns in Quads 1 and 4 run from -42 to 0. The columns in Quads 2 and 3 run from +1 to +42.
CONTINUED
T
3-15
3-16
2008
PS3 19 CB
PS8 CB4
A17
A18
A19
A14
1A5
A16
12.6 6VDC
PS7 CB3
PS11 CB7
5V DC * * E
ZERO TEST
74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 * 65 64 63 62 61 * 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 • 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5
BSSR
Q1
O BIT
**
***
4
11 I"
*. *
* *❤
* ***
*
*
*
0
*
*
+
*
+
부부
11 ||
**** + ****
+
* ** **
x
**
* * ** ***
*
***** A* ** *
|| 2222222 22 32 444333333333 ||||||||||
*
⭑
Q2 3 BIT
+ * * ***** * * * ******* *+ ****** *****
*
#
*❤ * *
+ * ** * ******* ****** * *
*
||
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION - Continued
820806
74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 *
K
*
*
*
** * + * * * * + * * * *
*
* * * ** x * * +
A27
A26
A25
A24
A48
A47
-A51 -A51
A50
A49
A48
A47
PS6 CB2
PS5 CB1
PS7 CB3
PS1 CB17
PS3 CB19
|||||||||| 222222222233333333 3444 BSCM RCDR 12.6 5V ZERO 21098765432109 87654321098765432109876543210123456789012345678901234567890123456789012 TEST 6VDC DC
A32--11 ----A31--11-A30 A29 11---A28 -A27-A-||--25-11-RCDR |·--A26-A24--
ARRAY FMAIN RONT RVIEW )(RASG IGHT SIDE
3-4 .
*
ARRAY FMAIN RONT VIEW )L(RASG EFT SIDE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
PS16 CB12
PS2 CB18 PS14 CB10
PS4 CB20
PS15 CB11
A191A9-
1A8
A17
1A6
1A5
A14
+
*
*
*
A13
1
5 6 7 8 9 10 -11 12 13 14 15 16 -17 18 19 -20 -21 -22 -23 24 -25 -26 -27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32 -33 -34 -35 -36 -37 38 39 40 -41 42 43 44 -45 -46 47 48 49 50 -51 -52 -53 -54 -55 -56 -57 -58 59 -60 61 62 63 -64 65 -66 -67 68 69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74 JI
2 BIT Q4
******
+
**
***
****
0 44433333333332222222222 ||||||||| 11 11 ABSSR -1-43-11 11 ---A42 11 A41 --A40
****
**
****
*
"1
學琴
***** * *******
NOTE : · 0 =
5 BIT Q3
***** *********** *******
***
*
A28 A49
PS9 CB5
3-4. ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION - Continued
FAULT =NO INDICATION FAULT INDICATION
-9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 A50 1-7 18 A29 PS10 19 * CB6 20 27 -21 -22 # -23 + -A51 -24 * -A51 -25 -26 * -27 -28 -29 +· A47 -30 * -31 -32 ** -33 -34 + -35 • A30 -36 A -37 · -38 # 39 PS13 40 * CB9 --41 PS2 42 ** A48 CB 18 43 44 * -45 * 46 47 • 48 * -49 * A31 50 * 51 -52 ** 53 54 *+ A49 55 * 56 -57 * 58 59 +★ 60 * 61 62 1+ PS14 63 * CB10 64 + 65 + 66 * A50 A32 67 * 68 69 ** 70 * -71 -72 ** -73 * =151 -74 * A51 ||||||||| 122222222 223333333432109876 33444 543210987654321012345678901234567890 210987654321098765 1234567890123456 11 1 A41--11 11 ---A42 11A43-1--BSSR
*
PS12 CB8
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-17
09
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4.
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION - Continued C.
Antenna Map
-Continued
SLC ARRAYS
MAIN ARRAY
SLC-1
74
74
49 48
49 48
SLC-2
SLC-5
SLC-4
SLC-3
0000 FIGURE C
TVM ARRAY 12 11
12 11
6543
16 15 14 13 12 11 10
0987 6 5 4 3 2
- 24 -25
0
-24 -25
74
49 48
QUAD 1
QUAD 2
QUAD 4
QUAD 33
1 0 1
061
2345 CON∞
-62
- 74
-74
74
7 8 9 10 -11 --12 13 14 15 - 16
FIGURE B
o
-74
74
42
FIGURE D FIGURE E
Element Designation and Location : When (5) referring to a radar element , an element designation and location is used in the following format :
ARRAY AX
ALL ELEMENTS A
QUAD
ROW
COLUMN
X
XX
XX CONTINUED
T T
3-18
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4. ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION - Continued c.
Antenna Map -Continued
SLCS Zero Test. Zero test is the zero degree test of the BITE lines . Fault reporting is special aided by a configuration of the radar elements . The element rows are halved , then paired off. The paired elements are electrically connected in a zig-zag pattern to one common (6)
BITE line, as shown in fig . F. (This pattern does not actually appear on the antenna map . ) When a failure in a BITE line occurs , a character (0) appears under the ZERO TEST head .
-A28-11--A27--11-- A26--11- A25--11-- A24--1
RCDR
||||12222222222333333333444 0123456789012345678901234567890123456789012
ZERO RCDR TEST
BSCM
0
*********** * ** ************* *********** *** *********** *** *********** *** ** ************ *************** ************** * * * **************** **** * **** *** * ** * * ***** *** * * ***** ************ *****************
wwwwwwwwww WW **** ** ******************* * ** ** * ** *** **** * ** *** **
* * * * * * * *
A47
A24
* * *
A48
* *
********** ***********
82888
***** ***** ****
* * *
*
Q2 BIT 3
74 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 221
** * * ****** ***** **** * ***
A25
* * A49 * * * * * * *
FIGURE F
CONTINUED
3-19
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4.
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION-Continued
C.
Antenna Map
-Continued
Diagnostic Delimiters . The antenna map can be used to fault isolate BRUS (7) including power supplies , BSSR , RCDR , and BSCM modules . This is done with diagnostic delimiters (fig . G ) , which are markings at the extreme left , right , top , and bottom of the map . The delimiters indicate which BRUS control a particular row or column of elements . By examining fault patterns , malfunctioning modules can be isolated . Note the area between delimiters for BSCM and RCDR modules .
RCDR A27 DELIMITERS
-- A28 -1 (-- A27-- | -- A26-- | | -· A25·- || -- A24 --- |
RCDR
|||| 2222222222333333333444 0123456789012345678901234567890123456789 012
BSCM
* *
* * *
* * * * * * * * * * ******* * * * * * * * *
14 73 72 71 70 69 68 67 66 65 64 63 62 61 60 59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38
RCDR
A47
DIAGNOSTIC DELIMITERS (BSCM)A47
*********
* ** * *** ***** ** Q2 * * * * * * * * BIT 3 * ****** : ** * * * *** * *** *** ** : *** **** *** * * * * ** * *** P *** ** ****** * *** **** **** * ** ****** *** ** **** ** * ****** *** *** **** ******** ** * ** * * ** *** *** * * **** **** **** ** * *** * * ********** **** ** *** *** * * ** : * ** * ************ **** **** ******** ៩ * ** * ** * **** ***** **** * * * ***** * ** ** *** * * * ** * ***** *** 3 ************ * * * * k * ********** **** *********** ***** ********** ** ***** ********* ***** ********* ******** *** * ****** ****** **** * + + **** ** ** ********* ***** *************** * * * * * * * ** ** * ******
ZERO TEST
A48
RCDR A25
A25
A49
FIGURE G
CONTINUED
3-20
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4. ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION d.
-Continued
TVM Array Antenna Map . The TVM array antenna map (fig . H) has the same
quadrant numbering system and row and column identification system as the main array antenna
Js ic
map. There are 33 rows . Quads 1 and 2 run from + 16 to +1 . Quads 3 and 4 run from 0 to -16. There are 19 columns . Quads 1 and 4 run from 0 to 9. Quads 2 and 3 run from +1 to +9. This
nap. The map is produced in two pieces.
ning for
The ZERO TEST diagnostic delimiters , and element designation and location are also the same as with the main array.
RASG TVM ARRAY ( FRONT VIEW) I- RCDR - || --RCDR -- 1 A5 A4 1 I I
5 VDC
12.66 VDC
BSSR
A21 800
TIC ERS 47
PS19 CB21
PS18 CB14
ZERO BITE TEST INC . 25-0 16 ⭑ 25-0 15 26-0 Q2 14 • 26-0 13 0 27-0 12 0 27-0 11 0 25-1 25-1 10 0 26-1 9 0 8 0 26-1 7 27-1 6 0 27-1 25-2 5 0 25-2 4 0 3 0 26-2 2 0 26-2 1 0 27-2 27-2 0 25-3 1 0 2 0 25-3 -3 0 26-3 4 26-3 27-3 27-3 25-4 8 0 25-4 -9 0 26-4 10 0 26-4 -11 27-4 - 12 0 27-4 25-5 -13 0 25-5 - 14 0 26-5 Q3 -15 4 26-5 16 * 27-5 27-5
RCDR BSCM
9876543210123456789
A20
* 16 ⭑ * 15 QI ⭑ 14 13 12 ★ 11 10 9 8 7 6 50⭑ 4 3 O 2 曲 1 0 * * 0 -t 1 2345
⭑
3456
⭑ 5 0⭑ 6 7 8 -9 10 11 12 13 A21 - 14 15 Q4 16
A4
A51
A5
300 9876543210 123456789 BSSR A22 ----
FIGURE H
CONTINUED
T
3-21
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4.
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION - Continued e.
SLC- 5 Array. The antenna map for the SLCs (fig . I ) includes information for all five
arrays . However , only SLC - 5 is active . These arrays consist of 51 elements , and no quadrant system is used . There are 17 rows and 7 columns in each . The map is generated in two sheets and must be taped . The ZERO TEST and diagnostic delimiters are the same as the main array .
SLC-4
SLC-5
BIT 2 ZERO 7654321 TEST 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * RCDR 0 0 0 0 * A3 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 * 0
BIT 3 ZERO 7654321 TEST 0 * -~| 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 * RCDR 0 0 0 0 * A6 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 * 1 0 0 0 * 1 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 * 0 0 * 0
BIT 4 ZERO TEST 7654321 * 17 * --1 * * 16 * 1 * ** 15 * I ** * * 14 * I *** 13 * 1 ** * * 12 * 1 * * * 11 * I *** * 10 * I *** 9 * RCDR * *** 8 * A33 *** * * * * * * I * ** K I **** * ** * 3 * * * 2 * 1 1 *
* *
*
*
*
*
*
BIT 1 ZERO TEST 7654321 0 * 0 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 * 0 * 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 * 1 0 0 0 * RCDR 0 0 0 0 * A2 0 0 0 * 1 0 0 0 0 * I 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 0 * 0 0 0 * 1 0 0 * * 0
SLC-3
76543
28 29 29 30 30 31 31 32 32 PS19 PS17 A52 33 33 C21 C:13 34 34 35 A53- 35 A53- 36 36
A51
SLC-2
*
SLC-1 BIT O ZERO TEST 7654321 * -17 0 * I A17 16 0 0 15 0 0 0 * 14 0 0 0 0 * 13 0 0 0 * 12 0 0 0 0 * 11 000 * 10 0 0 0 0 * 9 0 0 0 * RCDR 8 0 0 0 0 * A1 A18 7 0 0 0 * 6 0 0 0 0 * 5 0 0 0 * 4 0 0 0 0 * 1 3 0 0 0 * 1 A19 2 0 0 * 1 * A19- 1 0
5 12.66 BSCM BITE BSSR INC. VDC VDC
FIGURE !
f.
Antenna Map Fault Patterns .
The antenna map printout is used for identifying diagnostic fault indications . Using (1 ) infor mation provided by the antenna map , you may localize the specific fault condition . By the matching the antenna map printout with the examples given in the following paragraphs , the fault can be classified . Once classified , proper corrective action may be taken . Fault patterns resulting from RCDR , BSCM , and BSSR module failures may consist (2 ) of strings of zeros appearing in any row , column , or zero degree test column controlled by that module . Row Buffer failure fault . The BSSRs generate phase setting control for the (a) elements and deliver the start column / stop row pulses to the RCDR modules . Those modules drive up to 75 elements per column and up to 43 elements per row . None of the dynamic BSP tests monitor the operation of the BSSR output buffers or the RCDR input buffers . Failure of one of these devices can be detected only by operator fault pattern recognition of the antenna map printout . An example of a faulty buffer is shown in figure J. Notice the series of 19 zeros across Row-68 of the main array.
CONTINUED
ww 3-22
1-
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4. ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION -Continued
five f.
Antenna Map Fault Patterns
-Continued
rant heets RCDR
BSSR
*
A18 * * * * * *
DR 13
A19- * A19- *
-54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74
* * +
*** *
2
** 书号
* *
*
**** *** * ** * 羊羊
****
* ******** **** * *********** 书 书 书书 书 书 书 书 书书书书 * * **** *** * ****** * ** 羊羊 羊羊 ** * + * 3 * *** * * 羊羊 * 等等 羊 篇 * *** * ******** *********** * * * ** * * ** 0 0 0 0 0 0 00 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 **** **** ** * **** * * *** *** * * ** * ** * * * * ** * * ** * * * *** * * * ** 羊羊 * + + + * ** **** * ** **
*
BIT 2 Q4
*
A17 * *
BIT 5 Q3
-54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59 -60 -61 -62 -63 -64 -65 -66 -67 -68 -69 -70 -71 -72 -73 -74
*
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
A32
NOTE: ★ = NO FAULT INDICATION 0 = FAULT INDICATION
FIGURE J
(b)
Column Buffer failure fault (BSSR or RCDR) .
When a column buffer failure
occurs at BSSR or RCDR buffers , the antenna map will display one of two types of patterns. An example of the first type of pattern is shown in fig . K. Notice that column -42 contains all fail
9
indications (0) from row 20 to row -20 , (with the exception of the element in row 10; this will be discussed under multiple resetting elements) . This type of pattern occurs for a 337.5 degree test. (c)
Column Buffer failure fault (ZERO TEST) .
An example of the second type of
st pattern displaying a column buffer failure is shown on figure L. The string of fault indications (0) in the ZERO TEST column start at row 67 , quadrant 1 , and extends to row -68 in quadrant 4. The fault could be any of the column RCDR or BSSR modules that service quadrants 1 and 4. To isolate this problem , use table A along with the map . In the table under the heading of ZERO TEST FAULT PATTERN , find the condition or pattern that exists on the map . If a string of fail indications appeared in the ZERO TEST column for quadrants 2 and 4 , the same method would apply, using table B. Tables C and D are used for the TVM and SLC- 5 antenna arrays , respectively.
CONTINUED
3-23
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION - Continued Antenna Map Fault Patterns
** *
k ** *
0
*****
ει
***
0 0
***
0 0
0 0
** 0 * * *** 0
*******
0
*
OOOO 0
-67 -68
-70 -71 -72 -73 -74
* *
* ** *** O ** * * * * * * O
8
* * * * * *
* * *
* *
* * *
7654321
4443333333333222222. 2109876543210987654
RCDR A33
*******
*
BIT 2 Q4
*
BIT 2 Q4
0 0 0
*
*** ** * *
-61 62 63 -64 - 65
*
* **
* * * * * * * * * * * *
-54 -55 -56 -57 -58 -59
⭑
*** O * * * * * * 0
*
12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
* * 0
* * * *** O * * * * * * 0
*
* ει
*
0⭑ *
* * * *
0 0 0 0 0
* ** * ** ** * * * * * *** 0 ** ** ********* 0 ** ***** * ** * *0 * **** 單 **** **** ***** ** *** * ***** **** 0 ******** * **** ** ** 0 * * * * * * **** *0 ⭑
*** ** *
*
*
17 16 15 14
0 0 0 0
69-
7654321
*
ZERO TEST
99-
* **
--
* *
-71 -72 -73 -74
*
9 - 10 -11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 - 16 - 17 - 18 - 19 - 20 -21 -22 -23 -24 25
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5
** * *
*
BIT 4
0 0
* * * * *
ટ
*
*** ★ ** ** ** *
*
SLC-5
****
* **4
* * ⭑
* * *
-1 -2 -3 -4 -5 6 -7
0
0
*
*** *
1
* * *
*
3
*
*
*
*
*
59 58
543210.
*
*
* * *
**
Ooooooooooo
6987654
*
* *
*
*
*
* *
65 64 63 62 61
09-
*
12 11 10
*
* * * ******* * * * * ******* * * * * * ***** * ** * * ** ***** * *****
17
*
67
7 ε
* *
*
* ** * * ** ** * * * * * ⭑*
0 * **
0 0 0 0
* *
**
0 0 0 0
*
* *
oooooooooo * * * * *
**
Q1 BIT O
09
K
*
*
99
*
74 73 72 71 70 89 69
Q1 BIT O
2222
20 19 18 17 16 15 14
AAA
11 --A29 ---
A30-
HAMAL
74 73 72 71 70 24 23
* * *
A31-11-
444333333333 32 22 2222222 |||||||||| 2109876543210987654321098765432109876543210
ZERO TEST
*
LININ
44433333333332 2222222 210987654321098765432
--A32
* * * ** * ** ******* * *** ***** * * * ***** * *** ***** * * *** * * * * ** ****** ******* *** ****** * *** ****** * * * ******* ** ********* * * * ***** ******** ******* ****** * * *
* *
RCDR -
11
ZERO TEST
A31
---- ——— —
RCDR --|---A32
Continued
ARK
f.
HVE
3-4.
.
444333333333322222222221 2109876543210987654321098765432109876543210
BSSR- 1 -A43- || -----A42 ---|| --- A41
A40 --
A43-1- BSSR 1 -1- A33 -1- RCDR
BSSR-1-A43- || ----A42--
FIGURE L
--FIGURE K CONTINUED
3-24
T
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4. ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION -Continued f.
Antenna Map Fault Patterns (3)
Continued
Multiple resetting element fault.
Leaky capacitors in the antenna elements
cause the elements to produce more than one BITE response pulse . There should be only one
429 BITE response pulse produced per element during the reset time period . This is known as a BITE response and should only be present at specific times in a certain time frame (window) . When a
87654320
BITE pulse is sensed within the window at the wrong time , as is the case with a multiple resetting element , it causes two consecutive fail indications (0) in the ZERO TEST column of the map. Figure F illustrates this condition to the two consecutive zeros in the top row of each array
tti
which will show only one zero . When any of the 43 elements in this BITE line becomes a multiple resetter, it causes its BITE line to fail the ZERO TEST as indicated by the zeros . Isolation to a
ttt!
ttt ttt tit tt ttt
faulty multiple resetter requires a special fault location procedure . This procedure is contained in para 3-13. (4)
Deenergized or faulty contactor or tripped circuit breaker fault.
This is
caused by either a deenergized antenna electronics contactor 2K2 or a tripped circuit breaker 2A30CB93 . The contactor and circuit breaker mutually supply the antenna 12.66 -Volt power supplies with three phase power. All element positions in the three arrays will show fault conditions (0). (5) (a)
Element input loading or backplane wiring fault. Whenever a single row or column exhibits a 337.5 degree failure pattern such as
illustrated in figure I , another failure , other than a buffer problem , has been experienced . The fault can be a backplane wiring short circuit or an element row or column loading problem . The backplane wiring problem is beyond the maintenance scope of the operator and organizational maintenance personnel . The element loading problem , however , can be detected by the divideby-two principle of unseating elements . This action should not be undertaken until the row or column buffer fault localization procedure has failed to solve the problem . TABLE A. Main Array ZERO TEST, Quadrants 1 and 4 , ( left side of map) BSSR Output Buffer/RCDR Input Buffer Fault Truth Table
ZERO TEST FAULT PATTERN LISTED-ALL OTHERS O
ROWS WITH
CONDITION
+ ROWS
12
2
3
- ROWS
Exception-All rows show
FAULTY BRU PREFIX REFERENCE DESIGNATION WITH 2A 150A8.
A40, A28 , A29 A40, A29
+74
4569
+74
-74, -73
A40, A41 , A29, A30
+74 thru +72
-74, -73
A41 , A30
+74 thru +72
-74 thru -71
A41 , A30
6
+74 thru +70
-74 thru. -71
A41 , A30
7
+74 thru +70
-74 thru -69
A41 , A30
5
CONTINUED
3-25
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION
3-4. f.
Antenna Map Fault Patterns
Continued
-Continued
2nist169 Num
qeM &
Plasmale saneine edini erotiosuSO TABLE A. Main Array ZERO TEST, Quadrants 1 and 4 , ( left side of map) BSSR Output 3680 Buffer RCDR Input Buffer Fault Truth Table Continued alld & es nword arent boneq emir 1929: 90 huo mamele 19q D900 15 15291q ed ZERO TEST FAULT 1904 PATTERN alcitlum o ritiv seso ed ai as ROWS WITH LISTED ALL OTHERS O CONDITION 103T OFBSadt al (0 ) engite vens nose to won got erit nt sonstROWS sigitlum e gemooed snil 3718 evt.aleinem 8 +74 thru +68 a of noifeloel .conesert yd betsoibni asF 9 +74 thru +68 benistnoo el absooq sint Grubedolo 10 +74 thru +66 11 +74 thru +66 eleidt Just to send untie beg 12 +64 DENG SAS thru vexsend füonio baqghts 10 +74
newog13V-88.st annotai+74 thry +64 flu14wore lliw byens b74 thru +62 15 +74 thru +62 16
wrent of
ROWS
sid 0 691 -74 thru -69 ORES et list of egits -74 thru - 67
+74 thru +60 e04 magis 74 thru +56 enulis roue q es
FAULTY BRU PREFIX REFERENCE DESIGNATION WITH 2A 150A8 bentoulli 45 o vino won A41 , A30 A41 , A30
-74 thru -67
A41 , A30
-74 thru -65
A41 , A30
74 thru 65 orlosie ernstha besig 63 mexse74 thru og inam74 thru 1:630 a -74 thru -61
+74 thru +60
17
118
4 saluq s
A41 , A31 ob s 19hievab
stroo A42, A310 q 691A42|| A319 A42 ) A30b
3 olgot74-thru 61 -74 thru -59
ammulo= 74 hru 24570 £
from A42 , A31 A42 , A31 ened WA42 , A31
QU0 0 4
edt begn 19 ehagxe reed 274 thru 1956 559ice 1231 mars 1974 thru A42 , edt meldong enibsoi amulop 20 won female de no luoti more priv 20 slqHood & eg geo Husl 74 thru -55 lenoitssinecio bre totsiego off to ago. A42 , A31 dong puwenslqpoed 21 -shivib eyd betosib ed nt 74 thru 52 mg pelb 74 thru -51 A31 ennoe A42, Ashemiam to wor22nt litru neshebat 74 thru +50 Jos sim74 thru 51pm . ou to A42, A32 owl- yd 23 meldct 74 thru th48 be a esd 74 thru e 47 es pol flu A42, A32nmuloo 24 +74 thru +46 -74 thru -47 JugtugЯ288 (qsin to ebje Hell A A42 , A32 25 nisMARAT +74 thru +44 -74 thru - 43. A43, A32 oitus 26 +74 thru +40 -74 thru -41 A43 , A32 27 +74 thru +38 74 thru -37 9 XR399 URG YTJUAR BARRET A43, A32 ИОТАЙДІВ :28зривявная +74 thru # 340623-74 thru 74 thru -35 A43 A32 .BA08 29. HTIW +74 thru +32 -74 thru -31 A43 , A32 30 +74 thru +26 thru -74 27 8SAO AA es31 A43 , A32 +74 thru +22 Gyors awo1174 thru 21 ESA OLA A43 , A32 S QCA CSA TAA.OPA 4 OT - AT& OƐA IPA ! S A Q&A FPA 2 OCA , FAA OCA
ÞA
93 -
AT-Y
CONTINUED
3-26
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4. ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION -Continued f.
Antenna Map Fault Patterns
Continued
put
REFIX GNATION 8
180
MB
TABLE B. Main Array ZERO TEST, Quadrants 2 and 3, ( right side of map) BSSR Output Buffer /RCDR Input Buffer Fault Truth Table
ZERO TEST FAULT PATTERN ROWS WITH • LISTED -ALL OTHERS O
CONDITION
+ ROWS
FAULTY BRU PREFIX REFERENCE DESIGNATION WITH 2A150A8.
-ROWS
Exception -All rows show O
A40, A28 , A27
2
+74
A40, A41 , A27
3
+74
-74, -73
A40, A41 , A27
4
+74 thru +72
-74, -73
A41 , A27
5
+74 thru +72
-74 thru - 71
A41 , A26
6
+74 thru +70
-74 thru -71
A41 , A26
7
+74 thru +70
-74 thru -69
A41 , A26
8
+74 thru +68
-74 thru -69
A41 , A26
9
+74 thru +68
-74 thru -67
A41 , A26
10
+74 thru +66
-74 thru -67
A41 , A26
11
+74 thru +66
-74 thru -65
A41 , A26
12
+74 thru +64
-74 thru -65
A41 , A26
13
+74 thru +64
-74 thru -63
A41 , A26
14
+74 thru +62
-74 thru -63
A42, A25
A42 , A25
15
+74 thru +62
-74 thru = 61
16
+74 thru +60
-74 thru -61
A42 , A25
17
+74 thru +60
-74 thru - 59
A42, A25
A42, A25
+74 thru +56
-74 thru - 57
19
+74 thru +56
-74 thru -55
A42, A25
20
+74 thru +54
-74 thru -55
A42, A25
21
18
+74 thru +52
-74 thru -51
A42, A25
22
+74 thru +50
-74 thru -51
A42, A25
23
+74 thru +48
-74 thru -47
A42 , A24
24
+74 thru +46
-74 thru - 47
A42 , A24
+74 thru +44
A43, A24
26
+74 thru +40
-74 thru -43 -41 - 74 thru -
27
+74 thru +38
-74 thru -37
A43, A24
28
+74 thru +34
-74 thru -35
A43, A24
29
+74 thru +32
-74 thru -31
A43, A24
30
+74 thru +26
-74 thru -27
A43, A24
31
+74 thru +22
-74 thru -21
A43, A24
25
A42 , A24
2 2 2 N @ 283
CONTINUED
3-27
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-4 .
NEW
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION-Continued
f.
Antenna Map Fault Patterns - Continued
TABLE C. TVM Array ZERO TEST BSSR Output Buffer / RCDR Input Buffer Fault Truth Table
ZERO TEST FAULT PATTERN # ROWS WITH LISTED - ALL OTHERS O -ROWS
FAULTY BRU PREFIX REFERENCE DESIGNATION WITH 2A150A8
+16 thru +6
-16 thru -7
A22 , A4, A5
+16 thru + 10
-16 thru -9 16 thru - 13
A22 , A4, A5
CONDITION
+ ROWS 1 2 3 4 5
+16 thru +12 +16 thru +14 +16 thru +14
6 7 8 9
+16
16 thru
A22 , A4, A5
13
A22, A4, A5
- 16 thru - 15
A22 , A4, A5
- 16,
15
A22 , A4, A5
+16 A22 , A4, A5 - 16 , — 15
A22, A4
Exception-All rows show O A22 , A5
TABLE D.
SLC- 5 Array ZERO TEST BSSR Output Buffer / RCDR Input Buffer Fault Truth Table
ZERO TEST FAULT PATTERN ROWS WITH LISTED- ALL OTHERS O
CONDITION
+ ROWS
-ROWS
FAULTY BRU PREFIX REFERENCE DESIGNATION WITH 2A150A8
1 2 3 4 5
1 , 2 , 15, 16, 17
A43, A33 1 , 2 , 16, 17
A43 , A33 17
A43, A33 Exception- All rows show 0 A43, A33 17
6 7
A43, A33 1 , 2 , 17 A43, A33
1 , 2 , 15, 16 , 17 A43, A33
CONTINUED
3-28
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION -Continued
3-4. f.
Antenna Map Fault Patterns
-Continued
27 28 29 -30 31 32 33 -34
PREFIX IGNATION DA8
45
*
* * *** * *** 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
**
00 *
** ** ***** *
*****
* * ** * * * * ** ******** * * * **** * * 000 0 * * *
27 28 29 -30 -31 -32 -33 34
*****
Table
45
27 -28 -29 -30 -31 -32 -33 -34
5 5 5
* * * **** * * * 0 00
5
*
27 28 29 -30 -31 -32 -33 -34
* 0 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 *** * * * ******* *** ** * * ***
***
0000 *** ***
*****
*** * *********** * * * **** *** ★★★★ **** ***********
***** * * ** **** 0000
*
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
** *
* * ** * *** * * * ** * * *
*****
27 28 29 -30 31 32 33 34
-27 28 29 -30 -31 -32 -33 -34
*
* * *
15
*
ble FIGURE M
IX TION
(b) Because of a possible faulty logic IC on an element or a wiring resistive short on the backplane , the row or column reporting information can be distorted enough to fault a row or column without loading down the RCDR module . Ambient temperature effects on logic thresholds can sometimes change fault patterns . This condition is illustrated on figure M. The figure shows a segment of the map (rows - 27 through -34) run at different times of the day andillustrates the temperature variable . The actual problem here is a backplane wiring short . However , if the problem was caused by a faulty element, the method of fault locating is given in para 3-10.
(6)
5-Volt Power Supply Fault Verification . When a 5 - volt power supply fails in any
of the antenna arrays , the antenna map failure may be used to correlate the fault reported in BSP- 040-002 . The ZERO TEST column for the area of elements supplied five (5) volts by the particular power supply . Figure N illustrates this condition . In this case , Power Supply PS1 , controlled by circuit breaker CB 17 , is faulty . Notice the series of zeros (0) in the ZERO TEST column for the area of coverage of PS1 . The TVM array would show all 33 ZERO TEST positions as zeros (0) if power supply PS 19 failed since it is the only 5- volt power supply used for that array . Similarly , .if power supply PS 19 failed, the 17 ZERO TEST positions for SLC- 5 array would zero(0) al l show
CONTINUED
3-29
9 10 11 12
02
8
*
0
3-30
FIGURE N
* *** X * * * * ** * * ⭑ ⭑ * * * * * * * ** * * * **** ***** ** ** *** *** **** * ★ * * * * ** * ** * * * * *** * * * * * * * **** * * * * * 7 **** ** ** ***** * * * ช ********** *** * * *. **** * * : ** * * ***** ***** *** 會
0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
A49
A28 PS9 CB5
0
9
ટ
0 0 0
9 8 6
A48
A27
0 0 0
PS1 CB17
5VDC
0 A47
0 0
PS6 CB2
POWER SUPPLY
0
0 0
0
-A51 -A51
0 0 0
0 0 0
OOOOOOOOOO
A26 A50
0 0
0
0
0 PS5 CB1
0 0
0 0
A49
A25 A48
ZERO RCDR TEST 74 * 73 72 71 * 70 * *
* ** * * * ************ **
* *** ** ** *
* *
***** *** * ** * * *********** * ****** * * * **** *** ***** * ** * * ** * * ***** **** * **** **** * * **** ******** ** 1 ******** 2 **** * ***** * * **** ***** *************** ******************** **** ********* * * * ** **** *********** ****************** ************** ****** ** ********** * * * * ** ************* * * **** * ****************** ************** ***** ****************** ******************* *************** **** ************** *********** ***** * * * ******* *** * * ** * * ****** ******** *********** ****** A *********** ***** ********* **** * * *************** . ************** * * * * ** * * * * * * * * *** * ********* * * *
*
.
1234567
*
1 0 1 5 4 3
7
59 58 57 56 55 54 53 52 51 50 49 48 47 46 45 44 43 42 41 40 39 38 37 36 35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10
7 2 2 28
*
*
*
*** *
**
**
*
* *
** * ** *
**
* * *****
*
**
* Antenna Map Fault Patterns
228
*
+ * *
羊
*
* *** ** *** * * * **
* * *
* ** * ******** ** * ** ***
*
**** * *
******************* ** * ** * * +
*************
*** 3 ** **** *
*
*
*
** *
**
*
*
**
* **
Q2 BIT 3
* f.
BSCM
12.6 6VDC
5V DC
Continued
ANTENNA MAP INTERPRETATION- Continued
3-4.
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-5.
METHOD FOR RUNNING AN ANTENNA MAP
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
HARD COPY UNIT A65
CONTROL-KEYBOARD A57
0000
CATHODE RAY TUBE A73
CONTROL-KEYBOARD A76
CATHODE RAY TUBE A54
RO
AD
SI
DE
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
ER LY
1 At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) set COMPUTER CONTROL LOAD DEVICE SELECT to MASS STORAGE UNIT 2 .
B&CSTATUS
CITDISPLAY
LARP
CE
TEXT
EXT ALEXT
PESOUTBATA
COMPUTERCONTROL LOAD DEVICE SELECT MASS MASSSTORAGE STORAGE2 UNIT1 UNIT RECOVERY NOW STORAGE -TACTICAL UNIT1 PERIPHERALS
BASKET1POWER BASKET 1 CLOCK
BASKET 2POWER BASKET& CLOCK COMPUTERSTATUS
MALT
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-31
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
METHOD FOR RUNNING AN ANTENNA MAP-Continued
3-5.
2
At indicator panel ( fig . A) , press COMP & SYS RESET.
Normally , the message MSU OPERATING is displayed within three minutes NOTE
3
after performing step 3 and remains on cathode ray tube ( CRT) screen for about 50 seconds .
Press BOOT STRAP INIT and wait about three minutes until MODE SELECTION (fig. B) appears on CRT A54 / A73 (fig . C) .
MODE SELECTION : * M01 *
STATUS MONITOR AIDED SELECTION
* M02 *
OPERATOR DIAGNOSTIC SELECTION
* M03 *
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
* M04 *
CONTINUE
FIGURE B
4
At Control - Keyboard A57 /A76 (fig . D), press SEL TAB . Type M01 and press SEL TAB again . STATUS MONITOR AIDED SELECTION (fig . E ) will appear on CRT.
о
බ O
O Jonah
FIGURE C
CONTINUED
3-32
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-5. METHOD FOR RUNNING AN ANTENNA MAP -Continued
,,, TAB to change , and TAB At control-keyboard (fig . D ) , use cursor 12 = ECU , SHELTER , IFF , RASG , BSP from 0 to 1 on STATUS MONITOR AIDED
5
SELECTION MENU (fig . E ). inutes
en for
UNF PL3 SELECT CALL ΤΟ
VHF MONITOR EXTCKT
SEND PNTR CANCE HOOK
SEO HOOK NUM HOOK
HOOK
(fig.B CIRCUITSELECT
2
VOLUME O
HOME TAB
ER
0 GHJKL +
TAB
RING SELECT
SEL TAR HARD 2 3 COPY SEND 45 6 TAB ENTR 7 9 TAB 0
FIGURE D
STATUS MONITOR AIDED SELECTION :
* MO1 *
(0)
1 -WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER
(0)
2
RECOVERY STORAGE UNIT
(0) (0)
7 =CONTROL UNIT GROUP
(0)
9 =SEARCH TRACK
8
(0) 3 - HARD COPY UNIT
SIGNAL PROCESSOR GROUP
RECEIVER / ROOM
(0) 4 = MAN STATION 1 (0) (0)
5 - MAN STATION 3 6 = COMMUNICATIONS
KEY :
TVM RECEIVER
(0)
10
(0)
11 =TRANSMITTER
(0) 12 0 =NO FAULT
ECU , SHELTER , IFF , RASS, BSP 1 = FAULT
FIGURE E
6
PressENTR TAB .
7
Follow maintenance instructions shown on CRT.
CONTINUED
3-33
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
METHOD FOR RUNNING AN ANTENNA MAP
3-5.
Continued A
8
At CRT (fig . C) , observe BSP DIAGNOSTIC ANTENNA MAP (fig . F) .
BSP DIAGNOSTIC ANTENNA MAP H
ENTER THE NUMBER CORRESPONDING TO THE DESIRED ACTION : 0 = DO NOT OUTPUT THE MAP 1 -OUTPUT THE MAP
2 = OUTPUT MAP TO DISPLAY 3
OUTPUT MAP TO HCU AND DISPLAY
FIGURE F
9
10
At control - keyboard (fig . D) , enter number 3 into brackets and press ENTR TAB
At Hard Copy Unit A65 (fig . G) , a printed copy of the antenna map will be produced .
ANTENNA MAP
ON LINE
O
O
POWER FORM FEED O
O
OFF CB1 CB2 ON ON OFF OFF
FIGURE G
3-34
TEST
M1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
BEAM STEERING PROCESSOR 070 OUTPUT STORAGE AND TIMING MODULE TEST
3-6.
a.
When a beam steering processer (BSP) 070 test is run and the printout indicates an
output storage and timing module (OSTM) fault , make an additional verification before concluding the fault is the OSTM . It is unlikely that this module would be involved unless there was a total breakdown of this test. b.
Thirteen antenna elements and six BITE lines have been preselected to test the
functions of the OSTM not previously used . They also test the ability of the system to output row and column information and correctly report their status. c.
The BSP070 test has two parts . The first part tests the ability of the thirteen elements
to respond correctly to a 337.5 degree row and column command . The second part tests the ability of six BITE lines to report a fault . The data is compared to an expected return to determine a pass or fail condition . If a fail is indicated , procedure BPMP01 will be printed and the user will be directed to para 3-7 for fault isolation .
3-35
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-7.
BEAM PROCESSOR MODULE FAULT ISOLATION 01
ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION
100
08
RO
AD
SI
MAN STATION 1
DE
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
The specific procedures for running an antenna map are contained in NOTE
para 3-5 .
1
At man station 1 (MS 1 ) , run an antenna map (fig . A), unless one has already been obtained .
2
Observe antenna map main array (fig . A) .
If large number of unrelated 337.5 זיד
degree and zero degree failures exist:
Go to step 3.
If large number of unrelated 337.5 degree and zero degree failures do not exist :
-74
Go to step 4. FIGURE A CONTINUED
3-36
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
BEAM PROCESSOR MODULE FAULT ISOLATION 01 -Continued
3-7.
3
Run a second antenna map and compare two maps.
If fault pattern indicates similar random pattern: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If fault not repeated on second map : Fault corrected . Return to normal operation .
4
Observe antenna map main array (fig . A) . ZERO TEST If all 337.5 degree fail indications
and timing module ( OSTM) selected elements :
a. Row buffer fault. Go to para 3-4 to determine faulty RCDR or BSSR module . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If all 337.5 degree fail indications (0) (fig . B ) , do not
000000000000 000 0000 000000 ***
appear across entire rows containing OSTM selected elements :
74 * 73 72 71 * 70 * 69 * 68 + 67 * 66 * 65 * 64 * 63 * 62 * 61 * 60 * 59 * 58 * 57 * 56 + 55 54 53 52 * 51 * 50 * 49 * 48 * 47 * 46 45 * 44 43 42 * 41 * 40 * 39 * #
(0) (fig . B ) , appear across entire rows containing output storage
Go to step 5.
5 Observe antenna map main array (fig . A) .
If 337.5 degree fail indications ( 0) (fig . B) , appear in all element positions of BITE line containing OSTM selected elements :
Go to step 6.
If 337.5 degree fail indications (0) do not appear in all element positions of BITE line containing OSTM selected elements :
Go to step 8.
CONTINUED
3-37
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
BEAM PROCESSOR MODULE FAULT ISOLATION 01 -Continued
Observe antenna map array.
*
NOTE
electronics . This pin may become bent during maintenance .
* * *
A14
Bent pin 8 go to para 3-4.
b.
Go to step 12.
*
a.
PS15 CB11
If fault pattern is not similar
*
PS4 CB20
A15
to figure B:
Go to step 7. 7
Observe antenna map main array (fig . A) . A16
PS16 CB12
If fault pattern appears in all positions of a quadrant ( fig . C) :
*
A17
a. Multiplexer module fault. Go to para 3-4.
b. Go to step 12.
If fault pattern does not
PS2 CB18 PS14 CB10
A18 *
appear in all positions of a quadrant:
Call Intermediate Maintenance . 8
Observe antenna map main array (fig . A) .
A19- * A19-
00000000000000 00000000 A***
00000000 **** 0 0 0 0 0 ** ** 0000000 0 0 0 *** 000 *** 00 00 000 *** 0 0 0 0 0 0 000000000 00000 **** 00 000 00000 *** 000000000000000 **** 0000 00000000 000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 GO 0 0 0000 00 0000000 01 0 00 0000 00 0 24 000000000000 000 0 0 0 0 00000000 0000 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0000 0
00 00 00
000 00 0 0 00
* * * * +
Pin 8 of element is a ground connection for element
1 2 3 -4 5 -6 -7 -8 9 10 11 - 12 - 13 - 14 - 15 -16 - 17 - 18 19 -20 -21 -22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28 - 29 30 31 -32 33 -34 -35 -36 37 38 -39 40 -41 42 -43 44 -45 - 46 - 47 - 48 -49 -50 -61 52 -53 -54 55 56 57 58 59 -60 -61 - 62 -63 64 - 65 - 66 -67 -68 -69 - 70 -71 -72 -73 -74
リ
PS12 CB8
000000000000
figure B:
* 00 0 0 C 0000 000 0000 0 000000 00 000 000000 0.0 00. * 700000000 0000 C00000 00000 **** 0000 0000 0000 00000 ... 00 0 0 0 0 0 000 00000 0 0000 000000 00000 000000 ** 0000 00000 *** 0000 0 0 0 0 0 0000 . 000000 *** 000000000000000000 ** 0000 00 0 0 000 000000000000000000 **** 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 *** 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 **** 000 0000000 *** 00 0 0 0 0 0 0 ** ** 0 00 0 00000 0 **** 00000000 00 00000000 **** 0 000 00000000000 C **** 0000000002 *** ( 00000000 00000000000 00000000 000000000 ****
00 000 0
A13
If fault pattern is similar to
00000 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
6
)9 ( 1) 0 0
3-7.
BIT 2 Q4
00000 0 0 0 0 0 0
соо 44433333333332222222222 ||||||||| 2109876543210987654321098765432109876543210123456 I || 1 BSSR-1-A43- || ----A42---¡11¡ --- A41 ---¡ ¡ ‒‒‒‒‒‒‒· A40 .---
FIGURE C ind ications appear for at least 42 continuous rows on left If ZERO TEST fail
and right side of map (fig . C) :
Perform para 3-8.
If ZERO TEST fail indications do not appear for at least 42 continuous rows on left and right side of map: Go to step 9 . CONTINUED
3-38
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-7. BEAM PROCESSOR MODULE FAULT ISOLATION 01 - Continued 9
Observe antenna map main array (fig . D and E).
If any of the OSTM selected elements show 337.5 fail indications : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If none of the OSTM selected elements show 337.5 degree faults:
Go to step 10.
74
0011
00 ***
10
Observe antenna map main array (fig . D and E).
10 t If any BITE line containing OSTM selected elements show ZERO TEST fault:
*** 1911
Perform para 3-9. If BITE lines containing OSTM selected elements do not show ZERO TEST fault:
***
****
Go to step 11 . At MS1 , run beam steering processor antenna tests ( para 3-6) and get antenna map . Observe BSP070 diagnostic test results .
***
FIGURE D
If any OSTM selected element indicates fail :
*** ...
Go to step 1 . If no OSTM selected element indicates fail: Fault corrected . Return to normal operation .
"
ZERO TEST 210987654321098765432109876543210987654321012 3456789012345678901234567890123456789012 0 * * 000 * ★ A * * * * * * * * * * * * * ** * * * * *** * * * * * *
74 73 72 71
29 28 27 26 25 24 23
*
* * * * * x * * * * * * * * * * * * X x x * * * * 募 * 4. * ** * * * * * + * **** * * * * *** * * * * * ** * *幂 * ** * ** * * * 4. * * * * ** * * * * * * ** * * ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * 20 * * ¥ * * * 000 * * V * * * * * * * * * * * * * ***** ** * * ** * * * * * x * * * * * 부 * * " * 3 * * * * * * * *** * 羊羊 * * * * * * ¥ * * * * ** * * * * * * * *
**
*** * *
*
ZERO TEST
22222222 2222
2222 2222 2222
74 73 72 71
* * * *
29 28 27 26 25 24 23
* * * * * * * *
-22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28
* * *
*
★★
*
* ** * * 食 * * * * ** * * ** ** * * * * * * * *** * * * * ODO⭑ * # . * ** 食 *** * ** 食
** ** * ** * * * * * * # * *⭑ 食 ** * * * * * * ⭑ ** * * * * * * * * * * * * * * # * * * ** * * ★ ** * * * * * ⭑ * * ⭑ * * *
*
* * *
-22 -23 -24 -25 -26 -27 -28
*
+ E
*
"
CONTINUED FIGURE E
3-39
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-7.
BEAM PROCESSOR MODULE FAULT ISOLATION 01 -Continued
12
Run a new antenna map and observe main array.
If fault no longer exists :
Fault corrected . Return to normal operation .
If fault still exists :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-40
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-8. ZERO TEST FAILURES FAULT ISOLATION
נן MAN STATION 1 RO
AD
SI
DE
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
ZERO TEST failures can be caused by a variety of faults . Several of the following can cause the failure :
1. Elements
2. BSCM module 3. Beam Steering Shift Register (BSSR )
4. Row/Column Driver (RCDR )
5. Interface wiring fault
6. Data transfer fault.
The ZERO TEST faults can only be identified and detected in the BSP080 ( antenna element test) with an accompanying antenna map. The map provides a visual inspection device for inspecting the various fault patterns . The identified faults may appear as individual faults or is olation.faults that exhibit some recognizable pattern . The patterns hold the key to fault multiple
CONTINUED
3-41
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-8.
ZERO TEST FAILURES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
NOTE
18
The specific procedures for running an antenna map are contained in para 3-5.
1
At man station 1 ( MS1 ) , obtain an antenna map if a current antenna map is not available .
2
Observe antenna map all arrays ( fig . A) . 111
If any ZERO TEST colurn shows more than two fail indications (0) together : Go to step 3.
If any ZERO TEST column shows more than two fail indications (0 ) that are not together:
།
Go to step 6.
41
12, 5V VOC DC
፣
11-427426-11-125 - II--424-1 - RCOR 11 11 11II 1111 II11 ItIT 1 444333333333322222222221 12,0 v 883R 111111111 210947654321 ZERI) 098765432109 876543210987 654321012345 678901234567 890123456789 111111111122 012345678901 DC VOC 222222223333 TEST 333333a442 ZENO RCDR BSC TEST · 74 419 74 1 7170 02 72 . HIT O BIT 3 A87 418 424 PS7 CB3 ----
PS7 CB3 PS3 COL
417
FAIL ZERO DEGREE ELEMENT TEST BITE LINE 91 ASY BITE GROUP 4 C444
416 PSA сви PS3 CB19
426 450 ....
415
45 44 O
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-42
4 H
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-8. ZERO TEST FAILURES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
RCDR -1---A32--1---A31-11
ZERO TEST * * 1 1
3
Observe antenna map all arrays (fig . B and C) .
444333333333322222222 21098765432109 8765432
74 73 72 71 70
If any ZERO TEST column shows all fail indications (0) with a possible random pair
Q1 BITO
of pass indications (* ): a. Go to para 3-4.
ether
are
24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 · 16 15 · 14 13 12 11 10 < 9 8 * 7 * 6 $ 5 4 督 3 * 2 * 1 0 1 -2 -3 -4 -5 -6 -7 -8 -9 -10 -11 -12 -13 -14 • -15 16 $ -17 * 18 -19 20 -21 -22 -23 -24
** + ******* * * * *** + * * ** * * * * * * * 0 *** * * * * * * ****** * * * 2 0 ** * * * 解 * * ** * * 華 * * * * 0 ****** * * * **** * * 0 ***** * * * * ****** ** C* ** * + * ** * ** *** * * * X + *** * * * * * * 0 *** *** **** * * 0 **** 羊羊 *** * + 0 *** ** * * * * 0 ** * * * * * ** * * * * 0 * # *** * * * * * * * * * *** * 0 * ** * * * * ** * 0 ** *** ** ***X * * * * *** X * * * ***** * * + 0 ** * * * * * * * ** * * * * * * ** * 0 **** * * **** ** * ⭑ ** * ⭑ * * * * * *** 0⭑ ** * + ** * ⭑ **
* • * *
* * -71 • -72 ► -73 -74
b. Go to step 5 .
If any ZERO TEST column shows three or more fail indications (0) together:
*
* • • · * + +
BIT 2 Q4
4443333333333222222 210987654321098765 4 11 I 11 BSSR-1- A43-11----A42--1
Go to para 3-9 .
If any ZERO TEST column shows almost mirror image passing indications ( * ) at top and bottom (one more * on top of ZERO TEST column ) with a possible pair of pass indications ( * ): a . Go to para 3-4. SLC-5
b. Go to step 4. BIT 4 7654321 * * * * * * *** *** 0⭑ ** *** O⭑ * * ** * O *** *** O *** * ** O *** *** ** *
ZERO TEST
17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 1
* * * * * * * * * * * * * * * * *
RCDR A33
7654321
--1- A43-1- BSSR 1 ---1- A33 -1- RCDR
FIGURE B
FIGURE C
CONTINUED
3-43
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-8.
ZERO TEST FAILURES ISOLATION - Continued
4
Rerun BSPA test , get antenna map , and observe all arrays ( fig . B and C) .
If original fault is gone :
Go to step 5.
If original fault still exists :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
5
Observe antenna map all arrays.
If any additional ZERO TEST failure exists : Return to step 2.
If no additional ZERO TEST failure exists:
Fault corrected . Return to normal operations .
6
Observe antenna map main array.
If any ZERO TEST column has fail indications (0) in separated pairs except for top line , which may have only one : Go to para 3-9.
If any ZERO TEST column shows a pattern of individual random faults (0) : Go to step 7.
7
Rerun BSPA tests , get antenna map , and observe all arrays .
If fault still exists :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If fault condition changed :
Return to step 5.
3-44
a
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-9. STANDARD ZERO TEST FAILURES FAULT ISOLATION
ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION
RADAR SET
11
U
RO
U
AD
SI
U
MAN STATION 1
DE
o
mo
INTERIOR
RO
AD
SI
DE
CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX A30
! cept Tools and Equipment Required . Multimeter, Digital 8125A- AQ - O Probe , Test Element A- 35
: Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In. ZERO TEST failures can be caused by a variety of faults including the following :
1.
Elements
2.
BSCM module
3.
Beam Steering Shift Register (BSSR )
4.
Row /Column Driver ( RCDR )
5. Interface wiring fault 6.
Data transfer fault
ing can antenna withZERO element BSP080 (antenna identified detected and only be TEST faults in the inspection an accompany test)The device for a visual provides . The map map inspectingthe various fault patterns . The identified faults may appear as individual faults or multiple faults that exhibit some recognizable pattern. Thepatterns hold the key to fault isolation . CONTINUED
3-45
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-9.
STANDARD ZERO TEST FAILURES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
MANY HAZARDS EXIST IN AND NEAR THE RADAR SET. REFER TO TM 9WARNING
NOTE
1
1430-601-20 FOR COMPULSORY SAFETY MEASURES FOR RADAR MAINTENANCE .
Refer to para 3-5 for specific method for running an antenna map .
At man station 1 ( MS1 ) , observe antenna map (fig . A) . Determine correct 12.66 volt power supply circuit breaker that applies to fault.
74
ZERO TEST
* ****
** * ****
**
****
* * * * * * ⭑
* **
* *
* * * ★★ * * * ** * * *** 食倉 ** * * A *** * ****** ** ***** * * * * ⭑ * * * * * * * * * * *R * * ** * * * * * * ** ** * * ⭑ * * ** * * * ******* * ***** * ⭑ ** * * **** *** * * * * *** ******* * * *** ** * * *** * * * * *** **** * * **** ⭑ * * ⭑ ******** *** **** * * * ⭑ * ** ** * *** ** * ** ** *** *** ******
*
*
* *
-24 -25
*
-25
**
*
*
*
*
*
* **
*
*
*
20
*
-74
**
* *
-A51 -A51
*
* * * * * *
PS6 CB2
A47 PS1 CB17
A27 *
** r *
*
A50 A26
*
**** * ** * ** **
DC
*
*****
*** **
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23 22 21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12 11 10 9
12.6 6VDC
*
** ** * ** * *
BSCM
*
食
*
* ★★★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★ ★
8582
** *
RCDR
AS
74
74
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-46
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
STANDARD ZERO TEST FAILURES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-9.
OTM9 2
At radar set Circuit Breaker Box A30 (fig . B) ,
R set appropriate circuit breaker determined by fault pattern to OFF.
208V CB1 CB2
0
208V
CB4 Disregard BSP070 OSTM 337.5 CB5
CB6
CB7
CB8
degree faults which may be NOTE
induced by shutting off 12.66 volt power.
CB9 CB10 CB11 CB12 3
volt
At Engagement Control Station (ECS) MS1 ,
run beam steering processor antenna (BSPA) test and obtain a second antenna
CB13 CB14 CB15 CB16
map (fig . A) . • 4
Observe new antenna map (fig . A) for appropriate array . FIGURE B
If ZERO TEST fault of interest is gone : Perform fault isolation per para 3-10 for particular BITEline.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
Go to step 5.
NOTE
Steps 5 through 9 will be accomplished at radar set .
5
Remove any convenient antenna element from faulty BITE line per TM 9-1430-601-20 Antenna Group A 150 Track -Via- Missile Antenna Element A2 or Sidelobe Canceller Antenna Element A7 Replacement .
6
Insert test element probe in place of removed element .
NOTE
Normal voltage should not be less than 3.0 VDC .
Measure voltage between test element probe B J6 and GND J1 . CONTINUED
3-47
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
STANDARD ZERO TEST FAILURES FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
3-9.
7
—Continued
If voltage is 2.0 VDC or less :
Go to step 8.
If voltage is more than 2.0 VDC:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
8
Remove elements in faulty BITE line one at a time while observing digital multimeter . Place removed elements so they can be replaced in their original positions .
If voltage exceeds 3.0 VDC when any element is removed : a . Replace element .
b. Remove test element probe . c. Return all elements to original positions . d. At Circuit Breaker Box A30 ( fig . B ) , set circuit breaker to ON . e. Go to step 9 .
If voltage does not exceed 3.0 VDC after last element in faulty BITE line has been removed :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
9
At MS1 , run BSPA test and get new antenna map .
If ZERO TEST fault of interest is gone : Go to step 10.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists in same BITE line : Perform ZERO TEST failures fault isolation procedures per para 3-8.
10
Observe antenna map main array ( fig . A) .
If any additional ZERO TEST faults exist:
Perform ZERO TEST failures fault isolation procedures per para 3-8.
If no additional ZERO TEST faults exist :
Fault corrected . Return to normal operations .
CONTINUED
3-48
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DIVIDE-BY-TWO RESETTING ELEMENT FAULT
3-10.
a. The divide by two procedure is to unseat 50% of the elements in the affected rows and run the antenna map . If the fault disappears, the fault lies within the 50% removed . Half of the removed elements are then reseated and the map is rerun . This process is repeated until the faulty element is found. Isolate faulty elements in the BITE lines containing output storage and timing module (OSTM) selected test elements as follows . b.
Refer to paragraph 3-7 for locations of specific BITE lines. Perform
ter.
appropriate paragraph :
NOTE
c.
•
For BITE lines 1 and 76 , perform para 3-11 .
•
For BITE lines 26 , 51 , 101 , and 126, perform para 3-12 .
To isolate faulty elements not in OSTM selected rows , refer to para 3-13.
」
3-49
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT FAULT ISOLATION
3-11 .
ANTENNA GROUP A150
RO
AD
SI
DE
RADAR SET moo
INTERIOR
RO
AD
SI
DE
CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX A30
ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION
10.
07-20
28
RO
MAN STATION 1
AD
SI
DE
Personnel Required .
Two Tools and Equipment Required .
None CONTINUED
3-50
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-11 .
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
MANY HAZARDS EXIST AND NEAR THE RADAR SET. REFER TO TM 9WARNING
1430-601-20 COMPULSORY SAFETY MEASURES FOR RADAR MAINTENANCE .
DAMAGE TO ELEMENTS BEING SEATED AND UNSEATED COULD RESULT IF INSTRUCTIONS ON SETTING CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO ON AND OFF ARE NOT FOLLOWED EXACTLY .
CAUTION
1. The process of seating and unseating antenna elements in this paragraph is very important . Do only as instructed ; otherwise , the procedure will not correct the fault .
NOTES 2.
Specific procedures for running an antenna map are contained in para 3-5 .
OR
1
0
Find BITE line associated with ZERO TEST fault ( see table ) .
BITE LINE
ROW
QUADRANT
ELEMENTS CIRCUIT BREAKER
76
+74 +74
Q1 Q2
544
1
FIGURE
A30CB3
A
A30CB3
B
COLUMN 0
1
3
2
4
5
CENTER OF ARRAY
2
Go to appropriate step for selected BITE line . FIGURE A
a. For BITE line 1 , go to step 3. b. For BITE line 76 , go to step 9 . COLUMN CENTER OF
1234
ARRAY
FIGURE B CONTINUED
3-51
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-11 .
3
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
Isolate BITE line 1 ZERO TEST fault , elements 1-5 ( fig . A) .
a. At radar set Circuit Breaker Box A30 (fig . C), set CB3 to OFF .
b. At radar Antenna Group A 150 array ( fig . A) ,
208V 0 CBI CB2 20
208V
unseat elements 1 , 3 , and 5. CB3 CB4
c. At circuit breaker box ( fig . C) , set CB3 to ON. CB5
CB6
d. At man station 1 ( MS1 ) , run beam steering CB7 CB8
processor antenna ( BSPA) test. Get antenna map and observe main array (fig . D ).
CB9 CB10
CB11 CE12
If ZERO TEST fault is gone:
Go to step 4. If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
CB13 CB14 CE15 CB16
M2
Go to step 6. FIGURE C 4
Isolate BITE line 1 ZERO TEST fault , elements 1 , 3, and 5.
a. At circuit breaker box ( fig . C) , set CB3 to OFF . 1
b. Seat element 1 (fig . A) . c. At circuit breaker box (fig . C) , set CB3 to ON.
d . At MS1 , run BSPA test . Get antenna map and observe main array (fig . D) .
If ZERO TEST fault is gone : Go to step 5.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
( 1 ) Set CB3 (fig . C)
ZERO DEGREE RCDR ----- A32--11--- A31--|| -- A30 ---|| --A29 --- ||--A28FAIL ELEMEN T TEST 11 1 11 ZERO 44433333333332222222222111111111 (2) Replace element 1 21098765432109876543210987654321 TEST 0987654321012345€ 1 (fig . A) . BITE LINE 1 0 74 0 * 73 (3) Seat elements 3 and 5 * 72 01 * 71 BIT O (fig . A) . 70 69 68 業 (4) Set CB3 (fig . C) to ON . FIGURE D to OFF .
(5) Go to step 6 .
CONTINUED
3-52
Continued
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-11 . 5
DIVIDE- BY- TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT FAULT ISOLATION- Continued Isolate BITEline 1 ZERO TEST fault , elements 3 and 5. a. At circuit breaker box ( fig . C) set CB3to OFF. b. Seat element 3 (fig . A). c. At circuit breaker box ( fig . C) , set CB3to ON
d. At man station 1 (MS 1 ) , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array (fig. D).
If ZERO TEST fault is gone : ( 1 ) Set CB3 ( Fig . C) to OFF. ( 2) Replace element 5 ( fig . A) (3) Set CB3 (fig . C ) to ON. (4) Go to step 7.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists : ( 1 ) Set CB3 ( fig . C) to OFF. (2) Replace element 3 (fig . A) . (3) Seat element 5 (fig . A) . (4) Set CB3 (fig . C ) to ON.
(5) Go to step 7 . 6
Isolate BITE line ZERO TEST fault , elements 2 and 4 . a. At circuit breaker box ( fig . C) , set CB3 to OFF .
b. Unseat element 2 (fig . A). c. At circuit breaker box ( fig . C) , set CB3 to ON . d . At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array (fig . D) .
If ZERO TEST fault is gone : ( 1 ) Set CB3 (fig . C ) to OFF. ( 2) Replace element 2 (fig . A) . (3) Seat elements 1 , 3 , and 5. (4) Set CB3 ( fig . C ) to ON. (5) Go to step 7.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists : ( 1 ) Set CB3 (fig . C ) to OFF. (2) Replace element 4 (fig . A) . (3) Seat elements 1 , 2 , 3 , and 5 . (4) Set CB3 ( fig . C ) to ON . CONTINUED
(5) Go to step 7 .
3-53
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-11 . 7
DIVIDE - BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT FAULT ISOLATION -Continued At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array (fig . D ).
If ZERO TEST fault is gone : Go to step 8. If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
th Call Intermediate Maintenance .
8
Observe antenna map main array (fig . D) .
If other ZERO TEST faults exist: Perform para 3-8.
If no ZERO TEST faults exist :
Return to normal operation .
9
Isolate BITE line 76 ZERO TEST fault , elements 1-4 (fig . B ) . a. At circuit breaker box (fig . C) , set CB3 to OFF . b. Unseat elements 1 and 3 (fig . B). c. At circuit breaker box ( fig . C) , set CB3 to ON. d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array (fig . E) .
If ZERO TEST fault is gone: Go to step 10.
1 If ZERO TEST fault still exists: Go to step 11 .
-- || - · A28 - || --A27--11 -- A26.- ||-· A25- || -- A24 --- | 11 11
RCDR
FAIL ZERO DEGREE ELEMENT TEST
11
|||||||||| 2222222222333333333444 65432101234567890123 4567890123456789012345678901 2 '
0 * *
BITE LINE 76
**
Q2 BIT 3
74 73 72 71 70 69 68
288
0 ** ** *** * **** **** * ** * * * * * ** ****** * * * ** *** *** * **** * **** * * * * *****
ZERO TEST
*
FIGURE E CONTINUED
3-54
nued
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DIVIDE-BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-11 .
10
Isolate BITE line 76 ZERO TEST fault , elements 1 and 3. a. At circuit breaker box (fig . C) , set CB3 to OFF . b. Seat element 1 (fig . B). c. At circuit breaker box (fig . C ) , set CB3 to ON .
d . At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array (fig . E) .
If ZERO TEST fault is gone : ( 1 ) Set CB3 (fig . C ) to OFF . (2) Replace element 3 ( fig . B) . (3) Set CB3 (fig . C) to ON . (4) Return to step 7.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists : ( 1 ) Set CB3 (fig . C) to OFF . (2) Replace element 1 (fig . B) . (3) Seat element 3 . (4) Set CB3 (fig . C) to ON.
(5) Return to step 7. 11
Isolate BITE line 76 ZERO TEST fault , elements 2 and 4.
a. At circuit breaker box (fig . C) , set CB3 to OFF .
b. Unseat element 2 (fig . B ) . c . At circuit breaker box (fig . C ) , set CB3 to ON . d . At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array (fig . E ) .
If ZERO TEST fault is gone : ( 1 ) Set CB3 (fig . C ) to OFF. (2 ) Replace element 2 (fig . B) . (3) Seat elements 1 and 3 . (4) Set CB3 (fig . C) to ON. (5) Return to step 7.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists : ( 1 ) Set CB3 (fig . C ) to OFF. (2) Replace element 4 ( fig . B ) . (3) Seat elements 1 , 2 , and 3. (4) Set CB3 (fig . C ) to ON, (5) Return to step 7.
3-55
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DIVIDE -BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26, 51 , 101 , OR 126
3-12.
FAULT ISOLATION
ANTENNA GROUP A 150
o
mo
RO
AD
SI
CIRCUIT BREAKER
DE
RADAR SET
BOX A30 RO
AD
SI
INTERIOR
DE
ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION
ala
ROA
MAN STATION 1
DSI
DE
E
SID
B CUR
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
CONTINUED
3-56
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
OR 126
3-12.
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26, 51 , 101 , OR 126 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Le WARNING
MANY HAZARDS EXIST IN AND NEAR THE RADAR SET. REFER TO TM 91430-601-20 COMPULSORY SAFETY MEASURES FOR RADAR MAINTENANCE .
DAMAGE TO ELEMENTS BEING SEATED AND UNSEATED COULD RESULT IF INSTRUCTIONS ON SETTING CIRCUIT BREAKERS TO ON AND OFF ARE NOT FOLLOWED EXACTLY . CAUTION
1. The seating and unseating process of antenna elements in this procedure AKER
is important. Do only as instructed ; otherwise , the procedure will not correct the fault.
NOTES
Specific procedures for running an antenna map are contained in para 3-5.
2.
3. Refer to TM 9-1430-601-20 for replacement procedure for antenna elements .
1
Isolate BITE line element fault .
a . At radar set Circuit Breaker Box A30 (fig . A) , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF (see table ) .
0
26
101
CEB CEA
C819 CE20
ROW
QUAD
ELEMENTS
CIRCUIT BREAKER
CB5 CB6
CB21 CB22
C88
CB23 C824
+25
1
1-21
C89 CETO
CB25 CB2
+24
1
1-21
CE11 CE12
CB27 CB28
+25 +24
51
126
2081C818 CE17
77
BITE LINE
CBI208VCB2
2
1-21
C829 CB30
0615
CB31 CB32
2
2
1-20
2
4
1-21
11
-26
4
1-21
11
-25
3
1-21
6
1-20
6
-25
CE13 CB14
NO
FIGURE A
-26
3
CONTINUED
3-57
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-12.
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26 , 51 , 101 , OR 126 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
1
1
-Continued
b. At radar Antenna Group A 150 array, unseat all elements in appropriate row (see table and fig . B ) .
1
Elements are referred to in numerical order. There is a different order for NOTE
each side of the antenna array . Two examples are given to simplify the differences .
COLUMN
CENTER OF ARRAY
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
COLUMN 1 2 3 4
6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21
CENTER OF ARRAY
FIGURE B
c. At circuit breaker box (fig . A) , set appropriate circuit breaker to ON . d. At man station 1 ( MS1 ) , run beam steering processor antenna (BSPA ) tests . Get antenna map
-428--1II1--427--11--426--11--125--11--2--1--RCDA 11 II II IL 11 TI IT 1 1111111 1112222 2222223 3333333 334442 ZERO RCDR BSCH 12,6 5v 0123456789012345678901234567 8901234 5678901 TEST VDC DC 74 . ---- ----73 02 72 71 . BIT 3 70 487 A24 P57 65 C63 P83 CB19
and observe main array ( fig . C) .
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
59 . 57 · 56 55 53 .
440
A25
Go to step 2.
FAIL ZERO DEGREE ELEMENT TEST BITE LINE 91 A49 BITE GROUP 4 PSS COL
If ZERO TEST fault still exists : (1 ) Seat all elements in appropriate row ( see table ) .
(2) Go to step 23 .
35 34. 33 . 450 32. 31 A20 30 29 28 27 • 26 25 ·
45 O 44 O
FIGURE C Throughout remainder of procedure refer to : Table - for appropriate row and circuit breaker . NOTE
Figure A- for circuit breaker location . Figure B - for numerical order of antenna elements . Figure C - for antenna map example .
3-58
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
OR 126 DIVIDE - BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26, 51 , 101 , OR 126 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-12.
2
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 1-21 .
see a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker toOFF
b. Seat elements 1-11 . c. Set appropriate circuit breaker toON
or d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array. If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
Go to step 3. If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
Go to step 6.
3
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 12-21 .
a . At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker toOFF •
b. Seat elements 12-16 . c. Set appropriate circuit breaker toON .
d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array. If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
Go to step 4. If ZERO TEST fault still exists:
Go to step 10. 4
Isolate BITE line fault, elements 17-21 .
a . At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker toOFF
b. Seat elements 17 through 19 . c. Set appropriate circuit breaker toON . d . Set MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : (1 ) For rows with only 20 elements : (a ) Replace element 20 .
(b) Go to step 22. (2) For rows with 21 elements :
Go to step 5. If ZERO TEST fault still exists:
CONTINUED
Go to step 14.
3-59
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-12.
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26 , 51 , FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
5
101 OR 126
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 20 and 21 .
a . At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. b . Seat element 20. c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON. d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
(1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2 ) Replace element 21 .
(3) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON . (4) Got to step 22.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists: ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2) Replace element 20. (3) Seat element 21 .
(4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON . (5) Go to step 22.
6
Isolate BITE line fault, elements 1-11 .
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . b. Unseat elements 1 through 6 c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
d . At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : Go to step 7. If ZERO TEST fault still exists : Go to step 16.
CONTINUED
T
3-60
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
OR 126
3-12.
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26, 51 , 101 , OR 126 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 1-6.
a. At circuit breaker box, set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . b. Seat elements 1 through 3 . c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON . d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
Go to step 8.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
Go to step 20.
8
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 4-6 .
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF.
b. Seat element 4 . c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON. d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
Go to step 9. If ZERO FAULT still exists : ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. ( 2) Replace element 4. (3) Seat elements 5 , 6 , and 12 through 21 .
(4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON.
(5) Go to step 22.
9
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 5 and 6.
a. At circuit breaker box, set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . b. Seat element 5 .
c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON. CONTINUED
3-61
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-12 .
DIVIDE - BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26 , 51 ,
101 , OR 126
FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
9
-Continued
d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array .
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2 ) Replace element 6 .
(3) Seat elements 12 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON.
(5) Go to step 22.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists: ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2) Replace element 5 .
(3) Seat elements 6 and 12 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON (5) Go to step 22 . 10
Isolate BITE line fault, elements 12-16 .
a . At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . b. Unseat elements 12 through 14. c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON.
d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
Go to step 11 . If ZERO TEST fault still exists : Go to step 13.
11
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 12-14 .
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. b. Seat element 12.
c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
CONTINUED
3-62
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
OR 12
3-12.
11
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26, 51 , 101 , OR 126 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued
d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
Go to step 12.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists : (1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF .
(2) Replace element 12 . (3) Seat elements 13 , 14, and 17 through 21. (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON . (5) Go to step 22.
12
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 13 and 14.
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . b. Seat element 13. c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON. d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF .
(2) Replace element 14. (3) Seat elements 17 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
(5) Go to step 22.
If ZERO TEST fault still exists : ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2) Replace element 13 . (3) Seat elements 14 and 17 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON. (5) Go to step 22. CONTINUED
3-63
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-12.
13
DIVIDE-BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26, 51 , 101 , OR 126 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
1
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 15 and 16.
1 a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. b. Unseat element 15. c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON'
d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array. If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : ( 1) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. (2 ) Replace element 15 .
(3) Seat elements 12 through 14 and 17 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON'
(5) Go to step 22 . If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
( 1) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF(2) Replace element 16.
(3) Seat elements 12 through 15 and 17 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
(5) Go to step 22 .
14
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 17-21.
a . At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to
OFF
b. Unseat element 17. c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON'
d . At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array. If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF.
(2) Replace element 17.
(3) Seat elements 12 through 16 , and 18 through 21 .
(4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON (5) Go to step 22. If ZERO TEST fault still exists : Go to step 15.
CONTINUED
3-64
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DIVIDE-BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26 , 51 , 101 , OR 126 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
ORE 3-12.
15
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 18 and 19.
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker toOFF . b. Unseat element 18.
c. Set appropriate circuit breaker toON . d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array. If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2) Replace element 18.
(3) Seat elements 17 , 20, and 21. (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
(5) Go to step 22. If ZERO TEST fault still exists: ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2 ) Replace element 19.
(3) Seat elements 17 , 18 , 20 and 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
(5) Go to step 22.
16
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 7-11 .
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . b. Unseat elements 7 through 9.
c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON . d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
Go to step 18. If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
Go to step 17.
CONTINUED
3-65
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-12.
17
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26 , 51 , 101 , OR 126 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 10 and 11 .
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. b. Unseat element 10.
c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ONd. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array . If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
(1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2) Replace element 10 .
(3) Seat elements 1 through 9 and 12 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON . (5) Go to step 22. If ZERO TEST fault still exists:
(1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2)
Replace element 11 .
(3) Seat elements 1 through 10 and 12 through 21.
(4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON(5) Go to step 22.
18
Isolate BITE line fault, elements 7-9 . '
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF b. Seat element 7.
c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ONd . At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array. If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
Go to step 19. If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
(1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF (2) Replace element 7 .
(3) Seat elements 1 through 6, 8 , 9 , and 12 through 21 .
(4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON (5) Go to step 22 .
CONTINUED
3-66
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26 , 51 , 101 , OR 126
3-12. , OR 12
FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
19
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 8 and 9.
a. At circuit breaker box, set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . b. Seat element 8. c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
d. At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array . If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : (1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. (2 ) Replace element 9 . (3) Seat elements 1 through 6, and 12 through 21. (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON.
(5) Go to step 22. If ZERO TEST fault still exists : ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. (2 ) Replace element 8. (3) Seat elements 1 through 6 , 9 , and 12 through 21. (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON.
(5) Go to step 22.
20
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 1-3.
a. At circuit breaker box, set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF. b. Unseat element 1 .
c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON. d . At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array .
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : ( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF.
(2) Replace element 1 . (3) Seat elements 4 through 6 , and 12 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON.
(5) Go to step 22 . IfZERO TEST fault still exists :
Go to step 21 . CONTINUED
3-67
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-12.
21
DIVIDE - BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT BITE LINE 26 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
51 , 101 , OR 126
Isolate BITE line fault , elements 2 and 3.
a. At circuit breaker box , set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . b . Unseat element 2 . c. Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON. d . At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array.
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected :
(1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2 ) Replace element 2 .
(3) Seat elements 1 , 4 through 6 , and 12 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
(5) Go to step 22 .
If ZERO TEST fault still exists :
( 1 ) Set appropriate circuit breaker to OFF . (2) Replace element 3 .
(3) Seat elements 1 , 2 , 4 through 6 , and 12 through 21 . (4) Set appropriate circuit breaker to ON .
(5) Go to step 22 .
22
At MS1 , run BSPA tests . Get antenna map and observe main array .
If ZERO TEST fault is corrected : Return to normal operation . If ZERO TEST fault still exists : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
23
3-68
Repeat steps 1 through 22 for remaining row of BITE line.
X
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
OR 12
3-13.
DIVIDE -BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT GENERAL FAULT ISOLATION
ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION
100
10
נווג
J
C
RO
MAN STATION 1
AD
SI
DE
MAIN ARRAY A150A1
HC JA RADAR SET
SLC-5 ARRAY A150A7
⑦0
CIRCUIT BREAKER BOX A30
ROA
INTERIOR
DSI
DE
FRONT
Tools and Equipment Required . Extractor Tool , Element
CONTINUED
3-69
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-13.
DIVIDE-BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENT GENERAL FAULT ISOLATION —Continued MANY HAZARDS EXIST IN AND NEAR THE RADAR SET . GO TO 1
WARNING
COMPULSORY SAFETY MEASURES FOR RADAR MAINTENANCE IN TM 91430-601-20 AND PERFORM REQUIRED STEPS BEFORE PROCEEDING .
DAMAGE TO ELEMENTS MAY OCCUR IF CIRCUIT BREAKERS ARE NOT SET TO OFF DURING SEATING AND UNSEATING PROCESS .
CAUTION 1. The unseating and seating process of antenna elements in this procedure is of the utmost importance . Also refer to TM 9-1430-601-20 Antenna Group A 150 element replacement procedure . Do only as instructed ; otherwise , the procedure will not correct the fault.
NOTES
2. 1
1
Specific procedures for running an antenna map are contained in para 3-5.
At man station 1 ( MS1 ) , run beam steering processor antenna ( BSPA) test . Obtain antenna map ( fig . A) and observe .
If ZERO TEST fault exists : 1
Go to step 2. If ZERO TEST fault does not exist: 1
Return to normal operation . From antenna map , identify rows which show ZERO TEST
2
failures (0) (fig . B ). ZERO TEST
74
48
A50 A26
* *
*
* * * * * * + * * * * *
-A51 -A51
A47
PS6 CB2 PS1 CB17
A27 T
74
* * * *
0
*
10
5V DC
*
** ********** * * * * * * *** *** *** *** * *** * *
*
*
*
* 2 *
*
*
21 20 19 18 17 16 15 14 13 12
12.6 6VDC
* *
*
********* 22:
**** * **** * * ************ ** * * ******************* a ** ****************** *** ******* ********** *** ***** ************* ***** ** ********** ****** * * * ** ********** ****** * ************ ********* ***** ** * * *************** *** ** *** * ***** ** ***** ****************** * * * * * ********* ********* ** * ***** ************* ****** ************* *** * * * * * * ****** * * * * *** * * * * **** **** ** ********** ** ** *** * * ************ ** * * * * * ***** ********** * **** **************** ***** ******* ************** **** **************** ** **************
35 34 33 32 31 30 29 28 27 26 25 24 23
BSCM
*
** *
*
✰✰ *
*
*
RCDR
FIGURE A
*
*
*
1
*
* ** * *
* *
* * *
*
*
*
**
FIGURE B
CONTINUED
3-70
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DIVIDE-BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENTS GENERAL FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-13.
NTHS 3
DING.
At radar set Circuit Breaker Box A30 (fig . C ) , set associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker ( fig . B) to OFF.
208V 0 0 208V CB1 CB2 00 CB3 CB4
NOT
All circuit breakers are located at NOTE
Circuit Breaker Box A30 and can be identified from the antenna map
CB5 CB6 CB7 CB8 CB9 CB10
diagnostic delimiters ( refer to para 3-4). CB11 CB12
edure CB13 CB14:
a 4
At main array , unseat one half (50%) of the elements in the affected double rows.
CE15 C816 0 0
a 3-5
If ZERO TEST faults appear in row 17 of ก
NOTE
SLC-5 , replace the single antenna element , using the method described in
FIGURE C
step 6 below.
5 At circuit breaker box (fig . C ) , set associated 12.66 VDC circuit breakers to ON .
6
At MS1 , run BSPA tests , obtain antenna map (fig . A) , and observe array of interest .
If ZERO TEST fault of interest is gone and only one element in faulty row remains seated , perform following maintenance action: a . Set fault associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker to OFF . b. Replace last unseated element .
c. Seat all unseated elements . d . Set fault associated 12.66 VDC circuit breakers to ON.
e. Go to step 11 .
If ZERO TEST fault of interest is gone and only one element in faulty row remains unseated , perform following maintenance action :
a. Set fault associated 12.66 VDC circuit breakers to OFF. b. Replace unseated element .
c. Set fault associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker to ON.
d. Go to step 11 . If ZERO TEST fault of interest is gone and more than one element in faulty row remains unseated :
Go to step 7. CONTINUED
T
3-71
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-13.
DIVIDE-BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENTS GENERAL FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
6
-Continued
If ZERO TEST fault of interest still exists and more than one element remains seated :
Return to step 4. If ZERO TEST fault of interest still exists and only one element in row remains seated , perform following maintenance action : a. Set fault associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker to OFF ( fig . C) . b. Replace seated element .
c. Set fault associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker to ON .
d . Go to step 11 .
7
At circuit breaker box ( fig . C ) , set associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker to OFF .
8
At radar set main array, seat one half (50%) of unseated elements .
9
At circuit breaker box , set associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker to ON .
10
At MS1 , run BSPA tests , obtain antenna map ( fig . A) , and observe array of interest .
If ZERO TEST fault of interest is gone and only one element remains unseated , perform following maintenance action : a . Set fault associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker to OFF (fig . C) . b. Replace unseated element .
c . Set fault associated 12.66 VDC circuit breaker to ON .
d . Go to step 11 . If ZERO TEST fault of interest still exists :
Return to step 7 .
CONTINUED
3-72
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-13.
DIVIDE- BY-TWO MULTIPLE RESETTING ELEMENTS GENERAL FAULT ISOLATION Continued
remains 11
At MS1 , run BSPA tests , obtain antenna map (fig . A) , and observe array of interest. If ZERO TEST fault of interest still exists: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If any other similar ZERO TEST fault exists: Return to step 2.
If any other type of ZERO TEST fault exists:
Go to para 3-8. If no other ZERO TEST faults exist: Fault corrected . Return to normal operations .
3-73
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-14.
VOICE COMMUNICATIONS ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION TO RADAR SET FAULT ISOLATION
ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION RADAR SET
oooo 0
J RO
AD
SI
CU
DE
RB
SI
DE
GENERATOR CONTROL
EXTERIOR
PANEL A64 RADAR STATUS CONTROLINDICATOR PANEL A112
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
1
None
Communication fault between engagement control station ( ECS ) and radar set ( RS ) .
a. At ECS Generator Control Panel A64 ( fig . A) COMM jack, remove original soundpowered telephone and connect replacement sound - powered telephone. b. Establish communication with radar set .
If communication is established :
COMM
PHASEVOLTAGE TO NEUTRAL PHASE B PHASE PHASE A C OFF
ย
this paragraph .
SUM FUEL GENS ON FAULT LINE BNTAVOLTAGE 101 LAMP FAULT RESET จน 22 TEST POWER GENERATOR HADAR ECS TURBINES OFF DFF OFF COMM ON
ON
O
return to procedure that brought you to
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL
BATTLE SHORT BALLER SMONT
Fault corrected ,
ON
FIGURE A
If communication is not established : Go to step 2.
T
3-74
ww w .
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
SET
2
At Radar Status Control - Indicator Panel A112 ( fig . B) SOUND PWR COMM JACK , remove original sound - powered telephone and connect replacement sound - powered telephone .
STAT AIN FLOWFAULT US RAD utCURRSION OOADSIDE 100 ANTA COS H INPUT POWER CONTROL STARDUY CONTA LOWLEVEL FLEX 2008
If communication is established :
e
TROL. 112
3-14. VOICE COMMUNICATIONS ENGAGEMENT CONTROL STATION TO RADAR SET FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Fault corrected , return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If communication is not
COOLES
2
S
established : Fault isolate per Voice Communications RS to ECS, TM 9-1430-601-20 .
OFFS5 fif
WENEY 36 GEPAPST ICATORSFEWLAMPFEST LOCAL CONTROL 39 CORTRO
BTATVASE 1TOW
CAUTION HELPSAFETYPINHEA TURINGMAINTENANCE
SALETY STOW
INTERSTIT
SOUNDPW COMM JACK
FIGURE B
$).
3-75
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-15.
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2, OR 3 SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065 A10
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065 A35
RO
AD
SI
DE
MULTIPLEXER TD-660 A11
DATA BUFFER
MULTIPLEXER TD-660 A36
TD- 1065 A22 MULTIPLEXER TD- 660 A23
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Wrench , Spin - Tight Socket , 3/8 In . Screwdriver Cross Tip No . 2 , 8 In . , , Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In .
CONTINUED
3-76
ww w
3-15 .
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
TABLE FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURE
NOTE
This is a multiple application
RADIO RELAY
procedure for Radio Relay
TERM 1
Term 1 , 2 , or 3. See tables A and B for appropriate units
(RRT 1 ) CB8
A
SET CIRCUIT BREAKER RRT- 1
RRT-2
RRT-3
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ON
RADIO RELAY
corresponding to tripped circuit breaker.
TERM 2
UTION 466
(RRT2) CB7
RADIO RELAY TERM 3 (RRT3) CB6
TABLE FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURE
B
SET CIRCUIT BREAKER
RRT-1
RRT- 2
RRT-3
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
ON
ON
ON
OFF
RADIO RELAY TERM 1
RADIO RELAY TERM 2
RADIO RELAY TERM 3
Le WARNING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 208VAC) IS PRESENT IN EQUIPMENT WHEN RADIO RELAY TERM 1 , 2 , OR 3 IS SET TO ON.
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM (table A) to ON
AIRCOND BOADSIDE
AIRCOND CURBSIDE
RUWRING TIME LATERY SYS MAT1 POWER
ZEYDE POWERSUPPLY
LAMP TEST
OFE BOTSECUREPA CURRSIBE ROADSIDE FARS 2153 AFT ON ON ON QEF OFF DFF BFF ZEVOC PWNDIST DISPLAY COMMO RELIRADIOTERM UNITPWB 1 PLYON CONTROL PWRSPLT ON ON OFF 011 044 OFF OFF UNFANT TELEPHONE TERMERK LIGHT CONTROL CONVERTER WOLDEIR WEATERSE CONTROL ON ON ON ON DFF OFF OFF OFF OU UTILITYPOWER 17090 400Z EXTERNAL MART ERECT ON OR OFF OFF G
1
SECUREPWR PRINTER RADIO1 ON RELAYTEAM 2 ON 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY CONTROL NOADSIDE CURBEIDE ON DIF DUFF TWCU ALMA ON ON OFF OFF COMPUTER MODERS ON DEF 057 GAS FOICE COMMO UNIT PWRSPLY FEUTER 08 ON OFFT OFF
G
EPPINPUTPW URTAMS
G
KER
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DANGER 208 VOLTS MECHANICAL LBS WEIGHT 178 LIFT
CONTINUED
FIGURE A
3-77
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-15.
1
-Continued
1
IfRADIO RELAY TERM trips :
Go to step 2. IfRADIO RELAY TERM does
not trip: Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . 2
1
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM ( table A) to OFF O
3 3
Remove bottom shielding gasket
2 (fig . B) as follows: a. At bottom shielding gasket (4) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
FIGURE B
11
b. Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers and flat washers . c. Remove five self- locking nuts (2) and flat washers .
O
d. Remove bottom shielding gasket (4) .
Figure C illustrates the top view of Distribution Box A66J23 . Connector can only be accessed NOTE
4
C
from the bottom of this panel after removal of bottom shielding gasket .
A
At distribution box ( fig . C) , disconnect W 16P1 from J23.
44 43 J21
J22 J23
J12
J28
J30
J6
J7
J9
J13
J14
J5
12
J15
DOS OS
J18
OOO
J20
J16
OF O
J17 J19
J27
J10 FIGURE C
J11 am
A CONTINUED
3-78
R
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-15. RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
5
At distribution box (fig . A) , setRADIO RELAY TERM (table A) toON . IfRADIO RELAY TERM trips:
a . ReplaceRADIO RELAY TERM ( table A) per para 4-82.
b. Go to step 6. IfRADIO RELAY TERM does not trip:
Go to step 7. 6
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM (table A) toON . IfRADIO RELAY TERM trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance . IfRADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : a . SetRADIO RELAY TERM (table B) to OFF .
b . Connect W 16P 1 to J23 (fig . C) . c . Install bottom shielding gasket and secure with five flat washers and self- locking nuts ( 2 , fig . B) . d . Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws ( 3 ) . e. Install two flat washers , screws ( 1 ) , and nuts . f.
Set RADIO RELAY TERM 1,2 , and 3 to ON .
g . Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
7
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM (table B ) to OFF .
8
Connect W16P1 to J23 (fig . C) .
9 Install bottom shielding gasket and secure with five flat washers , and self-locking nuts (2 , fig . B).
10
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (3) .
11
Install two flat washers , screws ( 1 ) , and nuts .
12
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM ( table B) to ON .
13
Access appropriate radio relay terminal ( RRT) (fig . D) multiplexer as follows: a . At appropriate multiplexer TD - 660 (table C) , loosen four
captive screws ( 1 ) and slide equipment rack forward until slide latches (2) lock.
CONTINUED
T
3-79
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-15.
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
13
-Continued
b. Remove eight screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers . Slide chassis out
2
far enough to access rear cables .
3 FIGURE D TABLE FAULT ISOLATION PROCEDURE
MULTIPLEXER
MULTIPLEXER
TD- 660 REF DES
TD- 660
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065
CABLE
REF DES
RRT1
A36
W70P 1
RRT2
A23
W66P 1
RRT3
14
C
A11
W26P 1
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065
CABLE
FAULT ISOLATION PARAGRAPH
A35
W69P 1
3-119
A22
W52P1
3-119
A 10
W27P1
3-119
At rear of multiplexer TD - 660 ( fig . E ) , disconnect appropriate cable ( table C) from AC POWER 115V 50-400 ~.
AUX RCVR AUX AUDI CHANNE ADDRESS ADDR O LS ESS
PCM IN
ALT PCM TIMIN 6CHI-2 6CH 3-4 6CH5-6 PCM PCM 12CH 1-4 12CH 5-8 12CH 9-12 OUTSYNC OUT RCVR TO FROM AUX AUX SYNC OUT XMTR
AUX RCVRAU
IN
6CH
TIM OUT
12CH
TIMOUT
ဝင်းး (
SYNC
GND AC POWER 115V
50-400
PCM OOUT FIGURE E
CONTINUED
3-80
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
R
3-15.
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
15
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM (table A) to ON.
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips: a . At rear of appropriate multiplexer TD - 660 ( fig . E ) , connect cable (table C) to AC POWER 115V 50-400 ~ .
b. Go to step 17. If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : a . Set RADIO RELAY TERM (table B ) to OFF . b. Replace appropriate multiplexer TD - 660 per para 4-16. c. Go to step 16.
16
Set RADIO RELAY TERM ( table A) to ON.
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip :
N PH Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
17
At appropriate RRT (fig . F) , remove data buffer TD - 1065 as follows :
a . Remove eight screws, lockwashers , and flat washers . Slide data buffer partially out of rack .
C b. At rear of data buffer TD - 1065 (fig . G) , disconnect cable ( table C) from AC PWR 115V 50-400 HZ.
BUFFER CH1-4 MUX CH1-4 BUFFER CH5-8
AC PWR 115V MUX CH5-8 BUFFER CH9-17 MUX CH9-12 50-400 HZ REMOTE ALARM
RE
FIGURE F O
AUX ADAS PCM OUT O IN AUX ADRS OUT XMT PCMIN XMT PCM RCVR AUX RCVR AUX ACVR PCM RCVR PCM ADRS IN ADRS OUT FR AUX TO MUX O O AUX RCVR AUX 12CH TIM IN 12CH TIM OUT RCVR CLK OUT CLK IN O O
FIGURE G
CONTINUED
3-81
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-15 .
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2, or 3 SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
18
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM ( table A) to ON
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance . If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : a . At multiplexer TD - 660 ( fig . D) , slide chassis in and secure with eight flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (3). b. Replace data buffer TD- 1065 per para 4-15 . c. Go to step 19.
19
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM (table A) to ON .
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance . If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-82
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-16.
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 3
REF DES
NOMENCLATURE
A6
RADIO RECEIVER
A7
R- 1329 RADIO TRANSMTTER
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 2 REF DES
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 REF DES
NOMENCLATURE
A 18
RADIO RECEIVER
A 19
RADIO TRANSMITTER
NOMENCLATURE
A31
RADIO RECEIVER
A32
RADIO TRANSMITTER
A33
KEY GENERATOR
R- 1329
R- 1329
T-983 T-983
T-983
A8
KEY GENERATOR A20
KEY GENERATOR
TSEC/KG-27 TSEC /KG - 27
Personnel Required .
TSEC /KG- 27
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Wrench , Spin - Tight Socket , 3/8 In . Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 4 In . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 3/16 In . Wide , 8 In.
CONTINUED
3-83
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-16.
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2, OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
NOTE
This is a multiple application procedure for Radio Relay Term 1 , 2 , or 3. See tables A, C , and E for appropriate units corresponding to tripped circuit breaker . EXTEXPOTPICK
SECOEPR BLASIO RELATERM
PORTER NO
1
ABOARDS COM
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set NOT SECURE PWR- RADIO RELAY
DEF OFF DISPLAY CONTROL SEARSIDE
RINGTIME 2000 ENTERY POWER SYS ART-2 BETJ0 O O ROTSECURE PUR ע KASIO RELAYTEX
CONTROL PRSSPLT SPLT SCIPLI OFF म DOFANT BEATERS CONTROL CONTROL TELEFO CONVERTER OFF on UTRITYFORES EXTERI O OFF T DANGER 208 VOLTS
TERM 1, 2 , and 3 to ON.
OFF
BATERY PAYER
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : Go to step 2.
To To:]
OFF
If RADIO RELAY TERM does not
MECHANICALLIFT WEIGHT TOL
trip : FIGURE A
Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
2
Set RADIO RELAY TERM 1 , 2 , and 3 to OFF .
3
At distribution box (fig . B ) , remove bottom shielding gasket as follows : a. At bottom shielding gasket (4), remove two screws ( 1 ), flat washers , and nuts . b. Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers. O
c. Remove five self- locking nuts ( 2 ) and flat O
washers .
O
d. Remove bottom shielding gasket (4) .
4
2
Disconnect W447P1 from J14 (fig . C).
J17
FIGURE B
A
$16 320 321 J23 J28
&& A
FIGURE C CONTINUED
T
3-84
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
AKER
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION_Continued
3-16.
5
3. See it
At distribution box (fig . A), set RADIO RELAY TERM
TABLE A RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
(table A) to ON
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : Go to step 6.
RRT 1
RADIO RELAY TERM 1
RADIO RELAY TERM 2
RADIO RELAY TERM 3
ON
OFF
OFF
If RADIO RELAY TERM does
RRT2
OFF
ON
OFF
not trip :
RRT3
OFF
OFF
ON
Go to step 16 .
6
Connect W447P 1 to J14 ( fig . C) .
7
Install bottom shielding gasket ( fig . B) as follows : a. Install bottom shielding gasket and secure with five flat washers and self locking nuts (2).
b. Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws ( 3). c. Install two flat washers , screws ( 1 ) , and nuts .
NOTE
During temporary removal of power in shelter , keep flashlight available for use during blackout condition .
BANGER200 VOLTS
8
At distributuion box ( fig . D) , loosen 32 captive screws and lower front panel . D
9
FIGURE D
At large safety shield ( 1 , fig . E) , loosen eight captive screws and remove shield . TABLE
10
At terminal board TB4 (2 ) , remove terminal screw (3) as shown in table B. Disconnect time meter lead ( + ) .
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
TERMINAL
B
METER
M2
RRT1 (CB15)
TB4-1
RRT2 (CB23)
TB4-3
M4
TB4-2
M3
RRT3 (CB24)
CONTINUED
T
3-85
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-16.
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
DANGEROUS VOLTAGE ( 208VAC) IS PRESENT IN DISTRIBUTION BOX WHEN INTERLOCK SWITCH PLUNGER IS SET TO CHEAT POSITION .
Pull interlock switch plunger ( 4) out to cheat position .
O
O
11
වා
ස
4
O
A
A
1
1
1 ૭ ૬
12
Set RADIO RELAY TERM ( table A) (fig . A) toON .
IfRADIO RELAY TERM trips : a. Push interlock switch plunger (4 , fig . E) to remove power. b. At terminal board TB4 (2) , connect time meter lead ( + ) as shown in table B. Secure lead with terminal screw (3).
c. Replace circuit breaker (table B) per para 4-82.
d. Go to step 13.
CONTINUED
3-86
T
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
LAKER RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2, OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER
3-16.
TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
12
-Continued
BOX N. If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip :
a. Replace time meter (table B) per para 4-84. b. Go to step 15.
13
At distribution box (fig . A) ", set RADIO RELAY TERM (table A) to ON .
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : a . Replace Relay Assembly A2 per para 4-72 .
b. Go to step 14. If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
14
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM ( table A) toON .
IfRADIO RELAY TERM trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
15
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM ( table A) to ON .
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfRADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
16
Set RADIO RELAY TERM 1,2 , and 3 to OFF .
17 Connect W447P 1 to J14 (fig . C) .
CONTINUED
3-87
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
3-16.
18
Install bottom shielding gasket ( fig . B ) as follows:
1
a . Install bottom shield gasket and secure with five flat washers and self- locking nuts (2 ).
b. Install 13 flat washers, lockwashers , and screws (3) . c. Install two flat washers , screws ( 1 ) and nuts .
TABLE 19
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
RADIO RELAY TERM 1
RADIO RELAY TERM 2
Remove radio receiver
RRT1
OFF
ON
ON
R- 1329 as follows:
RRT2
ON
OFF
ON
RRT3
ON
ON
OFF
(table C) to ON
20
20
C
At distribution box (fig. A), set RADIO RELAY TERM
RADIO RELAY TERM 3
a. At radio.receiver R- 1329 (fig . F) , disconnect cables as shown in table D.
RCVR CHANNEL 390
TABLE
ACVR CHANNEL 400 390380
BAND1 FROM XMTA
XMTR CHANNEL 3203101 300
XMTR DUPL
D JACK
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
MULT PEAK ACVR SIG ANT
FROM XMTR
ANT
RRT1
W461P1
W460P1
RRT2
W458P1
W457P1
RRT3
W455P1
W454P1
FIGURE F
b. At radio transmitter T- 983 (fig . G) , disconnect cable as shown in table E.
TABLE
E
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
JACK
RRT1
W460P2
RRT2
W457P2
RRT3
W454P2
PWR OUT
DITS
BANDI
parePEout PA OUTPUT
FIGURE G
c. At RRT rack (fig . H ) , loosen four captive screws ( 1 ) and pull rack out on its slides until latches lock . d. At radio receiver R - 1329 , remove eight screws (2) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
3-88
A
CONTINUED
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
EAKER
3-16.
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2, OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
20
-Continued 1 e. Slide radio receiver R - 1329
ing
out far enough to gain access A to rear panel .
100
006
FDM
VIDEO PCM TMG OW
RADIO RELAY TERM3
COMB OW PWR IN
ON
AON
FIGURE H TABLE
OFF
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
f. At rear of radio receiver R- 1329 , disconnect cable from 115 VAC as
F
CABLE ASSEMBLY
RADIO RECEIVER R- 1329
RRT1
W50P 1
A31
RRT2
W51P1
A 18
RRT3
W56P 1
A6
shown in table F.
21
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 1 , 2, and 3 to ON .
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : a . At rear of appropriate radio receiver R - 1329 (fig . H) , connect cable to 115 VAC as shown in table F.
b. Go to step 23.
If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : a . Replace appropriate radio reciever R - 1329 (table G) per para 4-12.
TABLE
G
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
RADIO TRANSMITTER T-983
RADIO RECEIVER R- 1329
KEY GENERATOR TSEC/KG-27
RRT 1
A32
A31
A33
RRT2
A 19
A 18
A20
RRT3
A7
A6
A8
CONTINUED
3-89
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-16.
21
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2 , OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
-Continued
b. At radio transmitter T- 983 (fig . G ) , connect cable as shown in table E. c. At radio receiver R- 1329 (fig . F) , connect cables as shown in table D. d. Go to step 22 .
22
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 1 , 2, and 3 to ON.
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance . 1
If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
23
Remove appropriate key generator TSEC / KG - 27 ( table G ) ( fig . I ) as follows :
a. Loosen four captive screws ( 5) and
3
2
pull rack ( 1 ) forward on slides until latches (2) lock .
b. Remove four screws (4) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
c. Slide key generator (3 ) out far enough to gain access to rear panel . d . At rear panel ( fig . J ) , disconnect cable (table H ) from POWER IN.
ית
FIGURE I
CONTINUED
3-90
REAKER
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2, OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-16.
TABLE H
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
CABLE ASSEMBLY
RRT1
W71P1
A33
RRT2
W67P1
A20
RRT3
W24P1
A8
KEY GENERATOR TSEC /KG -27 O
GND
O
XMIT REC REC REC REC XMIT XMIT OO O OO PCM PCM TIM FRAME PCM FRAME PCM IN OUT POWER IN IN IN IN OUT IN
XMIT XMIT O TIM TIM IN OUT
FIGURE J
24
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 1,2 , and 3 toON .
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : a . At key generator rear panel (fig . J) , connect cable as shown in table H. b. Secure key generator with four flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (4 , fig . 1 ) . c. Release slide latches ( 2 ) and slide rack into place . Secure rack with four captive screws (5 ).
d. Go to step 26.
If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip : a . At radio receiver R - 1329 (fig . H) , secure unit with eight flat washers , lockwashers , and screws ( 2 ) . b. Release slide latches and slide rack into place . Secure rack with four captive screws ( 1 ) . c. At radio transmitter T-983 (fig . G) , connect cable as shown in table E. d . At radio reciever R- 1329 (fig . F) , connect cables as shown in table D. e. Replace key generator TSEC / KG - 27 per para 4-14.
f. Go to step 25.
CONTINUED
3-91
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 , 2, OR 3 NOT SECURE POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER
3-16.
TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
25
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 1 , 2 , and 3 to ON .
If RADIO RELAY TERM trips :
Call Intermediate Maintenance . If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip :
Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
26
At radio transmitter T- 983 rear panel (fig . K) , disconnect cable as shown in table I.
TABLE
I
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL
CABLE ASSEMBLY
RRT 1
W72P1
A32
RRT2
W68P 1
A 19
RRT3
W23P 1
A7
RADIO TRANSMITTER Ο
T-983
27
□
FIGURE K At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 1 , 2 , and 3 to ON. If RADIO RELAY TERM trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance . If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip :
a . At appropriate radio receiver R- 1329 ( table G ) (fig . H) , install eight flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (2).
b. Replace radio transmitter T- 983 ( table G) per para 4-13 . c. At radio transmitter T- 983 (fig G) , connect cable as shown in table E. d . At radio receiver R - 1329 (fig . F) , connect cables as shown in table D. e. Go to step 28. 28
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 1 , 2 , and 3 to ON . If RADIO RELAY TERM trips :
Call Intermediate Maintenance . If RADIO RELAY TERM does not trip :
Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-92
REAKER
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-17.
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER A87 RT-524 AND KY57 TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
100
орос Об
COBO
E
RO
AD
SI
blel.
DE
DE
BSI
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
POWER SUPPLY
CUR
A25
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In .
1
At Power Supply A25 ( fig . A) , set A87 RT-524 AND KY57 to ON .
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph :
at
e
If circuit breaker does not trip :
A87 RT-524 AND ONKY57 WCC ON
OFF OFF A88 RT-524 UHF AND KYST DLT ANTCONT ON ON ON OFF
OFF
OFF
If circuit breaker trips : FIGURE A
Go to step 2. SUBBINGTHRE
BELI TEAM
PRSN759
ZEVIC ANTERY POUSA POWERSUPPLY L'AMP FEAT
ㅁ ROADERS BLAS AFT ROTSECUMP CURBSID ALES AUT OB bri G ERVIC COMMOOFF RELOWFERI PWM DIE7 CONTROL VEITPRO PPLY PPLY ON DEY 07 OFF ~ MALLION LIDI C ONTROL CONVERTER TELEPIDL BOLLINK HEATERS CONTROL W OFF BLT OFF INTERNAL EXTERNAL MASTERECT ON on DANGER 208 VOLTS
2
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B) , set EPP INPUT PWR -BATTERY POWER to OFF .
LETIND
MECAMICAL178LESLIT
Set NOT SECURE PWR -28 VDC -COMMO PWR 3
SPLY to OFF .
CONTINUED
FIGURE B
3-93
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-17.
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER A87 RT-524 AND KY57 TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
4
At power supply ( fig . A) , loosen four captive screws and pull unit out to fully extended position . O J3
5
At rear of power supply (fig . C) , disconnect W48P1 from J2.
6
At distribution box (fig . B) , set NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC -COMMO PWR
C
O
SPLY to ON .
7
O 14
O
35
O
O
FIGURE C
At power supply (fig . A) , set A87 RT-524 AND KY57 to ON .
If circuit breaker does not trip : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If circuit breaker trips : a . Replace power supply subassembly per para 4-30. b. Go to step 8.
8
Set A87 RT- 524 AND KY57 to ON.
If circuit breaker does not trip : a . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set EPP INPUT PWR- BATTERY POWER to ON.
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If circuit breaker trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-94
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
O FAULT
3-18. POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER A88 RT-524 AND KY57 TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
Extended RECEIVERTRANSMITTER RT-524 A88
DISTRIBUTION BOX A89
SPEECH SECURITY UNIT TSEC/KY- 57 A93
RO
AD
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
SI
DE
BSI
DE
CUR
POWER SUPPLY A25
Personnel Required.
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 4 In. Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In .
to
1
At Power Supply A25 ( fig . A ) , set A88 RT-524 AND KY57 to ON.
A87 RT-524 ANDONKY57 WCC ON
If A88 RT- 524 AND KY57 does
OFF OFF A88 UHF RT-524 CONT ANDONKY57 DLT ON ANTON
not trip : Return to procedure that
OFF
OFF
OFF
の
brought you to this paragraph .
FIGURE A
If A88 RT- 524 AND KY57 trips :
Go to step 2.
CONTINUED
T
3-95
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-18.
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER A88 RT-524 AND KY57 TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
2
EPTINPUTPUR
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B) , set EPP INPUT PWR BATTERY POWERto OFF.
O com
3
SECURE P RELAYTERM
Set NOT SECURE PWR 28 VDG COMMO PWR SPLYto OFF.
BIRPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIDE OFF
CTRICE
OFF
captive screws and pull unit out to fully extended position .
AFT
MECHANICAL WEIGHT 170 LBSLIFT
FIGURE B At rear of power supply (fig . C) , disconnect W48P1 from J2.
6
At distribution box ( fig . B) , set NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC COMMO PWR
O
Θ
5
SPLYto ON.
J4
J3
J1 7
BOTSECURE P FOR
RADIO FURBEST BEPLE BELOTEM COMO BUTPRS 2 SPL CONTROL FORSPLT OFF OFF 851 LINT CHETROL TELEPORE HEATERS CONTROL CONVERTER T UTILITY POWER 129:92 40042 INTERNAL EXTERNAL DEF DANGER 208 VOLTS
OFF COMPUTER MODERS
At power supply ( fig . A) , loosen four
ZEVIC LITERT POWERSUPPLY STUS LATEXT
AFT
TUT POWER 4
17-1 O ROADSIDE
©
At power supply (fig . A) , set A88 RT- 524 AND KY57to ON.
If circuit breaker does not trip : FIGURE C
Go to step 8.
If circuit breaker trips: a. Replace power supply subassembly per para 4-30.
b. Go to step .
8
At distribution box (fig . B) , set NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC- COMMO PWR SPLYto OFF .
"
9
At rear of power supply (fig . C) , connect W48P1 to J2. 1
10
Push power supply (fig . A) back into rack and secure by tightening four captive screws .
CONTINUED
3-96
3-18 . POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER A88 RT- 524 AND KY57 TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
O
CALL BAND
30-52 A 53-75 B MC-TUNE-KC
At Receiver-Transmitter RT- 524 A88
SQUELCH ON NEW VOLUME OFF ON OFF OLD
X-MODE 58882
configuration . Disconnect front panel cables .
ONOFF
HIGH POWER LOW OFF BREAKER RESET
(fig. D), record front panel cable
ANT
SPEAKER
LIGHT
ON OFF
RETRANSMIT R/W SPKA ANTCONT MIKE FIGURE D
Le RECEIVER -TRANSMITTER RT-524 IS HEAVY. TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED WARNING
TO REMOVE OR INSTALL UNIT .
12
Loosen thumbscrews and remove receiver-transmitter RT- 524 from rack (fig . E).
FIGURE E
13
At Distribution Box A89 (fig . F) , remove 12 •
screws , lockwashers , and flat washers and remove access cover .
OO
Remove W248 from terminal board TB 1-5
TBI + + + + + + 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 ++ ++
+
14
(fig . F).
Q
"PED FA
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
15
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B) , set NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC- COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
16
TB2 + + + + + + + + + + + + + + 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
At power supply (fig . A) , observe A88 RT-524 AND KY57 . FIGURE F
If circuit breaker remains on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If circuit breaker trips: CONTINUED
Go to step 17.
3-97
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-18.
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER A88 RT-524 AND KY57 TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
17
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B) , set NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC- COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF .
18
At Distribution Box A89 (fig . F) , connect W248 to TB 1-5.
19
Remove W279 from A89 TB2-3 ( fig . F) .
20
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ) , set NOT SECURE PWR - 28 VDC- COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
21
At power supply (fig . A) , set A88 RT- 524 AND KY57 to ON.
If circuit breaker remains on: a . At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B ) , set NOT SECURE PWR - 28 VDCCOMMO PWR SPLY to OFF. b. At Distribution Box A89 (fig . F) , connect W279 to TB2-3 . c. Replace communication equipment access door fan B1 per para 5-64 .
d . Go to step 22. If circuit breaker trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
22
At Distribution Box A66 , set NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC- COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
23
At power supply ( fig . A) , observe A88 RT - 524 AND KY57.
If circuit breaker remains on: Go to step 25. If circuit breaker trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
24
At power supply (fig . A) , set A88 RT- 524 AND KY57 to ON .
If circuit breaker remains on: a. At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ) , set EPP INPUT PWR- BATTERY POWER to ON.
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If circuit breaker trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance.
3-98
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DED FAU
3-18.
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER A88 RT-524 AND KY57 TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION Continued
WRSPU
R SPL
25
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B ) , set NOT SECURE PWR 28 VDC- COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF
26
At Distribution Box A89 (fig . F) , install access cover and secure with 12 screws, lockwashers and flat washers .
Le WARNING RECEIVER - TRANSMITTER RT-524 IS HEAVY . TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO REMOVE OR INSTALL UNIT.
27
Install receiver-transmitter RT- 524 ( fig . E ) by placing unit in mounting housing and tightening mounting clamps .
190
5-64
28
At receiver-transmitter RT- 524 , connect front panel cables as recorded in step 11 .
29
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B ) , set NOT SECURE PWR- 28 VDC - COMMO PWR SPLY and EPP INPUT PWR- BATTERY POWER to ON.
30
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
ON
3-99
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-19.
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER DLT TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
RO
AD
SI
DE
DE
SI
POWER SUPPLY A25
Personnel Required .
RB
CU
POWER SUPPLY A 100
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In .
1
At Power Supply A25 (fig . A) , set DLT to ON.
If DLT trips :
Go to step 2.
If DLT does not trip: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
A87 RT-524 AND KY57 WCC ON ON OFF OFF A88 RT-524 UHF AND KY57 DLT ANTCONT ON ON ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-100
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ON
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER DLT TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
3-19.
-Continued
2
EPPLOPETPROB
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to OFF .
SECUREFOR
AUBINGTHRE 2030 UNTLEY LARP TEXT STE ROT-1 POWER O O GET SECUREPUT CHROSIDE BLE FLES EN 84 08 FS OF ERVIC DFT RELATE outP CONTROL PERSPLY 1 3 ON Ca OFF OFF OFF OFF SOADSIDE CONTROL CONTROLT CONVERTER TELEPHONE& OFF UTILITYPOWER HITERALJESSIC400 EXTERNAL EASTERECT OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
PROTER OFF
AllCome 3
Set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF . CHALCIDE
4
At Power Supply A25 (fig . A) , loosen four
MAILION OFF BUCH 鬼廳 ON COMPUTER HOGERS
BATERY POWER
FEDSPLT
captive screws and pull supply out.
PUTR
MECHANICAL PECT178LBSLIFT 5
At rear of Power Supply A25 (fig . C ) , disconnect W48P1 from J2 . FIGURE B
Θ
J3
O J4
O
O
J5
O +
FIGURE C
6
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
7
At Power Supply A25 (fig . A) , set DLT to ON .
If DLT does not trip : Go to step 8.
If DLT trips : a . Replace Power Supply A25 chassis per para 4-30 .
1
b. Go to step 14.
00
00
8
0
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF .
8
9 At rear of Power Supply A25 ( fig . C) , connect W48P1 to J2.
10
FIGURE D
At Power Supply A 100 (fig . D ) , loosen four captive screws and pull supply out . CONTINUED
3-101
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-19 .
11
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER DLT TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
At rear of Power Supply A 100 (fig . E ) , disconnect W256P1 from J9.
(EI) (J9) (JIO)
12
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR
(J5) (J2) (J4) (JIT)
888
SPLYto ON. FIGURE E 13
At Power Supply A25 (fig . A) observe DLT-
If DLT is ON: a . Replace Power Supply A25 chassis per para 4-30 .
b. Go to step 14.
If DLT is OFF: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
14
Set DLTto ON.
If DLT does not trip :
a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWERto ONb. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If DLT trips:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-102
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TION 3-20.
POWER SUPPLY A25, CIRCUIT BREAKER UHF ANT CONT TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41
J
RO
AD
SI
DE POWER SUPPLY A25 DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In.
1 At Power Supply A25 (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONT to ON.
A87 RT-524 AND KY57 WCC ON ON OFF OFF A88 UHF RT-524 AND KY57 DLT ANT CONT ON ON ON OFF
OFF
OFF
FIGURE A
If UHF ANT CONT does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If UHF ANT CONT trips :
CONTINUED
Go to step 2. T
3-103
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-20 .
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER UHF ANT CONT TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 208VAC) EXISTS IF UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT IS WARNING
SET TO ON. SECURE PWR RADIO PRINTER 1 ON RELAYTEAM 2 ON 3 04 ON OFF OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL SOADSIDE CURSSIDE ON DN OFF OFF AWCIU BLAID ON ON OFFTo OFF COMPUTER MODEMS ON OFF GAS VOICE COMMO PWB UNIT SPLY FILTER ON DFF
EPP INPUTPWX UNF AMS PWRAMPL
2
AIRCOND NOADSIDE
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B ) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to OFF .
NRCOND CURBSIDE
BATTERY POWER
ROWNINGTIME STS ART-1 BAT2
BATERY POWER
ZWYDC POWERSUPPLY SWUS
NOTSECUREPE COBASIDE ROADSIDE FWD EUTS AFT FWD ON ON OFF OFF BADID 28YDC C PWRDIST RELAYTERM DISPL UNITFWR 2 3 SPLYON CONTROLUN PWBEPLY 亞骂 ON ON W OFF OFF DET OFF OFF OFF ONEANT HOADSIDE TELEPHONE 1KLIGHT CONTROL HEATERS CONTROL UNIT CONVERTER 20 ON ON ON OFF ✔"OFF OFF OFF STILITYPOWER 120C 40082 UNTERNAL EXTERNAL MASTEDEST ON OFF OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL LBS WEIGHT 178 LIFT
FIGURE B
3
At Antenna Control Unit A41 ( fig . C) , loosen four captive screws and pull unit to its fully extended position .
80
ANTENNA
ANTENNA POSITION AC
DC O POWER
ANTENNA SELECT BITE
STO
P H AMS EADIN G
ON ON
ANTENNA STOW TOW 2
STOP
FAULT
ROTATE CCW CW AMS HEADING
FIGURE C 4
At rear of antenna control unit (fig . D) , disconnect W252P2 from J6.
El ال Dui
J2
J4 J3
J5
J6 O
OUT
FIGURE D
CONTINUED
T
3-104
J8
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
AULT POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER UHF ANT CONT TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
3-20.
OLUNITE
5
At power supply ( fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONT to ON.
If UHF ANT CONT does not trip : a. Set UHF ANT CONT to OFF . b . Replace Antenna Control Unit A41 per para 4-41 . c. Go to step 13 .
If UHF ANT CONT trips :
Go to step 6.
Le YOUS
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE (208VAC) EXISTS IF COMMO PWR SPLY AND
WARNING BATTERY POWER IS NOT SET TO OFF.
6
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY and BATTERY POWER to OFF .
7
At power supply (fig . A) , loosen four captive screws and pull unit to its fully extended position .
8
At rear of power supply (fig . E) , disconnect W468P1 from J5.
to its
J4
J3
J1
J5
J2
FIGURE E
CONTINUED
3-105
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-20 .
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER UHF ANT CONT TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
9
10
At rear of antenna control unit (fig . D) , connect W252P2 to J6.
At antenna control unit (fig . C) , push unit into equipment rack and secure with four captive screws.
11
At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY and BATTERY POWER to ON.
12
At power supply (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONT to ON .
If UHF ANT CONT does not trip :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If UHF ANT CONT trips : a . Replace power supply per para 4-25.
b. Go to step 13.
13
Set UHF ANT CONT to ON.
If UHF ANT CONT does not trip : a . At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON . b. Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If UHF ANT CONT trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-106
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
AULT
3-21 .
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION
COMMUNICATION SYSTEM CONTROLS A44
A82
A47
A86
COMMUNICATION PATCHING PANEL A42-
with for
O De
to ON
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
RO
AD
DE
SI
BSI
DE
CUR
POWER SUPPLY A39
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
•
Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In . Key, Socket Head , Hexagon 5/32 In . Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In . Pliers , Electrical Connector Connector, Removal Tool Extractor, Module
1 At Power Supply A39 ( fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If any indicator is on :
Go to step 2. b
If all indicators are off:
Go to step 3.
POWER SUPPLY FAULT 1 126VDC 126 VDC 5 VDC LAMP TEST
2 At power supply (fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
FIGURE A
If +5 VDC is on: Go to step 4. If- 12.6 VDC is on:
CONTINUED
Go to step 5.
3-107
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-21 .
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued 1
2
-Continued If all indicators are on : Replace BITE Circuit Card A39A1 per para 4-36 . Repeat step 1 after replacement . Call Intermediate Maintenance if fault still exists .
3
Perform self-test of power supply as follows : a . At power supply (fig . A) , set and hold LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST. b. Observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators.
If all indicators are on: a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all indicators are off:
a. Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 6. If + 12.6 VDC and + 5VDC are off:
a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 7. If any single indicator is off:
Replace BITE Circuit Card A39A1 per para 4-36 . Repeat step 3 after replacement . Call Intermediate Maintenance if fault still exists .
EPPHUPUTPAS 4
Fault isolate power supply as follows:
b. At power supply (fig . A) , loosen four captive screws and slide power supply out to fully extended position .
POWER POWERSUPPLY
BUTSECUREPI CONDOR FUD BLAS
SISPLAY/CENTER OFF
新 1 2 OFF OFF WEATERS CONTES
Conesal
៦
a. At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF .
com AmBEARSIDE
SECUREPUB BELITERM
POWER PRICE FOREPLY DFT
To: FATEN UIT OFF
FORBIST CONTA Furu OFF TELEPHONE CONVERTER
UT
Off SDILITY POWER TERBAL
EXTERNAL
DANGER 208 VOLTS
c. At rear of power supply (fig . C) , disconnect W58P2 from J2.
WECHANICAL WEIGHT 17HLASLIFT
FIGURE B
d. At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON . e. At power supply (fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If + 5VDC is on:
Go to step 16 . CONTINUED
3-108
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-21 . 4
-Continued
If +5 VDC is off:
1 after
a. Replace failed items in the following sequence . Repeat step 3 after each replacement and proceed with next listed item if required .
Replace Regulator Circuit Card A39A2 per
40
b.
para 4-36. c. Replace BITE Circuit Card A39A1 per para
FIGURE C
4-36 . d . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
5
Fault isolate power supply as follows: a. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At power supply (fig . A) , loosen four captive screws and slide power supply out to fully extended position . c. At rear of power supply (fig . C) , disconnect W58P2 from J2.
d. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON. J e. At power supply (fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If - 12.6 VDC is on :
Go to step 17 . If - 12.6 VDC is off: a. Replace failed items in the following sequence . Repeat step 3 after each replacement and proceed with next listed item if required. b. Replace Power Supply A39PS2 per para 4-38. c. Replace BITE Circuit Card A39A1 per para 4-36. d . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
6
At power supply (fig . A) , determine if internal cooling fan is operating as follows:
If operation cannot be determined audibly : a. Loosen four captive screws (fig . A) .
b.
Slide power supply out enough to place hand at air filter (fig . C) , on left side and feel air movement .
CONTINUED
3-109
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-21 .
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued -Continued
6
If fan is operating:
1
a. Replace failed items in the following sequence . Repeat step 1 after each replacement and proceed with next listed item if required. b. Replace BITE Circuit Card A39A1 per para 4-36. c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If fan is not operating : Call Intermediate Maintenance . 7
Fault isolate power supply as follows:
a. At distribution box ( fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At power supply ( fig . A) , loosen four captive screws and slide power supply out to fully extended position . c. At rear of power supply ( fig . C) , disconnect W58P2 from J2.
d . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON. e. At power supply ( fig . A) , set LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST . f.
Observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators.
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off: a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Replace failed items in the following sequence . Repeat step 3 after each replacement and proceed with next listed item if required .
c. Replace Power Supply A39PS1 per para 4-38. d. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on: a . Release LAMP TEST .
b . Go to step 8.
a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At power supply (fig . C) , connect W58P2 to J2.
Communications System Control A4 7 c. At fa re st ro lease six eners. tary stud (fig . D) ,
0000
0000
Fault isolate power supply + 12.6 VDC load as follows:
0000
8
FIGURE D
communicatons system contro ou l t d. Pull and disconnect W288P2 from J2. CONTINUED
3-110
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-21 . 8
Continued e. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
1afte
f. At power supply (fig . A) , set LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST and observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
Ted.
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on :
a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Replace Communications System Control A47 per para 4-44 . c. Repeat step 1 . If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off:
a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 9 . 등
outt
9
Fault isolate Communications System Control A44 as follows: a . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At Communications System Control A47 (fig . D) , connect W288P2 to J2. c. Install communications system control and secure with six rotary stud fasteners.
d . At Communications System Control A44 , release six rotary stud fasteners . e. Pull communications system control out and disconnect W286P2 from J2. f. At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
ter g. At power supply (fig . A) , set LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST and observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on :
a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Replace Communications System Control A44 per para 4-44.
c. Repeat step 1 . If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off:
a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 10.
10
Fault isolate Communications System Control A82 as follows :
a. At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At Communications System Control A44 (fig . D) , connect W286P2 to J2. CONTINUED
3-111
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-21 .
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION .
-Continued
-Continued
10
c. Install communications system control and secure with six rotary stud fasteners . d . At Communications System Control A82 , release six rotary stud fasteners . e . Pull communications system control out and disconnect W287P2 from J2. f.
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON
A g. At power supply (fig . A) , set LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST and observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on : a . Release LAMP TEST b . Replace Communications System Control A82 per para 4-44. c. Repeat step 1 .
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off: a. Release LAMP TEST
b. Go to step 11 .
11
Fault isolate Communications System Control A86 as follows : a. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF
b. At Communications System Control A82 (fig . D) , connect W287P2 to J2. c. Install communications system control and secure with six rotary stud fasteners .
d . At Communications System Control A86 , release six rotary stud fasteners . e. Pull communications system control out and disconnect W285P2 from J2. f.
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
g . At power supply (fig . A) , set LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST and observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on : a . Release LAMP TEST
b. Replace Communications System Control A86 per para 4-44 . c. Repeat Step 1 . If
12.6 VDC and +5 VDC
are off: a . Release LAMP TEST
b. Go to step 12 .
CONTINUED
3-112
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION_Continued
3-21 .
12
Fault isolate Communications Patching Panel A42 (fig . E) as follows:
2
asteners
3
a. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF
ers. b. At Communications System Control A86
2.
1.
(fig . D), connect W285P2 to J2. c. Install communications system control and
OWER secure with six rotary stud fasteners . d. At communication patching panel (fig . E ) loosen eight captive screws ( 1 ) and pull unit out to fully extended position . e. Release six rotary stud fasteners ( 3 ) and Į
loosen two captive screws ( 2) . Remove access cover .
FIGURE E
f. Remove Circuit Cards A1 through A13 using module extractor. g. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON. h. At power supply (fig . A) , set LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST and observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on: a. Release LAMP TEST
Γ
b. Go to step 13. If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off:
a. Release LAMP TEST
b. Go to step 14.
R 13
Fault isolate communication patching panel circuit cards as follows : a. At communication patching panel ( fig . E) , insert Circuit Card A1 .
b. At power supply ( fig . A) , set LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST and observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on : a . Repeat steps 13a and b inserting Circuit Cards A2 through A13 in sequential order. b. Replace circuit card which causes fault indicator not to light using
module extractor. c. Return to step 1.
CONTINUED
3-113
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-21 . 13
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued -Continued If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off:
a. Release LAMP TEST. b. Replace Circuit Card A1 using module extractor .
c. Install Circuit Cards A2 through A 13 using module extractor. d . Repeat step 1 .
14
Fault isolate communication patching panel load as follows: a . At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF. b. At communication patching panel (fig . E) , insert Circuit Cards A1 through A13. c. At communication patching panel rear panel (fig . F) , disconnect cables as shown in table .
EI
اال
J16
ال
J14 J13
JIO
J9
J8
J7
J6
J5
J4
J33
J2
ال5
L
CABLE
CONNECTOR
W214
J5
W215
J6
W216
J7
W217
J8
L
= FIGURE F
d . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON. e. At power supply ( fig . A) , set LAMP TEST to LAMP TEST and observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators .
If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on: a . Release LAMP TEST.
b. Go to step . 15. If +12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off: a. Release LAMP TEST.
b. Replace communication patching panel chassis per para 4-42 . c. Return to step 1.
15
Fault isolate communication patching panel load cables as follows: a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF. b. At communication patching panel (fig . F) , connect W214P1 to J5. c. At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
CONTINUED
3-114
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
3-21 . 15
-Continued
d. At power supply ( fig . A) , set LAMP TESTto LAMP TEST and observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators . If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are on :
a . Release LAMP TEST.
I. b. Call Intermediate Maintenance . If + 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off: a. Release LAMP TEST.
b. Call Intermediate Maintenance . A13.
sshow
16
Fault isolate power supply load as follows: a. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLYto OFF. b. At power supply (fig . C) , connect W58P2 to J2. c. At communication patching panel (fig . E ) , loosen eight captive screws ( 1 ) and pull unit out to fully extended position . d . Release six rotary stud fasteners (3) and two captive screws ( 2 ) . Remove access cover.
e. Remove Circuit Cards A 1 through A 13 using module extractor. f. At distribution box ( fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON g. At power supply (fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators . ER
If - 12.6 VDC or + 5VDC is on :
Go to step 17.
If - 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off:
Go to step 18.
Fault isolate communication patching panel as follows : a . At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF. b . At communication patching panel (fig . E) , insert circuits cards A1 through A13 . c. At communication patching panel rear panel (fig . F) , disconnect W58P1 from J15 . d. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO PWR SPLYto ON e. At power supply (fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY FAULTindicators .
If
- 12.6 VDC or +5 VDC is on : CONTINUED
Call Intermediate Maintenance.
3-115
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-21 .
17
POWER SUPPLY A39 FAULT INDICATION FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
-Continued
If - 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off: a. Replace communication patching panel chassis per para 4-42 . b. Return to step 1 .
18
Fault isolate communication patching panel circuit cards as follows :
a. At communication patching panel (fig . E ) , insert Circuit Card A1 . b. At power supply (fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY FAULT indicators.
If - 12.6 VDC or +5 VDC is on : a . At communication patching panel (fig . E) , replace Circuit Card A1 using module extractor.
b. Return to step 1 . If - 12.6 VDC and +5 VDC are off: a. Repeat steps 18a and b inserting Circuit Cards A2 through A 13 in sequential order . b. Replace circuit card which causes fault indicator to light using module extractor.
E. c. Return to step 1 .
3-116
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
pa
1-42
3-22.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 LAMP TEST INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
POWER SUPPLY A52 (LOCATED BEHIND A51 )
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64
圓
rdAls
C RO
AD
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
SI
DE
13in
Personnel Required
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Multimeter , Digital , 8125A- AQ - O Pliers , Electrical Connector Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide, 8 In. Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Wrench , Box / Open End , 3/8 In. Socket , Socket-Wrench , 1/4 Drive , 11/32 In .
Switch Assembly , AC Line Test Cable Assembly W104
Cable Assembly W106 Cable Assembly W150 Cable Assembly W156 Handle , Socket- Wrench , Ratchet, 1/4 In . Drive Extension , Socket-Wrench , 1/4 In . Drive , 2 In .
CONTINUED
3-117
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 LAMP TEST INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION
3-22.
-Continued
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A, press and hold LAMP TEST , observe D & C STATUS and COMPUTER STATUS indicators (fig . A).
NOTE
D & C STATUS- MS1 - BASKET 2 POWER lamp is not tested by BITE Indicator Panel A51 LAMP TEST .
1
1
D&C STATUS
MS1 MS1
MS3 MS3
MS1
MS3
MSI
MS3
MS1
MS3
MS1 GOOD
MS3
CAT DISPLAY LAMP TEST
EXT ALERT
P&SOUTDATA
BASKET I POWER
COMPUTER LOAD DEVICECONTROL SELECT MASS MASSSTORAGE STORAGE UNIT 1 UNIT 2 RECOVERY NON LAMP STORAGE TACTICAL BRIGHTNESS UNIT 1 PERIPHERALS
COMP 100 &SYS RESET STRAP INT
PROG HAL1
BASKET 1 CLOCK BASKET 2 POWER
COMP P/S
MSI BASKET 2 CLOCK COMPUTER STATUS INIT ALERT PROG PERI MEM ERR MEM ERROR
MS3
CUG P/S
:.5 FIGURE A
If all indicators are on :
Go to step 2. If all indicators are off: a. Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 3. If some indicators are off: a. Release LAMP TEST .
b. Replace failed indicators per para 5-54.
c. Go to step 4.
2
At BITE indicator panel , adjust LAMP BRIGHTNESS (fig . A) .
If all lamps are adjustable : a. Release LAMP TEST .
CONTINUED b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-118
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
N 3-22.
2
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 LAMP TEST INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued -Continued
&C If lamps are not adjustable :
a. Release LAMP TEST . b . Replace BITE Indicator Panel A51 per para 4-53 . Indicat c. Go to step 4.
3
At Control - Indicator A55 (fig B) , observe panel indicators .
O --888
FIGURE B
If all indicators are off: a . Fault isolate A51 MS1 per para 3-23.
b. Go to step 4. If some indicators are off: a . Replace BITE Indicator Panel A51 per para 4-53.
b. Go to step 4
4 At BITE indicator panel ( fig . A) , press and hold LAMP TEST and observe D & C STATUS and COMPUTER STATUS indicators .
If all indicators are on :
Go to step 5. If some indicators are off.
a. Release LAMP TEST. b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-119
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-22.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 LAMP TEST INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
5
At BITE indicator panel , adjust LAMP BRIGHTNESS control (fig . A) .
If indicators are adjustable :
a . Release LAMP TEST switch . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
E If indicators are not adjustable : a . Release LAMP TEST switch . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-120
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ON
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D & C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 HARD COPY UNIT A65
(POWER SUPPLY A52 BEHIND PANEL)
CONTROL- INDICATOR RECOVERY STORAGE
UNIT A95A6 POWER SUPPLY A58 A55
(BEHIND ACCESS COVER)
A74
JOD 80
O
LOG
RO
AD
A76
SI
DE
E
ID
BS
A57
R CU DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
CONTROL- KEYBOARD COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL A95A12
Personnel Required.
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2, 10 In .
CONTINUED
T
3-121
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D &C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
1 NOTE
BITE Indicator Panel A51 MS1 Indicators indicate faults under the following conditions :
MS1 INDICATOR
FAULT INDICATION
CRT DISPLAY- MS1
RED
P& S OUT DATA- MS1
RED
BASKET 1 POWER - MS1
RED
BASKET 1 CLOCK- MS1
RED
BASKET 2 POWER - MS1 GOOD
OFF
BASKET 2 CLOCK- MS1
1
ON
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) , observe BASKET 2 POWER - MS1 GOOD indicator .
0&CSTATUS
If indicator is on:
LAMP TEST
EXT ALERT
Observe the following MS1 indicators:
MS1
MS3
MSI
53
MS1
MS3
MS1 GOOD
S3
P&S OUT DATA
If indicator is off:
2
$3 MS3
CAT DISPLAY
Go to step 2.
Go to step 5 .
MS1 MS1
COMPUTERCONTROL LOAD DEVICE SELECT STORAGE MASS UNIT 1 RECOVERY LAMP STORAGE BRIGHTNESS UNIT1
COMP &SYS RESET
B00 STRAP INIT
BASKET I POWER BASKET I CLOCK
MASS STORAGE UNIT 2 NON TACTICAL PERIPHERALS
PROG HALT
BASKET 2 POWER
COMP P/S
53 MSI BASKET 2 CLOCK COMPUTER STATUS CUS SNITS PROG MEM ERR MEN ENBOR ALERT PERI
CRT DISPLAY- MS1
P& S OUT DATA- MS1
FIGURE A
BASKET 1 POWER - MS1 BASKET 1 CLOCK- MS1
BASKET 2 CLOCK- MS1
If all indicators are off: Go to step 16. If more than one indicator indicates a fault. a. Replace Computer Data Input / Output A53 Circuit Card Module A47 per para 4-56.
b. Go to step 3. CONTINUED
3-122
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TION 3-23 .
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D& C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
follow
2
-Continued
If BASKET 2 CLOCK- MS1 only indicates a fault : Replace battery replaceable unit ( BRU ) A53A7 , A53A9 , A53A1 , A53A 10 , and A53A47 one at a a time in the sequence listed per para 4-56 . After each replacement , go to step 4.
If only one of the following MS1 indicators is red :
CRT DISPLAY - MS1 P & S OUT DATA- MS1 BASKET 1 POWER - MS1 BASKET 1 CLOCK - MS1 Go to step 16 .
3
Observe the following MS 1 indicators :
CRT DISPLAY- MS1 P&S OUT DATA - MS1
BASKET 1 POWER - MS1 BASKET 1 CLOCK- MS1 BASKET 2 CLOCK - MS1
If all indicators are off: Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If more than one indicator indicates a fault : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
4
Observe BASKET 2 CLOCK - MS1 indicator.
If indicator is off: Fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If indicator is on: a. Replace next BRU listed in step 2.
b. If last BRU in list has been replaced and fault is not corrected , call Intermediate Maintenance . CONTINUED
T
3-123
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
EPPEXPUTPWR THE AMS PWRAMPL
AIRCOND ROADSIDE LO5
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ). Set AIRCOND CURBSIDE
DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF .
BATTERY POWER
RUNNING TIME PRINTER ON OFF
AUTERY POWER
STS MAT-1 ART-2 BAT-3
28VDC POWERSUPPLY STATUS
CAMP TEST ON 017
MOTSECURE PWS CURBSIDE FWD EURES AFT ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF NADIO ZAYOC RELAY TERM PWRDIST DISPLAY/ PWRSPLT COMMO PWB CONTROL UNIT 3 2 3 SPLY ON ON FR OR ON ยา OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF UNFANT ROADSIDE LIGHT CONTBOX TELEPHONE BADTEAMEINK HEATERS CONTROL URIT CORVENTES ON ON ON SN ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF UTILITYPOWER DUT INTERN120C450HZ AL EXTERNAL MAST ERECT ON G ON OFF OFF OFF ROADSIDE FWO TRANS
เอ
SECURE PWR RADIO RELAYTERM ON 2 ON 3 ON OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL BOADSIDE CURBSIDE ON OL OFF OFF RWCIO BLAIU OR ON OFF To OFF COMPUTER MODEMS ON ON OFFTo OFF GAS VOICE FILTER COMMO UNIT PWNSPLY OR ON OFF OFF
DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL WEIGHT 378 LIFT LBS
FIGURE B
CAUTION
6
7
WHEN LOWERING BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 , EXCERCISE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CRT AND ADJOINING CONTROLS .
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . C), loosen four rotary fasteners ( 1 ) , release latch (2 ) and lower panel .
CB1
At Power Supply A52 ( fig . C) , observe CB1 .
If CB1 is ON :
A 0
Go to step 15.
I
ΕΙ E2 E3 J3
If CB1 is OFF :
JI O
D
Go to step 8. 2 8
Set CB1 to ON . · A ·
FIGURE C 9
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL - ROADSIDE to ON and observe Power Supply A52 ( fig . C ) CB1 .
If CB 1 trips : a . Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF .
b. Go to step 10 .
If CB1 does not trip:
Go to step 15. CONTINUED
3-124
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 ATION
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D &C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
10
At Power Supply A52 ( fig . C) , disconnect A51P1 from J4.
11
Set CB1 to ON.
12
At distribution box (fig . B) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL - ROADSIDE to ON and observe Power Supply A52 ( fig . C ) CB1 .
If CB1 does not trip :
OUTS a . Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF.
b. Replace A51A 17 per para 5-54. c . Connect A51P1 to J4 (fig . C) .
ARE TO d. Go to step 13.
If CB 1 trips :
1 a . Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF . b. Replace Power Supply A52 mounting chassis per para 4-54.
c. Set CB 1 to ON (fig. C).
d. Go to step 14.
13 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to ON and observe Power Supply A52 ( fig . C ) CB1 .
If CB1 does not trip :
CAUTION
WHEN RAISING BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 , EXERCISE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CRT AND ADJOINING CONTROLS .
a. Raise BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . C) , secure latch (2) and secure panel with four rotary fasteners ( 1 ) . b. Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfCB1 trips : a . Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF . b. Replace BITE Indicator Panel A51 per para 4-53. c. Set CB1 to ON (fig . C).
CONTINUED
d . Go to step 14 .
3-125
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
14
Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE (fig . B ) to ON and observe CB1 ( fig . C) .
WHEN RAISING BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 , EXERCISE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CRT AND ADJOINING CONTROLS . CAUTION
a. Raise BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . C) , secure latch ( 2 ) and secure panel with four rotary fasteners ( 1 ). b. Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 trips : a . Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
15
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . A) , observe BASKET 2 POWER - MS1 GOOD indicator .
Ο
TTC2TTCI
If indicator is on:
Se DE DE
A2
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If indicator is off:
16
Lfoos r
Go to step 16.
0
At Recovery Storage Unit ( RSU ) A95A6 (fig . D) , loosen two captive screws and open access door. FIGURE D
17
Remove FP operational cassette from TTC1 slot and insert RSU / ECS cassette in its place.
Le
WEAPONS CONTROL COMPUTER ACCESS COVER IS HEAVY (37 WARNING lbs / 16.8 Kg . ) AND AWKWARD. USE CARE TO AVOID INJURY WHEN REMOVING OR REPLACING COVER .
18
At Computer Maintenance Panel A95A 12 ( fig . E) , verify that TTC1 - PROTECT / ENABLE and TTC2- PROTECT /ENABLE are both set to ENABLE
CONTINUED
3-126
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION
ATION
-Continued
PWR SPLY TEST CPU 1 MEM
C).
PCU VOCU
RETO
CPU 2
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL CLOCK OPARITY O MONITOR DATA WORD
FUNCTION WORD INPUT DATA WORD INPUT
CPU3 FUNCTION WORD MODE CONTROL SINGLE LOAD PANEL CONT AUTO
RSU WRITE CONTROL TTC1 TTC2 CLOCK PROTECT PROTECT RUN ENABLE ENABLE HALT
FIGURE E
ndsea 19
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) , setCOMPUTER CONTROL LOAD DEVICE SELECT toRECOVER STORAGE UNIT- 1 .
20
Press COMP & SYS RESET .
21
Press BOOT STRAP INIT and observe PERI indicator.
is
If indicator is off: Go to step 26.
If indicator is on: Go to step 22.
At RSU A95A6 (fig . D ) , release and reseat RSU / ECS Cassette in TTC1 slot.
23 At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) , press COMP & SYS RESET .
24
Press BOOT STRAP INIT and observe PERI indicator.
If indicator is off : Go to step 26.
If indicator is on: Go to step 25.
25
Perform weapons control computer (WCC) fault isolation per para 3-39 .
If WCC fault is corrected : Repeat from step 20. CONTINUED
J
3-127
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1
INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION
-Continued
25
-Continued
If WCC fault is not corrected :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If TWUD is properly loaded , RSBT diagnostic module will be running . If fault is detected , an error message will be displayed at Control Indicator A55 and NOTE
A74 CRT display and at Hard Copy Unit A65 printout . If no RSBT fault is detected , TWUD will automatically run CPUD1 , CPUD2 , MMUD ( MMU1-3) , IOCUD , operating system ( OS ) initialization , and DCCD . If no fault is detected , the following message appears on the CRT displays and hard copy unit printout :
** KEY IN " CARD " TO RESUME AUTOMATIC OPERATION ** " ?" also appears at displays .
ТР 26
At Control - Indicator
O
A55 and A74 (fig . F), observe CRT displays , and at Hard Copy Unit A65 (fig . G) , observe
printout for error
Q
O
message . FIGURE G
FIGURE F
If no error message appears and DCCD runs successfully :
Go to step 27 . If any error message appears and DCCD does not run successfully: a. Replace BRUS one at a time in the order listed on the hard copy unit printout .
b. After each replacement , repeat from step 20 . c. If all BRUS listed on printout have been replaced and fault still exists , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-128
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ON BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-23.
At Control - Indicator A55 / A74 , verify that " ? " appears on CRT before NOTE
proceeding .
Iffaut
55 and
27
At Control - Keyboard A57 / A76 ( fig . H) , type LOAD DCCD , and press SEND TAB key.
tis
J1-3 O ard co
CAT BRIGHTNESS CONTROL B
0
MONITOR EXTCXT
SPLE
R7 M6
VOLUME CINCHIT SELECT 000
R2 A1
O W ASDFG
HOME STAD
RS
TA
SELECT
SEND CANCL HOOK
SEO NOOK NUM HOOK
HODK
SEL WALID COPY 1 2 3 SEND TA 4 5 6 ENTA TA 0
FIGURE H
Type GO TO DCCD and press SEND TAB key . Observe CRT and printout for error message (fig . G and fig . H) .
If no error message appears and DCCD interface test runs successfully:
Go to step 45 .
If any error message appears and DCCD interface test does not run successfully:
Go to step 29.
29
Observe CRT and printout for error message.
If error message EM0002 through EM0014 does not appear:
Go to step 30.
If error message EM0002 through EM0014 appears:
a. Replace BRUS one at a time in the order listed in the printout. b. After each replacement , repeat from step 20 . c. If all BRUS listed have been replaced and fault is not corrected, call Intermediate Maintenance.
CONTINUED
3-129
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D &C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION
3-23.
-Continued
30
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) , observeBASKET 1 POWER MS1 indicator.
If indicator is red: Go to step 31 . If indicator is off:
Go to step 38.
31
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE to OFF .
32
CB1
Remove access cover to Power Supply A58 (fig . 1) by loosening 30 captive screws.
33
ObserveCB1 .
IfCB1 isON :
D Go to step 36. IfCB1 is OFF : B
Go to step 34. a
34
SetCB1 to ON . FIGURE I
35
At distribution box (fig . B ) , setDISPLAY / CONTROL - ROADSIDE to ON and observe Power Supply A58CB1 ( fig . 1).
IfCB1 does not trip : a. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Repeat from step 20.
IfCB1 trips: a . Perform Power Supply Assembly A58CB1 5AMP circuit breaker tripped fault isolation per para 3-162.
b. When fault is corrected , repeat from step 20. 36
Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws .
CONTINUED
3-130
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TION 3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
cator.
37
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE to ON .
38
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . A) , observe BASKET 1 POWER -MS1 indicator .
If indicator is red:
Replace BRUS one at a time in the sequence listed . After each replacement go to step 39.
A53A5 replace per para 4-56. A58A1 replace per par 4-62 .
CB1
If indicator is off:
Go to step 40.
39
Observe BASKET 1 POWER -MS1 indicator.
If indicator is red :
a. Replace next BRU listed in step 38. b. If last BRU has been replaced and fault is not corrected , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is off: Repeat from step 20. 40
Observe BASKET 1 CLOCK MS1 indicator.
en: If indicator is red:
Replace BRUS one at a time in the sequence listed . After each replacement go to step 41 . A53A5
replace per para 4-56 .
A53A11
replace per para 4-56.
A53A2 A53A3 A53A 10
replace per para 4-56. replace per para 4-56. replace per para 4-56 .
A59A 18
replace per para 4-63.
A59A52
replace per para 4-63. replace per para 4-63. replace per para 4-63.
A59A22 A59A23
If indicator is off:
CONTINUED
Go to step 42. T
3-131
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
41
Observe BASKET 1 CLOCK - MS1 indicator.
If indicator is red: a. Replace next BRU listed in step 40.
b. If last BRU has been replaced and fault is not corrected , call Intermediate Maintenance . If indicator is off: Repeat from step 20. 42
Observe P & S OUT DATA- MS1 indicator.
If indicator is red : Replace BRUS one at a time in the sequence listed . After each replacement go to step 43.
A53A5 replace per para 4-56 . A53A11
replace per para 4-56 . A53A 10 replace per para 4-56 .
A53A 13 replace per para 4-56.
A53A 12 replace per para 4-56. A53A2 A53A3
replace per para 4-56. replace per para 4-56.
A59A22 replace per para 4-63 . A59A23 replace per para 4-63.
If indicator is off:
Go to step 44. 43
Observe P & S OUT DATA - MS1 indicator . If indicator is red: a . Replace next BRU listed in step 42. b . If last BRU has been replaced and fault is not corrected , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If Indicator is off: Repeat from step 20 .
44
Observe CRT DISPLAY- MS 1 indicator .
If indicator is red : a . Replace BRUS one at a time in the sequence listed on the hard copy unit printout .
b. After each replacement , repeat from step 20 .
3-132
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ATION
3-23. BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
44
-Continued c. If all BRUS have been replaced and fault is not corrected , call Intermediate Maintenance .
all
If indicator is off: a. Replace BRUS one at a time in the sequence listed on the hard copy unit printout . b. After each BRU replacement , repeat from step 20.
c. If all BRUS have been replaced and fault is not corrected , call Intermediate Maintenance .
45
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . A) , observe the following indicators :
BASKET 1 POWER MS1 BASKET 1 CLOCK MS1 P & S OUTDATA MS 1
CRT DISPLAY MS1
If all indicators are off:
Go to step 47.
IfBASKET 1 POWER MS1 indicator is red :
a . Replace Circuit Card Module A53A47 per para 4-56. b. Repeat from step 20.
c. If fault is not corrected and A53A47 has been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfBASKET 1 CLOCK MS1 indicator is red :
a . Replace Circuit Card Module A53A47 per para 4-56. b . Repeat from step 20. c. If fault is not corrected and A53A47 has been replaced , call
Intermediate Maintenance .
IfP & S OUT DATA MS1 indicator is red :
a . Replace Circuit Card Module A53A47 per para 4-56. b. Repeat from step 20. c. If fault is not corrected and A53A47 has been replaced ,
CONTINUED
call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-133
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
145
-Continued
If CRT DISPLAY - MS1 indicator is red : Replace BRUs one at a time in the sequence listed . After each replacement , go to step 46. 1 A53A7 replace per para 4-56 . A53A47
46
replace per para 4-56 .
Observe CRT DISPLAY- MS1 indicator .
If indicator is red: a . Replace next BRU listed in step 45.
b. If last BRU has been replaced and fault is not corrected , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is off: Repeat from step 20.
47
At Control- Indicator A55 / A74 ( fig . F) and Hard Copy Unit A65 (fig . G ) , analyze DCCD keyboard test results on CRT and printout .
If test is passed and MS1 indicator fault was corrected :
Go to step 49 . If test is passed and MS1 indicator fault was not corrected :
Go to step 48.
If test is failed : a . Replace BRUs one at a time in the sequence listed on the printout .
b. After each replacement , repeat from step 20 . c. If all BRUS have been replaced and fault is not corrected , call Intermediate Maintenance . 48
Perform Status Monitor Aided Selection Diagnostic Procedure per TM 9-1425-60212 , and type 1 in * MO1 * tab for item 4 = MAN STATION 1 .
If fault is corrected : Repeat from step 20. CONTINUED
3-134
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-23.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL D&C STATUS MS1 INDICATOR FAULT ISOLATION
ATION -Continued
48
-Continued
If fault is not corrected : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
ch 49
At Recovery Storage Unit A95A6 (fig . D) , remove RSU / ECS cassette from TTC 1 slot .
50
Install FP operational cassette in TTC1 slot .
51
Close access door and secure with two captive screws.
52
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) , set COMPUTER CONTROL LOAD DEVICE SELECTto RECOVERY STORAGE UNIT- 1.
53
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
DOC
3-135
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-24.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 LAMP BRIGHTNESS CONTROL FAULT ISOLATION
ZB
RO
BITE INDICATOR
AD
SI
DE
PANEL A51
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
D&C STATUS
1
MSI MS1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 ,
$3
CAT DISPLAY
adjust LAMP BRIGHTNESS .
LAMP TEST
EXT ALERT
MS1
P&S OUT DATA MSI
If
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMP & SYS RESET
oo STRAP INIT
PROG HALT
MS1
BASKET CLOCK
MS1 GOOD BASKET 2 POWER
COMP P/S
3
LAMP BRIGHTNESS dims:
BASKET POWER
COMPUTER CONTROL LOAD DEVICE SELECT MASS MASS STORAGE UNIT 1STORAGE 2 UMIT RECOVERY NOW LAMP TACTICAL BRIGHTNESS STORAGE UNIT 1 PERIPHERALS
MS1 BASKET 2 CLOCK COMPUTERSTATUS TDY PROG MEM ERROR ALERT PERI P/S ERR
If LAM BRIGHTNESS P does not dim : a. Replace Power Supply A52A1 per
para 4-55 .
b. Go to step 2 .
CONTINUED
T
3-136
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ISOLAT 3-24.
2
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 LAMP BRIGHTNESS CONTROL FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
At BITE indicator panel , adjust LAMP BRIGHTNESS.
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS dims : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS does not dim : a . Replace Power Supply Assembly A52 mounting chassis per para 4-54. b. Go to step 3 .
3
At BITE indicator panel , adjust LAMP BRIGHTNESS.
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS dims : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS does not dim : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-137
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-25.
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 EXT ALERT FAULT ISOLATION
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
10'0
J
C
M
0000
RO
AD
SI
DE
A113
A114
HORN
HORN
10 O O O O
FRONT EXTERIOR
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
D
CONTINUE
T
3-138
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 EXT ALERT FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-25.
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , ( fig . A) , press and hold EXT ALERT and listen for audible alarm from Horns A113 and A114.
D&C STATUS MSI MS1
MS3 MS3
MS1
MS3
CRT DISPLAY EXT ALERT
LAMP TEST
P&S OUTDATA
COMPUTER CONTROL DEVICESELECT LOAD MASS MASSSTORAGE STORAGE UNIT 1 UNIT 2 RECOVERY NON LAMP STORAGE TACTICAL BRIGHTNESS UNIT 1 PERIPHERALS
COMP & SYS RESET
BOOT STRAP INIT
PROG HALT
BASKET 1 POWER
MS1
MS3
BASKET 1 CLOCK
MSI
MS3
MSI GOOD
MS3
BASKET Z POWER
COMP P/S
MST BASKET 2 CLOCK COMPUTER STATUS MEM PROG PERI INIT ALERT EHR MEM ERROR
MS3
P/S
FIGURE A
If both horns do not sound : a . Release EXT ALERT.
b. Replace BITE Indicator Panel A51 push switch A24 per para 5-54.
c. Go to step 2 . If curbside horn does not sound: a . Release EXT ALERT.
b. Call Intermediate Maintenance . If roadside horn does not sound : a . Release EXT ALERT. b. Call Intermediate Maintenance.
2 At BITE indicator panel ( fig . A) , press and hold EXT ALERT and listen for audible alarm from horns .
If both horns sound : a . Release EXT ALERT. b. Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If both horns do not sound : a . Release EXT ALERT . b . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-139
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
FP STATUS INDICATOR PANEL A61 LAMP BRIGHTNESS CONTROL FAULT
3-26.
ISOLATION
07
0..
[ RO
FP STATUS INDICATOR PANEL A61
AD
SI
DE
None
Tools and Equipment Required .
1
At FP Status Indicator Panel A61 , adjust LAMP BRIGHTNESS .
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS control dims : TIME OF DAY
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS control does
MSL INVENTORY
METHOD CONTROL WEAPOR DEF CON ALERT STATE CONTUL
FP ATTACK WARNINGS FATER CON LAMP BRIGHTNESS
not dim : a. Replace Power Supply A62A1 per para 4-55 .
LSI LS2 1S3 154 LSS LS6 157 ISB
OPER STRY OPER OPER STAY OPEN STOT OPER STDY OPER STAY OPER STAT OPER STAY
OPER OPER OPEN OPEN OPER OPER OPER OPER
FUEL OUL FIEL FUEL DOL FUEL FIREL 懷 FUEL FUEL FUEL
b. Go to step 2. 2
At FP status indicator panel , adjust LAMP BRIGHTNESS .
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS control dims : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS control does not dim : a. Replace Power Supply A62 mounting chassis per para 4-54 .
b. Go to step 3. 3
At FP status indicator panel , adjus . LAMP BRIGHTNESS .
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS control dims : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If LAMP BRIGHTNESS control does not dim : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-140
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
AULT 3-27.
PRIME POWER OUTAGE FAULT ISOLATION
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64
3088
ROA
DSI
DE
BSI
DE
CUR STORAGE COMPARTMENT
Tools and Equipment Required . 0
None
1 At engagement control station ( ECS) , restore lighting and communications .
a. At storage compartment , remove sound powered telephone set . b . At Generator Control Panel A64 , plug sound - powered telephone set into COMM receptacle and establish communications with electric power plant ( EPP) operator. c. Observe OVER VOLTAGE FAULT RESET .
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL
VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL PHASE 8
PHASE C
COMM
G
PHASE A OFF -
GENS ON SUM FAULT FUEL LINE OVERVOLTAGE SUM GEN NONO 21 LAMP FAULT FAULT TEST TELA RESET GENERATOR POWER RADAR ECS TURBINES OFF OFF OFF COMM ON
ON
ON
O
BATTLE SHORT BATTLE SHORT
If OVER VOLTAGE FAULT RESET is on:
Go to step 2. If OVER VOLTAGE FAULT RESET is off:
CONTINUED
Call Intermediate Maintenance . T
3-141
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-27.
PRIME POWER OUTAGE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued 2
Determine cause of over voltage shutdown .
a. SetGENERATOR POWER ECS and RADAR to OFF . b. Notify EPP operator to restart generators per TM - 5-6115-604-14& P . c . Notify EPP operator to observe prime power voltage . If voltage exceeds 126VAC : (1 ) Notify EPP operator to regulate prime power to 120VAC.
L ( 2) Go to step 3 .
If voltage does not exceed 126VAC:
Go to step 4. 3
At generator control panel , set ECS and RADAR to ON . a. Observe GENS ON LINE - NO.1 and NC . 2 are ON .
b . Press OVER VOLTAGE FAULT RESET . c. Set ECS to ON .
If ECS power is restored : ( 1 ) Set VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL to PHASE A , PHASE B , and PHASE C. Voltage indication should be between 114VAC and 126VAC .
(2 ) Set GENERATOR POWER - RADAR to ON . (3) Perform Last Prior Data Base Reinitialization per TM 9-1430-600-10-1 . (4) Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If ECS powr is not on : Call Intermediate Maintenance . 4
Set ECS and RADAR to ON. a. Observe GENS ON LINE- NO. 1 and /or NO . 2 are ON. b. Press OVER VOLTAGE FAULT RESET .
c. Set ECS to ON. If ECS power is restored :
Go to step 5. If ECS power comes on momentarily, then shuts down :
(1 ) Replace Generator Control A64 per para 4-66. (2) Call Intermediate Maintenance .
T
3-142
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
PRIME POWER OUTAGE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-27.
5
Test EPP voltage regulation : a. At generator control panel , set VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL to PHASE A b. Monitor VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL meter and set RADAR to ON .
c. Monitor meter and set RADAR to OFF . Any visible change will occur 30 seconds after switch is set to OFF d. Set VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL to PHASE B. e. Monitor VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL meter and set RADAR to ON . f. Monitor meter and set RADAR to OFF g. Repeat substeps 5d . , e . , and f . for PHASE C of VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL . If ECS power does not remain between 114VAC and 126VAC: (1 ) Notify EPP operator to correct fault.
(2 ) Repeat step 1 .
If ECS Power does not change and voltage remains within 114VAC and 126VAC : ( 1 ) Perform Last Prior Data Base Reinitialization , TM 9-1430-600-10-1 . (2) Call Intermediate Maintenance .
and d
3-143
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-28.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
RO
AD
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
SI
E
SID
DE
POWER DISTRIBUTION
B CUR
BOX A95A8 28VDC POWER
SUPPLY ASSEMBLY A25
SIGNAL DATA RECORDER- REPRODUCER SET A95A6
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 4 In . Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In . Pliers , Electrical Connector
1
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , observe COMPUTER
If COMPUTERIS ON Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If COMPUTERIS OFF. Go to step 2 .
EPTCEPUTPUR
A COM
SECUREPWD PORTER RADIO RELATER OFF OFF DFF OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIDE CURETIM OFF
AIRCOND CURLEDE 2
At distribution box , set COMPUTERto ON
If COMPUTERdoes not trip : Return to procedure that
O
LITERY POWER
COMPUTER MODEMS T o SAS VOICE FILTER Como FORSPLY VIT 10 OUR OFF OFF
ZEVIC KATERY POWERSUPPLY TEET m. T-1 POWER ST-2 287-3 + O NOTDECORE POR CORESIDE BEADGE F A AFT AFT OFF OFF OFT PRTIC PLE FORSPLY KELRADETE CONTROL 11 04 DO OFF OFF OFF TELEPHONE CONTRO ROADSIDE TE CONVERTER NEWERS CONTROL GRIT B BIT OFF DFT STILITYPOWER 1299 EXTERN ASTERECT INTEREAL 40062 OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL WEIGHT 178LBSLIFT
brought you to this FIGURE A
paragraph .
If COMPUTERtrips:
CONTINUED Go to step 3.
3-144
#
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR- COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
ER TRIPE 3-28 .
3
At distribution box (fig . B ) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
4
Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers, and flat washers .
5
Remove five self-locking nuts ( 2 ) and flat washers . Remove bottom shielding gasket (4).
6
Disconnect W445P1 (fig . C) from J18.
RAST RE
1
OOO
0
J20
J17 J19 J16
J22
J18 J21
J23 J28
J15 J12
J9
J30 J14
J5
JB
J11
2
FIGURE B -A-
C
7 At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER toON .
ICOMPUTER does not trip :
A
Go to step 16.
IfCOMPUTER trips : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 circuit breaker CB1 per para 4-81 . FIGURE C
b. Go to step 8.
8
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON
IfCOMPUTER does not trip : Go to step 9.
IfCOMPUTER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance . CONTINUED
9 At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF
3-145
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-28.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
10
At distribution box (fig . C) , connect W445P1 to J18.
11
At distribution box (fig . B) , install shielding gasket (4) and secure with five flat washers and self-locking nuts (2 ) .
12
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (3).
13
Install two flat washers , screws ( 1 ) , and nuts .
14
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON.
15
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
16
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF.
17
At distribution box (fig . C) , connect W445P1 to J18.
18
At Signal Data Recorder- Reproducer Set A95A6
1
700000
(fig . D ) , loosen 21 captive screws and pull unit forward . FIGURE D
19
At Power Distribution Box A95A8 (fig . E), disconnect W445P2 from J17.
J24
J26
8
J16 J17
JIB
A-
FIGURE E
CONTINUED
3-146
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 ER TRIPES
3-28 .
20
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
veflat
IfCOMPUTER does not trip : Go to step 21 . IfCOMPUTER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
21
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , install shielding gasket (4 ) and secure with five flat washers and self-locking nuts ( 2 ) .
22
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (3).
23
Install two flat washers , screws ( 1 ) , and nuts .
24
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
25
At power distribution box ( fig . E) , connect W445P2 to J17.
26
At Power Supply A25 (fig . F) , set WCC to OFF .
27
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
A8724 WCC ANDRT-ON5KYST ON
OFF OFF ABB UHI ANDRT-134 ON ONKYST DLT OR ANTCONT OFF
OFF
OFF
FIGURE F If COMPUTER does not trip :
Go to step 28.
If COMPUTER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
28
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
29
At power supply (fig . F) , set WCC to ON .
CONTINUED
3-147
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-28.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
30
At power distribution box access cover (fig . G) , loosen 14 captive screws and remove access cover.
31
At power distribution box (fig . E) , disconnect W3P1 from J19 .
32
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON . 1
IfCOMPUTER does not trip : a . Replace Signal Data RecorderReproducer Set A95A6 per para 4-105.
FIGURE G
b. Go to step 33.
IfCOMPUTER trips :
Go to step 36.
33
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
34
At power distribution box ( fig . E ) , connect W3P1 to J19.
35
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
If COMPUTER does not trip : a . Install signal distribution box access cover (fig . G) and secure with 14 captive screws . b. Install signal data recorder- reproducer set (fig . D) and secure with 21 captive screws .
c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfCOMPUTER trips :
Call Intermediate Mai... enance .
36
At power distribution box (fig . E ) , connect W3P1 to J19 .
37
Disconnect W12P2 from J20.
CONTINUED
3-148
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR- COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED
TRIPPE 3-28.
FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
38
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
IfCOMPUTER does not trip : a . Replace Input /Output Processor A95A 13 power supply PS1 per para 4-114.
b . Go to step 39 . IfCOMPUTER trips : Go to step 42.
39
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
40
At power distribution box (fig . E) , connect W12P2 to J20.
41
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
IfCOMPUTER does not trip : a . Install signal distribution box access cover (fig . G ) and secure with 14 captive screws . b . Install signal data recorder- reproducer set ( fig . D) and secure with 21 captive screws . c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfCOMPUTER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
42
At power distribution box (fig . E ) , connect W12P2 to J20.
43
Disconnect W14P2 from J22.
44
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
If COMPUTER does not trip : a. Replace Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 power supply PS1 per para 4-111 .
b. Go to step 45.
CONTINUED
T
3-149
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-28 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
44
-Continued
If COMPUTER trips : Go to step 48 .
45
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
46
At power distribution box ( fig . E ) , connect W14P2 to J22.
47
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
If COMPUTER does not trip : a . Install signal distribution box access cover (fig . G) and secure with 14 captive screws . b. Install signal data recorder- reproducer set (fig . D ) and secure with 21 captive screws.
c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If COMPUTER trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
148
At power distribution box (fig . E ) , connect W14P2 to J22.
49
Disconnect W13P2 from J23.
50
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
If COMPUTER does not trip : a. Replace Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 power supply
PS1 per para 4-111 .
b. Go to step 51 . If COMPUTER trips : Go to step 54 . 51
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
CONTINUED
3-150
RTRIPPE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-28.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR- COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
52
At power distribution box (fig . E) , connect W13P2 to J23.
53
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON
If COMPUTER does not trip: a . Install signal distribution box access cover (fig . G) and secure with 14 captive screws . b. Install signal data recorder- reproducer set (fig . D) and secure with 21 captive screws. c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If COMPUTER trips:
urewith Call Intermediate Maintenance .
rewill
54
At power distribution box ( fig . E) , connect W 13P2 to J23.
55
Disconnect W11P2 from J25.
56
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON
If COMPUTER does not trip: a. Replace Peripheral Control Unit A95A 14 power supply PS1 per para 4-111 .
b. Go to step 57. If COMPUTER trips :
Go to step 60.
57
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF
58
At power distribution box ( fig . E) , connect W11P2 to J25.
59
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON
If
COMPUTER does not trip :
a . Install signal distribution box access cover (fig . G) and secure with 14 captive screws. b. Install signal data recorder- reproducer set (fig . D ) and
CONTINUED secure with 21 captive screws .
c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-151
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-28.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-COMPUTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
59
-Continued
If COMPUTER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
60
At power distribution box (fig . E ) , connect W11P2 to J25 .
61
Disconnect W42P2 from J24.
62
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON .
If COMPUTER does not trip : a . Replace Lower Fan Assembly A95A4 per para 4-103.
b. Go to step 63.
If COMPUTER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
63
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
64
At power distribution box (fig . E) , connect W42P2 to J24.
65
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to ON.
If COMPUTER does not trip : a . Install signal distribution box access cover ( fig . G) and secure with 14 captive screws .
b. Install signal data recorder- reproducer set (fig . D) and secure with 21 captive screws .
c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If COMPUTER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-152
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-GAS FILTER UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER
3-29.
TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
切
10
RO
AD
SI
DE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
00
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Wrench, Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In.
1 At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set GAS FILTER UNIT to ON.
SPPERPHYFIB FORASP
SECOM PR RANS PRINTER EELIRTERM 01 OFF SPLAY CONTROL ROADKISE
RUEDINTIME TRVIC POWERSUPPLY 環線 LAP 51% AUT-3 POWER . BOT-2 ACADSIDE BOT SECURE F CEREDEY FWD
TUGA
PRYOC PRENBEST CONTROL BELETES 1 G OFF TELEPO TE 2011ONTROL ROADSIDE UNIT CONVERTED ΥΠΑ CONTROL OFF STILITYPOWER 12 40047 EXTERIAL ERECT UTERAL 10 ors DANGER 208 VOLTS
CURSSION
If GAS FILTER UNIT does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If GAS FILTER UNIT trips :
Go to step 2 .
DICE PREPLY
TIDER B
TRIPPE
OFF MECARICAL WEIGHT 174LELIFT
FIGURE A
2 At distribution box exterior (fig . B ) , disconnect W20P1 from GPFU .
CONTINUED
3-153
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-29.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-GAS FILTER UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
3
Continued
At distribution box (fig . A) , set GAS FILTER UNITto ON
If GAS FILTER UNIT does not trip :
AIR COND CS
GPFU
AIR COND RS
208 VAC 400 HZ Call Intermediate Maintenance . BATTERY INPUT POWER 28 VDC
UHF AMG PWR AMP 208 VAC 400 HZ
INPUT POWER 208 VAC 400 HZ
UTILITY POWER 120 VAC
If GAS FILTER UNIT trips : a. Replace Distribution Box A66 CB32
b. Go to step 4.
4
At distribution box (fig . A) , set GAS FILTER UNIT to ON.
If GAS FILTER UNIT does not trip : Go to step 5.
If GAS FILTER UNIT trips :
61
Call Intermediate Maintenance.
5
Set GAS FILTER UNIT to OFF.
6
At distribution box exterior (fig . B) , connect W20P 1 to GPFU .
7
At distribution box (fig . A) , set GAS FILTER UNIT to ON.
8
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-154
GND
FIGURE B
D
per para 4-81 .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
EAKER
3-30.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- TELEPHONE CONVERTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
Dx
ARC
02
THEING PAR P 22 40%
20:7:74.
C
J DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
ROA
DSI
B
DE
TELEPHONE SIGNAL CONVERTER A38
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Handle , Socket Wrench , Ratchet, 3/8 In . Drive Socket , Socket-Wrench , 3/8 In . Drive - 3/8 In. Wrench , Box / Open End 3/8 In.
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set TELEPHONE CONVERTER to ON .
WORKINGTIRE
WFT
SELA TER T 1
CURSSION
ZEROC AFTERY HOWERSUPPLY LAMP TEST
C 口
1
SECOSE FR RELAYTEAM ON DEP OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL COMMON
NOTRECURE PR ΓΕ
AFT OFF thea CONTROL PEEcomeGLY PU DISPLAY
To:7 IfTELEPHONE CONVERTER does not trip :
7
POWER
070FILTER
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
TELEPHO SSASSION HEATERS CONTROL CONTROL bert00 CONVERTER DET UTILITYPOWER DFF EXTERNAL MASTERECT ANTR DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHERICH WEIGHT3THLASLOT
FIGURE A
IfTELEPHONE CONVERTER trips:
Go to step 2 . CONTINUED
3-155
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-30.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-TELEPHONE CONVERTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
2
Isolate Telephone Signal Converter A38 (fig . B) as follows :
a. Remove eight screws , lockwashers , and flat washers .
a
DUE TO SIZE AND WEIGHT, TWO Le PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO SAFELY WARNING MOVE TELEPHONE SIGNAL A38 .
b. Pull telephone signal converter out from equipment rack far enough to reach cables . c. At rear of telephone signal converter (fig . C) , disconnect W439P2 from J4.
J4 O
J5
J6 0
ال
J2
J3
FIGURE B
J8
O
O
FIGURE C
d. At distribution box (fig . A), set TELEPHONE CONVERTER to ON.
If TELEPHONE CONVERTER does not trip : (1 ) Replace Telephone Signal Converter A38 per para 4-35. (2) Go to step 3.
If TELEPHONE CONVERTER trips :
Go to step 4. 3
At distribution box , set TELEPHONE CONVERTER to ON.
If TELEPHONE CONVERTER does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If TELEPHONE CONVERTER trips :
Go to step 4.
3-156
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
R CIRCUT
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- TELEPHONE CONVERTER CIRCUIT
3-30.
BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
4
Access Distribution Box A66J9 as follows:
a. At Distribution Box A66 (fig . D) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
b. Remove 13 screws , lockwashers , and flat washers (3). c. Remove five self- locking nuts ( 2 ) and flat washers.
2 d. Remove shielding gasket (4). FIGURE D 5
At distribution box (fig . E ) , disconnect W439P1 from J9.
J22
J18
J15
J21 J23
J28
O
J20
J17 J19 J16
J6
J7
J4
J12
J9
J13
J27
J30
J14
J5
J8
J3
J11
·A·
FIGURE E
6 At rear of telephone signal converter (fig . C) , connect W439P2 to J4.
7 At distribution box (fig . A) , set TELEPHONE CONVERTER to ON .
If TELEPHONE CONVERTER does not trip:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If TELEPHONE CONVERTER trips : ( 1 ) Replace circuit breaker A66CB 18 per para 4-82 .
(2) Go to step 8. CONTINUED
3-157
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-TELEPHONE CONVERTER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-30 .
8
At distribution box, setTELEPHONE CONVERTER toON .
IfTELEPHONE CONVERTER trips : a. Replace Distribution Box A66 per para 4-71 .
b. Go to step 9 .
IfTELEPHONE CONVERTER does not trip: a . At distribution box ( fig . E ) , connect W439P 1 to J9. b. Install distribution box shielding gasket ( fig . D) as follows : ( 1 ) Install shielding gasket (4) . (2) Secure gasket with two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts . (3) Secure gasket with 13 screws , lockwashers , and flat washers (3) . (4) Secure gasket with five self- locking nuts (2 ) and flat washers .
C.
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
9
At distribution box (fig . A) , set TELEPHONE CONVERTER to ON .
IfTELEPHONE CONVERTER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance.
If TELEPHONE CONVERTER does not trip: Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-158
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 CIRCUIT 3-31 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
0000
ZE 188
נון
5.
hers J
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
ers. RO
AD
SI
DE
POWER SUPPLY A39
Tools and Equipment Required .
Wrench , Open End , 3/8 In . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Marker, Tube Type
Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In . Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In . Handle , Socket Wrench , Ratchet , 3/8 In . Drive Socket, Socket-Wrench , 3/8 In . Drive 1/4 In. Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 1 , 8 In . Key, Socket Head , Hexagon 3/32 In.
CONTINUED
3-159
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
EPPINPUTPWR AMS PWRUHF AMPL
SECUREPWR BELAYRADIOTERM ON ON 3 ON OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIDE CURBSIDE ON OFF OFF BWCIU ALBIU ON DR OFFTo OFF COMPUTER MODEMS ON ON OFF T OFF VOICE GAS FILTER COMMO PWRSPLY UNIT ON OFF OFF
AIRCORD ROADSIDE
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip :
AIR COND CURBSID E
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that
BATTERY POWER
brought you to this
paragraph .
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips:
RUNNINGTIME PRINTER ON OFF
SYS BAT-1 ABT-2 2017-1
BATTERY POWER
ZBYDC POWERSUPPLY STYUS
"
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
近
TEST
BOT RECUREPWR CURBSIDE ROADSIDE FANS AFT FRO FLAS AFT DR ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF BADIO 28YDC PWNDIST RELAYTERN DISPLAY PWBSPLY Сомно UNITPWR CONTROL 1 7 1 SPLYON OR ON ON ON 09 OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF UNFART ROADSIDE LIENT TELEPRORE TERM HEATERS CONTROL CONTROL UNIT CONVERTER ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF UTILITYPOWER DLT 120WC 400NZ INTERNAL EXTERNAL MASTERECT OR OFF
FWD
G
3-31 .
1
DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL WEIGHT 178 LIFT 1.85
1
Go to step 2 . FIGURE A
DUE TO AWKWARD SIZE , CAREFUL HANDLING IS REQUIRED TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT .
CAUTION
2
At Power Supply A39 (fig . B) , release four captive screws securing power
POWER SUPPLY FAULTГ + 12.6VDC - 12.6VDC + 5VDC TEST
supply front panel to equipment rack
RESET
and slide assembly out on its slides.
FIGURE B 3
At rear of power supply (fig . C) , disconnect W 19P2 from J1 and slide assembly back into equipment rack. 50
4
At distribution box (fig . A) , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY
does not trip: Go to step 5 .
0
FIGURE C
000
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips:
Go to step 23 . CONTINUED
ww
ww
3-160
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
CIRCUIT
VOLTS
3-31 .
5
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
At distribution box, set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF and slide power supply (fig . C) out on its slides.
6
Connect W19P2 to J1 .
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE (208VAC) IS PRESENT IN EQUIPMENT UNTIL WARNING PROPER CIRCUIT BREAKER IS SET TO OFF .
7
At power supply ( fig . C) , remove top access cover by releasing 22 rotary fasteners.
8
At power supply (fig . D ) , remove four screws and rim clamps ( 2 ) securing fan to plenum and move fan for access to terminal block ( 1 ).
9
Identify and mark leads connected to terminal block in vaneaxial fan .
0 PS2 PS1
Disconnect three leads from fan terminal block.
ease
ver
Eck
11
es.
Tape exposed ends of three disconnected leads and position so as not to come in contact with each other
POWE SUPPLY FAULT R
or any part of the power supply chassis .
1 12
Slide power supply (fig . C) back on its slides into equipment rack .
2 FIGURE D
13
At distribution box (fig . A) , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip : a. Replace Power Supply Vaneaxial Fan A39B1 per para 4-37.
b. Go to step 14.
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips :
Go to step 15.
CONTINUED
3-161
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION_Continued
3-31 .
14
At distribution box (fig . A) , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
La
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 208VAC) IS PRESENT IF PROPER CIRCUIT
WARNING BREAKER IS NOT SET TO OFF.
15
At distribution box , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF .
1
When installing fan , orient so that terminal block is on top . NOTE
16
At power supply (fig . C) , pull power supply out on its slides .
a. Connect leads on terminal block per marking on wires (fig . D) . 1
b. Install four screws and rim clamps securing fan to plenum (2) . c. Disconnect P1 from PS1J1 . d. Slide power supply back on its slides into equipment rack .
17
At distribution box (fig . A) , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip : a. Replace Power Supply Analog 3 PS1 per para 4-38 .
b. Go to step 18 . If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLYtrips : Go to step 19.
CONTINUED
3-162 T
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ROUT 3-31 .
18
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
At distribution box , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip :
aragra
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
19
At power supply (fig . C) , pull equipment rack out on its slides .
CUIT a. Connect P1 to PS1J1 ( fig . D) . b. Disconnect P2 from PS2J1 . c. Slide power supply back on its slides into equipment rack .
20
At distribution box (fig . A) , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip : a. Replace Power Supply Analog 1 PS2 per para 4-38.
b. Go to step 21 . If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips : a. Replace Power Supply A39 per para 4-39.
b. Go to step 22 . 21
At distribution box , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
IfVOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
22
At distribution box, set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
IfVOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip :
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-163
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-31 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
1 23
Remove shielding gasket (4 , fig . E) as follows :
1 a. At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . E ) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts.
1 இ.
0
O 0
0
4
0
O 0 2
O
118
317
123
J30
J28 -A-
FIGURE E
b. Remove 13 screws (3 ) , lockwashers , and flat washers . c. Remove five self- locking nuts , (2 ) and flat washers . Remove shielding gasket.
d. Disconnect A 19P 1 from J28.
24
At distribution box (fig . A) , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLYto ON
If
VOICE COMMO PWR SPLYdoes not trip :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
if VOICE COMMO PWR SPLYtrips :
a . Replace circuit breaker A66CB28 per para 4-81 . D
b. Go to step 25 .
3-164
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
IRCUT
3-31 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
25
At distribution box (fig . A) , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
andnote
IfVOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfVOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 per para 4-71 .
b. Go to step 26 .
26
At distribution box , set VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
IfVOICE COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If VOICE COMMO PWR SPLY trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
10
3-165
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT
3-32.
BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41
O
נ RO
AD
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
SI
DE
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Wrench , Box /Open End 3/8 In.
EPP PATPS
OFE OFF OFF DEPLAY&CONTROL COREDIOL DEF
to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If UHF ANT CONTROL
VOICE COMMO FOREPLY
OFF
NOTDECOR FOR Fore ad
ToTol
Fault corrected . Return
TAMP
TRY
PORTER ACB COND RGARDIOL
If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT remains ON :
SECUSEPOL
୮
角色
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON .
HO
1
ON DEF DEF CRESENTERE 九聊 MEAFERS CONTROL CONTROL FELEPHON DT BY UTILITYPOWER LATERAL
DANGER 208 VOLTS MECHANICAL WEST 17 LIFY( 3 FIGURE A
UNIT trips : Go to step 2.
3-166
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
CRO 3-32 .
2
At distribution box (fig . B ) , remove two screws (2 ) , flat washers, and nuts .
3
Remove 13 screws ( 1 ), lockwashers , and flat washers .
2 4
Remove five nuts (3) and flat washers . Remove shielding gasket (4). 0 O O
0:00
J17 19
328
J30
O O
3
18
FIGURE B
-A-
5
Disconnect W469P1 from J30.
6 At distribution box ( fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON .
If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT remains ON :
Go to step 8. If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT trips : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 CB 19 per para 4-81 .
b. Go to step 7 .
7 At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON .
If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT remains ON :
Go to step 14. If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
8 At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to OFF .
3-167
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT
3-32.
BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
9
Connect W469P 1 to J30 (fig . B ) .
Le WARNING
DUE TO OVERHEAD POSITION , TWO PEOPLE ARE REQUIRED TO REMOVE OR INSTALL ANTENNA CONTROL .
At Antenna Control A41
AC DC OO POWER
(fig . C) , loosen four
ANTENNA
ANTENNA POSITION 10
STOP
ON ON ON captive screws and pull unit out to access rear.
ANTENNA SELECT BITE! 4
H AMS EADING
ANTENNA STOW
STOP FA STOP ROTATE Cow cw AMS HEADING FIGURE C
J2
ال
J4
J3 J5
J6
J7
O
J8
11
At rear of antenna control (fig . D) disconnect W469P2 from J4.
FIGURE D
12
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON. If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT remains ON: a. Replace Antenna Control A41 per para 4-41 .
b. Go to step 13.
If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
13
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON. If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT remains ON:
Go to step 17. If UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance . 14
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNITto OFF .
CONTINUED
3-168
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
CIROU 3-32 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
15
At distribution box (fig . B ) , connect W469P1 to J30 .
16
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON .
17
At distribution box (fig . B) , install shielding gasket (4) and secure with 13 screws ( 1 ),
TO
lockwashers , and flat washers .
Install five nuts (3) and flat washers .
19
Install two screws (2) , flat washers , and nuts .
20
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
یکاک
18
trol ( A
M
3-169
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-33.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- ROADSIDE HEATERS CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
1 I
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
ROA
DSI
DE HEATER A2
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 10 In . Wrench, Box / Open End , 3/8 In. Handle, Socket- Wrench , Ratchet , 1/4 In . Drive Socket , Socket- Wrench , 1/4 In . Drive - 3 / 8 In .
1
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set ROADSIDE HEATERS to ON . G coo ARADSIDE
SCURSFR BEL TERM B DISPLAY CONT ANSIDEON
TUNNERIRE PRINTCO OFF
POWER卷
回
NETSEZON PAR
ROARCIDE
[1]
If ROADSIDE HEATERS trips:
308
KINCOND соев
Go to step 2.
COFF COMPUTRX
If ROADSIDE HEATERS does not trip :
1
STERK POWER
[ T ] COUND 2011 BIT $ ]
ori Cove ROADSIDE HEATERS CONTRO OFF THISPELA
CONVERTER
DANGER 208 VOLTS Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CHANICALKRZ BOUR FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-170
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
CIRCUIT 3-33.
2
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- ROADSIDE HEATERS CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
Isolate fault to Heater A2 as follows :
a. At heater (fig . B) , release four captive screws and remove access panel . Ꮻ
の
b. At heater (fig . C) , disconnect W438P2 from J1 . c. At distribution box (fig . A) , set ROADSIDE HEATERS to ON.
000 о
If ROADSIDE HEATERS trips : ( 1 ) Connect W438P2 to J1 (fig . C) .
O
(2) Install access cover and secure with four captive screws ( fig . B) .
J1
(3) Go to step 3.
FIGURE B
If ROADSIDE HEATERS does not trip :
FIGURE C ( 1 ) Replace heater A2 per para 4-6 . (2) Go to step 5.
3
Isolate fault to distribution box as follows :
a. At distribution box (fig . D) , remove two screws (1 ), flat washers , and nuts . b. Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers, and flat washers .
c. Remove five self- locking nuts (3) and flat washers . Remove shielding gasket (2 ). d . At distribution box (fig . E) , disconnect W438P 1 from J8.
J18
310
J21 J23 J28
2
OOO
J22
OOO
320
J17 J19 J16
J30
J14
J8
J11
FIGURE E
FIGURE D CONTINUED
3-171
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-33 .
3
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-ROADSIDE HEATERS CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued
e. At distribution box (fig . A) , set ROADSIDE HEATERS to ON
If ROADSIDE HEATERS trips : ( 1 ) Replace CB 16 per para 4-81 . (2) Connect W438P1 to J8 (fig . E ) .
(3) Go to step 4.
If ROADSIDE HEATERS does not trip : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
4
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set ROADSIDE HEATERS to ON.
If ROADSIDE HEATERS trips : ( 1 ) Replace Distribution Box A66 per para 4-71 . (2) Go to step 5.
If ROADSIDE HEATERS does not trip : Fault corrected , at distribution box ( fig . E ) , install shielding gasket by installing five self-locking nuts ( 2) , flat washers , two screws ( 1 ) , and flat washers and 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
5
At distribution box (fig . A) , set ROADSIDE HEATERS to ON.
If ROADSIDE HEATERS trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance.
If ROADSIDE HEATERS does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph.
3-172
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
CUIT 3-34.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-RWCIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
jo
ROA
DSI
DE
DE
BSI
CUR
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 CABLE LINK PROCESSOR A 106
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 10 In . Wrench , Box /Open End 3/8 In .
t by Pliers , Slip -Joint 8 In .
andfe
EPPUPOTPWR UBFAS PWRAMPL AINROADSIDE COND
AIR COND CURBSIDE
If RWCIU trips: Go to step 2.
If RWCIU does not trip:
BATTERY POWER
BATTERY POWER
28VDC POWERSUPPLY SUTUS
LAP TEST ON OFF
NOT SECUREPR CURBSIDE ROADSIDE FWD BLUS AFT FWD BUES AFT ON ON ON 0 OFF OFF OFF OFF 28YDC RADIO FORDIST DISPLAY COMMO GELATTERS BITFUN SPLY OR CONTROLON PWBSPLY 7 3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF URFANT LIBS BAD TELEPHONE ROADSIDE LIGHT CONTROL BRIT CONVERTER TER HEATERS CONTROL ст ON ON ON OFF ad OFF OFF OFF OFF UTILITYPOWER 120 400KZ EXTERNAL MASTERECT ON GN ON OFF OFF ස්ත රී
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set RWCIU to ON .
RUNNINGTIME STE EXT-1 BAY-2 FO
1
SECURE PWR PRINTER 24010 1 ON BEL ONTERM O OFF OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL BOADSIDE CURBSIDE ON ON OFF DFF RWCIU ALBRI ON ON OFF OFF COMPUTER MODEMS D OFF & OFF GAS VOICE COMMO FILTER LEWET PWSPLY ON ON OFF OFF
DANGER 208 VOLTS Return to procedure that brought you to
this paragraph .
MECHANICAL LIET WEIGHT 178LES
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-173
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR- RWCIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED
3-34 .
FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
2
At distribution box (fig . B ): a. Remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers and nuts . b. Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers and flat washers .
c. Remove five self-locking nuts (2 ) , flat washers and remove shielding gasket .
1
" 3 2 FIGURE B
A 3
Disconnect W13P1 from J20 (fig . C).
0
FIGURE C
A 4
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RWCIU to ON .
If RWCIU trips: a. Replace CB4 per para 4-81 .
b. Go to step 5 . If RWCIU does not trip : Go to step 6. 5
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RWCIU to ON.
If RWCIU trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance.
If RWCIU does not trip:
Go to step 13 .
3-174
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
PPED DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR- RWCIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-34.
6
At distribution box ( fig . A) , setRWCIU to OFF .
7
Connect W 13P 1 to J20 (fig . C) .
La
DATA LINK TERMINAL (DLT) ACCESS DOOR IS LARGE . TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO REMOVE OR INSTALL DOOR.
WARNING
8
Remove three hinge pins and remove DLT access door.
9
At Cable Link Processor A 106 ( fig . D ) , loosen four captive screws and pull unit fully out.
Fig. Cl
19
Q ee
D
P
9
20
9 e
10
9
9
A
8
FIGURE D
10
Disconnect W13P2 from J5 (fig . D) .
11
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RWCIU to ON.
If RWCIU trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-175
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-34.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR- RWCIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
11
-Continued
If RWCIU does not trip : a. Replace Cable Link Processor A 106 per paragraph 4-122. b. Go to step 12 .
12
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RWCIU to ON .
If RWCIU trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance . If RWCIU does not trip :
Go to step 13.
13
At distribution box (fig . B):
a. Install five self- locking nuts (2 ) and flat washers securing shielding gasket .
b. Install 13 screws (3) , lockwashers and flat washers . c. Install two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers and nuts . d . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-176
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
PPED 3-35.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-RLRIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
00
HAO
נווץ
J RO
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
AD
SI
DE
ROUTING LOGIC RADIO INTERFACE UNIT A46
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Wrench , Spintight 3/8 In. Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In . Gloves , Leather
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , observe RLRIU .
EPPCUTFIE
SECUREF
PRINTER
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If RLRIUIS OFF:
AINCONT WORDSIDE
ROADSIDE
FOR
CURBSIDY ·T BUTERY FIWEL WORCE
OFF PRISER eat
Go to step 2 .
2
Set RLRIU to ON-
SEST
。
MET
NOTSECUREPet Swa
27 Ofe PAPEN KILM TEPR1 PLE CONNOS ON 00 Off ( CONTROL TELEPHONE LOTEA WWEKS CONTRO DAY ATKITYPONTR 201 TER POW BODY EXTRAC OH DANGER 208 VOLTS
G
If RLRIU IS ON :
09 GSEPEAT CONTRO ACASSION O!?
ANTERY POWER
STSB
09
G
1
MECHANICAL WEIGHT:278S(97
FIGURE A
If RLRIU remains ON: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If RLRIU trips :
Go to step 3. CONTINUED
T
3-177
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR- RLRIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT
3-35.
ISOLATION - Continued
3
At distribution box (fig . B ) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts. 1
A
0
323 328
OOO OO DOO O-
2
000
3
1 FIGURE B
-A-
4
Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
5
Remove five self- locking nuts (2 ) and flatwashers . Remove shielding gasket .
6
Disconnect W15P1 from J22.
7
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RLRIU to ON .
If RLRIU remains ON :
Go to step 9.
If RLRIU trips : a. Replace Distribution Box A66 CB5 per para 4-81 .
b. Go to step 8. 8
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RLRIU to ON .
If RLRIU remains ON : a. At distribution box (fig . A) , set RLRIU to OFF .
b. Connect W15P1 to J22 ( fig . B) . c. Install shielding gasket and secure with five self - locking nuts ( 2 ) and flatwashers .
d . Install 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
3-178
CONTINUED
་
PED FA
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-35 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR- RLRIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
8
Continued
-Continued
e.
Install two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
f.
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RLRIU to ON
g.
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If RLRIU trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
9
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RLRIU to OFF.
10
Connect W15P 1 to J22 (fig . B) .
11
Install shielding gasket and secure with five self-locking nuts ( 2 ) and flat washers .
12
Install 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers.
13
Install two screws ( 1 ) flat washers , and nuts .
14
At Routing Logic Radio Interface Unit A46 ( RLRIU) (fig . C) , disconnect W 15P2 from J1 (4).
3
2
000 4
ம
CONTINUED
FIGURE C
3-179
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-35.
15
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR-RLRIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
At distribution box A66 (fig . A) , set RLRIU to ON.
If RLRIU remains ON: Go to step 16.
If RLRIU trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
16
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RLRIU to OFF .
17
At RLRIU (fig . C) , connect W 15P2 to J1 ( 4 ) .
18
Loosen 14 captive screws ( 1 ) and pull control panel out on its slides (5 ) .
19
Loosen nine captive screws (3) and remove cover.
Le WARNING POWER SUPPLY MAY BE HOT. USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES .
20
Disconnect A46P7 from PS1J3 (2 ) .
21
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RLRIU to ON .
If RLRIU remains ON: a . Replace power supply PS1 per para 4-48 .
b. Go to step 24 .
If RLRIU trips: a. Connect A46P7 to PS1J3 (4 , fig . C). b. Replace Tubeaxial Blower A46B1 per para 4-51 .
c. Go to step 22 . 22
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RLRIU to ON.
If RLRIU remains ON : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If RLRIU trips : a. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
b. Go to step 23 .
3-180
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RIPPED
3-35.
23
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 SECURE PWR - RLRIU CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RLRIU to ON-
If RLRIU remains ON: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If RLRIU trips :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
24
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RLRIU to ON.
If RLRIU remains ON: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If RLRIU trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance.
j
3-181
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
EXTERNAL UTILITY DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR - INTERNAL POWER · 120VAC 400 HZ CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
3-36.
版
10
ROA
DSI
-00
DE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
Tools and Equipment Required .
NOTE
None
This is a multiple application procedure for INTERNAL UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ circuit breaker or EXTERNAL UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ circuit breaker . See table for units corresponding to tripped circuit
breaker.
1
At Distribution Box A66 , set UTILITY POWERto ON.
EFPINPUTPWS WHY ARES PWRAMPL COND AIRFORDSIDE
AIR COMB CURBSIDE
SECURE FUT PRINTER BELMADIOTEAM ON ON ON ON OFF off OFF OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL NOADSIDE CURBSIDE OR ON OFF OFF AWCRU 滷味 OFF COMPUTER MODE
ENTERY FOWER VOICE PWBCOMMO EPLY OFT
MECHANI CAL LIFT WEIGHT178 LUS
OFF GAS FILTER OFF
BUNNINGTIME SYS ANT BRT2
NATTERY POWER
28VOC POWERSUPPLY FOTUS
LAMP TEST ON OFF
NOTSECUREPWR CORESIDE ROADSIDE TWD BUS FWb ARS AFT ON ON ON DR OFF OFF OFF OFF RADIO ESYOC COMMO RELOTERM PWR DIST DISPLE UNEYPW SPLY08 CONTROLON PWR SPLY 單 ON OR OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF BRFANT TELEPHONE DAKLINK BOADSIDE LIGHT CONTROL HEATERS CONTROL UNIT CONVENTER TER ON ON ON BR NG OFF OFF DEF UTILITYPOW ER OL 120VAC400HZ OXTERNAL EXTERNAL MASTEBECT ON ON ON OFF OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
If UTILITY POWER does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to to this paragraph .
If UTILITY POWER trips : Go to step 2.
CONTINUED
3-182
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UTILITY TION
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR - INTERNAL EXTERNAL UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-36.
2
At distribution box ( see fig . ) , disconnect any external load from UTILITY POWER outlets .
3
SetUTILITY POWER to ON .
IfUTILITY POWER does not trip : a . Check or replace external load . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfUTILITY POWER trips : a . Replace apppropriate circuit breaker (see table) per para 4-82. b. Go to step 4 .
UTILITY POWER
CIRCUIT BREAKER
Internal
CB 13
External
CB27
ER-
ACA
4
SetUTILITY POWER toON .
cut
IfUTILITY POWER does not trip: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfUTILITY POWER trips : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 per para 4-71 .
b. Go to step 5.
5
SetUTILITY POWER toON .
IfUTILITY POWER does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfUTILITY POWER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-183
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-37.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
ENCLOSURE BLACKOUT SWITCH A4
A49
(INSIDE ABOVE DOOR)
BLACKOUT CURTAIN
LIGHT PANEL A85
1 DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
RO
AD
SI
E
ID
DE
BS
R CU
MAN STATION 3
BLACKOUT
DISTRIBUTION
LIGHTING
ENVIRONMENTAL
CURTAIN
BOX A66
CONTROL PANEL A71
CONTROL PANEL
TRANSFORMER ASSEMBLY A111 (BEHIND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
PANEL)
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Tape , Masking Marker, Tube Type Pliers , Connector , Electrical Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 8 In . , 3/8 In . Wide Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 10 In . , 1/4 In. Wide Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In.
CONTINUED
3-184
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
IT BREA 3-37.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 115VAC) IS PRESENT IN ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL PANEL WHEN LIGHT CONTROL IS ON.
WARNING
OUT IN
RMER YA111 D ENTAL
WEL TESO 1
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON.
PROTEN
POWERSUPPLY
DEPLAY CONTROL
WT OFF CONTROL FORSPLT PLY RIPLE OFF OFF OFF CONTROL CONTROL CONVERTER B OFF OFF STILITYPRUCE 1200CADR EXTERNAL
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : MILLY POWER
Go to step 2.
POWLS
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL WEIGHT 1781.00LIFT
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . FIGURE A
709025 090 6 -
2
At distribution box , perform the following :
a. At distribution box (fig . B) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers and nuts . b. Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers and flat washers .
OL
J
c. Remove five self- locking nuts ( 2 ) and flat washers and remove shielding gasket (4) . d. Disconnect W444P 1 from A66J15 ( fig . C) . 2
J21
J22
J28
J12 J30
J10
J14
JS
J8
J11
O
J23
J15
OOO
J18
OOO
J20
J17 J19 J16
FIGURE B
&*
TOP VIEW CONTINUED FIGURE C
T
3-185
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-37.
3
At distribution box (fig . A) , setLIGHT CONTROL
toON
ILIGHT CONTROL trips : a . ReplaceCB22
per para 4-82 .
b. Go to step 5 .
IFLIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
Go to step 4 .
4
At distribution box ( fig . A) , setLIGHT CONTROL toOFF and perform the following:
1
a. Connect W444P1 to J15 ( fig . C) . b . Install shielding gasket (4 , fig . B ) and secure with five self- locking nuts ( 2) and flat washers . c. Install 13 screws ( 3 ) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
d . Install two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
e. Go to step 7.
LO
5
At distribution box (fig . A) , setLIGHT CONTROL toON .
IfLIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfLIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
Go to step 6.
6
SetLIGHT CONTROL to OFF and perform the following : a. Connect W444P1 to J15 (fig . C). b . Install shielding gasket (4 , fig . B ) and secure with five self- locking nuts (2) and flat washers .
c. Install 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers.
d . Install two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers, and nuts . e. Set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . f.
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CONTINUED
T
3-186
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
IT BREA
3-37.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
7
At Environmental Control Panel (fig . D), perform
2
the following :
a. Loosen four captive screws ( 1 ) . b. Release panel retainer ( 2 ) . Pull panel out and swing down to access rear of Lighting Control Panel A71 ( fig . E) . เจ ง
8
following
909
At rear of lighting control panel ( fig . E ) , identify , mark,and tag W55 leads connected to TB2-1 and TB2-2 .
900
07
(2)ar
FIGURE D
TO AVOID WIRING OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE , INSURE THAT DISCONNECTED LEADS ARE POSITIONED SO THAT THEY REMAIN CLEAR OF THE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL AND EACH OTHER .
CAUTION
TB2-6 TB2-5 TB2-4 TB2-3 TB2-2
TB2-1 O
1001 1801
O
lo ol
and
1001
1001 ब्ब
10
1011011
O
TB1-6 TB1-5 TB1-2 TB1-1
FIGURE E
9
10
Disconnect W55 leads from TB2-1 and TB2-2 .
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON.
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : a . Connect W55 leads to TB2-1 and TB2-2 (fig . E) . Remove tags .
CONTINUED
b. Go to step 11 . T
3-187
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-37.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
10
-Continued
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : a . At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF.
b. Connect W55 leads to TB2-1 and TB2-2 (fig . E ) . Remove tags . c. Go to step 20.
11
At rear of lighting control panel (fig . E ) perform the following : a. Identify and tag W280 leads at TB 1-5 and TB 1-6 . Disconnect leads .
b. Identify and tag W281 lead at TB2-4 . Disconnect lead .
12
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON,
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Go to step 13.
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : a. At distribution box , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b . At rear of lighting control panel (fig . E ) connect W280 leads to TB1-5 and TB1-6. Remove tags .
c. Go to step 30.
13
If not already open , open shelter door.
14
If not already open blackout curtain .
15
At lighting control panel (fig . F) , set NORMAL- OFF- MAINTENANCE switch to
e LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
NORMAL
NORMAL 16
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROLto ON.
OFF
If LIGHT CONTROL trips :
C
MAX MIN AISLE LAMPS
E POWER MAINTENANC ON O
FIGURE F a . Replace Lighting Control Panel A71 per para 4-91 . b. Go to step 19.
CONTINUED
3-188
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 IT BREAKE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-37 .
16
Continued
IfLIGHT CONTROL does not trip : a. ReplaceNORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE switch A71S1 per para 4-92.
ags.
b. Go to step 17.
17
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON .
IFLIGHT CONTROL trips : a . Replace Lighting Control Panel A71 per para 4-91 .
b. Go to step 18. IfLIGHT CONTROL does not trip : a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b. At rear of lighting control panel (fig . E) , connect W280 leads to TB1-5 and TB1-6. Remove tags . c. Identify , tag , and disconnect W281 lead from TB2-4 . d . At distribution box (fig . A) , setLIGHT CONTROL toON .
OTB
e. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
18 At distribution box ( fig . A) , setLIGHT CONTROL toON .
IfLIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfLIGHT CONTROL does not trip : a . SetLIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b. At rear of lighting control panel (fig . E) , connect W280 leads to TB 1-5 and TB 1-6. Remove tags . c. Disconnect W281 lead from TB2-4.
d . At distribution box (fig . A) , setLIGHT CONTROL to ON . e. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
19
At distribution box ( fig . A ) , setLIGHT CONTROL toON .
IfLIGHT CONTROL trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
T
3-189
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-37.
19
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Continued
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
a. Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b. At rear of lighting control panel ( fig . E ) connect W280 leads to TB 1-5 and TB 1-6. Remove tags . c. Identify , tag , and disconnect W281 lead from TB2-4 . d . At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . e. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph.
TO AVOID WIRING OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE , INSURE THAT DISCONNECTED LEADS ARE POSITIONED SO THAT THEY REMAIN CLEAR OF THE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL AND EACH OTHER. CAUTION
20
At Transformer A111 (fig . G ) , perform the following : 1
b. Identify, tag , and disconnect transformer lead from TB1-2 .
21
DANGER,
a. Remove four screws ( 1 ) , lockwashers , and flat washers , and remove safety shield (2 ).
2
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON.
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : a . Connect transformer lead to TB1-2
FIGURE G
(fig . G) . Remove tag .
b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip: a . Replace Transformer A111 per para 4-123 .
b. Go to step 22. 22
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON .
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Go to step 23. If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
CONTINUED Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-190
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 BREAKE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-37.
TO AVOID WIRING OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE , INSURE THAT DISCONNECTED LEADS ARE POSITIONED SO THAT THEY REMAIN CLEAR OF THE LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL AND EACH OTHER.
toTB CAUTION
23
At transformer ( fig . G ) , perform the following : a. Remove four screws ( 1 ) , lockwashers , and flat washers , and remove safety shield (2) . b. Identify, tag , and disconnect W84 leads from TB 1-6 and TB1-8.
Le HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC FOR DS1 THROUGH DS5 ; 28VAC FOR WARNING LIGHT PANEL ASSEMBLIES A49 AND A85 ) IS PRESENT THROUGHOUT COMPARTMENT LIGHTING WHEN LIGHT CONTROL IS SET TO ON .
24
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON .
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : a. At transformer ( fig . G) connect W84 leads TB1-6 and TB1-8 . Remove tags . b. Identify , tag , and disconnect W65 leads from TB1-6 and TB1-8.
c. Go to step 26. If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : a. Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
b. At transformer (fig . G ) , connect W84 leads TB 1-6 and TB 1-8 . Remove tags . c. Install safety shield and secure with four screws , flat washers , and lockwashers . d. Replace Light Panel Assembly A49 per para 4-52.
e. Go to step 25. 25
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
CONTINUED
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-191
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-37.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
26
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROLto ON If LIGHT CONTROLtrips : a . At transformer (fig . G ) , connect W65 leads to TB 1-6 and TB1-8. Remove tags .
b. Install safety shield ( 2 ) and secure with four screws ( 1 ) , lockwashers, and flat washers . c. At rear of lighting control panel ( fig . E ) , identify, mark , tag and disconnect XDS 1-1 lead from TB 1-5 and XDS 1-2 from TB 1-6.
d. Go to step 28. If LIGHT CONTROLdoes not trip : a . Set LIGHT CONTROLto OFF. b. At transformer (fig . G ) , connect W65 leads to TB 1-6 and TB 1-8. Remove tags . c . Install safety shield ( 2 ) and secure with four screws ( 1 ) , lockwashers, and flat washers . d . Replace Light Panel Assembly A85 per para 4-52.
e. Go to step 27.
27
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROLto ON
If LIGHT CONTROLtrips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
28
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROLto ON
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : a . At rear of lighting control panel (fig . E) , connect XDS 1-1 lead to TB1-5 and XDS1-2 lead to TB 1-6 . Remove tags .
b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip: a. Replace Lighting Control Panel A71 per para 4-91 .
b. Go to step 29. 29
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROLto ON
CONTINUED
3-192
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER
JIT BREA 3-37.
TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued 29
-Continued
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
TB1-8.
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
Ockwas Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . and
-6.
30
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON .
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Go to step 31 . If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
1-8
Go to step 43. kwaste
31
At rear of lighting control panel ( fig . E) , connect W281 lead to TB2-4 . Remove tag .
32
At shelter door locate Enclosure Blackout Switch A4 box on upper roadside interior of door jam .
TO AVOID WIRING OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE , INSURE THAT
CAUTION
DISCONNECTED LEADS ARE POSITIONED SO THAT THEY REMAIN CLEAR OF TERMINAL BOARD AND EACH OTHER .
TB1-2
TB1-4
TB1-5
TB1-6
O
E
33
At switch A4 box ( fig . H) , remove eight screws ( 2 ) and remove cover ( 1 ) .
34
Identify, tag , and disconnect W61 leads from TB1-6 and TB1-2. FIGURE H
35
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON .
If LIGHT CONTROL trips: Go to step 36 .
CONTINUED
3-193
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-37.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
35
1 1
-Continued If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
a. Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF. b. At switch box A4 (fig . H ) , connect W61 leads to TB 1-6 and TB1-2 . Remove tags . c . Install switch box cover and secure with eight screws . d. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
36
At switch box A4 (fig . H ) , connect W61 leads to TB 1-6 and TB 1-2 . Remove tags .
37
Identify , tag , and disconnect W60 leads from TB 1-4 and TB1-5.
38
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON.
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Go to step 40.
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF.
:
b. At switch box A4 ( fig . H) , connect W60 leads to TB 1-4 and TB1-5. Remove tags .
c. Install switch box cover and secure with eight screws . d . Replace curtain Blackout Switch S2 per para 5-67. e. Go to step 39.
39
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON.
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance.
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . 40
At switch box A4 (fig . H): a. Connect W60 leads to TB1-4 and TB1-5. b. Identify, tag , and disconnect two door switch S1 leads from TB1-1 .
41
3-194
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON .
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
IT BREN 3-37.
41
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance . TB1-2
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : a. Replace Actuator Switch S1 per para 5-66. b. Go to step 42.
42
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON
etags
B16
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IF LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
43
At distribution box, set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF.
44
At rear of lighting control panel (fig . E) , connect W281 lead to TB2-4 . Remove tag .
45
At man station no. 3 close environmental control panel (fig . D) swing panel up , and secure four captive screws ( 1 ) and latch panel retainer (2).
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC FOR DS1 THROUGH DS5 ; 28VAC FOR WARNING LIGHT PANELS A49 AND A85) IS PRESENT THROUGHOUT COMPARTMENT LIGHTING WHEN LIGHT CONTROL IS SET TO ON
TO AVOID WIRING OR EQUIPMENT DAMAGE , INSURE THAT
CAUTION
46
DISCONNECTED LEADS ARE POSITIONED SO THAT THEY REMAIN CLEAR OF TERMINAL BOARD AND EACH OTHER .
At lighting fixture DS5 ( fig . 1 ) , located front of interior isle , overhead , perform the following:
CONTINUED
T
3-195
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER
3-37 .
TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
46
-Continued a. Remove eight screws and flat washers . Lower lamp assembly . b. Identify , tag , and disconnect W62 leads from TB1-1 and TB1-2 (fig . J) .
FIGURE I
O
FIGURE J
47
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON .
If LIGHT CONTROL trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip :
Go to step 48. 48
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
49
At lighting fixture DS5 perform the following : a. Connect W62 leads to TB1-1 and TB 1-2 (fig . 1) . Remove tags . b. Install DS5 (fig . H) and secure eight screws and flat washers.
ED
CONTINU
3-196
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
CUITBRE 3-37.
50
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-LIGHT CONTROL CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued At lighting fixture DS4 ( fig . H) , perform the following : a. Remove eight screws and flat washers . Lower lamp assembly. b. Identify, tag , and disconnect W63 leads from TB 1-1 and TB1-2 (fig. J).
51
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON.
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : Go to step 52.
52
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
53
At lighting fixture DS4 perform the following : a . Connect W63 leads to TB 1-1 and TB2-2 (fig . 1 ) . Remove tags . b. Install DS4 (fig . 1 ) and secure with eight screws and flat washers.
54
At lighting fixture DS3 (fig . H) , perform the following :
a. Remove eight screws and flat washers . Lower lamp assembly . b. Identify, tag , and disconnect W282 leads from TB1-1 and TB 1-2 (fig . 1 ).
55
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON .
If LIGHT CONTROL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If LIGHT CONTROL does not trip : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
ŭ
3-197
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-38.
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 STATUS 28V ON LAMP OFF FAULT ISOLATION
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64 AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL
O A72
O DAB
[
DISTRIBUTION BOX RO
AD
A66
SI
DE
Tools and Equipment.
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set 28VDC PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and DISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE to ON
EPPEXPUTPWR UNFAMS PWNAMPL ALBCOND ROADSIDE
AIRCOND CURBS IDE
BOTERY POWER
SECUREPWN RADIO PRINTER RELAYTEA ON 04 OR OFF OFF OFF DIFF DISPLAY/CONTROL BOADSIDE CURBSIDE ON ON OFF WCIU ELBIU ON OFFToOFF COMPUTER MODEMS ON OFF VOICE GAS SPLY FILTER PWRCOMMO UNIT ON ON OFFT OFF
MECHA NICAL LIF WEIGHT178LBS
RUNNINGTIDLE
28VDC SUPPLY LAMP BATTERY POWERSUTUS TEST SYS RAT-1 POWER ON RBT-2 BRT-3 D OFF NOTSECUREPW ROADSIDE CURBSIDE FURS FLES FWD AFT FWD AFT ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF BADIO ZKVDC RELAYTERM PWRDIST DISPLAY/ PURSPLY COMMO UNITSPLYPWS CONTROL 1 2 3 ON OU ON ON DN OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF UNFART ROADSIDE LIGHT CONTROL HEATERS CONTROL UNIT TELEPHONE CONVERTER DARTERMLINK ON ON ON L OFF OFF OFF T OFF OFF UTILITYPOWER OU 120VAC4008 2 INTERNAL EXTERNAL MASTERECT ON 05 ON OFF OFF OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS 03
1
None
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-198
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
FAULT
3-38.
2
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 STATUS 28V ON LAMP OFF FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 (fig . B ) , set and hold LAMP TEST .
BIENTAIR
If any Ambient Air Control Panel A72 indicators are on :
ONTROL PANEL
a . Note lamps not on.
A72 b. Release LAMP TEST . c. Replace defective indicators per para 5-54 .
d. Go to step 7. If all Ambient Air Control Panel A72 indicators are off: a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 3.
28V ON
NO. 41
O
о
HOOD CLOSED
e AMBIEN ENTT AIR CONTROL ONTROL PANEL O O EOPT FLOW ROADSIDE FANSCURBSIDE AIRTEMP VALVE FLOWFLAPPER AIR HIGH FWD FWD NORMALLYCLOSED. ONLY WHENOROUTSIDE OPEN LOV AFT AFT BELOW TEMPFREEZING 白百
о
OSTATUL
CS AFT
O RS FWD
RS AFT
2 FWD O
TEST POINTS 3 5
6
GND
LAMP TEST
о
FIGURE B
3 At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , set and hold 28VDC LAMP TEST .
If 28VDC POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1 and PS2 indicators are on:
a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 4. If28VDC POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1 and PS2 indicators are off:
a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 5 .
CONTINUED
3-199
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-38.
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 STATUS 28V ON LAMP OFF FAULT ISOLATION— Continued
4
At Generator Control Panel A64 ( fig . C) , set and hold LAMP TEST If Generator Control Panel A64 indicators are on : a . Release LAMP TEST . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance If Generator Control Panel A64 indicators are off: a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Replace Distribution Box A66 CB29 per para 4-82 . c. Go to step 6.
BATTLE SHORT BATTLE SHORT
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL PHASE A OFF-
PHASE B 1 PHASE C
COMM
SUM FAULT OVERVOLTAGE SUM FAULT FAULT RESET
FUEL GEN
GENS ON LINE NO.1 LAMP 2 TEST
0
GENERATOR POWER RADAR TURBINES ECS OFF OFF OFF COMM 0 0 ON ON %
ON 1
57
FIGURE C
At Generator Control Panel A64 (fig . C) , set OFF / PHASE A/ PHASE B / PHASE C to each phase and observe VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL meter.
If VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL meter indicates 114 to 126VAC in each switch position :
a . Replace Distribution Box A66 PS1 per para 4-85.
b. Go to step 6 . If VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL meter does not indicate 114 to 126VAC for each switch position :
a. Replace Distribution Box A66 CB9 per para 4-81 .
b. Go to step 6.
CONTINUED
3-200
FAULT
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-38. AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 STATUS 28V ON LAMP OFF FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
6
At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 ( fig . B) , observe STATUS 28V ON indicator. If Ambient Air Control Panel A72 STATUS 28V ON indicator is on: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If Ambient Air Control Panel A72 STATUS 28V ON indicator is off: a . Replace Distribution Box A66 per para 4-71 .
b. Go to step 8.
7
Observe STATUS 28V ON indicator :
If Ambient Air Control Panel A72 STATUS 28V ON indicator is on : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If Ambient Air Control Panel A72 STATUS 28V ON indicator is off: a . Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 (fig . B ) , per para 4-94. b. Go to step 8.
8
Observe STATUS 28V ON indicator :
If Ambient Air Control Panel A72 STATUS 28V ON indicator is on: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If Ambient Air Control Panel A72 STATUS 28V ON indicator is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-201
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION
MONOLITHIC MEMORY UNIT 1 A95A2
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
CENTRAL
HARD COPY UNIT A65
CATHODE
PROCESSOR UNIT 1
RAY TUBE
A95A9 CENTRAL
1
A54
PROCESSOR
A73
UNIT 2 A95A10
Π
RO
AD
SI
DE
DE
RECOVERY STORAGE UNIT A95A6
'༣ A55
SI
RB
CU
A74 MONOLITHIC MEMORY
CONTROLINDICATOR
DISTRIBUTION
UNIT 2
BOX A66
A95A3
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL A95A 12
PANEL INPUT /OUTPUT PROCESSOR A95A 13
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . None
CONTINUED
3-202
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
IF CATHODE RAY TUBE A54 OR A73 BREAKS OR IS VISIBLY DAMAGED Le
(CHIPPED , SCRATCHED , OR CRACKED ) , EVACUATE CONSOLE POSITION
WARNING AND NOTIFY UNIT COMMANDER. DO NOT PERFORM MAINTENANCE ON FAILED UNIT.
{
1. Insure Hard Copy Unit A65 is fully loaded . If opened at any time after starting diagnostics , unit will stop printing and procedures will have to be rerun . NOTES
CENTRAL
2.
OCESS UNIT2 A95A10
Refer to TM 9-1425-602-12 per loading , call - up , and description of engagement control station /mass storage unit diagnostic programs on Recovery Storage Unit A95A6 tape cassette .
1
At Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 (fig . A) , observe PWR SPLY TEST indicators .
COMPUTERMAINTENANCE PANEL FUNCTIONWORD INPUT PWR SPLY TEST CLOCK MEM CPU 1 PARITY MONITOR DATAWORD oo-oooooo PCU CPU 2 DATAWORD INPUT JOE CPU3 FUNCTIONWORD MODE RSUWRITE CONTROL TTC1 TTC? CLOCK SINGLE LOAD CONTROL PANEL PROTECT PROTECT RUN CONT AUTO ED O ENABLE ENABLE HALT FIGURE A
If all the following PWR SPLY TEST indicators are off: PUTE ENAN
MEM
OLPA
CPU 1
5A12
PCU
CPU 2 1/OCU Fault isolate weapon control computer status lights per para 3-142.
If all the following PWR SPLY TEST indicators are on : MEM CPU 1 PCU
CPU 2
I/OCU
Go to step 2.
CONTINUED
3-203
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued 1
-Continued
If CPU 1 is off: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 62 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , observe CPU 1 .
If indicator comes on : Return to step 1 .
If indicator stays off: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If CPU 2 is off: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 63 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , observe CPU 2 .
If indicator comes on :
Return to step 1 . :
If indicator stays off: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfI/OCU and MEM flash on and off: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 64 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , observe I / OCU and MEM .
If indicators stop flashing : Return to step 1 . If indicators continue flashing : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfI/OCU is off: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 65 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , observe I / OCU .
CONTINUED
3-204
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-39.
1
-Continued
If indicator comes on :
rder list
Return to step 1 . If indicator stays off: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance.
If MEM is off: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 66 in the order listed in para 3-41.
ced
b. After each replacement , observe MEM .
If indicator comes on:
er liste
Return to step 1 . If indicator stays off: Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If PCU is off: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 67 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
d.cal
b. After each replacement , observe PCU .
If indicator comes on :
DIGE
Return to step 1 . If indicator stays off: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced, call Intermediate Maintenance .
RECUSE P WEL TE
2
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B) , set COMPUTER to OFF , then to " ON
230C BUFFERY POWER POWERSUPPLY TEXT
PUBITER
DISPLAY/CONTRO
AFT
FAB
OFF CONTROL FURDAY
1
CURBSIDE
OFF
POWEN FILTER
DOTAVT BOARDON CONTROL CONTROL CONVENTER TE DR OFF STILITYPOWER LEPAC400AT EXTERDAL
DIY
DANGER 208 VOLTS MECHANICH WEIGHT170LASLIFT
CONTINUED FIGURE B
3-205
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3
BC STATOR
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . C), press and hold COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
EXT COMPETED COUPO DELECT LANDDEVICE MASS MASSSTORAGE STORAGE UNITI UNIT2 RECOVERY STOLAGE TACTICAL UNIT1 PERIPHERALS
GRYGOPLAY PORSUTMATA DOBKET: 1 POWER
1000000
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-39.
PETERSTARS
If indicator is on:
Go to step 4 . FIGURE C
If indicator is off:
a . Release COMP & SYS RESET . b. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 2 in the order listed in para 3-41. c. After each replacement , press and hold COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
If indicator comes on:
Return to step. 1 . If indicator stays off: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced, call Intermediate Maintenance .
4
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , observe MEM ERR .
If indicator is off:
Go to step 5. If indicator is on: a . Release COMP & SYS RESET . b . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 4 in the order listed in para 3-41 . c. After each replacement , press and hold COMP & SYS RESET and observe MEM ERR .
If indicator goes off: (1 ) Release COMP & SYS RESET .
(2) Return to step 1 . If indicator stays on : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
T
3-206
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-39.
5
ReleaseCOMP & SYS RESET and observeINIT ERROR .
If indicator is on:
Go to step 6.
If indicator is off:
Go to step 55.
6
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
7
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 ( fig . D ) , disconnect A95A3W2P2 from J2 (8) .
8
Disconnect A95A3W3P3 from J3 (7).
9
At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (6).
10
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A17 to J2 (8).
isted
and
cal
At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (5).
12
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect Line Terminator Network ASA19 to J3 (7).
13
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMPUTER to ON .
14
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
If indicator is on : Go to step 15. If indicator is off:
Go to step 16.
CONTINUED
3-207
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
1
3
2
GHT5 LF CRI149 HA )
CLE 1 HA FT A95LF)
49
42
AIO
43
A12
12 13 191
25 27J J24 J23
J22 J26 J20 J21 J19 J18 J17 J16
A6
A13
J15
J2
J12 J11 J9
A14
J13 J5 J1
FIGURE D 5 10
6 7 8
CONTINUED
3-208
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION
15
Continued
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 2 per para 3-44.
If test passes: Go to step 47.
If test fails : a . At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 ( fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (8). b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W2P2 to J2 (8). d . Disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (7). e. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5) . f.
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W3P3 to J3 (7).
g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 3 in the order listed in para 3-41 . h. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR.
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 . If indicator is on : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
16
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
17
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 (fig . D) , disconnect A95A9W2P2 from J2 (1 ).
18
Disconnect A95A9W3P3 from J3 (2).
19
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (8). CONTINUED
J
3-209
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
20
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 ( 1 ).
1 21
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (7) .
1
1 22
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (2) .
23
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W2P2 to J2 (8) .
24
Connect A95A3W3P3 to J3 (7).
25
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMPUTER to ON.
26
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR.
If indicator is on: Go to step 27. If indicator is off:
Go to step 36.
27
At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
28
At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 (fig . D) , disconnect A95A2W2P2 from J2 (9).
29
Disconnect A95A2W3P3 from J3 ( 10.)
30
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (1 ).
31
At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A17 to J2 (9).
32
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (2) .
CONTINUED
3-210
T
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
33
At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 ( 10) .
34
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set COMPUTER to ON
35
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR
If indicator is on: a. At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 ( 9) . b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6) . c. At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 ( 10) . d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5) . e. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ).
f.
Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 (2 ).
g . At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 , connect A95A2W2P2 to J2 (9).
h . Connect A95A2W3P3 to J3 ( 10). i.
One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 75 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
j.
After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-211
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
35
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
-Continued
If indicator is off: a . At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 ( fig . D ) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (9) . b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6 ) . c. At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 ( 10) . d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). e. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ) . f.
Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 ( 2) .
g . At Monolithic Memory Unit 2 A95A3 , connect A95A2W2P2 to J2 (9) . h. Connect A95A2W3P3 to J3 ( 10).
i.
One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 74 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
j.
After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR.
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUs in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
36
At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMPUTER to OFF.
37
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 (fig . D) , disconnect A95A 10W2P2 from J2 (4) .
38
Disconnect A95A 10W3P3 from J3 (3).
39
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 ( 1 ) .
CONTINUED
3-212
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
Ed
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
40
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9, connect Line Terminator Network A95A17 to J2 (4).
41
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 ( 2 ).
42
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (3).
43
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ).
44
Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 (2).
45
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set COMPUTER to ON .
46
At BITE indicator panel ( fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
LineTem
natorNe
ninato
atorNe
toJ2
toJ2
er If indicator is off:
SS a . At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (4). b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (3). d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). e. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect A95A 10W2P2 to J2 (4) .
f. Connect A95A 10W3P3 to J3 (3) . g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 77 in the order listed in para 3-41 . h. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
If indicator is off: Return to step 1 .
CONTINUED
3-213
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
46
-Continued
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is on: a . At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 ( fig . D ) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (4) . b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (3). d. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). e . At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect A95A 10W2P2 to J2 (4) . f. Connect A95A 10W3P3 to J3 (3). g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 76 in the order listed in para 3-41 . :
h. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 . If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
47
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 6 per para 3-48.
If test passes : Go to step 48 . If test fails with no change: a. At Input /Output Processor A95A13 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (8).
D
CONTINUE
3-214
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
47
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
Continued
aced, b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6) . c. At Input /Output Processor A95A13, connect A95A3W2P2 to J2 (8) . d . Disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (7) .
eTe e . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5).
forNet f.
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W3P3 to J3 (7).
горе
g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 70 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
orNe
h. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR.
0J2 If indicator is off:
liste
SCO
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails with zeros: a . At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 (fig . D ) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (8). b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W2P2 to J2 (8 ) . d . At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (7). e . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). f.
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W3P3 to J3 (7) .
g. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 71 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
CONTINUED
T
3-215
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
47
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued
h . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR.
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails with sevens : a . At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 (fig . D ) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (8).
b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W2P2 to J2 (8) . d. Disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (7). e. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). f.
At Input /Output Processor A95A13 , connect A95A3W3P3 to J3 (7) .
g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 73 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
h. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list .If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-216
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
47
-Continued
DressC If test fails with readout other than 25252525 , all zeros , or all sevens : a. At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (8) . b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6) . c. At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W2P2 to J2 (8). aced.c
d . Disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A19 from J3 (7) . e. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). f.
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 , connect A95A3W3P3 to J3 (7).
Terr
g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 72 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
or Net
h . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 . If indicator is on : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
liste
CO
48
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (8).
49
At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6).
50
At Input /Output Processor A95A13 , connect A95A3W2P2 to J2 (8) .
51
Disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (7) .
52
At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5).
CONTINUED
3-217
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
1 53
54
At Input /Output Processor A95A 13 (fig . D ) , connect A95A3W3P3 to J3 (7) .
1
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 30 per para 3-72.
If test passes : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 68 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
I If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
:
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 69 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe INIT ERROR .
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUs in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
55
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , observe PERI .
If indicator is on: Go to step 56 .
If indicator is off:
Go to step 67 .
3-218
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
Ed
-3(7).
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
56
At computer maintenance control panel ( fig . A) , observe CLOCK.
If HALT is on :
30
a. Set CLOCK to RUN.
b. Return to step 1.
Orderist
If RUN is on : Go to step 57.
press
57
Set MODE to CONTROL PANEL and observe CLOCK MONITOR.
If indicator is off: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 6 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , observe CLOCK MONITOR.
ced,
If indicator is on : Return to step 1 .
rlist If indicator is off: Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is on: Go to step 58.
58
Observe DATA WORD .
If display is all sevens :
Go to step 59.
If a display is not all sevens :
Go to step 63.
CONTINUED
3-219
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-39.
59
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 1 per para 3-43.
If test fails with unmixed DATA WORD bits : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 143 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe PERI .
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails with mixed DATA WORD bits: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 144 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe PERI .
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list .If all BRUS in group have been replaced, call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test passes: Go to step 60 .
60
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 2 per para 3-44 .
If test passes : Go to step 61 . D
CONTINUE
3-220
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-39.
1 per
60
-Continued If test fails : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 145 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
orderli
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , pressCOMP & SYS RESET and observePERI
C), DE If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . ced.
61
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 33 per para 3-75.
If test passes :
derlis
Go to step 62. [ If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 146 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , pressCOMP & SYS RESET and observePERI
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on : Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenace .
62
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 34 per para 3-76.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 149 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C), press COMP & SYS RESET and observePERI
CONTINUED
3-221
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
1 62
-Continued
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails and peripheral control unit / input output control unit ( PCU / IOCU) parity error is set : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 147 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe PERI .
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails and HCU malfunction error is set: a. At Hard Copy Unit A65 , insure unit is powered up and check for low, torn , or improperly loaded paper .
If any of these problems are observed :
(1 ) Correct problem .
(2) Return to step 1 . If none of these problems are observed :
Go to step 62b .
b. One at a time , replace BRUs in BRU group no . 148 in the order listed in para 3-41 . c . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe PERI .
CONTINUED
3-222
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-39.
62
Continued
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on:
placed
Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance.
CUC 63
At BITE indictor panel (fig . C) , press and hold COMP & SYS RESET
64
At computer maintenance control panel (fig . A) , observe DATA WORD
derlist
SSCO
If display is not all sevens: a. At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , release COMP & SYS RESET
b. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 141 in the order listed in para 3-41.
c. After each replacement:
( 1 ) At comparator maintenance control panel (fig . A) set MODE to AUTO
ced
(2) At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe PERI
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1.
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If display is all sevens :
Go to step 65.
65
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , release COMP & SYS RESET
66
At computer maintenance contol panel (fig . A) , observe DATA WORD ,
If display is all sevens :
CONTINUED
Return to step 59 .
3-223
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued 1
66
-Continued
1
If display is not all sevens: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 142 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe PERI.
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
67
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , observe PROG ALERT .
If indicator is on:. Go to step 68. :
If indicator is off: Go to step 88.
68
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 9 per para 3-51 .
If test passes : Go to step 69.
If test fails:
Go to step 70. 69
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 8 per para 3-50.
If test passes: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 78 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and observe PROG ALERT .
3-224
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
69
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Continued
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 .
derliste
If indicator is on:
essC Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenace .
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 79 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 8 per para 3-50.
ed.c
If test passes : Return to step 1 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
70
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 8 per para 3-50.
If test passes : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 80 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 9 per para 3-51 .
If test passes : Return to step 1 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : Go to step 71 . CONTINUED
3-225
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-39.
71
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 ( fig . D) , disconnect A95A 10W2P2 from J2 (4).
72
Disconnect A95A 10W3P3 from J3 (3).
73
At Central Processor Unit 2 , A95A 10 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (6).
74
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A17 to J2 (4).
75
At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (5).
76
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A19 to J3 (3).
77
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 9 per para 3-51 .
If test passes : a . At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 ( fig . D ) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (4 ) .
b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (3). d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). e. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect A95A 10W2P2 to J2 (4) . f.
Connect A95A 10W3P3 to J3 (3).
g . One at a time, replace BRUS in BRU group no . 79 in the order listed in para 3-41 . h . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 8 per para 3-50 .
If test passes : Return to step 1 .
CONTINUED
3-226
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d 3-39.
TomJ214
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
77
-Continued
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
work
If test fails :
95A17 Go to step 78.
78
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 ( fig . D) , disconnect A95A9W2P2 from J2 ( 1 ) .
79
Disconnect A95A9W3P3 from J3 ( 2) .
80
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (4).
81
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (1 ).
82
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (3).
83
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (2).
84
At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect A95A 10W2P2 to J2 (4).
85
Connect A95A 10W3P3 to J3 (3).
86
At BITE indicator panel ( fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET .
87
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 29 per para 3-71 .
5A19:
perpe
Tem
or le
ator
If test passes : a. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 ( 1 ).
CONTINUED
3-227
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
87
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
—Continued
b . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (2) . d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 ( 5 ) . e . At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ) . f.
Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 (2).
g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 80 in the order listed in para 3-41 . h . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 9 per para 3-51 .
If test passes : Return to step 1 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : a. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 ( fig . D ) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 ( 1 ).
b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A17 to J2 (6). c. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (2). d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). e . At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ). f. Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 (2).g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 81 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
CONTINUED
3-228
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
87
-Continued h . After each replacement, perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 29 per para 3-71 .
atorN
minator If test passes : Return to step 1 . ator If test fails: to 20
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . erlist 88
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , observe MEM ERR .
If indicator is on: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 5 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement, press COMP & SYS RESET and observe MEM ERR
If indicator is off:
Return to step 1 . If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is off: Go to step 89.
89
At computer maintenance control panel (fig . A) , set MODE to CONTROL PANEL and observe CLOCK MONITOR
If indicator is on: Go To Step 90.
If indicator is off: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 6 in the order listed in
para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , observe CLOCK MONITOR CONTINUED
3-229
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
89
-Continued
If indicator is on: Return to step 1 .
If indicator is off: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
90
90
Set MODE to AUTO .
91
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT-
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Go to step 92.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
Go to step 181 .
92
At Cathode Ray Tube A54 and A73 , observe displays , and at Hard Copy Unit A65, observe printout .
If any message appears at any unit:
Go to step 93 .
If no message appears at any unit :
Go to step 148.
93
At Cathode Ray Tube A54 and A73 , observe displays , and at Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX ..." appears correctly at all units : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 82 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds:
Go to step 181 .
3-230
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
93
-Continued
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . ced c
If the message "The QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly at all units :
Go to step 94.
AP
94
95
At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 2 per para 3-44.
If test passes : Go to step 104.
If test fails : Go to step 96.
96
At computer maintenance control panel (fig . A) , set MODE to CONTROL PANEL and observe CLOCK MONITOR
If indicator if off: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 6 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , observe CLOCK MONITOR
If indicator is on: Return to step 90 .
If indicator is off: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is on: CONTINUED
Go to step 97.
3-231
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
97
Observe DATA WORD.
If display is all sevens : Go to step 102.
If display is not all sevens :
Go to step 98.
98
At BITE indicator panel (fig C) , press and hold COMP & SYS RESET.
99
At computer maintenance control panel (fig . A) , observe DATA WORD .
If display is not all sevens : a . At BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . C ) , release COMP & SYS RESET. b. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 141 in the order listed in para 3-41 . c. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C ) , press and hold COMP & SYS RESET. d . At computer maintenance control panel (fig . A) , observe DATA WORD.
If display is all sevens : Return to step 90.
If display is not all sevens : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If display is all sevens :
Go to step 100 .
100 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , release COMP & SYS RESET:
101
At computer maintenance control panel (fig . A) , observe DATA WORD.
If display is not all sevens: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 142 in the order listed in para 3-41.
CONTINUED
3-232
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
101 -Continued
b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET . c. At computer maintenance control panel (fig . A) , observe DATA WORD .
If display is all sevens : Return to step 90.
If display is not all sevens : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If display is all sevens: ESET
Go to step 102 .
rlist
Sand
102 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 1.per para 3-43.
If test passes : a . One at a time , replace BRUS from BRU group no . 145 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement, perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 2 per para 3-44.
If test passes : Return to step 91 . If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : Go to step 103.
CONTINUED
T
3-233
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-39.
103 At computer maintenance control panel ( fig . A) , observe DATA WORD .
If display is all sevens : a . One at a time , replace BRUS from BRU group no . 143 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 1 per para 3-43.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If display is not all sevens: a . One at a time , replace BRUS from BRU group no . 144 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 1 per para 3-43.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list .If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
104 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 29 per para 3-71 .
If test passes : Go to step 105.
D
CONTINUE
3-234
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
104 -Continued If test fails : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 83 in the order listed in
heorde
Contr
para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 29 per para 3-71 .
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . aced
mordel
105 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Go to step 128.
ntrol If test fails : Go to step 106.
106 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 32 per para 3-74.
If test passes : Go to step 130 . If test fails : Go to step 107.
107 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 10 per para 3-52.
If test passes : Go to step 108. If test fails: CONTINUED
Go to step 112.
3-235
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-39.
108 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 23 per para 3-65.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 96 in the order listed in para 3-41. b . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails:
Go to step 109.
109 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 4 per para 3-46.
If test passes : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 97 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine No. 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list .If all BRUs in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails :
Go to step 110 .
CONTINUED
3-236
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d 3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
23 110 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 5 per para 3-47.
111 At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . C) , observe MEM ERR.
Orderi If indicator is on: Contr a. One at a time , replace BRUS from BRU group no . 98 in the order listed in para 3-41. b . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Return to step 91 . aced
Der
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is off: C a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 99 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
112 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 ( fig . D) , disconnect A95A9W2P2 from J2 (1 ).
113 Disconnect A95A9W3P3 from J3 (2).
114 At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (6).
115 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect line Terminator Network A95A17 to J2 ( 1).
CONTINUED
T
3-237
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
116 At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (5) .
117 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (2 ).
118 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 10 per para 3-52 .
If test fails : a. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 ( 1 ).
b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A17 to J2 (6). c. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (2). d. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5).
e . At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ) . f.
Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 (2).
g . One at a time, replace BRUS in BRU group no . 100 in the order listed in para 3-41 . h. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47 .
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance.
If test passes: Go to step 119.
119 At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 (fig . D) , disconnect A95A 10W2P2 from J2 (4) .
120 Disconnect A95A 10W3P3 from J3 (3) .
CONTINUED
3-238
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
rk 121 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 ( 1 ) .
95A19 122 At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (4) .
Oper
123 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (2 ).
124 At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9, connect Line Terminator Network eTerr
A95A 19 to J3 (3).
or Ne
125 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ) .
ator
126 Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 (2).
orNe
127 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 10 per para 3-52. J2
데
If test passes : a . At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 ( fig . D) disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (4). b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (3). d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5).
e. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect A95A 10W2P2 to J2 (4) . f.
Connect A95A 10W3P3 to J3 (3).
g. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 79 in the order listed in para 3-41 . h. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Return to step 91 . CONTINUED
T
3-239
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-39.
127 -Continued
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : a. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 ( fig . D ) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (4) . b . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6 ) . c. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (3). d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). e. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect A95A 10W2P2 to J2 (4). f.
Connect A95A 10W3P3 to J3 (3) .
g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 80 in the order listed in para 3-41. h. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance.
128 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 32 per para 3-74 .
If test passes: Go to step 129 . If test fails:
Go to step 130.
T
3-240
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
129 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 4 per para 3-46.
If test passes : laced.c
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 84 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT
neTem If indicator comes on within 20 seconds : ator New Go to step 181 . nator
torNe
་
toJ2
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : Go to step 130.
erliste
ntral
130 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 10 per para 3-52.
If test passes : Go to step 131 .
If test fails : Go to step 132.
131 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 23 per para 3-65 .
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUs in BRU group no. 96 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routines no . 5 and no . 32 per para 3-47 and 3-74.
CONTINUED
3-241
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-39.
131 -Continued
If both tests pass: Return to step 91 .
If both tests do not pass : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 97 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement, perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 23 per para 3-65.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
132 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 (fig . D) , disconnect A95A9W2P2 from J2 (1 ).
133 Disconnect A95A9W3P3 from J3 (2).
134 At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (6).
135 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 ( 1 ).
136 At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (5).
137 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (2) .
CONTINUED
3-242
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed 3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
138 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no 10 per para 3-52.
If test passes : Return to step 119. eplace :
If test fails : Go to step 139.
ordere
139 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 ( 1 ).
Cont 140 At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6).
141 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (2).
aced
142 At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5) .
י
143 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ).
144 Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 (2).
145 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Go to step 146.
If test fails : Go to step 147.
CONTINUED
T
3-243
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
146 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 31 per para 3-73.
If test passes : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 101 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 10 per para 3-52.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 102 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 31 per para 3-73.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
147 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A12 test routine no. 31 per para 3-73 .
If test passes: a . One at a time , replace BRUs in BRU group no . 102 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel
A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes: D
CONTINUE
Return to step 91 .
3-244
31
Order
Contro
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
147 -Continued
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails :
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 101 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47 .
If test passes :
ced,
ntrol
Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
148 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , observe PERI.
If indicator is on : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 150 in the order listed in para 3-41.
b. After each replacement, press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PERI.
If indicator is off:
Return to step 91 .
If indicator is on: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is off:
Go to step 149 . CONTINUED
T
3-245
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION--Continued
149 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 2 per para 3-44.
If test passes : Go to step 150.
If test fails : Go to step 151 .
150 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 3 per para 3-45.
If test did not indicate a Recovery Storage Unit ( RSU ) summary error: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 159 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds : Go to step 181 . If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test indicates an RSU summary error with error mode # 0: a . One at a time, replace BRUS in BRU group no . 159 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESETand BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
Go to step 181 . If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Replace next BRU on list . Ifall BRUs in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . D
CONTINUE
3-246
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
per
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
150 -Continued
If test indicates an RSU summary error with error mode # 1: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 151 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
J
Go to step 181 .
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : ror
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
erist
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 152 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
;
1222
If test indicates an RSU summary error with error mode # 2:
ונ
SCON
Go to step 181 .
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds:
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test indicates an RSU summary error with error mode # 3:
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 153 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds:
Go to step 181 .
CONTINUED
3-247
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
. 150 -Continued
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test indicates an RSU summary error with error mode # 4 or error mode # 5:
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 156 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESETand BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
Go to step 181 .
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test indicates an RSU summary error with error mode # 6: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 157 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , at BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds : Go to step 181 . If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUs in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test indicates an RSU summary error with error mode # 7: a . One at a time , replace BRUs in BRU group no . 154 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement, at BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . C), press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INITand observe PROG ALERT.
3-248
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
150 -Continued
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds : aced
Go to step 181 .
rrorm
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
rders
C),, press PROG
If test indicates an RSU summary error with error mode # 8: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 155 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
Ded
Go to step 181 .
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds:
38
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
prest
151 At BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET.
152 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 2 per para 3-44.
If test passes : Go to step 154. If test fails: Go to step 153.
CONTINUED
3-249
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
153 At computer maintenance control panel (fig . A) , observe CLOCK.
If HALT is on : a . Set CLOCK to RUN . b. Return to step 91 .
If RUN is on : Return to step 96.
154 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 6 per para 3-48.
If test passes : Go to step 156 .
If test fails with no change : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 85 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 6 per para 3-48.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUs in group have been replaced, call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails with other than no change: Go to step 155.
155 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes:
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 87 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47 .
CONTINUED
3-250
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
155 -Continued
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails :
Sper a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 86 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 6 per para 3-48.
If test passes :
derl
Return to step 91 .
If test fails :
ontra Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
156 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 25 per para 3-67.
If test passes : IY E
Go to step 157 .
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 160 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT .
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
Go to step 181 . If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been CONTINUED
replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
T
3-251
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
157 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 6 per para 3-48 .
If test passes : Go to step 158.
If test fails with no change : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 88 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routines no . 6 , no . 25 , and no . 6 in this exact order per paras 3-48 and 3-67.
If all tests pass: Return to step 91 .
If all tests do not pass : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails with other than no change : :
a. One at a time, replace BRUS in BRU group no . 89 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routines no . 6 , no . 25, and no . 6 in this exact order per para 3-48 and 3-67.
If all tests pass : Return to step 91 .
If all tests do not pass: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
158 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 26 per para 3-68 .
If test passes : Go to step 160 . If test fails :
Go to step 159.
CONTINUED
J
3-252
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
6 per
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
159 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 27 per para 3-69.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 90 in the order listed in para 3-41.
der liste
Control
b . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 26 per para 3-68.
If test passes :
order Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . If test fails :
Ced a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 91 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
liste
trol
2
erge
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no 27 per para 3-69.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
160 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 27 per para 3-69.
If test passes : Go to step 161 .
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 92 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 27 per para 3-69. CONTINUED
3-253
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
160 - Continued
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
161
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 28 per para 3-70.
If test passes : Go to step 162.
If test fails N- Register test : a. One at a time , replace BRUS from BRU group no . 93 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 28 per para 3-70 .
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUs in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : a . One at a time , replace BRUS from BRU group no . 94 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 28 per para 3-70 .
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-254
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
162 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes: Go to step 163. ced
If test fails :
Return to step 106.
per 163 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 32 per para 3-74.
If test passes : Go to step 164 .
derfis
If test fails :
Return to step 130.
trol
164 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 4 per para 3-46.
If test passes : Go to step 165.
If test fails :
Return to step 130.
165 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A 12 (fig . D ) , disconnect A95A9W2P2 from J2 ( 1 ) .
18 166 Disconnect A95A9W3P3 from J3 (2).
167 At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (6).
168 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (1 ).
169 At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, disconnect
CONTINUED
Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 ( 5 ) .
T
3-255
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
NE
170 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J3 (2).
171 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If "START OF CPUD" is printed out within 30 to 45 seconds : Go to step 172.
If "START OF CPUD " is not printed out within 30 to 45 seconds : a . At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 ( fig . D ) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 ( 1 ). b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6). c. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 ( 2). d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5) . e. At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ).
f.
Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 (2) .
g . One at a time, replace BRUS in BRU group no . 95 in the order listed in para 3-41 . h. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
Go to step 181 . If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds: Replace next BRU on list .If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
172 At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect A95A 10W2P2 from J2 (4 ) .
173 Disconnect A95A 10W3P3 from J3 (3) .
CONTINUED
3-256
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
A95A 174 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A17 from J2 (1 ).
RAPINTE 175 At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (4) .
176 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (2).
-Termi
177 At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (3) .
178 At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 , connect A95A9W2P2 to J2 ( 1 ) . tor
179 Connect A95A9W3P3 to J3 ( 2) .
-Neb
12(0
180 At BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65 .
If "START OF CPUD " is printed out within 30 to 45 seconds : a . At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 ( fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (4) . b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 to J2 (6).
c. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (3) . d. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). e. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9, connect A95A 10W2P2 to J2 (4) . f.
Connect A95A 10W3P3 to J3 (3).
g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 79 in the order listed in
para 3-41 . h . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , pressCOMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observePROG ALERT
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds:
Go to step 181 . CONTINUED
T
3-257
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
180 -Continued
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If "START OF CPUD" is not printed out within 30 to 45 seconds: a . At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 (fig . D) , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 17 from J2 (4). b. At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10, connect Line Terminator Network A95A17 to J2 (6). c. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 , disconnect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 from J3 (3). d . At Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 , connect Line Terminator Network A95A 19 to J3 (5). e. At Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9, connect A95A 10W2P2 to J2 (4). f.
Connect A95A 10W3P3 to J3 (3).
g . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 80 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
h . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
If indicator comes on within 20 seconds :
Go to step 181 .
If indicator does not come on within 20 seconds : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
181 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , observe PROG ALERT .
If indicator goes off and stays off:
Go to step 207 .
If indicator flashes on and off: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 7 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT.
CONTINUED
3-258
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION Continued
181 -Continued
If indicator goes off and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running:
laced Go to step 207. If indicator does not go off or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running :
S: neTem
atorNe
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator stays on: Go to step 182.
nator
torNe
182 At Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73, observe displays , and at Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
toJ2 If any message appears on any unit:
Go to step 207.
r liste
SSCO
If no message appears on any unit :
Go to step 183.
1.
183 At BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , observe
PERI
If indicator is on: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 161 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , press COMP & SYS RESETand
BOOTSTRAP
INITand observe PROG ALERT
If indicator goes off and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 207 .
If indicator does not go off or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is off: Go to step 184 .
CONTINUED
3-259
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
184 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 2 per para 3-44.
If test passes : Go to step 185.
If test fails :
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 162 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT .
If indicator goes off and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 207.
If indicator does not go off or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
185 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 6 per para 3-48.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 10 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT .
If indicator goes off and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 207.
If indicator does not go off or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails with no change : a . One at a time, replace BRUS in BRU group no . 8 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C), press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT .
3-260
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION_Continued
2per 185 -Continued
If indicator goes off and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 207.
If indicator does not go off or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running :
order
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
Dress If test fails with other than no change : LERT
Go to step 186.
186 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET
ning:
187 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 25 per para 3-67.
ced
er
If test passes : Go to step 188.
If test fails: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 160 in the order listed in
rliste para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT
If indicator goes off and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 207.
If indicator does not go off or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
188 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 6 per para 3-48.
If test passes : Go to step 189. CONTINUED
3-261
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
188 -Continued
If test fails :
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 9 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT ,
If indicator goes off and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 207.
If indicator does not go off or ECS / MSU diagnositcs are not running : Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
189 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 25 per para 3-67.
If test passes : Go to step 190 .
If test fails: a. One at a time, replace BRUS in BRU group no . 160 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT .
If indicator goes off and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 207.
If indicator does not go off and ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list.If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
190 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 6 per para 3-48 .
If test passes : Go to step 191 . CONTINUED
3-262
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION
Continued
190 -Continued
If test fails : der listet
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 11 in order listed in para 3-41.
Dress LERT
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A12 test routines no . 25 , no . 6 , no . 25 , and no . 6 in this exact order per para 3-48 and 3-67.
If second performance of test routine no . 6 passes :
Return to step 91 . ning: ced If second performance of test routine no . 6 fails: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
Der 191 Perform Computer Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47 .
If test passes : Go to step 192. If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 12 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
COM
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 5 per para 3-47.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
192 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 10 per para 3-52 .
If test passes : Go to step 193.
CONTINUED
T
3-263
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
192 - Continued
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 13 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 10 per para 3-52.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
193 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 11 per para 3-53.
If test passes : Go to step 194 .
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 14 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 11 per para 3-53.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced, call Intermediate Maintenance .
194 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 12 per para 3-54 .
If test passes : Go to step 195. CONTINUED
3-264
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION
Continued
194 -Continued
If test fails :
Order
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 15 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
Contro
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 12 per para 3-54.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : aced, Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
per 195 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 13 per para 3-55.
If test passes : Go to step 196.
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 16 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 13 per para 3-55.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
196 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 14 per para 3-56.
CONTINUED
3-265
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
A 196 -Continued
•
If test passes : Go to step 197.
If test fails :
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 17 in order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement, perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 14 per para 3-56 .
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
197 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 15 per para 3-57.
If test passes : Go to step 198 .
If test fails: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 18 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement, perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 15 per para 3-57.
If test passes : Return to step 91 . If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-266
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 p 3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued 198 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A12 test routine no. 16 per para 3-58.
If test passes : Go to step 199.
er listed
Contro
If test fails :
a. One at a time, replace BRUS in BRU group no . 19 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 16 per para 3-58.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
aced
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
per 199 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 17 per para 3-59.
If test passes : Go to step 200.
.
If test fails: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 20 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 17 per para 3-59.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . CONTINUED
3-267
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
200 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 18 per para 3-60.
If test passes : Go to step 201 .
If test fails: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 21 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 18 per para 3-60.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
201
Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 19 per para 3-61 .
If test passes : Go to step 202 .
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 22 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement, perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 19 per para 3-61 .
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUs in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-268
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
18per 202 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 20 per para 3-62 .
If test passes : Go to step 203.
If test fails :
derliste
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 23 in the order listed in para 3-41.
Control
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 20 per para 3-62.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails :
ed
er
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
203 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 21 per para 3-63.
If test passes : Go to step 204.
If test fails : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 24 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement, perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 21 per para 3-63.
If test passes : Return to step 91 . If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-269
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION_Continued
204 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 22 per para 3-64.
If test passes : Go to step 205.
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 25 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 22 per para 3-64.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails:
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
205 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 23 per para 3-65.
If test passes : Go to step 206 .
If test fails:
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 26 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 23 per para 3-65 .
If test passes : Return to step 91 . If test fails : Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-270
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
22 per 206 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 24 per para 3-66.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 28 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
derliste
Control
er
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe PROG ALERT
If indicator goes off and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 207.
If indicator does not go off or ECS / MSU diagnostics do not run: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 27 in the order listed in para 3-41.
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 24 per para 3-66.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
207 At Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73 , observe displays , and at Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
Ifthe message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." appears correctly at all units : Go to step 217.
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly at all units :
Go to step 208.
208 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , observe MEM ERR
CONTINUED
3-271
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
208 -Continued
If indicator is on: a . One at a time , replace BRUS from BRU group no . 29 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73 and Hard Copy Unit A65 .
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." appears correctly at all units and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 217.
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly at all units or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is off: Go to step 209. : 209 At Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73 , observe displays , and at Hard Copy Unit A65, observe printout .
If any message appears at any unit :
Go to step 210.
If no message appears at any unit: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 30 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73 and Hard Copy Unit A65 .
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX ..." appears correctly at all units and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 217 .
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX ... " does not appear correctly at all units or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-272
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
210 At Cathode Ray Tube A54, observe display . If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." appears correctly:
e orderi
3001ST ardCop
Go to step 213.
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly: Go to step 211 .
211 At Cathode Ray Tube A73, observe display. atall If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX... " appears correctly: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 36 in the order listed in para 3-41 . orrect b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESETand BOOTSTRAP INITand observe Cathode Ray Tubes ced. A54 and A73 and Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." appears correctly at all units and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 217.
Ifthe message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly at all units or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly: Go to step 212.
212 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout.
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX... " appears correctly: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 38 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESETand BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73 and Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX ..." appears correctly at all units and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 217 .
CONTINUED
3-273
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
212 -Continued
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX... " does not appear correctly at all units or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 37 in order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73 and Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX... " appears correctly at all units and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 217.
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly at all units or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running :
Replace next BRU on list. If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
213 At Cathode Ray Tube A73 , observe display .
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX... " appears correctly:
Go to step 215.
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX... " does not appear correctly: Go to step 214.
214 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." appears correctly: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 32 in order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator parel (fig . C ) press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73 and Hard Copy Unit A65 .
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." appears appears correctly at all units and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 217.
3-274
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
214 -Continued ar corre
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly at all units or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running :
placed
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
f correct
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly:
rlisted
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 31 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
press
b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Cathode Ray Tubes
RayT
yatal
A54 and A73 and Hard Copy Unit A65 . If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." appears correctly at all units and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 217.
Correct
If the message "THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly at all units or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running :
ced
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
215 Perform Hard Copy Unit A65 self- test per para 3-77.
If test passes : Go to step 216.
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 33 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , perform Hard Copy Unit A65 self- test per para 3-77.
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-275
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-39.
216 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 7 per para 3-49.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 35 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Cathode Ray Tubes A54 and A73 and Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." appears correctly at all units and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 217 .
If the message " THE QUICK BROWN FOX..." does not appear correctly at all units or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 34 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 7 per para 3-49 .
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
217 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " START OF CPUD" appears :
Go to step 223.
If the message " START OF CPUD" does not appear :
Go to step 218.
CONTINUED
3-276
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
7per
218 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , observe MEM ERR.
If indicator is on: orderli
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 29 in the order listed in para 3-41.
press
b. After each replacement , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65 .
RayTu If the message " START OF CPUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running:
lyatal Go to step 223.
If the message " START OF CPUD " does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running :
Correc Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
aced If indicator is off:
Go to step 219.
derlist 219 Observe PERI
ontr
If indicator is on: Go to step 222.
If indicator is off:
Go to step 220 .
220 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET .
221 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 26 per para 3-68.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 40 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
CONTINUED
3-277
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
221 -Continued
If the message " START OF CPUD " appears and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 223.
If the message " START OF CPUD " does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 39 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A12 test routine no . 26 per para 3-68.
If test passes: Return to step 91 .
If test fails :
:
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
222 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 34 per para 3-76.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 149 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESETand BOOTSTRAP INITand observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF CPUD" appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 223.
If the message " START OF CPUD" does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-278
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
222 -Continued
gnostic
If test fails and PCU / IOCU parity error is set: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 161 in the order listed in para 3-41.
SU
ced.
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message "START OF CPUD" appears and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 223.
r liste
If the message "START OF CPUD " does not appear or ECS / MSU
8 €
diagnostics are not running :
$CO
TelA8
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
>
If test fails and HCU malfunction error is set: a . At Hard Copy Unit A65 , insure unit is powered up and check for low, torn , or improperly loaded paper.
If any of these problems are observed :
d, cal (1 ) Correct problem . (2) Return to step 91 .
If none of these problems are observed :
Go to step 222b .
b. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 148 in the order listed in
para 3-41 . c. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF CPUD" appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 223.
If the message "START OF CPUD" does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been CONTINUED
replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-279
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39 .
E
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
223 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message "START OF MMUD " appears : Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD" does not appear: Go to step 224.
224 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If any other message appears after the message " STARD OF CPUD" : Go to step 225.
If no message appears after the message "START OF CPUD ": a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 41 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , pressCOMP & SYS RESET andBOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF MMUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD" does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
225 Observe printout .
If the message " END OF CPUD PROGRAM " appears:
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 42 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , pressCOMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF MMUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running:
Go to step 233.
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d 3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
225 -Continued
If the message " START OF MMUD" does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " END OF CPUD PROGRAM" does not appear: Go to step 226.
CPUD
226 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " END OF TEST ON CPU 1 " appears :
Go to step 230. derlist If the message " END OF TEST ON CPU1 " does not appear:
resso!
Go to step 227.
227 Observe printout.
gn If the message " FAILED TEST CP 1001 " appears:
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 43 in the order listed in para 3-41 . དྲ།། b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF MMUD" appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD " does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message "FAILED TEST CP1001 " does not appear:
Go to step 228.
CONTINUED
3-281
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION —Continued
228 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message''IOCU TRAP ILLEGAL OP CODE " appears : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 44 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , pressCOMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF MMUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running:
Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD" does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " IOCU TRAP ILLEGAL OP CODE" does not appear: Go to step 229.
229 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " IOCU TRAP MEMORY OR BUSS PARITY ERROR " appears: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 45 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF MMUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD" does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-282
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
229 - Continued
If the message " IOCU TRAP MEMORY OR BUSS PARITY ERROR" does not appear:
order
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 46 in the order listed in para 3-41.
press
b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
py Ut
Tiagnost
MSU
aced
蓉
ear
If the message "START OF MMUD" appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD " does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
230 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " FAILED TEST CP2001 " appears :
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 47 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message "START OF MMUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD" does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " FAILED TEST CP2001 " does not appear:
Go to step 231 . CONTINUED
3-283
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
231 Observe printout .
If the message " IOCU TRAP ILLEGAL OP CODE " appears : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 48 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF MMUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD " does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " IOCU TRAP ILLEGAL OP CODE" does not appear: Go to step 232.
232 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " IOCU TRAP MEMORY OR BUSS PARITY ERROR " appears: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 49 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF MMUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 233.
If the message " START OF MMUD" does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " IOCU TRAP MEMORY OR BUSS PARITY ERROR " does not appear: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 50 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
3-284
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
232 -Continued
rders
b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
Dress
byUnit
If the message "START OF MMUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 233.
agnost
If the message " START OF MMUD" does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running :
SU
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
ceda
233 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout.
If the message " START OF IOCD " appears :
Ear
Go to step 242 .
If the message "START OF IOCD" does not appear:
Go to step 234.
234 Observe printout .
If the message " END MMUD " appears : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 51 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message "START OF IOCD " appears and ECS /MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 242.
If the message " START OF IOCD" does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " END MMUD" does not appear: CONTINUED
Go to step 235.
3-285
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
235 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMUD AS MMU 1 " appears : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 52 in the order listed in para 3-41. b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START of IOCD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running: Go to step 242.
If the message " START OF IOCD " does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " TESTING MMUD AS MMU 1 " does not appear : Go to step 236.
236 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMU3 " appears : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 53 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65 .
If the message " START OF IOCD" appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 242.
If the message " START OF IOCD " does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " TESTING MMU3 " does not appear:
Go to step 237.
T
6
3-28
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
1
3-39 . WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
237 Observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMU2 " appears :
rderliste
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 54 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
press00 by Unt
nostics
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65 .
If the message "START OF IOCD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 242.
U
ced
If the message " START OF IOCD " does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message "TESTING MMU2" does not appear: Go to step 238.
238 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " CPU TRAP -- NO TRAP BIT SET" appears :
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 55 in the order listed in para 3-41 . COMP & b. After each replacement, at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press SYS RESET nd BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65. a
If the message " START OF IOCD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running :
Go to step 242.
If the message "START OF IOCD " does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message " CPU TRAP-- NO TRAP BIT SET" does not appear: Go to step 239. CONTINUED
3-287
#
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
239 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " CPU TRAP -- PROCESSOR NOT RESPONDING " appears: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 56 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
if the message " START OF IOCD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 242.
If the message " START OF IOCD " does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message "CPU TRAP -- PROCESSOR NOT RESPONDING " does not appear: Go to step 240.
240 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no. 10 per para 3-52.
If test passes : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 57 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESETand BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If the message " START OF IOCD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running : Go to step 242.
If the message " START OF IOCD " does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails :
CONTINUED Go to step 241 . T
3-288
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
241 Perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 24 per para 3-66. appet der liste
If test passes : a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 13 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
ressC yUni
b . After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A94A 12 test routine no . 10 per para 3-52.
nostics
J
ced
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If test fails :
doesno a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 58 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b. After each replacement , perform Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 test routine no . 24 per para 3-66. er
113
500
If test passes : Return to step 91 .
If test fails : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
242 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout.
If the message " END OF IOCUD " appears:
Go to step 243.
If the message " END OF IOCUD" does not appear:
a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 59 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESETand BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
CONTINUED
3-289
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
242
Continued
If the message " END OF IOCUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnostics are running:
Go to step 243.
If the message " END OF IOCUD " does not appear or ECS / MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
243 At Control - Indicator Panel A55 or A74, perform Display and Control Console Diagnostics ( DCCD ) interface subtest per instructions appearing on Cathode Ray Tube A54 or A73.
If subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 244.
If subtest does not load or run successfully: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 60 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT, and at Control - Indicator Panel A55 or A74 , perform DCCD interface subtest per instructions appearing on Cathode Ray Tube A54 or A73.
If subtest loads and runs successfully : Go to step 244 . If subtest does not load and run successfully: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
244 At Control- Indicator Panel A55 or A74 , perform Monolithic Memory Unit Diagnostics ( MMUD) subtest per instructions appearing on Cathode Ray Tube A54 or A73 .
If subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 257. If subtest does not load or run successfully: Go to step 245.
CONTINUED
3-290
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
245 Hard Copy Unit A65 , observed printout .
gnostics If the message " START OF MMUD " appears: Go to step 246.
SUdiag
If the message "START OF MMUD " does not appear:
laced a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 60 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , at BITE panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS
ole RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65 . node :
If the message " END OF IOCUD " appears and ECS / MSU diagnositcs are running :
Go to step 257 . If the message " END OF IOCUD " does not appear or ECS /MSU diagnostics are not running : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call
ss
Intermediate Maintenance .
Pare
246 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMU5 " appears :
Go to step 247.
If the message " TESTING MMU5 " does not appear :
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 16 in the order listed in
b.
para 3-41 . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully : Go to step 257. If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . CONTINUED
3-291
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
247 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMU6 " appears :
Go to step 248.
If the message " TESTING MMU6" does not appear :
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 17 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 257.
If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
248 Observe printout.
If the message " TESTING MMU7 " appears : Go to step 249.
If the message " TESTING MMU7" does not appear: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 18 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully : Go to step 257 .
If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully : Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
D
CONTINUE
3-292
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
249 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout.
If the message " TESTING MMU8" appears : Go to step 250.
derlister
If the message " TESTING MMU8" does not appear: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 19 in the order listed in
essCo UnitA
para 3-41 . b. After each replacement at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully :
Go to step 257.
edc
If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
250 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout.
If the message " TESTING MMU9 " appears:
Go to step 251 .
SE If the message " TESTING MMU9" does not appear:
82
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 20 in the order listed in
CON
para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65 .
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully:
Go to step 257. If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
T
3-293
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
251
Observe printout.
If the message " TESTING MMU 10" appears : Go to step 252.
If the message " TESTING MMU 10" does not appear: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 21 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b . After each replacement at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 257.
If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
252 At Hard Copy Unit A65, observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMU11 " appears :
Go to step 253.
If the message " TESTING MMU 11 " does not appear: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 22 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C ) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully :
Go to step 257 . If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully: Replace next BRU on list.If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-294
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
253 Observe printout .
If the message "TESTING MMU 12 " appears: Go to step 254.
If the message " TESTING MMU 12 " does not appear:
listed
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 23 in the order listed in para 3-41 .
CON nit A65
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65 .
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 257.
If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully: call Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
254 At Hard Copy Unit A65 , observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMU 13" appears :
Go to step 255.
If the message "TESTING MMU 13" does not appear: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 24 in the order listed in para 3-41.
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit A65.
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 257. If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully :
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance . CONTINUED
T
3-295
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION— Continued
255 At Hard Copy Unit , observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMU 14" appears: Go to step 256.
If the message " TESTING MMU 14" does not appear: a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 25 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel ( fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit.
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 257.
If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
256 Observe printout .
If the message " TESTING MMU 15 " appears : a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 27 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit .
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully : Go to step 257. If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully : Replace next BRU on list .If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the message "TESTING MMU 15" does not appear: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 26 in the order listed in para 3-41.
b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C), press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe Hard Copy Unit.
3-296
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39. WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
256 -Continued
If MMUD subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 257.
If MMUD subtest does not load or run successfully:
derliste Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
ess00
Uni 257 At Control - Indicator Panel A55 or A74 , perform Multi - Processor Control Diagnostics (MPCD) subtest per instructions appearing on Cathode Ray Tube A54 or A73.
If subtest loads and runs successfully: Go to step 258.
ed.cal
COM
If subtest does not load or run successfully :
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no . 61 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT, and at Control - Indicator Panel A55 or A74, perform MPCD subtest per instructions appearing Cathode Ray Tube A54 or A73.
If subtest loads and runs successfully:
1. Go to step 258. If MPCD subtest does not load or run successfully:
Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
258 At Control - Indicator Panel A55 or A74 , perform remainder of ECS / MSU diagnostics per instructions appearing on Cathode Ray Tube A54 or A73.
If diagnostics load and run successfully: Go to step 259.
If diagnostics do not load or run successfully :
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in BRU group no. 60 in the CONTINUED order listed in para 3-41 .
3-297
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-39.
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
258 -Continued
b. After each replacement , at BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT, and at Control - Indicator Panel A55 or A74, perform remainder of ECS / MSU diagnostics per instructions appearing on Cathode Ray Tube A54 or A73 .
If diagnostics load and run successfully: Go to step 259.
If diagnostics do not load and run successfully: Replace next BRU on list . If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
259 At BITE indicator panel (fig . C) , press COMP & SYS RESET.
260 At Recovery Storage Unit A95A6 ( fig . E) , remove ECS / MSU tape cassette from TTC1 and replace TAC 1 DATA BASE in TTC2 and K7 in TTC1 .
261
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
TTC2TTCI DE DE
Ø
FIGURE E
3-298
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
3-40 WEAPONS CONTROL COMPUTER A95, MMU1 AND MMU2 MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
g. C) ,pre trond nostics
3.
E
placed RO
AD
SI
DE
MONOLITHIC MEMORY UNIT 1 A95A2
E
MONOLITHIC MEMORY UNIT 2 A95A3
SID
B CUR
tefro Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . None
1 At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) , observe MEM .
B&CSTATUS 1
TEXT
CST DISPLAY P&ROUTBATA
EXT ALERT
BASKET1POWER
COMPUTERCONTROL LOADDEVICESELECT MASS MASSSTORAGE STORAGE UNIT1 UNIT2 NONRECOVERY TACTICAL STORAGE ITHERS WHIT PERIPHERALS
BANKETI CLOCK
BASKET&POWER BABLET2CLOCK COMPUTERSTATUS P/B
FIGURE A
If indicator is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If indicator is on:
CONTINUED
Go to step 2.
3-299
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-40.
2
WEAPONS CONTROL COMPUTER A95, MMU1 AND MMU2 MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At Monolithic Memory Unit 1 ( MMU1 ) A95A2 ( 1 , fig . B ) and Monolithic Memory Unit 2 ( MMU2 ) A95A3 ( 2 ) , observe display indicators .
O
O
O
0
0
0
2 O
THE FIGURE B
NOTE
Refer to paragraphs 4-101 and 4-102 for procedures for replacing battery replaceable units .
If both indicators are off: a . One at a time, replace battery replaceable units ( BRUS ) in the BRU group 105 in the order listed in para 3-41 . b. After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . A) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe MEM.
If indicator goes off and engagement control station ( ECS ) diagnostics load and run successfully :
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If indicator stays on or ECS diagnostics do not load or run successfully: If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance.
CONTINUED
3-300
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
FAULT 3-40.
Memory: 2
WEAPONS CONTROL COMPUTER A95 , MMU1 AND MMU2 MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION —Continued
-Continued
If MMU 1 indicator displays a character from 0 through 9 or from A through F: ا listed in para 3-41 .
TABLE A
CHARACTER
BRU GROUP
CHARACTER
CHARACTER
BRU GROUP
A
115
0
105
110
1
106
56
BRU GROUP
6
111
B
116
2 3
2
a. One at a time , replace BRUS in group indicated in table A in the order
107
7
112
C
117
108
8
113
D
118
4
109
9
114
E
119
F
120
b . After each replacement , at BITE indicator panel (fig . A) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe MEM .
If indicator goes off and ECS diagnostics load and run successfully: Fault corrected . Return to the procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If indicator stays on ECS diagnostics do not load or run successfully: If all BRUS in group have been replaced , call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
T
3-301
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-40.
WEAPONS CONTROL COMPUTER A95 , MMU1 AND MMU2 MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
2
-Continued
If MMU2 indicator displays a character from 0 through 9 or from A through F: a . One at a time , replace BRUS in group indicated in table B in the order listed in para 3-41 .
TABLE
B
BRU CHARACTER
BRU GROUP
CHARACTER
BRU GROUP
121
5
126
A
131
122
6
127
B
132
123
C
133
CHARACTER
GROUP 0
128
8
129
125
9
130
DEF
1 2 3 4
7
124
134
135 136
b. After each replacement , at BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) , press COMP & SYS RESET and BOOTSTRAP INIT and observe MEM
If indicator goes off and ECS diagnostics load and run successfully :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator stays on or ECS diagnostics do not load or run successfully and all BRUS in group have been replaced :
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph.
3-302
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
FAULT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
mAthro
1
A95A2A 1
in theor
BRU ROUP
4-102
A95A9A3
4-110
A95A 10A3
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
A53A7
4-56
A53A47
4-56 5-54
A51A1 A95W29
Call Intermediate Maintenance
31
A95A2W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
32
A95A3W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
33
A95A9W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
34
A95A 10W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
35 A95A2
4-101
A95A9
4-109
A95A 10
A95A 13
4-109 4-113
A95A7
4-106
36
A53
A51
4-56
4-53
W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8
Call Intermediate Maintenance
y
2
SUE
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A 13A2
4-110
A95A 13A7
4-110
A95A 13A9
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A 13A20
4-110
A95A 13A 14
4-110
A95A 13A6
4-110
A95A 13A 15
4-110
A95A 13A8
4-110
A95A 13A32
4-110
A95A 13A38
4-110 Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W40 A95W29
A51A21
A51A22 A51S1
5-54 5-54 Call Intermediate Maintenance
CONTINUED
1
3-303
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 • 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
2 Continued
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A 13
4-113
A95A7
4-106
A51
3
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-53
W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A9A3
4-110
A95A 10A3
4-110
A95W29
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 16
4-116
A95A17
4-116
A51A21
5-54
A51A22
5-54
A51S1
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A9W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 10W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A2W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3W2 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A51 4-53 W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13 4-113
A95A9 4-109
A95A10 4-109
A95A7 4-106
4
A95A 13A4 A95A2A31
4-110 4-102
A95A2A14 A95A2A30
4-102 4-102
A95W40 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13 4-113
A95A2 4-101 5
A95A9A13 A95A9A14
4-110
A95A9A15
4-110
A95A9A 12
4-110
A95A9A4
4-110
4-110
3-304
CONTINUED
.TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UNIT
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-41 .
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
5
A95A 10A 13
4-110
Continued
A95A 10A 14
4-110
CO
6
A95A 10A 15
4-110
A95A 10A 12
4-110
A95A 10A4
4-110
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A 11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A 11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A9
4-109
A95A 10
4-109
A95A 13
4-113
A95A2
4-101
A95A3
4-101
A95A13A4
4-110
A95A 13A7
4-110
A95A 14A1
4-110
A95A14A27
4-110
A95A 14A 13
4-110
A95A 14A 12
4-110
A95A 14A9
4-110
A95A14A14
4-110
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A 14A34
4-110
A95A 13A 17
4-110
A95A 13A 15
4-110
A95A 13A 12
4-110 CONTINUED
3-305
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-110
6
A95A 13A11
Continued
A95A 13A 10
4-110
A95A 13A9
4-110
A95A13A35
4-110
7
8
A95A 13A36
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A20
4-110
A95A13A21
4-110
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A34
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A13A33
4-110
A95A 13A 15
4-110
A95A13
4-113
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A13A34
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A13A30
4-110
A95A13A25
4-110
A95A13A26
4-110
A95A 13
4-113
O
A95A 14A 19 A95A14A22
4-110
4-110
A95A14A25 4-110
A95A14A5 4-110
A95A14A17 4-110
A95A14A1 4-110
A95A13A29 4-110
A95A 13A30 A95A13A31
4-110 4-110
A95A13A15 4-110
A95A13A36 4-110
A95A 13A8 A95A13A33
4-110
A95A13A24
4-110
A95A13A 18 A95A13A17
4-110 4-110
A95A13A16
4-110 4-110
CONTINUED
3-306
LE UNIT
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
3-41 .
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
9
A95A 13A 13
4-110
Continued
A95A 13A 12
4-110
A95A 13A 11
4-110
A95A 13A 10
4-110
A95A 13A9
4-110
A95A 13A38
4-110
A95A14A34 A95A14A36
4-110 4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A95A14A7
4-110
A95A 14A9
4-110
A95W24
10
11
12
A95A 14
Call Intermediate Maintenance 4-115
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A29 A95A13A36
4-110
A95A13A28
4-110
A95A 13A24
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A26
4-110
4-110
A95A 13A25
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 13A37
4-110
A95A 13A32
4-110
A95A 13A33
4-110
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A13A35
4-110
A95A 13A36
4-110
A95A 14A5
4-110
A95A14A6
4-110
A95A14A7
4-110
A95A14A8 A95A14A9
4-110
4-110
A95A14A 10 A95A14A11
4-110
4-110
CONTINUED
3-307
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
12
A95A14A17
4-110
Continued
A95A 14A34
4-110
A95A13A24
4-110
A95A 13A 18
4-110
A95A13A 16
4-110
BRU GROUP NO.
20
A95A13A13
13
14
4-110
A95W24
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13
4-113
A95A14
4-115
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A29
4-102
A95A3A30
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A28 4-102
A95A2 4-101
15
A95A3A 13 4-102
A95A3A27 A95A3A28
4-102 4-102
A95A3 4-101
16
A95A2A12 4-102
A95A2A25 4-102
A95A2A26 4-102
A95A2 4-101 17
A95A3A12 A95A3A25
4-102
A95A3A26
4-102
A95A3
4-102 4-101
18
A95A2A11 A95A2A23
4-102
A95A2A34
4-102
A95A2
4-102 4-101
19
A95A3A11 A95A3A23
4-102 4-102
CONTINUED
3-308
LE UNT
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 . WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
19 Continued
20
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A3A24
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A21
4-102
A95A2A22
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A21
4-102
A95A3A22
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A 19
4-102
A95A2A20
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A 19 A95A3A20
4-102 4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A17
4-102
A95A2A 18
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A 17
4-102
A95A3A 18
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A 15
4-102
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A3A7
4-102
27 A95A3A 15
4-102
A95A3A 16 A95A3
4-102 4-101 CONTINUED
3-309
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
28
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A14A5
4-110
A95A14A17
4-110
A95A14A1
4-110
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A13A31
4-110
A95A 13A36
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A13A34
4-110
A95A 13A23
4-110
A95A 13A39
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A14A34
4-110
A95A14A36
4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A95A14A7
4-110
A95A14A9
4-110
A95W24 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 14 4-115
A95A13 4-113
29
A95A2A30 4-102
A95A2A29 A95A2A14
4-102 4-102
A95A2A32 4-102
A95A2A31 4-102
A95A2 4-101 30
A95A13A29 4-110
A95A13A31 4-110
A95A13A30
A95A 13A37
4-110
A95A 13A35
4-110
A95A 13A36 A95A13A34
4-110
4-110
A95A13A19
4-110
A95A13A33
4-110
A95A13A20
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A13
4-110
CONTINUED 4-113
3-310
E UNIT
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
31
32
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A13A20
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A36
4-110
A95A 13A35
4-110
A95A13A34
4-110
A95A 13A37
4-110
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 13A9
4-110
A95A13
4-113
33
A65
34
A65
4-70 4-70
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A 14A25
4-110
A95A14A 12
4-110
A95A14A9
4-110
A95A14A34
4-110
A95A14A 13
4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A95A14A36
4-110
A95A14A38
4-110
A95A14A37
4-110
A95A14A29
4-110
A95A 14A30 A95A14A31
4-110
4-110
4-110
A95A 14A32 A95A14A33
4-110
A95A14A27
4-110
A95A14A28
4-110
A95A 14A2
4-110
A95A 14A 17 A95W26 A95A 14 A95A7 W226 35
4-110 Call Intermediate Maintenance
4-115 4-106 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A 15
4-110
A95A 13A6
4-110 CONTINUED
3-311
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
35 Continued
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A14A5
4-110
A95A14A1
4-110
A95A 13A 17
4-110
A95A13A 12
4-110
A95A 13A11
4-110
A95A 13A 10
4-110
A95A 13A9
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A38
4-110
A95W24
36
37
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 14
4-115
A95A13A11
4-110
A95A 13A8
4-110
A95A 13A10
4-110
A95A13A9
4-110
A95A13
4-113
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A13A35
4-110
A95A13A 18
4-110
A95A13A16
4-110
A95A 13A 13 4-110
A95A13 38
4-113
A95A13A31 4-110
A95A13A20 4-110
A95A 13A9 4-110
A95A13A10 4-110
A95A13A11 4-110
A95A13A32 4-110
A95A13 4-113
39
A95A13A31 A95A13A34
4-110
A95A13A33
4-110
A95A13A25
4-110
A95A 13A26 A95A13A27
4-110
A95A13
4-110 4-110 4-113
CONTINUED
3-312
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
EUNT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
40
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Basic Weapon Control Computer (WCC) Diagnostics Tactical Tape A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A39
4-110
A95A 13A37
4-110
A95A 13A7
4-110
A95A 14A5
4-110
A95A 14A17
4-110
A95A 14A35
4-110
A95A 14A27
4-110
A95A 14A32
4-110
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A 14A 12
4-110
A95A14A13
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A 13A3
A95W24
A95A6A3
41
4-110 Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13
4-113
A95A14
4-115
A95A 13A33
4-110
A95A 13A34
4-110
A95A 13A39
4-110
A95A 13A26
4-110
A95A 13A25
4-110
A95A13A27
4-110
A95A9A 17
4-110
A95A9A 19
4-110
A95A9A 13
4-110
A95A9A 14
4-110
A95A9A18
4-110 4-110
A95A9A 15
A95A9A25 A95A9A33
4-110 4-110
A95A9A34
4-110
A95A9A35
4-110 CONTINUED
3-313
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
41
A95A9A36
4-110
Continued
A95A9A38
4-110
A95A9A39
4-110
A95A9A40
4-110
A95A9A21
4-110
A95A9A 12
4-110
42
A95A9A4
4-110
A95A9A 16
4-110
A95A9A3
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A 13A 17
4-110
A95A 13A 10
4-110
A95A13A9
4-110
A95A 13A38
4-110
A95A 13
4-113
A95A9
4-109
Basic WCC
Diagnostics Tactical Tape 43
A95A9A 13 4-110
A95A9A 14 4-110
A95A9A15 4-110
A95A9A 12 4-110
A95A9A35 4-110
A95A9A4 4-110
A95A9A36 4-110
A95A9A40
A95A9A39
4-110 4-110
A95A9A37 4-110
A95A9 4-109
44
A95A 13A34 A95A13A2
4-110
A95A9A11
4-110
A95A9A37
4-110
A95A9A6
4-110
A95A13
4-110
A95A9 45
A95A9A 13 A95A9A14 A95A9A17
4-110 4-110 4-110
CONTINUED
T
3-314
4-113 4-109
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 UNT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-110
45
A95A9A 19
Continued
A95A9A 15
4-110
A95A9A 18
4-110
46
47
48
A95A9A33
4-110
A95A9A4
4-110
A95A9A39
4-110
A95A9A40
4-110
A95A9A35
4-110
A95A9A21
4-110
A95A9A36
4-110
A95A9A 12
A95A9
4-110 4-109
A95A9A 13
4-110
A95A9A 12
4-110
A95A9A40
4-110
A95A 13A 14
4-110
A95A9
4-109
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 10A 13
4-110
A95A 10A 14
4-110
A95A 10A 15
4-110
A95A 10A 12
4-110
A95A 10A35
4-110
A95A 10A4
4-110
A95A 10A36
4-110
A95A 10A40
4-110
A95A 10A39
4-110
A95A 10A37
4-110
A95A 10
4-109
A95A13A34
4-110
4-110 A95A 13A2
4-110 A95A 10A11 A95A 10A37
4-110
4-110 A95A 10A6
4-113 A95A 13
A95A 10 49
4-109
4-110 A95A 10A 13
4-110 A95A 10A 14
4-110 A95A 10A 17 CONTINUED
3-315
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATIONContinued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
49
A95A 10A 19
4-110
Continued
A95A 10A 15
4-110
A95A 10A 18
4-110
A95A 10A33
4-110
A95A 10A4
4-110
A95A 10A39
4-110
A95A 10A40
4-110
A95A 10A35
4-110
A95A10A21
4-110
A95A 10A36
4-110
A95A 10A 12
4-110
A95A 10 4-109
50
A95A 10A 13 4-110
A95A 10A 12 4-110
A95A 10A40 4-110
A95A 10 4-109 51
Basic WCC Diagnostics
Tactical Tape A95A13A31 4-110
A95A13A5 4-110
A95A 13A32 4-110
A95A 13A4 4-110
A95A 13A37 A95A13A28
4-110
A95A13A39
4-110
A95A13
4-110 4-113
52
A95A2A14 A95A2A30
4-102 4-102
A95A2A29 A95A3A14
4-102
A95A3A30
4-102
A95A3A29
4-102
A95A2
4-102
A95A3
4-101 4-101
53
A95A3A13
A95A3A27 A95A3A28
4-102
4-102 4-102
CONTINUE
3-316
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
E UNT
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A9A 13
4-110
A95A9A 14
4-110
A95A9A 15
4-110
54
53 Continued
54
56
55
56
57
58
A95A3
4-101
A95A9
4-109
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A9A34
4-110
A95A9A 16
4-110
A95A9
4-109
A95A 13A37
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A9A3
4-110
A95A9A39
4-110
A95A 13
4-113
A95A9
4-109
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A32
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A 13A 14
4-110
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A 13
4-113
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A33
4-102
A95A3A34
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
4-102 A95A3A 11
4-102 A95A3A 10 CONTINUED
3-317
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
58
A95A3A9
4-102
Continued
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A13A29
4-110
59
A95A 13A 14
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A35
4-110
A95A 13A34
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A32
4-110
A95A 13A37
4-110
A95A 13A39
4-110
A95A13A2 4-110
A95A 13 4-113
60
Basic WCC
Diagnostics Tactical Tape
A95A9A 13 4-110
A95A9A 14 4-110
A95A9A15 4-110
A95A 13A29 4-110
A95A 13A30 4-110
A95A13A31 4-110
A95A 13A28 4-110
61
Basic WCC Diagnostics Tactical Tape A95A 10A 13
A95A 10A 14
4-110
A95A 10A 15 A95A9A 13
4-110 4-110
A95A9A 14
4-110
A95A9A15
4-110
A95A 13A29 A95A13A30
4-110
A95A 13A31 A95A13A28
4-110
4-110
4-110 4-110
CONTINUED
3-318
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UNIT
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
3-41 .
BRU GROUP NO.
62
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A9PS1 A95W 13
63
4-111 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A9
4-109
A95A8
4-107
A95A 10PS1
4-111
A95W 14
64
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 10
4-109
A95A8
4-107
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A39
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A9A3
4-110
A95A 10A3
4-110
A95A 13W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A2W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3W2 A95A9W2 A95A 10W2 A95A 16
Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
4-116
A95A 17
4-116
A95A 13PS1
4-114
A95A2A1
4-102
A95A9PS1
4-111
A95A 10PS1
4-111
A95A2
4-101
A95A3
4-101
A95A9
4-109
A95A 10
4-109
A95A 13
4-113
65
A95A 13PS1 A95W 12 A95W22
A95A2
4-114 Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
4-101
A95A3
4-101
A95A8
4-107 CONTINUED
3-319
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
66
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A2A1
A95W21 A95A2 67
A95A14PS1 A95W11 A95W 19
68
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-102
Call Intermediate Maintenance 4-101
4-111 Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A14
4-115
A95A 13
4-113
A95A8
4-107
A95A13A30
4-110
A95A13A31
4-110
A95A13A4
4-110
A95A 13A20
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A13A26
4-110
A95A 13A24
4-110
A95A 13A23 A95A13A21
4-110 4-110
A95A13A33 4-110
A95A 13A 14 4-110
A95A13A34 4-110
A95A 13A37 4-110
A95A 13 4-113 69
A95A13A31 4-110
A95A 13A26 4-110
A95A13A24 4-110
A95A13A22 4-110
A95A 13A23 4-110
A95A13A1 4-110
A95A13A9 4-110
A95A 13A 10 A95A13A11
4-110
A95A13A12
4-110
A95A13A15
4-110
A95A 13A17
4-110
A95A 13A 14
4-110
A95A18
4-110
A95A19
4-116
A95A 13W3 A95A13
4-116 Call Intermediate Maintenance
4-113
CONTINUED
3-320
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 UNIT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
770
71
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A 13A20
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A35
4-110
A95A 13A36
4-110
A95A 13A37
4-110
A95A 13A22
4-110
A95A 13A24
4-110
A95A 13A25
4-110
A95A 13A14
4-110
A95A 13A33
4-110
A95A13A34
4-110
A95A 13A39
4-110
A95A 13A23
4-110
A95A 13A 15
4-110
A95A 13A 16
4-110
A95A 13A 13
4-110
A95A13A2
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A13A6
4-110
A95A13A7
4-110
A95A 13A38
4-110
A95A 13A 17
4-110
A95A 13A 18 A95A 13
4-110 4-113
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A13A30
4-110
A95A13A29
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A13A24
4-110 4-110
A95A 13A23 A95A 13A22 A95A 13A25
4-110
4-110 4-110
A95A 13A34 A95A 13A35
4-110 CONTINUED
3-321
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
71
A95A 13A36
4-110
Continued
A95A 13A39
4-110
A95A 13A33
4-110
A95A 13A32
4-110
A95A 13A1
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A20
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A 13A 10
4-110
A95A 13A9
4-110
A95A 13W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A18 4-116
A95A 19 4-116
A95A 13 4-113
72
A95A 13A31 4-110
A95A 13A29 4-110 A95A13A30 4-110
A95A 13A26 4-110
A95A13A25 4-110
A95A13A24 4-110
A95A 13A23 4-110
A95A 13A22 A95A13A1
4-110 4-110
A95A13A28 4-110
A95A 13A35 4-110
A95A 13A36 4-110
A95A13A32 A95A13A27
4-110
A95A13A34 A95A13A21
4-110 4-110
A95A 13A4 A95A13A20
4-110
A95A13A33
4-110
A95A 13A19 A95A13A39
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A37
4-110
A95A13A2
4-110
A95A 13A17
4-110
4-110
4-110
4-110
CONTINUED
3-322
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
E UNIT
3-41 . WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
72
A95A 13A 15
4-110
Continued
A95A 13A 12
4-110
A95A 13A11
4-110
A95A 13A 10
4-110
A95A 13A9
4-110
A95A 13A 13
4-110
A95A 13A 14
4-110
A95A 13A 18
4-110
A95A13W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 16
73
74
4-116
A95A 17
4-116
A95A 18
4-116
A95A 19
4-116
A95A13
4-113
A95A13A30
4-110
A95A13A31
4-110
A95A 13A23
4-110
A95A 13A22
4-110
A95A 13A24
4-110
A95A13A25
4-110
A95A 13A 17
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A39 A95A13
4-110 4-113
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A34
4-102
A95A2A33
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A14
4-102
A95A2A13
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102 Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A2W2 A95A2W3 A95A2
4-101
CONTINUED
3-323
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
75
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A34
4-102
A95A3A33
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3
76
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-101
A95A9A 13
4-110
A95A9A 14
4-110
A95A9A 15 4-110
A95A9A6
4-110
A95A9A7 4-110
A95A9A 12 4-110
A95A9A4
4-110
A95A9A1 4-110
A95A9W2 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A9W3 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A9 4-109
77
A95A 10A 13 4-110
A95A 10A 14 4-110
A95A 10A 15 4-110
A95A10A6 4-110
A95A 10A7 4-110
A95A 10A 12 4-110
A95A 10A4 A95A 10A1
4-110
A95A 10W2
4-110
A95A10W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A10
Call Intermediate Maintenance 4-109
78
A95A9A 13 A95A9A14
4-110
4-110
CONTINUED
3-324
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
EUNT 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
78
Continued
79
80
81
82
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A9A 15
4-110
A95A9A 12
4-110
A95A9A4
4-110
A95A 10A 13
4-110
A95A 10A 14
4-110
A95A 10A15
4-110
A95A 10A 12
4-110
A95A 10A4
4-110
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A9
4-109
A95A10
4-109
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 10A 13
4-110
A95A 10A 14
4-110
A95A 10A 15
4-110
A95A 10A 12
4-110
A95A 10A4
4-110
A95A 10
4-109
A95A9A 13
4-110
A95A9A 14
4-110
A95A9A 15
4-110
A95A9A 12 A95A9A4
4-110 4-110
A95A9
4-109
A95A13A30
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A13
4-113 4-110
A95A 13A31
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
4-110 A95A 13A32
4-113 A95A 13 83
A95A 14A5 A95A14A1
4-110 4-110 CONTINUED
3-325
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
83
A95A13A 15
4-110
A95A13A6
4-110
A95A 13A7
4-110
Continued
84
A95A 13A 18
4-110
A95A 13A 16
4-110
A95A 13A 13
4-110
A95A13A24
4-110
A95A14A19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A14A15
4-110
A95A14A16
4-110
A95A14A5
4-110
A95A14A6
4-110
A95A14A34
4-110
A95A14A35 A95A14A37
4-110
A95A14A30
4-110
4-110
A95A14A12 4-110
A95A14A13 4-110
A95A14A29 4-110
A95A14A17 4-110
A95A14A36 4-110
A95A14A32 4-110
A95A14A31 4-110
A95A14A38 4-110
A95A14A27 4-110
A95A 13A29 4-110
A95A 13A35 A95A13A36
4-110
A95A13A37
4-110
A95A13A39
4-110
A95A13A3
4-110
A95A2A14
4-110
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A30
4-102
A95A14
4-102
A95A 13
4-115
A95A2
4-113 4-101
CONTINUED
3-326
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
UNIT BRU GROUP NO.
85
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A 16
4-110
A95A 13A 15
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A 13A35
4-110
A95A 13A36
4-110
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A 14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A14A17 A95A 14A5
4-110 4-110
A95A14A1
4-110
A95A 13A6 A95A13A7
4-110
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A21 A95A13A24
4-110 4-110
A95A13A34
4-110
A95A13A14
4-110
A95W24
4-110 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13
4-113
A95A 14
4-115
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A5
86
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A 16
4-110
A95A 13A 15
4-110
A95A13A35
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A20
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A 13A 14
4-110
A95A14A5
4-110
A95A14A6
4-110
A95A14A1
4-110
A95A13A24
4-110
A95A 13A34
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A33
4-110 CONTINUED
T
3-327
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-41 .
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
86
A95A13A13
4-110
Continued
A95A13A18
4-110
87
88
A95W24
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13
4-113
A95A14
4-115
A95A13A29
4-110
A95A13A25
4-110
A95A 13A26
4-110
A95A13A4
4-110
A95A13A33
4-110
A95A13
4-113
A95A13A29
4-110
A95A13A30
4-110
A95A13A31
4-110
A95A13A37
4-110
A95A 13A16
4-110
A95A 13A19 A95A13A20
4-110
A95A13A21
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A14A19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A14A17
4-110
A95A14A5
4-110
A95A 13A28 A95A13A34
4-110
4-110 4-110
A95A13A14 4-110
A95A 13A39 A95A13A32
4-110 4-110
A95A13A4 4-110
A95A13A2 4-110
A95A 13A 18 4-110
A95A13A17 4-110
A95A13A13 4-110
A95A13A12 A95A13A11
4-110
A95A13A10
4-110
A95A13
4-110
A95A14
4-113 4-115
CONTINUED
3-328
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UNIT 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
89
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A 13A31 A95A 13A25
90
91
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-110 4-110
A95A 13A26
4-110
A95A 13A33
4-110
A95A 13A34
4-110
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A30 A95A13A25
4-110
A95A 13A26 A95A13A35
4-110
A95A 13A36
4-110
4-110
4-110
A95A13A34
4-110
A95A 13A33
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A13
4-113
A95A 13A31 A95A13A29
4-110
A95A 13A35
4-110
4-110
A95A13A36
4-110
A95A 13A 16
4-110
A95A 13A6
4-110
A95A14A5
4-110
A95A14A1
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A20
4-110
A95A13A21
4-110
A95A 13A33
4-110
A95A 13A14
4-110
A95A13A24
4-110
A95A 13A 13
4-110
A95A13A 18
4-110 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W24 A95A13
4-113
A95A 14
4-115
92 A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A30
4-110 4-110
A95A 13A27
A95A 13A33
4-110
A95A 13
4-113
CONTINUED
3-329
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT
3-41 .
REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
93
A95A 13A27
4-110
94
A95A 13A25
4-110
A95A 13A26
4-110
95
Basic WCC Diagnostics Tactical Tape A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A13A31
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A20
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A13A35
4-110
A95A13A36
4-110
A95A 13A28
4-110
A95A14A19
4-110
A95A 14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A13A37
4-110
A95A13A4
4-110
A95A13A34
4-110
A95A13A32
4-110
A95A13A33
4-110
A95A 13A39
4-110
A95A13A5 4-110
A95A13A14 4-110
A95A13A23 4-110
A95A13A3 4-110
A95A13A16 4-110
A95A13A2 4-110
A95A13A6 4-110
A95A13A7 4-110
A95A14A17
A95A14A12
4-110
A95A14A26
4-110
A95A14A13
4-110
A95A14A27
4-110
A95A14A28
4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A95A14A34
4-110
4-110
3-330
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UNIT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
95
A95A 14A37
4-110
Continued
A95A 14A30
4-110
A95A 14A29
4-110
A95A14A31
4-110
A95A14A32
4-110
A95A 14A36
4-110
A95A14A38
4-110
A95A 14A33
4-110
A95A 14A 1
4-110
A95A 14A2
4-110
A95A6
96
16
97
4-105
A95W31
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A7
4-106
A95A8
4-107
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A30
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A33
4-102
A95A2A34
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A35
4-102 4-102
A95A2A34 A95A2A33
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102 4-102
A95A2A9 4-102 A95A2A8 4-102 A95A2A7
4-101 A95A2 98
4-102 A95A2A35 A95A2A34
4-102 4-102
A95A2A33
4-102 A95A2A32
CONTINUED
T
3-331
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
98
A95A2A30
4-102
Continued
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A26
4-102
A95A2A25
4-102
A95A2A24
4-102
A95A2A23 A95A2A22
4-102
A95A2A21
4-102
4-102
A95A2A20
4-102
A95A2A 19
4-102
A95A2A 18
4-102
A95A2A 17
4-102
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2A15 4-102
A95A2A14 4-102
A95A2A13 4-102
A95A2A 12 4-102
A95A2A11 4-102
A95A2A 10 4-102 A95A2A9 4-102
A95A2A8 4-102
A95A2A7 4-102
A95A2A31 4-102
A95A2 4-101 99
A95A2A35 A95A2A34
4-102 4-102
A95A2A33 4-102
A95A2A32 A95A2A31
4-102
A95A3A34
4-102
A95A9A2
4-102
4-110
A95A 10A2 A95A 13A2
4-110
A95A2W3
4-110
A95A3W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A9W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 10W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 18
Call Intermediate Maintenance
4-116
3-332
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ய
LE UNT 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
99 Continued
100
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A 19
4-116
A95A2
4-101
A95A3
4-101
A95A9
4-109
A95A 10
4-109
A95A13
4-113
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A34
4-102
A95A2A33
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A34
4-102
A95A3A33
4-102
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A2
4-110
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A13A35
4-110
A95A 13A36
4-110
A95A 13A22
4-110
A95A2A14
4-102
A95A2A 13 A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A11 A95A3A 10
4-102
4-102
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7 A95A3W3
4-102 Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance A95A2W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance A95A 13W3
4-116 A95A 18
4-116 A95A 19
CONTINUED
3-333
TM 9-1430-300-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
100
A95A2
Continued
A95A3
4-101
A95A13
4-113
101
4-101
A95A13A2
4-110
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A34
4-102
A95A2A33
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A34
4-102
A95A3A33
4-102
A95A 13W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A2W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A2W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 16
4-116
A95A17 4-116
A95A 18 4-116 A95A19 4-116
A95A13 4-113
A95A3 4-101 A95A2 4-101
102
A95A13A29 4-110
A95A13A30 4-110
A95A13A36 4-110
A95A13A35 4-110
A95A13A24 4-110
A95A13A14 4-110
A95A 13A34 A95A13A3
4-110
A95A13A1
4-110
A95A2A35
4-110
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A13W2
4-102
A95A2W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3W2
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A16
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A17
4-116
A95A13
4-116 4-113
3-334
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
LE UNIT 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
102
A95A3
4-101
Continued
A95A2
4-101
A95A 13A5
4-110
103
A95A 13A6
4-110
A95A 13A4 A95A13A21
4-110
4-56
A53A47
4-56
A51A3 A95W29
A95A13 A95A7 A53
A51
104
4-110
A53A7
5-54 Call Intermediate Maintenance 4-113 4-106 4-56 4-53
W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A2A34
4-102
A95A2A 14 A95A2A 13
4-102
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A3A34
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A9A3
A95A 10A3 A95A 18
4-110
4-110 4-116
CONTINUED
3-335
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
104 Continued
105
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A 19
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-116
A95A9W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 10W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A2W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A3W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13
4-113
A95A2
4-101
A95A3
4-101
A95A9
4-109
A95A 10
4-109
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A13A7
4-110
A53A7
4-56
A53A47 4-56 A51A4
5-54 A95W29 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13 4-113 A95A7 4-106
A53 4-56
A51 4-53
W228 Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8 Call Intermediate Maintenance
106
A95A2A30 4-102
A95A2A14 4-102
A95A2A31 4-102
A95A2A32 4-102
A95A2A35 4-102
A95A2A 13 A95A2A12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A26
4-102
A95A2A24
4-102 4-102
3-336
CONTINUED
A4
LE UNIT
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 . WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
106
A95A2A22
4-102
Continued
A95A2A20
4-102
A95A2A 18
4-102
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
e
e
107
108
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A 11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A25
4-102
A95A2A23
4-102
A95A2A21
4-102
A95A2A 19
4-102
A95A2A17
4-102
A95A2A 15
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A31 A95A2A32
4-102 4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102 4-102
A95A2A 12 A95A2A 11
4-102
4-102 A95A2A 10 A95A2A9
4-102
4-102 A95A2A8
4-102 A95A2A7 A95A2A30
4-102 4-102
A95A2A26
4-102
ED
A95A2A24
3-337
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
108
A95A2A22
4-102
Continued
A95A2A20
4-102
A95A2A 18
4-102
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
109
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A 12 A95A2A11
4-102 4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A9 4-102
A95A2A8 A95A2A7
4-102 4-102
A95A2A29 4-102
A95A2A25 4-102
A95A2A23 4-102
A95A2A21 4-102
A95A2A19 4-102
A95A2A17 4-102
A95A2A15 4-102
A95A2 4-101
110
A95A2A26 A95A2A12
4-102 4-102
A95A2A31 4-102
A95A2A32
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A14
4-102
A95A2A13
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95 A2A30 A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A24
4-102
4-102
4-102
3-338
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
E UNT 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
110
A95A2A22
4-102
Continued
A95A2A20
4-102 4-102
A95A2A 18
111
112
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A25
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A23 A95A2A21
4-102
4-102
A95A2A 19
4-102
A95A2A 17
4-102
A95A2A 15 A95A2
4-102 4-101
A95A2A24
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A14
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A10
4-102
4-102 A95A2A9 A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A30
4-102
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A26
4-102 CONTINUED
3-339
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-41 .
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
112
A95A2A22
Continued
A95A2A20
4-102
A95A2A 18
4-102
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2
4-101
113
4-102
A95A2A23
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A12
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A25 4-102
A95A2A21 4-102
A95A2A 19 4-102
A95A2A17 4-102
A95A2A15 4-102 A95A2 4-101 114
A95A2A22 4-102
A95A2A10 4-102
A95A2A31 4-102
A95A2A32 4-102
A95A2A35 A95A2A14
4-102 4-102
A95A2A 13 4-102
A95A2A 12
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102 4-102
A95A2A7 A95A2A30
4-102
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A26
4-102 4-102
3-340
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
E UNIT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
114
A95A2A24
4-102
Continued
A95A2A20
4-102
A95A2A 18
4-102
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A21
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
115
116
A95A2A32
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A25
4-102
A95A2A23
4-102
A95A2A 19
4-102
A95A2A 17
4-102
A95A2A 15
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A20
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A12
4-102
A95A2A 11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A30
4-102
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A26
4-102 CONTINUED
5
3-341
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-41 .
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
116
A95A2A24
Continued
A95A2A22
4-102
A95A2A 18
4-102
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A 19
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
117
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
A95A2A13
4-102
A95A2A12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A25
4-102
A95A2A23 4-102
A95A2A21 A95A2A17
4-102
4-102
A95A2A 15 4-102
A95A2 4-101 118
A95A2A 18 4-102
A95A2A8 4-102
A95A2A31 4-102
A95A2A32 4-102
A95A2A35 4-102
A95A2A14 4-102
A95A2A13 4-102
A95A2A12
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A7 A95A2A30
4-102
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A26
4-102
4-102
4-102
T
3-342
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
E UNT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
118
A95A2A24
Continued
A95A2A22
4-102
A95A2A20
4-102
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2
4-101
119
120
4-102
A95A2A 17
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A14
4-102
A95A2A 13
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A25
4-102
A95A2A23
4-102
A95A2A21
4-102
A95A2A19
4-102
A95A2A 15
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A 16
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32 A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A 14
4-102
4-102
A95A2A13
4-102
A95A2A 12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A 10
4-102 4-102
A95A2A9
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A30
4-102
A95A2A28
4-102
A95A2A26
4-102
CONTINUED
J T
3-343
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
120
A95A2A24
4-102
Continued
A95A2A22
4-102
A95A2A20
4-102
121
A95A2A 18
4-102
A95A2
4-101
A95A2A 15
4-102
A95A2A7
4-102
A95A2A31
4-102
A95A2A32
4-102
A95A2A35
4-102
A95A2A14
4-102
A95A2A13
4-102
A95A2A12
4-102
A95A2A11
4-102
A95A2A10
4-102
A95A2A9
4-102
A95A2A8
4-102
A95A2A29
4-102
A95A2A27
4-102
A95A2A25 4-102
A95A2A23
4-102
A95A2A21 4-102
A95A2A 19 4-102
A95A2A 17 4-102
A95A2 4-101
122
A95A3A30 4-102
A95A3A 14 4-102
A95A3A31 4-102
A95A3A32 4-102
A95A3A35 4-102
A95A3A13 4-102
A95A3A 12 A95A3A11
4-102 4-102
A95A3A10 A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A28
4-102
A95A3A26
4-102
A95A3A24
4-102 4-102
CONTINUED T
3-344
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
E UNIT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
122
A95A3A22
Continued
A95A3A20
4-102
A95A3A 18
4-102
A95A3A 16
4-102
A95A3
4-101
123
124
4-102
A95A3A29
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A 11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A27
4-102
A95A3A25 A95A3A23
4-102
A95A3A21 A95A3A 19
4-102
4-102
4-102 4-102
A95A3A17 A95A3A 15
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A28
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A31 A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102 4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A 11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7 A95A3A30
4-102 4-102
A95A3A26
4-102
A95A3A24
4-102 CONTINUED
3-345
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT Continued REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
124
A95A3A22
Continued
A95A3A20
4-102
A95A3A 18
4-102
125
4-102
A95A3A 16
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A27
4-102
A95A3A13
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A14
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A29
4-102
A95A3A25
4-102
A95A3A23 4-102
A95A3A21 4-102
A95A3A 19 4-102
A95A3A17 4-102
A95A3A 15 4-102
A95A3 4-101 126
A95A3A26 4-102
A95A3A 12 4-102
A95A3A31 4-102
A95A3A32
A95A3A35
4-102 4-102
A95A3A14 4-102
A95A3A 13 4-102
A95A3A11 4-102
A95A3A 10 A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A30
4-102
A95A3A28 A95A3A24
4-102
4-102
4-102
CONTINUED
T
3-346
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
E UNIT
3-41 . WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
126
A95A3A22
4-102
Continued
A95A3A20
4-102
A95A3A 18
4-102
A95A3A 16
4-102
A95A3
4-101
127
128
A95A3A25
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A29
4-102
A95A3A27
4-102
A95A3A23
4-102
A95A3A21
4-102
A95A3A 19
4-102
A95A3A 17
4-102
A95A3A 15
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A24
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A30
4-102
A95A3A28
4-102
A95A3A26
4-102 CONTINUED
3-347
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
128 Continued
129
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95A3A22
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-102
A95A3A20
4-102
A95A3A 18
4-102
A95A3A 16
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A23
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7 A95A3A29
4-102
4-102
A95A3A27 4-102
A95A3A25 4-102
A95A3A21 4-102
A95A3A 19
4-102
A95A3A17 4-102
A95A3A15 4-102 A95A3 4-101 130
A95A3A22 4-102
A95A3A 10 A95A3A31
4-102
4-102
A95A3A32 4-102
A95A3A35 4-102
A95A3A14 4-102
A95A3A 13 A95A3A12
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A30
4-102
A95A3A28
4-102
A95A3A26
4-102 4-102
CONTINUED
3-348
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
E UNIT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
130
A95A3A24
4-102
Continued
A95A3A20
4-102
A95A3A 18
4-102
131
132
A95A3A 16
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A21
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A 11
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A29
4-102
A95A3A27
4-102
A95A3A25
4-102
A95A3A23
4-102
A95A3A 19
4-102
A95A3A 17
4-102
A95A3A 15
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A20
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
D
4-102 A95A3A31 4-102 A95A3A32
4-102 A95A3A35 A95A3A14
4-102 4-102
A95A3A13
4-102 A95A3A 12
4-102 A95A3A11 4-102 A95A3A 10
4-102 A95A3A8
4-102 A95A3A7
4-102 A95A3A30
4-102 A95A3A28 4-102 A95A3A26
CONTINUED
3-349
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
132
A95A3A24
4-102
Continued
A95A3A22
4-102
A95A3A 18
4-102
133
A95A3A 16
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A 19
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A7 4-102
A95A3A29 4-102
A95A3A27 4-102 A95A3A25 4-102
A95A3A23 4-102
A95A3A21 4-102
A95A3A17 4-102
A95A3A 15 4-102
A95A3 4-101 134
A95A3A18 4-102
A95A3A8 4-102
A95A3A31 4-102
A95A3A32 4-102
A95A3A35 4-102
A95A3A 14 4-102
A95A3A13 4-102
A95A3A12 4-102
A95A3A11 A95A3A10
4-102
4-102
A95A3A9 4-102
A95A3A7 A95A3A30
4-102
A95A3A28
4-102
A95A3A26
4-102
4-102
CONTINUED
3-350
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
LE UNIT 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
134 Continued
135
136
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A3A24
4-102
A95A3A22
4-102
A95A3A20
4-102
A95A3A 16
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A 17
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A 11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A29
4-102
A95A3A27
4-102
A95A3A25
4-102
A95A3A23
4-102
A95A3A21
4-102
A95A3A 19
4-102
A95A3A 15
4-102
A95A3
4-101
A95A3A 16
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A14
4-102
A95A3A 13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A30
4-102
A95A3A28
4-102
A95A3A26
4-102 CONTINUED
3-351
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
136
A95A3A24
Continued
A95A3A22
4-102
A95A3A20
4-102
A95A3A 18
4-102
A95A3
4-101
137
4-102
A95A3A 15
4-102
A95A3A7
4-102
A95A3A31
4-102
A95A3A32
4-102
A95A3A35
4-102
A95A3A 14
4-102
A95A3A13
4-102
A95A3A 12
4-102
A95A3A11
4-102
A95A3A 10
4-102
A95A3A9
4-102
A95A3A8
4-102
A95A3A29
4-102
A95A3A27
4-102
A95A3A25
4-102
A95A3A23
4-102
A95A3A21
4-102
A95A3A 19
4-102
A95A3A 17 4-102
A95A3 4-101
138
A95A13A3 4-110
A95A13A7 4-110
A95A9A3 4-110
A95A 10A3 4-110
A53A7 4-56
A53A47 4-56
A51A5 5-54
A95A18 4-116
A95A19 4-116
A95W29 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13 4-113
A95A7 4-106
A53 4-56
A51 4-53
CONTINUED
3-352
LE UNIT
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
138 Continued 139
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 13A3
4-110
A95A 13A7
4-110
A95A9A3
4-110
A95A 10A3
4-110
A53A7
4-56
A53A47
4-56
A51A6
4-116
A95A 19
4-116
A95W29
Call Intermediate Maintenance 4-113
A95A7
141
4-106
A53
4-56
A51
4-53
W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13A31
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A13
4-113
A95A 1.4A 1
4-110
A95A 14A26
4-110
A95A 14A 12
4-110
A95A 14A9
4-110
A95A 14A34
4-110
A95A14A3
4-110
A95A 14A5
4-110
A95A 14A6
4-11.0
A95A14A7 A95A14A8
4-110
A95A14A14
4-110 4-110
A95W24
4-110 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A14
4-115
A95A 13A7
142
5-54
A95A 18
A95A 13
140
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A12
4-112
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 14A9
4-110
A95A 14A34
4-110
4-110
CONTINUED
A95A 14A 19
3-353
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
142
A95A14A22
Continued
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A 14A30
4-110
A95A 14A5
4-110
A95A 14A14
4-110
143
4-110
A95A14A27
4-110
A95A14A37
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A14A9 4-110
A95A14A34
4-110
A95A14A10 4-110
A95A 14A 12 A95A14A23
4-110 4-110
A95A14A32 4-110
A95A14A17
4-110
A95A14A 12 4-110
A95A14A26 4-110
A95A14A28 4-110
A95A14A35 4-110
A95A14A11 4-110
A95A14A 18 4-110 A95A14A5 4-110
A95A14A6 4-110
A95A14A7 4-110
A95A14A8 4-110
A95A14A14 4-110
A95A14A13 4-110
A95A14A15 A95A14A16
4-110
4-110
A95A14A20 A95A14A27
4-110
A95A14A29
4-110
A95A14A30
4-110
A95A14A31
4-110
A95A14A32
4-110
A95A14A33 A95A14A36
4-110
A95A14A38
4-110
A95A14
4-110
4-110 4-115
3-354
CONTINUED
LE UNT
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
144
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A 14A25
4-110
A95A 14A 10
4-110
145
146
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
A95A 14A 15
4-110
A95A 14A 16
4-110
A95A 14A11
4-110
A95A 14A9
4-110
A95A 14A34
4-110
A95A 14A 18
4-110
A95A 14A14
4-110
A95A 14A 17
4-110
A95A 14A 12
4-110
A95A 14A26
4-110
A95A 14A 13
4-110
A95A14A27 A95A14A28
4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
4-110
A95A14A14
4-110
A95A14A11
4-110
A95A 14A 17 A95A14A 10
4-110
A95A 14A 19
4-110
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
A95A14A23 A95A14A21
4-110
4-110
4-110
A95A 14A 18 A95A14A20
4-110
A95A14A38
4-110
A95A 14A26
4-110
A95A14A9
4-110
A95A14A17
4-110
A95A14A27
4-110
A95A14A13
4-110
A95A14
4-115
A95A14A30
4-110
A95A 14A2
4-110
147
CONTINUED
3-355
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
147
A95A 14A38
4-110
Continued
148
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A 14A 13 A95A14A11
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
A95A14A2
4-110
A95A14A11
4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A65
149
4-110
4-70
A95W26
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W226
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A14
4-115
A95A7
4-106
A95A14A1
4-110
A95A14A29
4-110
A95A14A26
4-110
A95A14A13
4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A95A14A32
4-110
A95A14A 15
4-110
A95A 14A 16
4-110
A95A14A23
4-110
A95A14A20
4-110
A95A14A9 4-110
A95A14A26 4-110
A95A14A38 4-110
A95A14A18 4-110
A95A14A21 4-110
A53A7
4-56 A53A47 4-56
A51A7 5-54
A95W24 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W29 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 14 4-115
A95A7 4-106
A95A13 4-113 A53 4-56
A51 4-53
W228 Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8 Call Intermediate Maintenance
CONTINUED
J
3-356
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
EUNT 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
150
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
Basic WCC
Diagnostics Tactical Tape
151
A95A 14A17
4-110
A95A 14A28
4-110
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A 14A 12
4-110
A95A 14A25
4-110
A95A 14A35
4-110
A95A 14A 1
4-110
A95A 14A3
4-110
A95A 14A5
4-110
A95A 14A6
4-110
A95A 14A34
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A8
4-110
A95A 13A7
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A 13A32
4-110
A95A6
4-105
A51S1
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A51A22
5-54
A95W24
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 14
4-115
A95A 13
4-113
A95A7
4-106 4-53
A51 W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 14A25
4-110
A95A 14A 19 A95A14A13
4-110
A95A 14A29
4-110
4-110
A95A 14A38
4-110
A95A 14A2
4-110
A95A14A11
4-110
A95A 14A36 A95A 14A 12
4-110 4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A28
4-110
A95A 14A1
4-110 CONTINUED
3-357
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
151
A95A14A34
4-110
Continued
152
A95A14A27
4-110
A95A14A3
4-110
A95A14A17
4-110
A95A 14A35
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
A95A14A2
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A 19
4-110
A95A 14A11
4-110
A95A14A36
4-110
A95A14A38
4-110
A95A6 A95W31
153
4-105 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W24
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W27
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A14
4-115
Basic WCC Diagnostics Tactical Tape
A95A6 A95W31
4-105 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W27 Calt -Intermediate Maintenance
A95A7 4-106 154
Basic WCC Diagnostics Tactical Tape A95A14A1 4-110
A95A14A2 4-110
A95A14A34 4-110
A95A14A11 4-110
A95A14A19 A95A14A22
4-110 4-110
A95A14A25 4-110
A95A14A33 A95A14A13
4-110
A95A14A36
4-110
A95A14A12
4-110 4-110
3-358
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
E UNT 3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
154
A95A 14A29
4-110
Continued
A95A 14A27
4-110
A95A 14A38
4-110
A95A 14A31
4-110
A95A 14A32
4-110
A95A 14A37 A95A14A30
4-110 4-110
A95A 14A 17
4-110
A95A6
4-105
A95W3
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W27
Call Intermediate Maintenance 4-115
A95A 14
155
A95A7
4-106
A95A 14A34
4-110
A95A14A 19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A14A27
4-110
A95A 14A2
4-110
A95A14A37 A95A14A35
4-110
A95A 14A 17
4-110
A95A 14A28
4-110
4-110
A95A 14A 12
4-110
A95A 14A11
4-110
A95A 14A1 A95A14A3
4-110
A95A14A5
4-110
4-110
A95A14A6
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A8
4-110
A95A13A7
4-110
A95A 13A4
4-110
A95A13A32
4-110
A51S1
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A51A22
5-54 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W24 A95A 14
4-115
A95A 13
4-113
A95A7
4-106
A51
4-53 CONTINUED
3-359
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION - Continued BRU GROUP NO.
155
Continued 156
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8
Call Intermediate Maintenance
Basic WCC Diagnostics Tactical Tape
A95A 14A19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A 14A 15
4-110
A95A14A 16
4-110
A95A14A14
4-110
A95A14A37
4-110
A95A14A30
4-110
A95A 14A34
4-110
A95A14A29
4-110
A95A 14A31 A95A14A32
4-110
A95A14A36
4-110
A95A14A38
4-110
A95A14A33
4-110
A95A14A1
4-110
4-110
A95A14A2 4-110
A95A14A17 4-110
A95A14A 12 4-110
A95A14A26
4-110
A95A14A13 4-110
A95A14A27 4-110
A95A14A28 4-110
A95A14A35 4-110
A95A6 4-105
A95W31 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W27 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A14 4-115
A95A7 4-106
157
A95A 14A 19 A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A14A1
4-110
A95A14A6
4-110
A95A14A11
4-110
A95A14A17
4-110 4-110
3-360
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
LE UNT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
e
157
A95A 14A 12
4-110
е
Continued
A95A 14A26
4-110
A95A14A13
4-110
A95A 14A27 A95A14A28
4-110
158
4-110
A95A 14A35
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A 14A22
4-110
A95A 14A25
4-110
A95A 14A36
4-110
A95A14A29
4-110
A95A 14A 17
4-110
A95A 14A26
4-110
A95A 14A27 A95A14A28
4-110
4-110
A95A 14A 12
4-110
A95A 14A 13
4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
D
159
Basic WCC Diagnostics Tactical Tape A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A5
4-110
A95A 13A8
4-110
A95A 13A 19
4-110
A95A 13A27
4-110
A95A 13A32
4-110
A95A 13A38
4-110
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A 14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A 14A11
4-110
A95A 14A6
4-110
A95A 14A 1
4-110
A51A22 A95A6 A95A6W2A A95W24
5-54 4-105 Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance CONTINUED
3-361
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
159 Continued
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A95W29
161
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13
4-113
A95A 14
4-115
A95A7
4-106
A51
160
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
4-53
W228
Call Intermediate Maintenance
W8
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 14A 19
4-110
A95A14A22
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A 15
4-110
A95A13A6
4-110
A95A14A5
4-110
A95A14A10
4-110
A95A14A30
4-110
A95A14A38
4-110
A95A14A25
4-110
A95A14A19
4-110
A95A14A21
4-110
A95A14A17
4-110
A95A14A35
4-110
A95A14A27
4-110
A95A14A34
4-110
A95A14A38 4-110
A95A14A13 4-110
A95A14A36 4-110
A95A14A7 4-110
A95A14A28 4-110
A95A14A 12 4-110
A95A14A13 4-110
A95W24 Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A13
A95A14
4-113 4-115
162
A95A14A6 A95A14A13
4-110
A95A14A17
4-110
A95A14A19
4-110 4-110
CONTINUED
3-362
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UNIT
3-41 .
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER MANUAL BATTERY REPLACEABLE UNIT REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
BRU GROUP NO.
BRU REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
BRU REPLACEMENT PROCEDURE
162
A95A 14A22
4-110
Continued
A95A 14A25
4-110
A95A 14A28
4-110
163
A95A 14A 12
4-110
A95A14A26
4-110
A95A 13A29
4-110
A95A 13A30
4-110
A95A 13A21
4-110
A95A 13A22
4-110
A95A 13A23
4-110
A95A 13A31
4-110
A95A 13A34
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
A95A 13
4-113
A95A 14A29
4-110
A95A 14A 1
4-110
A95A 14A26
4-110
A95A 14A35
4-110
A95A 14A 13
4-110
A95A14A23
4-110
A53A47
4-56 4-56
A51A7
5-54
A53A7
A95W24
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95W29
Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 14
4-115
A53
A95A13 A51 A95A7
W228
W8
164
4-56 4-113 4-53 4-106 Call Intermediate Maintenance Call Intermediate Maintenance
A95A 14A5
4-110
A95A 14A 10
4-110 4-110
A95A 14A38
0
A95A 14A25
4-110
A95A 14
4-115
3-363
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-42 .
CO
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL A95A 12 MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION
Joo
Calla OOD DE
E
CUR
E
ID
BSI
DS
DE
A RO
BITE INDICATOR
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL A95A 12
PANEL A51
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
1
None
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . A) , press COMP & SYS RESET
D&C STATUS
MS1 MS1
MS3 MS3
MS1
MS3
MS1
MS3
MS1
MS3
MS1 GOOD
MS3
CAT DISPLAY LAMP TEST
EXT ALERT
P&S OUT DATA BASKET 1 POWER
COMPUTER CONTROL LOAD DEVICE SELECT
LAMP BRIGHTNESS
MASS STORAGE UNIT2 NONTACTICAL PERIPHERALS
MASS STORAGE UNIT 1 RECOVERY STORAGE UNIT 1
COMP & SYS RESET
BOOT STRAP INIT
PROG HALT
BASKET 1 CLOCK BASKET 2 POWER
COMP P/S
MS1 BASKET 2 CLOCK COMPUTER STATUS MEM MEM INIT PROG ERR ERROR ALERT
FIGURE A
3-364
MS3
PERI
CUG P/S
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
AULT 3-42.
2
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL A95A 12 MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
At Computer Maintenance Control Panel (CMP) A95A 12 (fig . B) , press CONTROL PANEL /AUTO until CONTROL PANEL indicator is on .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL
PWR SPLY TEST
MEM
CPU 1
PCU
CPU 2
FUNCTION WORD INPUT
CLOCK MONITOR
PARITY
031400001
DATA WORD
DATA WORD INPUT 77777777
7 7 7 7 7 7 777777771) ( RSU WRITE CONTROL TTC1 TTC2 CLOCK PROTECT PROTECT RUN ENABLE ENABLE HALT
CPU 3
V/OCU
CTION WOR FUNCTION WORD
SINGLE CONT
LOAD
MODE CONTROL PANEL AUTO
FIGURE B
If CMP DATA WORD display is 77777777:
Go to step 3. If CMP DATA WORD display is not 77777777: a . Replace battery replaceable units ( BRU) in the order listed for BRU group number PM1 (table A).
TABLE
BRU GROUP NUMBER
PM 1
A
REPLACEMENT PROCURE
para 4-110
A95A 14 REPLACEMENT SEQUENCE
A9 /A19 / A22 /A25 / A23 / A21/A18 /A20 / A34 /A35 / A37/A28 /A17 /A26
PM 2
para 4-110
A19 /A22 / A25 /A10 / A9 / A34/A35 /A37 /A28 /A17 /A18-
/A23 /A26
PM 3
para 4-110
A19 /A22 /A25 /A34 /A35 /A37 /A28 /A9 /A17 / A18 / A23-
/A26
PM 4
A23 /A21 /A20 /A18 /A19 /-
para 4-110 A22 /A25 /A38 /A26 /A32 /A34 /A9 / A10 /A17
CONTINUED
3-365
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-42.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL A95A12 MANUAL FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
2
-Continued
b.
At BITE indicator panel (fig . A) , press COMP & SYS RESET after each BRU is installed .
If data display is 77777777:
a. Fault corrected . b. Go to step 3.
If all BRU's in group number PM 1 have been replaced and fault is not corrected:
Perform WCCA95 fault isolation per para 3-39. 3
Perform CMP test routine no . 1 per para 3-43. If CMP test routine no . 1 passes :
Go to step 4.
If CMP test routine no . 1 fails :
Go to step 5. 4
Perform CMP test routine no . 2 per para 3-44.
If CMP test routine no . 2 passes :
Go to step 6. If CMP test routine fails : a. Replace BRU's in the order listed for BRU group number PM 3 (table A) . b. Perform CMP test routine no . 2 per para 3-44 for each BRU installed.
If CMP test routine no . 2 passes:
Go to step 1 .
If all BRU's in group number PM 3 have been replaced and fault is not corrected :
Perform WCCA95 fault isolation per para 3-39. LO
5
Perform CMP test routine no . 2 per para 3-44 .
If CMP test routine no . 2 passes: a. Replace BRU's in the order listed for BRU group number PM 3 (table A) . b. Perform CMP test routine no. 1 per para 3-43 for each BRU installed .
3-366
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
AULT
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL A95A12 MANUAL FAULT
3-42.
ISOLATION - Continued
5
ESET
-Continued
If CMP test routine no. 1 passes: Go to step 1.
If all BRU's in group number PM 3 have been replaced and fault is not corrected : Perform WCCA95 fault isolation per para 3-39. S
If CMP test routine no . 2 fails : a. Replace BRU's in the order listed for BRU group number PM 2 (table A) . b. Perform CMP test routine no . 1 per para 3-43 and CMP test routine no. 2 per para 3-44 for each BRU installed .
If both CMP test routines pass:
Go to step 7. If all BRU's in group number PM 2 have been replaced and fault is not corrected :
Perform WCCA95 fault isolation per para 3-39.
6
Perform CMP test routine no . 25 per para 3-67.
If CMP test routine no . 25 passes :
Go to step 7.
If CMP test routine no . 25 fails: a . Replace BRU's in the order listed for BRU group number PM 4 (table A). b. Perform CMP test routine no . 25 per para 3-67 for each BRU installed.
If CMP test routine no . 25 passes:
Go to step 1 . If all BRU's in group number PM 4 have been replaced and fault is not corrected : Perform WCCA95 fault isolation per para 3-39.
7
At CMP (fig . B) press CONTROL PANEL /AUTO until AUTO indicator comes on .
8 Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-367
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 1
3-43.
1
2
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , pressCOMP & SYS RESET .
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , pressMODE so thatCONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
PressFUNCTION WORD so thatSINGLE comes on .
4
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to00007012 .
5
SetDATA WORD INPUT to00000000 .
6
PressFUNCTION WORD LOAD and observeDATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is00000000 :
Go to step 7.
IfDATA WORD is not00000000 :
Go to step 9.
7
SetDATA WORD INPUT to77777777 .
8
PressFUNCTION WORD LOAD and observeDATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 1 passed .
b. Go to step 11 . IfDATA WORD is not77777777 :
Go to step 10. 9
ObserveDATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is77777777 (unmixed bits): a. Note that CMP test routine no . 1 failed with unmixedDATA WORD bits (no change ) .
b. Go to step 11 . IfDATA WORD is not77777777 ( mixed bits) : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 1 failed with mixed DATA WORD bits. D
CONTINUE
b. Go to step 11 .
3-368
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO.
3-43.
10
1 - Continued
Observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 00000000 ( unmixed bits) : CONTRO
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 1 failed with unmixed DATA WORD bits (no change) .
b. Go to step 11 . IfDATA WORD is not 00000000 ( mixed bits): a . Note that CMP test routine no . 1 failed with mixed DATA WORD bits. b. Go to step 11 .
11
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
12
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 2
3-44.
1
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on.
2
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
3
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to 00007013 .
4
SetDATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
5
PressFUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD . IfDATA WORD is00000000 :
Go to step 6. IfDATA WORD is not00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 2 failed.
b. Go to step 10.
6
SetDATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
7 PressFUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is77777777 :
Go to step 8. CONTINUED
T
3-369
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-44.
7
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 2-Continued
-Continued
If DATA WORD is not 77777777. a. Note that CMP test routine no . 2 failed .
b. Go to step 10.
8
Set DATA WORD INPUTTO 25252525
9
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORDIS 25252525 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 2 passed .
b . Go to step 20 .
If DATA WORD is not 25252525 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 2 failed . b. Go to step 10.
10
Press MODESo that AUTO comes on.
11
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-45 .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 3
1
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODEso that CONTROL PANELcomes on.
2
Press FUNCTION WORDso that SINGLEcomes on .
3
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 00007017.
4
Press FUNCTION WORD LOADand observe DATA WORD.
, If DATA WORDleft - most digit is 0
1, 2 , or 3 ( no RSU summary error) :
Go to step 5.
If DATA WORDleft- most digit is not Q
1, 2 , or 3
Go to step 6. D
CONTINUE
T
3-370
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 3 -Continued
3-45.
NOTE
When directed , record the meaning of a display indication before leaving this procedure . The information is required when returning to the weapons control computer fault isolation procedure .
5
Observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD third digit from right is 0 , 1 , 4 , or 5 : a . Record that indication means : No RSU or HCU summary error. b. Go to step 14.
If DATA WORD third digit from right is noto , 1,4 , or5 : a . Record that indication means: HCU summary error. b. Go to step 14.
6
Observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD third digit from left iso , 1,4 , or 5 (TTC1 selected) :
Go to step 7.
IfDATA WORD third digit from left is noto , 1,4 , or5 : a. Record that indication means : RSU summary error with error mode no . 1 .
b. Go to step 14.
TAL 7
Observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD fourth digit from left is 1,3,5 , or7 (RSU on - line) :
Go to step 8.
IfDATA WORD fourth digit from left is not 1,3,5 , or7 :
a. Record that indication means : RSU summary error with error mode no. 2.
b. Go to step 14.
8 At CMP A95A 12 , observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD third digit from left iso or4 (no cartridge error):
Go to step 9. CONTINUED 1
T
3-371
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-45. 8
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 3- Continued
V
-Continued
If DATA WORD third digit from left is not Oor 4: a. Record that indication means : RSU summary error with error mode no . 3.
b. Go to step 14.
9
Observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD fourth digit from right is 2 ( RSU in read mode ) :
Go to step 10.
If DATA WORD fourth digit from right is not 2: Go to step 13.
10
Observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD second digit from left is 0, 1 , 4, or 5 ( no word count error): Go to step 11 .
C If DATA WORD second digit from left is not 0,
1, 4, or 5:
a . Record that indication means : RSU summary error with error mode no . 4.
b. Go to step 14. 11
Observe DATA WORD.
, 4, or 6 ( no checksum error) : If DATA WORD left - most digit is 0, 2
Go to step 12. If DATA WORD left - most digit is 0, 2, 4, or 6 : a. Record that indication means : RSU summary error with error mode no . 5.
b. Go to step 14. 12
Observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD second digit from left is 0, 1, 2, or 3: a. Record that indication means : RSU summary error mode no . 0.
b. Go to step 14. If DATA WORD second digit from left is 0, 1 , 2, or 3: a . Record that indication means : RSU summary error with error mode no. 6.
CONTINUED b. Go to step 14.
3-372
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 3-Continued
3-45. 13
Observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD fourth digit from right is 6
rrormod: a. Record that indication means : RSU summary error with error mode no. 7. b. Go to step 14 . If DATA WORD fourth digit from right is not & a. Record that indication means : RSU summary error with error mode no. 8.
b. Go to step 14.
nter
14
At CMP A95A 12 , press MODEso that AUTOcomes on .
15
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-46.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 4
1 At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET.
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A12 , press MODEso that CONTROL PANELcomes on.
3
Press FUNCTION WORDSo that SINGLEcomes on.
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01037777.
5
Set DATA WORD INPUTTO 00000000
6
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD
mode
60
7 Set FUNCTION WORD - INPUTto 03037777.
8
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDis 00000000
Go to step 9. If DATA WORDis not 00000000
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 4 failed .
b. Go to step 14.
CONTINUED
3-373
TM 9-1130-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 4- Continued
3-46.
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01037777 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03037777 .
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD . If DATA WORD is 77777777: a . Note that CMP test routine no . 4 passed .
b. Go to step 14.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 4 failed .
b. Go to step 14.
14
Press MODE So that AUTO comes on.
15
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 5
3-47.
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET .
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP ) A95A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on.
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01000000 .
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
6
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03000000 .
CONTINUED
3-374
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-47.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 5
8
-Continued
PressFUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observeDATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9.
IfDATA WORD is not00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 5 failed .
b. Go to step 14 .
9
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01000000 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
12
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03000000
13
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 5 passed .
b. Go to step 14.
IfDATA WORD is not77777777 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 5 failed . b. Go to step 14 .
14 Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
RO 15
3-48.
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 6
1
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP ) A95A 12 , presSMODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
2 PressFUNCTION WORD so thatSINGLE comes on .
3
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT 1040010000 CONTINUED
T
3-375
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-48.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 6- Continued
4
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000001 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 6 passed .
b . Go to step 6. If DATA WORD is not 00000001 :
Go to step 5. LO
5
Observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 25252525: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 6 failed with no change . b. Go to step 6.
If DATA WORD is 00000000 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 6 failed with zeroes.
b. Go to step 6. If DATA WORD is 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 6 failed with sevens . b. Go to step 6. If DATA WORD is not 25252525 , 00000000 , or 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 6 failed .
b. Go to step 6.
6
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
7
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 7
3-49 .
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET.
2
At Hard Copy Unit ( HCU ) A65 , set and hold FORM FEED up for 5 seconds .
3
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP ) A94A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
CONTINUED
3-376
60
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 ed 3-49.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 7- Continued
4
So that SINGLE comes on . Press FUNCTION WORD so
5
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 00007014
6
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 21361563
7
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD-
8
So that AUTO Comes on . Press MODE so
9
At HCU set and hold FORM FEED up for 5 seconds to expose HCU printout .
10
Observe HCU printout .
If HCU printed ECS : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 7 passed . b. Go to step 11 . If HCU did not print ECS: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 7 failed.
b. Go to step 11 . こ
11
3-50.
1
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 8
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET
2 At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A94A12 , press MODESO that CONTROL PANELComes on .
3 Press FUNCTION WORDSO that SINGLEComes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTTO 20000002
5
Set DATA WORD INPUTto
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
00000000
CONTINUED
3-377
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 8 - Continued
3-50.
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 20002002 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD
C
If DATA WORD is 00000000 ;
Go to step 9. If DATA WORD is not 00000000 ; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 8 failed . b. Go to step 14 .
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 20000002 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777.
11
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 20002002 .
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 8 passed .
b. Go to step 14. If DATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 8 failed .
b. Go to step 14.
14
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
15
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 9
3-51 .
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET.
2 At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
3-378
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-51 .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 9
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 10000002 .
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 10002002 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 9 failed .
b. Go to step 14 .
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 10000002.
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 100002002.
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
C
If DATA WORD is 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 9 passed .
b. Go to step 14.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 9 failed .
b. Go to step 14 . 14
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
15
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-379
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-52.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 10
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 press MODEso that CONTROL PANELcomes on.
3
Press FUNCTION WORDSo that SINGLEcomes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 0104000Q
5
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 00000000
6
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03040000
8
Press FUNCTION WORD LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDis 00000000
Go to step 9 If DATA WORDis not 00000000 a. Note CMP test routine no . 10 failed .
b. Go to step 29.
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01040000
10
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 7777777
11
At CMP A95A 12 press , FUNCTION WORD LOAD
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03040000
13
Press FUNCTION WORD LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDis 77777777
Go to step 14. If DATA WORDis not 77777777; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 10 failed .
b. Go to step 29 .
3-380
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-52 . COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 10 - Continued
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01040004 .
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000004 .
16
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03040004 .
18
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
ONTRO
If DATA WORD is 00000004 , and if PARITY light is off:
Go to step 19. If DATA WORD is not 00000004 , or if PARITY light is on :
a . Note that CMP test routine no . 10 failed .
b. Go to step 29.
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01077777.
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000.
21
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03077777.
23
At CMP A95A 12 , press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 00000000:
Go to step 24. If DATA WORD is not 00000000: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 10 failed .
b. Go to step 29.
24
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01077777.
25
Set DATA WORD INPUTTO 77777777.
26
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
27
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTTO 03077777.
CONTINUED
T
3-381
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-52.
28
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO.
10- Continued
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 77777777; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 10 passed .
b. Go to step 29.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 ; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 10 failed .
b. Go to step 29.
29
Press MODE to light AUTO.
30
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-53.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 11
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET
2
L At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTRO PANEL comes on.
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01100000,
5
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 00000000
6
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03100000
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDis 00000000
Go to step 9.
If DATA WORDis not 00000000 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 11 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
3-382
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 ed
ITRO
3-53.
- Continued COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 11
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTTO 01100000
10
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777
11
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
12
At CMP A95A12 , set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03100000
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDIS 77777777
Go to step 14.
If DATA WORDis not 77777777 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 11 failed.
b. Go to step 24.
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTTO 01137777
15
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 00000000
16
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTTO 03137777.
18
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDIS 00000000
Go to step 19.
If DATA WORDis not 00000000 a. Note that CMP test routine no. 11 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01137777.
20
Set DATA WORD INPUTTO 77777777.
21
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD CONTINUED
3-383
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO.
3-53.
11 - Continued
22
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to03137777 .
23
At CMP A95A12 , pressFUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observeDATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 11 passed .
b. Go to step 24 .
IfDATA WORD is not77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 11 failed . b. Go to step 24 .
24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-54.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 12
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET .
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A 12 press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01140000-
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
6
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03140000 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9.
CONTINUED
3-384
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 12 - Continued
3-54.
8
Continued
IfDATA WORD is not00000000 :
DAD a. Note that CMP test routine no . 12 failed . b. Go to step 24.
9
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to01140000 .
10
SetDATA WORD INPUT to77777777 .
11
PressFUNCTION WORD LOAD .
12
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to03140000 .
13
At CMP A95A 12 , pressFUNCTION WORD LOAD and observeDATA WORD
IfDATA WORD is77777777 : Go to step 14.
IfDATA WORD is not77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 12 failed . & C 3
30
b. Go to step 24.
14
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to01177777 .
15
SetDATA WORD INPUT to00000000 .
16
PressFUNCTION WORD LOAD .
17
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to03177777
18
PressFUNCTION WORD LOAD .
IfDATA WORD is00000000 :
Go to step 19.
IfDATA WORD is not00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 12 failed.
b. Go to step 24. CONTINUED
3-385
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
-Continued COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO.
3-54.
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01177777
20
Set
12
to 77777777
DATA WORD INPUT
21
Press
22
Set
FUNCTION WORD LOAD
to FUNCTION WORD INPUT
03177777
233
At CMP A95A12 , press FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If
is DATA WORD
77777777
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 12 passed .
b. Go to step 24 . If DATA WORD is not 77777777: a . Note that CMP test routine no . 12 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 24
Press
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
MODE so that AUTO comes on.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 13
3-55.
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET.
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so So that CONTROL PANEL Comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD So that SINGLE Comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01200000-
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000-
6
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD-
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03200000.
CONTINUED
3-386
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 13 -Continued
3-55.
8
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD
IfDATA WORD is 00000000 : Go to step 9.
IfDATA WORD is not 00000000 ; a . Note that CMP test routine no . 13 failed . b. Go to step 24.
D 9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01200000 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03200000 .
13
At CMP A95A 12 , press FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD
IfDATA WORD is 77777777 : Go to step 14.
IfDATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 13 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01237777 .
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
16
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03237777 .
18
Press FUNCTION WORD -LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 19.
CONTINUED
3-387
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
10
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 13- Continued
3-55.
-Continued
18
If DATA WORDis not 00000000,
a. Note that CMP test routine no. 13 failed . b. Go to step 24.
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01237777.
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777.
21
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03237777
At CMP A95A 12 , press FUNCTION WORD. LOAD and observe DATA WORD
L
23
22
22
If DATA WORD is 77777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 13 passed .
b. Go to step 24 . If DATA WORD is not 77777777: a . Note that CMP test routine no . 13 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 14
3-56.
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET
2
L so that CONTRO At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 press MODE so that PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01240000 CONTINUED
J
3-388
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO .
3-56.
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000.
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03240000 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
14- Continued
If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9 .
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 14 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01240000.
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777.
11
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03240000.
13
At CMP A95A12 , press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 77777777:
Go to step 14.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no. 14 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01277777 .
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000.
16
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03277777.
CONTINUED
J
3-389
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO.
3-56 .
18
14— Continued
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 00000000; Go to step 19 . If DATA WORD is not 00000000 ; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 14 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01277777,
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
21
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD ,
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03277777.
23 At CMP A95A 12 , press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 77777777 ; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 14 passed .
b. Go to step 24.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 14 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 15
3-57.
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET
2
L At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTRO PANEL comes on.
CONTINUED
3-390
d
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 15 - Continued
3-57. 3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01300000 .
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
6
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03300000 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9. If DATA WORD is not 00000000: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 15 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01300000 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
12
At CMP A95A12 , set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03300000 .
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 77777777 :
Go to step 14. IfDATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 15 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01337777 .
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
CONTINUED
3-391
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-57.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO.
15-Continued
16
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03337777.
18
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 00000000:
Go to step 19.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 15 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01337777.
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777.
21
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
22
At CMP A95A 12, set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03337777.
23
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 77777777 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 15 passed .
b. Go to step 24.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777. a. Note that CMP test routine no . 15 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 24
Press MODESO that AUTO comes on .
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-392
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
nued 3-58. COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 16 1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET .
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on.
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01340000.
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000.
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03340000.
8
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD. If DATA WORD is 00000000,
Go to step 9. If DATA WORD is not 00000000,
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 16 failed . b. Go to step 24. 9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01340000.
10
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777.
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03340000
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD,
If DATA WORDis 77777777:
Go to step 14 . If DATA WORD is not 77777777
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 16 failed . b. Go to step 24.
CONTINUED
3-393
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-58 .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 16- Continued
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01377777.
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
16
At CMP A95A12 , press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03377777.
18
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 19. If DATA WORD is not 00000000: a. Note that CMP test routine no. 16 failed . b. Go to step 24 . 19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01377777 .
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
21
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to C3377777 .
23
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 77777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 16 passed .
b. Go to step 24 .
If DATA WORD is not 77777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 16 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-394
d
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-59.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 17 1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on.
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01400000 .
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03400000 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9 .
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 17 failed . b. Go to step 24. 9 Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01400000 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777.
11
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03400000.
13
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 77777777:
Go to step 14. If DATA WORD is not 77777777:
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 17 failed. b. Go to step 24. CONTINUED
3-395
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-59.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO.
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01437777 .
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
16
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
17 - Continued
1
17
At CMP A95A 12 , set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03437777 .
·
18
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
C
If DATA WORD is 00000000 : Go to step 19.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 17 failed . b. Go to step 24. 19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01437777 .
20
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
21
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03437777 .
23
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 17 passed .
b. Go to step 24. If DATA WORD is not 77777777 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 17 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-396
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-60. COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 18
d 1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01440000 .
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03440000 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 00000000 ;
Go to step 9.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 18 failed.
b. Go to step 24. 9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01440000
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD. LOAD.
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03440000 .
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 77777777:
Go to step 14 .
If DATA WORD is not 77777777; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 18 failed .
CONTINUED
b. Go to step 24.
3-397
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 18-Continued
3-60 .
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01477777.
15
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 0000000Q
16
At CMP A95A12 , press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03477777,
18
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
A
If DATA WORDis 00000000
C
Go to step 19. If DATA WORD is not 00000000 1 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 18 failed . b. Go to step 24.
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01477777.
20
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777.
21
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD 22
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03477777.
23
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORDis 77777777; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 18 passed .
b. Go to step 24.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 18 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-398
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 19
3-61 . 1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET ·
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01500000 ·
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
6
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03500000 *
8
Press
FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If
DATA WORD is 00000000
Go to step 9.
If
DATA WORD is not 00000000 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 19 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01500000 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777
11
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03500000.
13
Press
observe DATA WORD FUNCTION WORD LOAD and If DATA WORD is
77777777
Go to step 14.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 19 failed.
b. Go to step 24. CONTINUED
T
3-399
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 19 -Continued
3-61 .
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01537777.
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
16
At CMP A95A 12 , press FUNCTION WORD -LOAD .
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03537777 .
18
Press FUNCTION WORD -LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 : Go to step 19.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 19 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01537777 .
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
21
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03537777 .
23
Press FUNCTION WORD -LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 77777777 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 19 passed .
b. Go to step 24.
IfDATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 19 failed .
b. Go to step 24 .
24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-400
ed
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 20
3-62.
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET ·
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on.
3
Press FUNCTION WORD So that SINGLE comes on.
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01540000-
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000-
6
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03540000 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD -LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9.
IfDATA WORD is not 00000000 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 20 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01540000 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03540000 .
13
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 77777777 :
Go to step 14.
IfDATA WORD is not 77777777 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 20 failed . b. Go to step 24.
CONTINUED
3-401
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 20- Continued
3-62 .
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01577777.
15
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 00000000
16
At CMP A95A12 , press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03577777.
18
Press FUNCTION WORD LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDis 00000000
Go to step 19.
If DATA WORDis not 00000000
a . Note that CMP test routine no . 20 failed . b. Go to step 24. 19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01577777.
20
20
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777.
21
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03577777.
23
Press FUNCTION WORD LOADand observe DATA WORD If DATA WORDiS 77777777 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 20 passed .
b. Go to step 24. If DATA WORDis not 77777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 20 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
24
Press MODEso that AUTOcomes on.
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-402
ed
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 21
3-63.
1
2
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET .
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01600000 .
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03600000 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9. If DATA WORD is not 00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 21 failed.
b. Go to step 24.
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01600000 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03600000 .
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 77777777 :
Go to step 14.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 21 failed. b. Go to step 24 .
CONTINUED
3-403
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
A COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 21 - Continued
3-63.
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01637777.
15
At CMP A95A 12 , set DATA WORD INPUTto 00000000
16
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03637777.
18
Press FUNCTION WORD -LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 00000000 1 Go to step 19.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 a . Note that CMP test routine no . 21 failed . b. Go to step 24.
19 20
20
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01637777.
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777.
21
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03637777.
23
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 77777777: a . Note that CMP test routine no . 21 passed .
b. Go to step 24. If DATA WORD is not 77777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 21 failed .
b. Go to step 24 . 24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-404
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ued
3-64.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 22
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET.
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01640000
5
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 00000000
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03640000
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD. If DATA WORDis 00000000
Go to step 9. Г If DATA WORDis not 00000000 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 22 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 0164000Q
10
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777.
11
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 0364000Q
13
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDis 77777777.
Go to step 14.
If DATA WORDis not 77777777
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 22 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
CONTINUED
3-405
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-64.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 22 - Continued
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01677777 .
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
16
At CMP A95A12 , press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03677777 .
18
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 : Go to step 19. If DATA WORD is not 00000000: a . Note that CMP test routine no. 22 failed . b. Go to step 24 .
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01677777 .
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
21
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03677777 .
23
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 77777777 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 22 passed .
b. Go to step 24. If DATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 22 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . !
3-406
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
3-65.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 23
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A12 , press MODE so that
CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD So that SINGLE comes on.
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01700000-
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to
6
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD-
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03700000.
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
00000000-
If DATA WORD is 00000000: Go to step 9.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 a . Note that CMP test routine no . 23 failed .
b. Go to step 29.
9 Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01700000-
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777
11
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03700000-
13
Press FUNC TIO
observe DATA WOR D N WORD - LOAD and
If DATA WORD is 77777777 Go to step 14.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 23 failed . b. Go to step 29. CONTINUED
T
3-407
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-65.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 23 -Continued
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01704000 .
15
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00004000 .
16
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
17
At CMP A95A 12 , set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03704000 .
18
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
་་
14
If DATA WORD is 00004000 and PARITY is off. Go to step 19.
If DATA WORD is not 00004000 and PARITY is on. a . Note that CMP test routine no . 23 failed . b. Go to step 29.
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01737777 .
20
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000-
21
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03737777 .
23
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 : Go to step 24. If DATA WORD is not 00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 23 failed.
b. Go to step 29. 24
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01737777 .
25
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777.
26
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
27
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03737777 .
T
3-408
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ued COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 23 -Continued
3-65.
28
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD . If DATA WORD is 77777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 23 passed .
b. Go to step 29.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 23 failed .
b. Go to step 29 .
29
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
30
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 24
3-66. 1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET.
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01740000 .
5 Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000 .
6
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03740000 .
8 Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 24 failed. b. Go to step 24.
9 Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01740000 .
CONTINUED
3-409
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-66.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 24-Continued
10
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777
11
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03740000
13
Press FUNCTION WORD LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDis 77777777.
Go to step 14. If DATA WORDis not 77777777 a . Note that CMP test routine no . 24 failed .
b. Go to step 24.
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01777777
15
At CMP A95A 12 , set DATA WORD INPUTto 00000000
16
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
17
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03777777
18
Press FUNCTION WORD LOADand observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORDis 00000000
Go to step 19. If DATA WORD is not 00000000 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 24 failed .
b. Go to step 24. 19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 01777777
20
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777.
21
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03777777.
CONTINUED
3-410
ed
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 24 - Continued
3-66.
23
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 24 passed . b. Go to step 24.
IfDATA WORD is not 77777777 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 24 failed .
b.
Go to step 24.
24
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
25
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 25
3-67.
1
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
2
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on.
3
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 00007013 .
4
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 25252525 .
5 Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 25252525 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 25 passed .
b. Go to step 6.
IfDATA WORD is not 25252525 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 25 failed .
b.
Go to step 6.
6 Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
7 Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-411
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-68.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 26
1
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANELcomes on.
2
Press FUNCTION WORDSo that SINGLE comes on .
3
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 00012000.
4
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777.
5
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
6
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 000 14000,
7
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 25252525.
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 02014000,
10
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 14631463,
11
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 04014000 ,
13
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 03607417.
14
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
15
Set FUNCTION INPUTto 10014000 ,
16
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 00177400,
17
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD.
18
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 20014000 .
19
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000377.
CONTINUED
3-412
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-68. COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 26- Continued ONTRO
20
At CMP A95A 12 , press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
21
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 40012000.
22
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORDIS 00777777: Go to step 23.
If DATA WORD is not 00777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 26 failed.
b. Go to step 33.
23
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 40014000.
24
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 25252525:
Go to step 25.
If DATA WORD is not 25252525:
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 26 failed.
b. Go to step 33.
25
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 42014000.
26
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 14631463
Go to step 27.
If DATA WORDis not 14631463:
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 26 failed. b. Go to step 33 . 27
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 44014000.
28
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 03607417:
CONTINUED Go to step 29.
T
3-413
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-68.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 26-Continued
28
-Continued If DATA WORD is not 03607417: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 26 failed . b . Go to step 33.
29
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 50014000.
30
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 00177400 :
Go to step 31. If DATA WORD is not 00177400 ; a. Note that CMP test routine no . 26 failed .
b. Go to step 33. 31
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 60014000,
32
At CMP A95A 12 , press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD
If DATA WORD is 00000377 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 26 passed .
b. Go to step 33 .
If DATA WORD is not 00000377: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 26 failed.
b. Go to step 33. 33
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
34
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 27
3-69.
1
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on.
2
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
CONTINUED
3-414
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 27 - Continued
3-69.
3
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to00016000 .
4
Set DATA WORD INPUT to00007777 .
5
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
6
99
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 02016000 .
7
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00002525 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
9
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 04016000-
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00005252 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 10016000 .
13
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00007654 .
14
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD .
15
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 20016000 .
16
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000123 .
17
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
18
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 40016000 .
19
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 45007777 :
Go to step 20 .
IfDATA WORD is not 45007777 :
a . Note that CMP test routine no . 27 failed . CONTINUED b. Go to step 28.
3-415
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-69.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 27 - Continued
20
At CMP A95A12 , setFUNCTION WORD INPUT to 42016000 .
21
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 45002525 :
Go to step 22.
If DATA WORD is not 45002525 : a . Note that test routine no . 27 failed .
b. Go to step 28. 22
22
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to44016000 .
23
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 45005252 :
Go to step 24. IfDATA WORD is not 45005252 : a . Note that CMP test routine no. 27 failed.
b. Go to step 28 .
24
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 50016000 .
25
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 45007654 :
Go to step 26. If DATA WORD is not 45007654 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 27 failed.
b. Go to step 28. 26
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 600 16000 .
27
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 25000123 : a. Note that test routine no . 27 passed .
b. Go to step 28.
CONTINUED
3-416
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-69.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 27 -Continued
27
-Continued
IfDATA WORD is not25000123 : a. Note that test routine no . 27 failed .
b. Go to step 28.
28
PressMODE so thatAUTO comes on .
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-70.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 28
1
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP ) A95A 12 , pressMODE so thatCONTROL PANEL comes on.
2
PressFUNCTION WORD so thatSINGLE comes on.
3
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to 16012000 .
4
SetDATA WORD INPUT to00000000 .
5
PressFUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
6
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to 16014000 .
7
PressFUNCTION WORD- LOAD-
8
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to 160 16000 .
9
PressFUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
10
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to56012000 .
11
PressFUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observeDATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is00000000 : Go to step 12.
CONTINUED
3-417
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-70.
11
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO . 28- Continued
-Continued
If DATA WORDis not 00000000 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 28 failed .
" b. Go to step 29.
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 56014000
13
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 00000000:
Go to step 14. If DATA WORDis not 00000000 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 28 failed .
b. Go to step 29 .
14
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 56016000
15
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORDIS 45000000 Go to step 16.
If DATA WORDIS not 45000000 a. Note that CMP test routine no . 28 failed.
b. Go to step 29.
16
At CMP A95A12 , set FUNCTION WORD INPUTTO 16012000.
17
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 77777777.
18
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
19
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 16014000
20
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD
21
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 160 16000.
CONTINUED
3-418
d
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-70.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 28 - Continued
22
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
23
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to 56012000 .
24
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 00777777 : Go to step 25 .
IfDATA WORD is not00777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 28 failed .
b. Go to step 29.
25
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 56014000 .
26
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 77777777 :
Go to step 27.
IfDATA WORD is not 77777777 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 28 failed. b. Go to step 29.
27
SetFUNCTION WORD INPUT to56016000 .
28
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD is 45007777 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 28 passed . b. Go to step 29 .
IfDATA WORD is not 45007777 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 28 failed N register test. b. Go to step 29.
29
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
30
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-419
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 29
3-71 . 1
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A 12 , set MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
2
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on.
3
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 00014000.
4
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777.
LO
5
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
6
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 40014000.
7
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD.
If DATA WORD is 77777777:
Go to step 8. If DATA WORD is not 77777777: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 29 failed .
b.
Go to step 13.
8
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 00014000.
9
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000.
10
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
11
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 40014000
12
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD. If DATA WORD is 00000000: a. Note that test routine no . 29 passed .
Go to step 13.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000: a. Note that test routine no . 29 failed .
b.
Go to step 13.
13
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
14
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-420
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 30
3-72.
1
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on .
2
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
3
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 00010000.
4
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000.
5
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
6
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 40010000.
7
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD display.
TROL
If DATA WORD is 00000000:
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 30 passed .
b.
Go to step 8.
If DATA WORD is not 00000000: a. Note that CMP test routine no . 30 failed . b.
Go to step 8.
8
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
9
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 31
3-73.
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET.
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL 2
PANEL comes on.
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on.
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01040000.
5
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 00000000.
CONTINUED
6
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD.
3-421
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 31 - Continued
3-73. 7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03040000 .
8
Press FUNCTION WORD- LOAD and observe DATA WORD. If DATA WORD is 00000000 :
Go to step 9. If DATA WORD is not 00000000 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 31 failed .
b. 9
Go to step 14 .
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01040000 .
10
Set DATA WORD INPUT to 77777777 .
11
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD .
12
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 03040000-
13
Press FUNCTION WORD - LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD is 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 31 passed .
b.
Go to step 14.
If DATA WORD is not 77777777 : a. Note that CMP test routine no . 31 failed .
b. Go to step 14. 14
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on .
15
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 32
3-74.
1
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET .
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL comes on.
3
Press FUNCTION WORD so that SINGLE comes on .
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 01000001
3-422
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
d 3-74.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 32-Continued
5
Set DATA WORD INPUTto 00000002
6
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD
7
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 03000001
8
Press FUNCTION WORD LOADand observe DATA WORD If DATA WORDis 00000002 a . Note that CMP test routine no . 32 passed .
b.
Go to step 9.
If DATA WORDis not 00000002 : a . Note that CMP test routine no . 32 failed .
b. Go to step 9 . 9
Press MODEso that AUTOcomes on .
10
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-75.
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 33
1 At BITE Indicator Panel A51 , press COMP & SYS RESET.
2
At Computer Maintenance Panel ( CMP) A95A 12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANELcomes on.
3
Press FUNCTION WORDso that SINGLE comes on.
4
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUTto 40007052
5
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD . If DATA WORD is 77600040
a . Note that CMP test routine no . 33 passed . b.
Go to step 6.
If DATA WORD is not 77600040
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 33 failed . b. Go to step 6. 6
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
7 Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-423
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL TEST ROUTINE NO. 34
3-76. 1
At Computer Maintenance Panel (CMP) A95A12 , press MODE so that CONTROL PANEL Comes on .
2
Press FUNCTION WORD So that SINGLE comes on.
3
Set FUNCTION WORD INPUT to 00007017 .
4
Press FUNCTION WORD LOAD and observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD left- most digit is 0 , 1,4 , or 5 :
Go to step 5.
If DATA WORD left- most digit is noto , 1,4 , or 5 : a . Note that peripheral control unit- input /output control unit parity error is set .
b. Note that CMP test routine no . 34 failed .
c. Go to step 7 . 5
Observe DATA WORD .
IfDATA WORD third digit from the right is 0,2,4 , or6 :
Go to step 6. If DATA WORD third digit from the right is noto , 2,4 , or6 : a . Note that peripheral control unit - input/output control unit parity error is set.
b. Note that CMP test routine no . 34 failed .
c. Go to step 7. 6
Observe DATA WORD .
If DATA WORD second digit from right is 0 , 1 , 4 , or 5 :
a. Note that CMP test routine no . 34 passed .
b. Go to step 7 . If DATA WORD second digit from right is not 0 , 1 , 4 , or 5 :
a. Note that hard copy unit malfunction error is set . b. Note that CMP test routine no . 34 failed .
c. Go to step 7. 7
Press MODE so that AUTO comes on.
8
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-424
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-77.
HARD COPY UNIT SELF-TEST
ONTRO
......
.
0:1-74 נוון
J HARD COPY UNIT A65 當
RO
AD
SI
DE
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
1 At Hard Copy Unit ( HCU ) A65 ( fig . A) , set and hold test switch to TEST.
ON LINE
POWER ON
FORM FEED
TEST
OFF TIME METER AND CIRCUIT BREAKERS
FIGURE A
If HCU prints out test pattern : a . Release TEST.
b. Go to step 2.
If HCU does not print out test pattern :
a. Release TEST. b. Note that HCU self-test failed .
CONTINUED
c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-425
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HARD COPY UNIT SELF-TEST- Continued
3-77.
2
At HCU , observe test pattern printout ( fig . B) .
If each character prints correctly in each column :
a. Note that HCU self-test passed . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If each character does not print correctly in each column : a. Note that HCU'self-test failed .
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
" #$%&' O *+ . - . /0123456789 :: < = >?@ HGÜDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [ N ]^ _ ! " # $%& *+ -. / C ++, "# 0123456789 : ; ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYED N ^ _ 6 ! " #$*80 *+, /6 * # $%& * + -. / 8123456789 :; ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZDNI - ! " #$%&' ()* +, / G ! " # $2 & ( 4 + , - . 0123456789 ·; ( =>?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZIN ^ .. ! " #$ %808+, /0 ! " #$ %& C ++, -. 0123456789 :; ?@ RBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZOV ! "#$20** .-. / 0 ! " # $ 26° © * +, −. / A123456789 :; ? @ HECDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZEN ]^_ ! " # $%&* O * : 11 + - / ! " #$ * ()* + ~ . /0123456789 : ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPARSTUVWXYZ [ \ ]^ _ / ! " #$% & \ Q * +, ~ . / U123456789 ; ?@ RBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ [ \ ]^.. ! " #$% ! + - / ! " #$ %&' O * +, - , / 123456789 ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZIN ) .. ! # %& C ++. / 0 ! " #$% & () * + , - . /'0123456789 ; ? @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWAYED NJ _ ! " # $%& * +, -. 0123456789 ?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPARSTUVWXYZ * #*% & " **% ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZLN ^ ! " # // 123456789 /6 ! " # $%& O * +, ABCDE FGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZIN X& Q **, ••. // ! " #$%& © **, - . / 123456789 : ; < => ?@ "# /0123456789 :; ? @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZDN- | = ! " #$%&* O ** $380 *+, - . / **• , ~. #$%& /0 ! " #$%& 0+ , - /0123456789 ; < => ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPERSTUVWXYZ [ 17 . ! " #$%&* ( **. -. /0123456789 :) ? @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPERSTUVWXYZEN J ^./ − / ! " # $%&* O * +, * + , - . / 0123456789 : ; ?@ RBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZIN ! " # $%& '##28 ( ) *+, - . / ! " # $%& () *+ , -- / 0123456789 ; ? @ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXY ZOVIT " #$28 0 *+, - . /8 ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXYEDNJ &^&^(4+, ! " #$280 *+ , ~ . / 0 ! "! #$% * +,~-. /0123456789 : ?@ " #$% / 123456789 ?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPURSTUVWWEL 1 /G ! " # $%&* ( )*+, -.0123456789 :; ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZI ! " # $%& © * +, -
\ ]^_ ! " # $%&* Q ** −. // [N] .. " #$%&* & * +,
! " # $% V O * + − / 0123456789 (= 7@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPURSTU VWXYZ ! " #$%&' O * +, - . 0123456789 : ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPORSTUVWXY
/ " #$%%' () *+ , / ! " #$%& C ++, - . / 123456789 ; < =>?@ HBCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWX Y2 XYZ[ N- ! " # $% &? () * +, - , /0 ! " #$%& © 4-0123456769 ?@ ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVW $%&' *+, , / NYYEINT- !'#" # $% &'()() * +,- − . 0 ! ' # יו$%& ( +, -. /0123456789 ? @ HEDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUV / ! " #$%& 'O / 123456789 : < =>?@ HHCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTU VWXYEL N ]^ .. יו 0123456789 :
SWITCH
A
B
CRP
PRESS TO TEST
FIGURE D
If all voltages within specified limits : Go to step 9. If one or more voltages outside specified limits : a. Replace circuit breaker CB21 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 32.
9
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE to OFF .
10
Disconnect test equipment (fig . C) .
11
Connect W5P11 to J17.
23 J2 AI BOTTOM VIEW
1
ло
12 At Power Supply Assembly A58 ( fig . E) , loosen 30 captive screws ( 2 ) . Remove access cover.
S
13
Disconnect W5P 17 from J1 (1 ).
14
Set up test equipment for W5 voltage measurement per fig . F.
2
FIGURE E
CONTINUED
3-545
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
14
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS1 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
宣
3-94.
-Continued
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
J1 /
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P21
P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W 104
CABLE ASSEMBLY W5
J2
P17
P2
-OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
HI
NORMALLY P17 17. CONNECTED TO A58J1 LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE F
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH
WARNING
15
CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL -ROADSIDE to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION 16 At ACTS (fig . D) , set POI AND CRP in sequence shown in table B. Press PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe DMM .
If all voltages are within specified limits :
Go to step 17.
If one or more voltages are outside specified limits :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
TABLE SWITCH ΡΟΙ DAAB
Α
3-546
B VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC )
CRP
LOW
HIGH
A
114
126
B
198
218
C
198
218
C
198
218
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-94.
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS1 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
17
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE to OFF .
18
Disconnect test equipment (fig . F).
ដ០
EI E2 E3 33 19
Connect W5P 17 to J1 (fig . E) .
3
WHEN LOWERING BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 , USE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE
CAUTION
20 NOTE
TO CRT AND SURROUNDING CONTROLS.
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . G) , loosen four rotary stud fasteners ,
A release latch , and lower panel ( 2 ) .
0
0
POWER SUPPLY MAY BE HOT. USE PROTECWARNING TIVE GLOVES .
2
STC
FIGURE G
21
At Power Supply Assembly A52 ( 1 , fig . G) , disconnect W5P 16 from J1 (3) .
22
Set up test equipment for W5 voltage measurement per fig . H.
CABLE ASSEMBLY W5
CABLE ASSEMBLY W104
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2J1
J2P16
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY P1
P2
HI
-09 -OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO 6 A52J1 XP1
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 CONTINUED FIGURE H
3-547
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-94.
10
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS1 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL WARNING MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
23
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE to ON.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
24
At ACTS ( fig . D ) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. Press PRESS TO TEST for each position and observe DMM .
If all voltages are within specified limits :
Go to step 25.
If one or more voltage is outside specified limits:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
25
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF .
26 At power supply assembly (fig . G ) , disconnect ACTS W104J2 from W5P 16 and ACTS W 106P2.
27
Connect W5P 16 to J1 (3) .
28
Install lower shielding gasket ( 2 , fig . B) and secure with five flat washers and selflocking nuts (3) .
29
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (4).
30
Install two flat washers , screws , and nuts ( 1 ) .
31
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-548
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-94.
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS1 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
O NOTT AT DIGIT DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
32
At ACTS (fig . D ) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. Push PRESS TO TEST for each position and observe DMM .
TESTS If all voltages are within specified limits : Go to step 33.
If one or more voltage is outside specified limits :
PRESS
Call Intermediate Maintenance.
33
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL - ROADSIDE and UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400HZ INTERNAL to OFF .
34
Disconnect test equipment .
[ 35
Connect W5P11 to J17 (fig . B) .
36
Install lower shielding gasket ( 2 ) and secure with five flat washers and self- locking nuts (3).
37
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (4) .
38
Install two flat washers , screws , and nuts ( 1 ) .
39
Set DISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE (fig . A) to ON .
40
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-549
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-95 .
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS3 FAULT ISOLATION
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
B
C POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY A77
RO
AD
SI
DE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 6 In. Screwdriver, Flat tip , 1/4 In . 8 In . Wrench , Spintight , 3/8 In. Multimeter, Digital , 8125 - AQ - 0 Switch Assembly, AC Line Test Cable Assembly , W104 Cable Assembly , W106
Cable Assembly , W150 Cable Assembly, W156 Gloves, Leather
EPPINPUTPWS
AIR COND BOARD 1
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL CURBSIDE
AINCOD CURBEIDE
to ON
ARTERT POWER
SECUREPO RADIO PRINTER RELAYTEAM ON ON OH OFF 027 DISPLAY CONTROL GOADSIDE CURESBY OF
ToCOMPUTER VOICE FORSPLY
MECHANICALLIFT WEIGHT 178LES
FILTER
RUNNINGTIME ZYC 4] SOTERY POWERSUPPLY [TEST STS RET O O NOTSECURE F Couation CARDE Ar WT ON B 20130 FW DIS! DISPLAY CONTROL PPLY 20 on OFF OFF TELEPRENE ROADSIDE CONTRAL CENTRAL BRIT CONVERTER UTILITYPOWER Irama 4002 INTERRAL
LITERAL 0FT DANGER 208 VOLTS
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-550
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS3 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-95 .
1
-Continued
If circuit breaker tripped : a. Perform DISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE circuit breaker tripped fault isolation per para 3-88. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If circuit breaker remains on :
a . Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - CURBSIDE to OFF . b. Go to step 2 .
BLYATT
2
At distribution box (fig . B) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers and nuts .
O 0
A
유
0:00
0-0-0-
A
O
3 2
FIGURE B
3
Remove 13 screws (4) , lockwashers and flat washers .
4
Remove five self- locking nuts (3 ) and flat washers . Remove shielding gasket (2 ) .
5
Disconnect W4P40 from J16 .
CONTINUED
3-551
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-95.
TOTAL
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS3 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Le
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL
MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO PATRIOT SYSTEM UTILITY WARNING
OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED.
CAUTION
6
Set up test equipment for J16 voltage measurement per fig . C.
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY 11 /
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W156
P1
J1
J16 DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
P1
P2
HI
-09
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE C
WARNING
7
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT . CAUTION 8 At ACTS (fig . D ) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. Push PRESS TO TEST for each position and observe DMM . CONTINUED
3-552
יו
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-95.
DIGITAL
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS3 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
8
-Continued
MUTILO
TABLE
SWITCH
LOW
HIGH
K
114
126
K
G
198
218
K
H
198
218
H
198
218
A
114
126
B
198
218
C
198
218
198
218
А
B
C
ΡΟΙ
CRP
O
CRP
OHO
REMOVE
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
ΡΟΙ JX XG DAAB
P BETWE
A
PRESS TO TEST
FIGURE D
If all voltages within specified limits : Go to step 9 .
If one or more voltages outside specified limits : a. Replace circuit breaker CB2 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 32.
9
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- CURBSIDE to OFF.
23
BOTTOM VIEW 10
Disconnect test equipment ( fig . C) .
11
Connect W4P40 to J16.
A
12 At Power Supply Assembly A77 (fig . E) , loosen 30 captive screws ( 2 ) . Remove access cover .
13
Disconnect W4P42 from J1 ( 1 ).
2
14 Set up test equipment for W4 voltage measurement per fig . F.
FIGURE E
CONTINUED
3-553
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-95.
TOTA
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS3 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
14
-Continued
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 J2P1 P2ŞJ1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W104
CABLE ASSEMBLY W4
J2P42
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
P1
P2
J1 < NORMALLY CONNECTED TO P42 A77J1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150 HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE F
Le
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH WARNING CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
15
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL -CURBSIDE to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED. DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION
16
At ACTS (fig . D ) , set POI AND CRP in sequence shown in table B. Press PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe DMM .
If all voltages are within specified limits:
Go to step 17 .
If one or more voltages are outside specified limits :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
TABLE SWITCH ΡΟΙ D AAB
3-554
B VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
CRP
LOW
HIGH
A
114
126
B
198
218
C
198
218
C
198
218
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-95 .
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS3 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
17
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL -CURBSIDE to OFF .
18
Disconnect test equipment ( fig . F) .
19
Connect W4P42 to J1 (fig . E) .
ΕΙ E2 E3 J4
O
WHEN LOWERING BITE · AINDICATOR PANEL A51 , EXERCISE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CRT AND SURROUNDING CONTROLS . CAUTION
20
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . G ),
NOT
loosen four rotary stud fasteners ,
TO
release latch , and lower panel (2 ) .
8
Le
POWER SUPPLY MAY
0
WARNING BE HOT. USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES .
2
FIGURE G 21
At Power Supply Assembly A62 ( 1 , fig . G ) , disconnect W4P41 from J1 (3).
22
Set up test equipment for W4 voltage measurement per fig. H.
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 /
P1
J2P4
P2
-09 -OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
CABLE ASSEMBLY W4
CABLE ASSEMBLY W104
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2J1
HI
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO P41 A62J1 W4
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE H
CONTINUED
3-555
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-95.
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS3 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Le WARNING
23
TO
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL -CURBSIDE to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT . CAUTION
24
At ACTS (fig . D) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. Press PRESS TO TEST for each position and observe DMM .
If all voltages are within specified limits:
Go to step 25.
If one or more voltage is outside specified limits :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
25 At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL -CURBSIDE to OFF .
26
At power supply assembly (fig . G ) , disconnect ACTS W 104J2 from W4P41 and ACTS W 106P2.
27
Connect W4P41 to J1 (3) .
28 Install lower shielding gasket ( 2 , fig . B) and secure with five flat washers and selflocking nuts (3) .
29
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (4) .
30
Install two flat washers , screws , and nuts ( 1 ) .
31
Call Intermediate Maintenance . D
CONTINUE
3-556
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-95.
TOTAL POWER FAILURE MS3 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
NOTTO AT DIGI
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION
32
At ACTS (fig . D) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. Push PRESS TO TEST for each position and observe DMM .
TESTS If all voltages are within specified limits : Go to step 33.
If one or more voltage is outside specified limits :
PRESS
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
33
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL -CURBSIDE and UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400HZ INTERNAL to OFF .
34
Disconnect test equipment .
35
Connect W4P40 to J16 (fig . B ) .
36
Install lower shielding gasket (2 ) and secure with five flat washers and self- locking nuts (3).
37
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (4) .
38
Install two falt washers , screws , and nuts ( 1 ) .
39
Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE (fig . A) to ON .
40
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
ar!d
3-557
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96.
S
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION
CONTROL-INDICATOR
BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
PANEL A55
(POWER SUPPLY A52)
CATHODE RAY TUBE A54
Palka
l
RO
AD
E
SI
ID
DE
BS
MAN STATION 1
POWER SUPPLY
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
R CU
ASSEMBLY A58
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In. Wrench , Spin - Tight Socket , 1/2 In . Wrench , Spin - Tight Socket , 3/8 In . Multimeter, Digital , 8125A - AQ - 0 Switch, Assembly , AC Line Test Cable Assembly W 106
Cable Assembly W 150 Cable Assembly W 109 Cable Assembly W103 Cable Assembly W104
Cable Assembly W156 Gloves, Leather
CONTINUED
T
3-558
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96 .
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued 1
At man station 1 ( MS 1 ) , observe Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) A54 .
If CRT is blanked out :
BEA54
a . Replace CRT A54 Power Supply A5 per para 4-58.1 .
b. Go to step 2 . If CRT is not blanked out: Go to step 54.
2
At MS1 , observe CRT . If CRT is blanked out:
ZEYIC
PORTER FO
Go to step 3.
ENTERT
HO
SECES PWN RELYTEAM OFF BESPLAY/CONTROL BASTIDE
EPP PSTPOS
TEXT
BUTBECOMEPRE PWB
If CRT is not blanked out: ALB
RTERY PRUSE 3
PROSPLY OFT At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL -ROADSIDE to OFF .
ออ
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
FORBEST 1 201 BEL TEME DR APLT COATHER OFF DET TELEPHONE CONTOR CONTROL CONVERTER
UTILITYPOWER EXTERNAL OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
DECIMDICAL178LBSLETT WEIGHT
FIGURE A 4
At MS1 , unlatch seat , raise and latch in raised position .
5
At Power Supply Assembly A58 ( fig . B ) ,
1
loosen 30 captive screws ( 2 ) and remove access cover.
41 J2 J
OCVHEIRA ND E1 E2 E3
El E2 E3 ØØ J3
NO
A
ל
1 -A-
9
Le WARNING POWER SUPPLIES MAY BE HOT. USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES .
の
FIGURE B
2
CONTINUED 6
At power supply subassembly ( 1 ) , disconnect W3P 14 from J2 .
3-559
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96 .
$1P
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-C Le
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL
WARNING MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO PATRIOT SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED. CAUTION
Set up test equipment for J2 voltage measure-
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
P1J2
J1
POWER SUPPLY A58
P2
HI
Юд
ment per fig. C.
P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W109
HO
7
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W 106 P2 PP1
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
Le HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO WARNING NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
8
L
FIGURE C
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to ON. ΡΟΙ
PAO
DO NOT CHANGE POIOR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED. DAMAGE TO
CRP
1
EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT . CAUTION
PRESS TO TEST
9
At ACTS (fig . D) , set Poland CRP in sequence shown in table A. Press PRESS TO TESTat each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each position.
3-560
FIGURE D
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-96.
9
-Continued
IGITAL
TABLE
MUTILITY
SWITCH
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
ΡΟΙ
CRP
< B
DAAB
A
PBETHE с
REMOR C
A
HIGH
LOW 114
126
А
198
218
Α
198
218
198
218
| The
If all voltages are within specified limits : Go to step 10. If not all voltages are within specified limits : Go to step 28.
10
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF .
11
Disconnect test equipment (fig . C) .
12
Connect W3P 14 to J2 (fig . B) .
13
Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws ( 2 ) .
ING.D
MING
PEOPLE CAN BE INJURED
0x0
00
FROM FLYING GLASS OR
WARNING ESCAPING GASES IF THE CRT IS BROKEN . BE CAREFUL NOT TO UNLATCH THE CONTROLINDICATOR PANEL OR DROP
2
TOOLS OR PARTS ON THE FACE OF THE TUBE .
14
At Control - Indicator Panel A55 (fig . E) , loosen four rotary stud fasteners (1 ).
FIGURE E
CONTINUED
3-561
3-96.
VST
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
15
Raise control - indicator panel and secure latch to overhead hook (fig . F ) .
16
At CRT , disconnect AC Interlock A80 (7 , fig . G ) from J1 .
CABLES CAN BE DAMAGED WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING CHASSIS . BE SURE ALL CABLES ARE REMOVED FROM UNDER UNIT . CAUTION FIGURE F
17
At two lower access covers ( 5 ) , remove two screws , one on each cover. Swing cover open . 2
1
Good 5
6
7 FIGURE G
18
Loosen two lower slide lock captive bolts (6) and two upper slide lock captive bolts (2) . Slide CRT out to slide locked position .
19
Reach underneath CRT and disconnect W3P 15 (4) from J3.
20
Set up test equipment for W3 voltage measurement per fig H. D
CONTINUE
3-562
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96 .
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION- Continued CABLE CABLE ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY W106 W103 J2 P2 HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE J2> امد AC LINE TEST IS PRESENT DURING SWITCH ASSEMBLY TESTING . DO NOT P1 P2 WARNING J1 , TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT
CABLE ASSEMBLY W3 J2
P15
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO P15 A55J3
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
FIGURE H
FIGUR
21
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE to ON.
er. DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION
22
At ACTS (fig . D) , set POland CRP in sequence shown in table A. Press PRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each position .
If all voltages are within specified limits : Go to step 23.
If not all voltages are within specified limits: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
23
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE to OFF.
24
Disconnect test equipment.
25
At CRT (fig . G) , connect W3P 15 (4 ) to J3 .
26
Install replacement AC interlock (7 ) to J1 .
27
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to ON and observe CRT at MS1 .
If CRT is blanked out :
a. Replace CRT subassembly per para 4-58 .
CONTINUED
b. Go to step 76.
3-563
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96.
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
27
-Continued
If CRT is not blanked out: Go to step 77.
28
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF .
29
Disconnect test equipment ( fig . C ) .
30
At Power Supply Assembly A58 (fig . B) , connect W3P 14 to J2.
31
At power supply subassembly ( 1 ) , disconnect W5P 17 from J1 .
32
Set up test equipment for W5 voltage measurement per fig . I.
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 /
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2
P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W5 12
P17
P2
HI
-09
-OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W 150
CABLE ASSEMBLY W 104
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO A58J1
17 .
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE I
Le HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO WARNING NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
33
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY/CONTROL- ROADSIDE to ON.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION
34
3-564
At ACTS (fig . D) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. Press PRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each position .
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96 .
34
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued -Continued
If all voltages are within specified limits : a. Replace power supply assembly per para 4-61 . b. Go to step 76 .
OFF. If not all voltages are within specified limits: Go to step 35.
35
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF .
36
Disconnect ACTS W104J1 from ACTS W106P2 (fig . 1 ) .
37
Disconnect W 104J2 from W5P 17 .
38
Connect W5P 17 to J1 (fig . B) .
1
39
At distribution box ( fig . J ) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
40
Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and
O flat washers .
FIGURE J
&& 2
A-
J17 19 16
41
18
J23 J28
Remove five self-locking nuts (2 ) and flat washers . Remove bottom shielding gasket (4).
J30
JEA
At distribution box (fig . K) , disconnect 42 W5P11 from J17.
FIGURE K
CONTINUED
T
3-565
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
VSSSV
3-96.
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
43
Set up test equipment for J17 voltage measurement per fig . L.
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2 J2> AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1K
CABLE ASSEMBLY W156 P117
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P1
P2
HI
-09
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE L
Le
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO WARNING NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
44
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to ON.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
45 At ACTS (fig . D ) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table B. Press PRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each setting .
TABLE SWITCH
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC) LOW
HIGH
J
114
126
198
218
198
218
G
198
218
F
CRP
IL F
ΡΟΙ
B
G H I
H
F
G
If all voltages are within specified limits :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-566
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96.
45
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Continued
If not all voltages are within specified limits : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 circuit breaker CB21 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 46.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
STING.
46
ERMINA
At ACTS (fig . D) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table B. Press PRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each setting .
If all voltages are within specified limits : Go to step 47.
If not all voltages are within specified limits : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE to OFF .
48
Disconnect test equipment .
49
Connect W5P11 to J17 (fig . K) .
10M
47
Install shielding gasket ( 4 , fig . J) and secure with five flat washers and self- locking 50 nuts (2).
51
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (3) .
52
Install two flat washers , screws ( 1 ) , and nuts .
53
Go to step 76 .
54
At MS1 , unlatch seat , raise and latch in raised position . CONTINUED
3-567
3-96.
VIST
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
Loc WARNING
PEOPLE CAN BE INJURED FROM FLYING GLASS OR ESCAPING GASES IF THE CRT IS BROKEN . BE CAREFUL NOT TO UNLATCH THE CONTROLINDICATOR PANEL OR DROP TOOLS OR PARTS ON THE FACE OF THE TUBE .
55
At Control - Indicator Panel A74 ( fig . E) , loosen four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ).
56
Raise control - indicator panel and secure latch ( 2 ) to overhead hook (fig . F).
57
At CRT ( fig . G ) , adjust FOCUS control ( 1 ) and CRT BIAS control (3 ) . If CRT raster is controllable :
Go to step 61 . If CRT raster is not controllable : a . Replace CRT Power Supply A5 per para 4-58.1 .
b. Go to step 58.
PEOPLE CAN BE INJURED FROM FLYING GLASS OR ESCAPING GASES IF THE CRT IS BROKEN . BE CAREFUL NOT TO UNLATCH THE CONTROL. WARNING INDICATOR PANEL OR DROP TOOLS OR PARTS ON THE FACE OF THE TUBE .
58 At control- indicator panel (fig . E ) , loosen four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ).
59
Raise control - indicator panel and secure latch ( 2 ) to overhead hook (fig . F) .
60
At CRT (fig . G) , adjust FOCUS control ( 1 ) and CRT BIAS control ( 3 ) .
If raster is controllable : a. Unlatch control- indicator panel ( fig . F) and lower carefully. b. Secure control - indicator panel (fig . E ) with four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) . c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If raster is not controllable :
Go to step 64.
61
At control- indicator panel (fig . M) , observe indicators .
If all indicators are off:
Go to step 62 .
3-568
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96.
CAPING
61
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Continued
THECO
FACEOF
If any indicators are on : Go to step 63.
ers( 1) 62
At control - indicator panel , press CONSOLE MODE indicators and observe corresponding group enable indicators .
fig. Fl
If group enable indicators are on :
9900
Go to step 63.
FIGURE M
If all indicators are off:
a. Perform Power Supply A52A1 fault isolation per para 3-144. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 ( fig . N ) , observe indicators .
INGGE
MIGSTATION
ECONT
Go to step 73.
ICE
If all indicators are off (except BASKET 2 POWER MS1 GOOD ) :
COFF
LDCOMPUTERCON DEVICE DELET BASS MASSSTORAGE STORABL UNIT1UNIT2 NOW RECOVERY TACTICAL STGRAGE PERIPHERALS DRIT1
If any indicators are on ( except BASKET 2 POWER MS1 GOOD ) :
CIT PLAY PASBUTMATA GABLET 1PROWE MBLETI CLOCK MOKET & POWER BABLET &CLOCK COOPUTERSTATION
000000
63
Go to step 64.
FIGURE N
64
At Power Supply Assembly A58 (fig . B ) , loosen 30 captive screws ( 2) and remove access cover.
65
Set CB15 AMP OVERHEAD to ON .
If CB 1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : a. Perform Power Supply Assembly A58 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD circuit
breaker tripped fault isolation per para 3-162 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD does not trip : Go to step 66 .
CONTINUED
3-569
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
161
3-96.
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Ave WARNING
66
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
At power supply subassembly ( 1 , fig . B) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM .
If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC:
a. Disconnect DMM probes. b . Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws (2) . c. Go to step 69.
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC :
a. Disconnect DMM probes . b. Replace Power Supply Assembly A58A1 subassembly per para 4-62 but do not install access cover.
c. Go to step 67.
67
At power supply subassembly ( 1 , fig . B ) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3. Observe voltage on DMM .
If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC :
a. Disconnect DMM probes. b . Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws (2). c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC :
a. Disconnect DMM probes. b.
Replace Power Supply Assembly A58 per para 4-61 but do not install access cover.
c. Go to step 68.
68 At power supply subassembly ( 1 , fig . B) . connect DMMHI probe to terminal E2 andLO probe to terminal E3. Observe voltage on DMM .
If voltage indication is between 4 75 and 5 25VDC:
a. Disconnect DMI probes b. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws ( 2) CONTINUED
c. Return to procedur that breagh you to this paragraph .
3-570
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96.
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
68
-Continued
DIGITAL
Y OUTLE
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
erminal WHEN LOWERING BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 , EXERCISE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CRT AND SURROUNDING CONTROLS . CAUTION
2
1 $(2)
69
At BITE indicator panel (fig . O) , release four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) . Release latch ( 2 ) and lower panel .
(JI)
CAUTION HIGH CURRENT POWER MUST BE OFF AT MAINACCB BEFORE DISCONNECTIO N CBI 5AMP ON
FIGURE O
OFF
(PI) (E))
(E2)
(E3) 70
At Power Supply Assembly A52 (fig . P) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM .
FIGURE P
If voltage is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a. Disconnect DMM probes. b. Raise BITE indicator panel (fig . O) , latch and secure panel with four
rotary stud fasteners (1 ). c. Perform BITE Indicator Panel A51 D & C STATUS indicator fault isolation per para 3-23. d . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . E
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a. Disconnect DMM probes. b. Replace Power Supply A52A2 per para 4-55 but do not close BITE
indicator panel . c. Go to step 71 .
CONTINUED
3-571
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96.
71
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
At Power Supply Assembly A52 (fig . P ) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM .
If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC :
a . Disconnect DMM probes. b . Raise BITE indicator panel ( fig . O) , latch and secure with four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) . c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC :
a . Disconnect DMM probes. b. Replace Power Supply A52 ..unting chassis per para 4-54 but do not close BITE indicator panel .
c. Go to step 72. 72 At Power Supply Assembly A52 ( fig . P) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM .
If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC:
a. Disconnect DMM probes . b. Raise BITE indicator panel (fig . O) , latch and secure with four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) . c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
73
At BITE indicator panel (fig . N ) , press and hold LAMP TEST .
If all indicators are off ( except BASKET 2 POWER MS1 GOOD ) :
a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Replace BITE indicator panel per para 4-53.
c. Go to step 74. If all indicators are on: a. Release LAMP TEST .
b. Go to step 63. If any indicators are on (except BASKET 2 POWER MS1 GOOD) :
a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Replace indicators that were off per para 5-54 . c. Go to step 63.
3-572
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
terminal
3-96 .
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
74
At BITE indicator panel ( fig . N ) , press and hold LAMP TEST .
If all indicators are off (except BASKET 2 POWER MS1 GOOD ) : a . Release LAMP TEST .
withfour b. Replace Power Supply A52 mounting chassis per para 4-54 . c. Go to step 75 .
ph.
If all indicators are on : a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
a4-54
75
At BITE indicator panel ( fig . N) , press and hold LAMP TEST .
If all indicators are off (except BASKET 2 POWER MS1 GOOD ) :
mitalE
a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance . If all indicators are on :
a . Release LAMP TEST .
hfour b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
76
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL -ROADSIDE to ON and observe CRT at MS1 .
If CRT is blanked out:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If CRT is not blanked out:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
77
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - ROADSIDE to OFF .
At CRT (fig . G ) , release slide locks and slide unit fully into console . Secure with four 78 slide lock captive bolts (2 and 6) .
79
Close two lower access covers ( 5) and secure with two screws .
80
Unlatch control - indicator panel (fig . F) and carefully lower panel . Secure with four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 , fig . E) .
CONTINUED
1
3-573
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-96.
MS1 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
81
Unlatch seat from raised position at MS1 , lower and latch in lowered position.
82
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL- ROADSIDE to ON.
83
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-574
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION
position
N.
FP STATUS INDICATOR PANEL A61 (POWER SUPPLY A62)
CATHODE RAY TUBE A73
CONTROL-INDICATOR PANEL A74
's
[
RO
Lood
MAN STATION 3
AD
SI
DE
E
SID
B CUR
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
POWER SUPPLY ASSEMBLY A77
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In. Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In. Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In .
Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 1/2 In . Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In . Multimeter , Digital , 8125A - AQ- O Switch , Assembly , AC Line Test Cable Assembly W106 Cable Assembly W150 Cable Assembly W109 Cable Assembly W103 Cable Assembly W104 Cable Assembly W156 Gloves, Leather
CONTINUED
3-575
3-97.
380
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
1
At man station 3 ( MS3) , observe Cathode Ray Tube (CRT) A73.
If CRT is blanked out: a . Replace CRT A73 Power Supply A5 per para 4-58.1 .
b. Go to step 2 . If CRT is not blanked out:
Go to step 54.
2
At MS3, observe CRT.
If CRT is blanked out : Go to step 3. If CRT is not blanked out: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . EPPJUSTP 3
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- CURBSIDE to OFF .
BECUSE PW BADID ELTTERM BISPLAY/CONTROL
ET ASBCOSB
4
At MS3, unlatch seat , raise and latch in raised position .
POWERSUPPLY
PRINTER
COMPUTER
T da 2 3 DEF BEATERS
DOPLE ·T CONTROL CONVERTER TELEPHO
PLY
STEST POWER
STRITYPOWER 12 MOZ
FVBSPLY 5
ARTDECIDEPR TOR
At Power Supply Assembly A77 (fig . B) , loosen 30 captive screws (2) and remove access cover.
EXTER MASTERECT
DANGER 208 VOLTS MECHANICALLIFT WENDET178 S FIGURE A
El E2 E3 ⑩の J3 32
MEN A—
A
Le
WARNING
POWER SUPPLIES MAY BE HOT. USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES .
FIGURE B
6
3-576
At power supply subassembly ( 1 ) , disconnect W12P43 from J2.
CONTINUED 2
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
3-97.
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO PATRIOT SYSTEM UTILITY WARNING OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS.
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IS GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LOAND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION CABLE ASSEMBLY W109
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2J1 J2P1
7
Set up test
P1
J2
POWER SUPPLY A77 P1
P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
togL -OF
equipment for J2 voltage measure-
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1/
HI
O
ment per fig . C.
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE C
Le
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT
WARNING DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- CURBSIDE TO ON. ΡΟΙ
ΟΡΟ
8
CRP
DO NOT CHANGE POIOR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
PRESS TO TEST
FIGURE D
9
At ACTS (fig . D ) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. Press PRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on
CONTINUED
DMM for each position .
3-577
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
9
163F
-Continued
TABLE
SWITCH CRP
A B
DAAB
C
Ove
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
ΡΟΙ
C
A
LOW
HIGH
114
126
198
218
198
218
198
218
If all voltages are within specified limits :
Go to step 10.
If not all voltages are within specified limits :
Go to step 28.
10
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - CURBSIDE to OFF .
11
Disconnect test equipment (fig . C) .
12
Connect W12P43 to J2 (fig . B ) .
13
Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws (2 ).
1 PEOPLE CAN BE INJURED Le
FROM FLYING GLASS OR WARNING ESCAPING GASES IF THE CRT
40
00
IS BROKEN . BE CAREFUL NOT TO UNLATCH THE CONTROLINDICATOR PANEL OR DROP TOOLS OR PARTS ON THE 2
FACE OF THE TUBE. FIGURE E
14
3-578
At Control- Indicator Panel A74 (fig . E) , loosen four rotary stud fasteners (1 ) .
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
15
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
Raise control - indicator panel and secure latch to overhead hook (fig . F).
16
At CRT, disconnect AC Interlock A81 (7 , fig . G ) from J1 .
CABLES CAN BE DAMAGED WHEN REMOVING OR INSTALLING CHASSIS . BE SURE ALL CABLES ARE REMOVED FROM UNDER UNIT . CAUTION
FIGURE F
17
At two lower access covers (5) , remove two screws , one on each cover. Swing cover open .
1
F
2
3
5
6
FIGURE G 7
18
Loosen two lower slide lock captive bolts ( 6) and two upper slide lock captive bolts (2) . Slide CRT out to slide locked position .
19
Reach underneath CRT and disconnect W12P44 (4) from J3 .
20
Set up test equipment for W 12 voltage measurement per fig . H. CONTINUED
3-579
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE Le
WARNING
IS PRESENT DURING
TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1K
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2
P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W103
CABLE ASSEMBLY W12 J2P44
P2
INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT
MEASUREMENT .
HI
-09
DURING VOLTAGE
OH
DIGITAL MULTIMETER
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO. P44 A74J3
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE H
21
At distribution box (fig . A) , setDISPLAY / CONTROL CURBSIDE toON .
DO NOT CHANGEPOI ORCRP SETTINGS WHENPRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
22
At ACTS (fig . D ) , setPOI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. PressPRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each position .
If all voltages are within specified limits :
Go to step 23.
If not all voltages are within specified limits : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
23
At distribution box (fig . A ) , setDISPLAY / CONTROL CURBSIDE to OFF .
24
Disconnect test equipment.
25
At CRT (fig . G) , connect W12P44 (4) to J3 .
26
Install replacement AC interlock ( 7) to J1 .
27 At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL -CURBSIDE to ON and observe CRT at MS3.
If CRT is blanked out: a . Replace CRT subassembly per para 4-58.
CONTINUED
b. Go to step 75. T
3-580
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
27
-Continued If CRT is not blanked out: Go to step 76.
NOVA COVER STA
28
At distribution box (fig . A) , setDISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE toOFF
29
Disconnect test equipment ( fig . C).
30
At Power Supply Assembly A77 (fig . B) , connect W12P43 to J2.
31
At power supply subassembly ( 1 ) , disconnect W4P42 from J1 .
32
Set up test equipment for W4 voltage measurement per fig . I.
TEST
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
P1
J2P42
P2
-OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W 150
Posis
CABLE ASSEMBLY W4
CABLE ASSEMBLY W104
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 ❘P2
HI
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO P42 A77J1 LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE I
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT
WARNING
DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREM ENT.
At distribution box (fig . A) , setDISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE toON 33
DO NOT CHANGE POI ORCRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT . CAUTION
34
At ACTS (fig . D) , setPOI and CRP in sequence shown in table A. Press
CONTINUED PRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each position .
3-581
3-97. 34
153
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued -Continued
If all voltages are within specified limits : a . Replace power supply assembly per para 4-61 .
b. Go to step 75. If not all voltages are within specified limits :
Go to step 35.
35
36
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - CURBSIDE to OFF .
Disconnect ACTS W 104J1 from ACTS W106P2 (fig . 1) .
37
Disconnect W104J2 from 4P42 .
38
Connect W4P42 to J1 (fig . B) .
39
At distribution box (fig . J ) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts . 0
40
Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
D 10
2 FIGURE J
A
OOOE
OOO
317 J19 J16 J20 318 J22 J21 J23 J2B
41
Remove five self- locking nuts (2) and flat washers . Remove bottom shielding gasket (4 ) .
313 J27 J30 J14
38
J11 42
At distribution box (fig . K) , disconnect W4P40 from J16.
A
FIGURE K CONTINUED
3-582
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION_Continued
43
Set up test equipment for J16 voltage measurement per fig . L.
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2
J2> AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 /
CABLE ASSEMBLY W156 J16 DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P2
P1
-09
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
F
HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE L
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT WARNING DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
DISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE to ON 44
At distribution box (fig . A) , set
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT . CAUTION
PRESS TO POI and CRP in sequ ence shown in table B. Press At ACTS (fig . D), set TEST at each setting and observe voltage displaye on DMM for each setting . d TABLE
B
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC) SWITCH UFF O
HIG TI
45
CRP
LOW
HIGH
ΡΟΙ
J
114
126
F
198
218
198
218
198
218
Н H
G
If all voltages are within specified limits:
CONTINUED
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-583
3-97.
45
683
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION- Continued -Continued
If not all voltages are within specified limits : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 circuit breaker CB2 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 49.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
46
At ACTS (fig . D) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table B. Press PRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each setting .
If all voltages are within specified limits :
Go to step 47 .
If not all voltages are within specified limits : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
47
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL- CURBSIDE to OFF.
48
Disconnect test equipment .
49
Connect W4P40 to J16 (fig . K) .
50
Install shielding gasket (4 , fig . J ) and secure with five flat washers and self- locking nuts (2 ).
51
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws (3) .
52
Install two flat washers , screws ( 1 ) , and nuts.
53
Go to step 75.
54
At MS3, unlatch seat , raise and latch in raised position .
CONTINUED
3-584
من
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-97.
PEOPLE CAN BE INJURED FROM FLYING GLASS OR ESCAPING GASES
Le WARNING para48
IF THE CRT IS BROKEN . BE CAREFUL NOT TO UNLATCH THE CONTROLINDICATOR PANEL OR DROP TOOLS OR PARTS ON THE FACE OF THE TUBE .
55
At Control - Indicator Panel A74 ( fig . E) , loosen four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ).
56
Raise control - indicator panel and secure latch ( 2 ) to overhead hook ( fig . F) .
57
At CRT (fig . G) , adjust FOCUS control ( 1 ) and CRT BIAS control (3) .
TESTE
If CRT raster is controllable : Go to step 61 . If CRT raster is not controllable :
a . Replace CRT Power Supply A5 per para 4-58.1 b. Go to step 58.
PEOPLE CAN BE INJURED FROM FLYING GLASS OR ESCAPING GASES IF THE CRT IS BROKEN . BE CAREFUL NOT TO UNLATCH THE CONTROLWARNING INDICATOR PANEL OR DROP TOOLS OR PARTS ON THE FACE OF THE TUBE .
58
At control - indicator panel (fig . E) , loosen four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) .
59
Raise control - indicator panel and secure latch to overhead hook (fig . F) .
60
At CRT (fig . G) , adjust FOCUS control ( 1 ) and CRT BIAS control (3) .
If raster is controllable : a . Unlatch control - indicator panel (fig . F) and lower carefully .
b. Secure control - indicator panel (fig . E ) with four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) . c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If raster is not controllable : Go to step 64 .
61
At control - indicator panel (fig . M ) , observe indicators .
If all indicators are off:
CONTINUED
Go to step 62.
3-585
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
61
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION- Continued -Continued
If any indicators are on:
FUTS
Go to step 63. T 62
At control - indicator panel , press CONSOLE MODE indicators and observe corresponding group enable indicators .
If group enable indicators are on: 9930
Go to step 63 . FIGURE M
If all indicators are off: a . Perform Power Supply A62A1 fault isolation per para 3-145. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
63
At FP Status Indicator Panel A61 (fig . N) , observe indicators .
If all indicators are off: a . Replace FP status indicator per para 4-64.1 .
Go to step 64.
64
At Power Supply A77 ( fig . B) , loosen 30
13/0
If any indicators are on :
SSL VENTORY பபபப்ப
b. Go to step 73.
O O TIMEOFDAY ATTACKWARNINGS EN ALERT METHO FP FP2 LAMP BRIGHTNESS FP3 FP4 FP5 FP6
FIGURE N
captive screws ( 2) and remove access cover.
65
Set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON.
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : a. Perform Power Supply A77 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD circuit breaker tripped fault isolation per para 3-163.
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD does not trip :
Go to step 66. CONTINUED
3-586
اللقاء
3-97.
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
ااالاللعيلغللععلةطللاةج TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO PATRIOT SYSTEM UTILITY
WARNING OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
66
At power supply subassembly ( 1 , fig . B) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM . If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a. Disconnect DMM probes .
b. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws (2 ). c. Go to step 69.
145
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a . Disconnect DMM probes.
b. Replace Power Supply A77A1 subassembly per para 4-62 but do not install access cover. c. Go to step 67.
67
At power supply subassembly ( 1 , fig . B ) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM . If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a. Disconnect DMM probes.
b. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws (2). c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a. Disconnect DMM probes. b. Replace Power Supply A77 per para 4-61 but do not install access cover. c. Go to step 68 .
68
At power supply subassembly ( 1 , fig . B) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM .
If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a . Disconnect DMM probes .
b. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws (2 ) . c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CONTINUED
3-587
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ST
3-97.
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
68
-Continued
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
WHEN LOWERING BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51 , EXERCISE CARE TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CRT AND SURROUNDING CONTROLS .
CAUTION
69
At FP status indicator panel ( fig . O ) , release four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) . Release latch ( 2 ) and lower panel .
) ( ال
CAUTION HIGH CURRENT AC POWER MUST BE OFF AT MAIN CB BEFORE DISCONNECTION CBI 5AMP ON OFF
(PI)
(EI)
(E 2)
(E3) FIGURE O
70
At Power Supply Assembly A62 (fig . P) , connect DMM HI probe to terminal E2 and LO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM .
FIGURE P
If voltage is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC :
a. Disconnect DMM probes. b . Raise FP status indicator panel (fig . O) , latch and secure panel with four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ). c. Perform BITE Indicator Panel A51 display and control STATUS - MS3 fault lamps fault isolation per para 3-82.
d. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC :
a. Disconnect DMM probes .
b. Replace Power Supply A62A2 per para 4-55 but do not close FP status indicator panel . c. Go to step 71 . CONTINUED
3-588
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION -Continued 71
At power supply ( fig . P) , connect DMMHI probe to terminal E2 andLO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM .
If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a . Disconnect DMM probes. b . Raise FP status indicator panel (fig . O) , latch and secure with four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) .
CARE c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
LS
If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : a. Disconnect DMM probes .
b. Replace Power Supply A62 mounting chassis per para 4-54 but do not close FP status indicator panel . c. Go to step 72.
72
At power supply (fig . P) , connect DMMHI probe to terminal E2 andLO probe to terminal E3 . Observe voltage on DMM .
If voltage indication is between 4.75 and 5.25VDC: a . Disconnect DMM probes. b. Raise FP status indicator panel (fig . O) , latch and secure with four
rotary stud fasteners (1 ). c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If voltage indication is not between 4.75 and 5.25VDC : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
73
At FP status indicator panel (fig . N ) , observe indicators .
If all indicators are off:
a . Replace Power Supply A62 mounting chassis per para 4-54 . b. Go to step 74.
北 If all indicators are on :
Return to the procedure that brought you to this paragraph . 74
At FP status indicator panel (fig . N) , observe indicators .
If all indicators are off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If any indicators are on : Return to the procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CONTINUED
3-589
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-97.
75
MS3 POWER SUPPLIES FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- CURBSIDE to ON and observe CRT at MS3.
If CRT is blanked out : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If CRT is not blanked out:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
76
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- CURBSIDE to OFF.
77
At CRT (fig . G ) , release slide locks and slide unit fully into console . Secure with four slide lock captive bolts ( 2 and 6) .
78
Close two lower access covers (5) and secure with two screws.
79
Unlatch control - indicator panel ( fig . F ) and carefully lower panel . Secure with four rotary stud fasteners ( 1 , fig . E) .
80
Unlatch seat from raised position at MS3, lower and latch in lowered position .
81
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL- CURBSIDE to ON.
82
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-590
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-98.
AMG ENABLE LIGHT OFF FAULT ISOLATION
ONandd
O TZB
F
C נ
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
Curew
RO
AD
SI
DE
ewith Personnel Required .
Two
Test Equipment Required
sition
Multimeter, Digital , 8125A- AQ - O Switch Assembly, AC Line Test Cable Assembly W106 Cable Assembly W150 Cable Assembly W188
WARNING
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO PATRIOT SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
LPPINPUTFOR NAMES At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to OFF .
AIRCOND ROADSIDE
TRYDC RUBBING TINE BATERY POWERSUPPLY LABE STS B POWER 1101 TEST -O ROT-2 D O ROADSIDE NOTSECURSPR CURSION Mess MT FWD FRAS AFT ON ON CR 21 OFF OFF OFF 2000 FORDIST CONTRO BE RADIOTERM3 BUITPRE FORSPLT 2 ON ca PAY 210 B 00 by OFF ~ QFF OFF 9 ANT CONTR ZELEPHOM OL CONVERTER BOANSION LIGHT WEATERS CONTROL On ON B OPP COTALITYPOWER EXTERNAL MAST ERECT INTERER 20 OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
:G
1
SECURE FIRE RADIO - PROTES RELAYTER ON or BST OFF 25F DISPLAY CONTRO ROADSIDE CURSSION
AIRCORD CUBESIDE
COMPUTER BUSTERY POWER COMM PARSPLY
INTER
WECREBICALLIFT WEIGHTSTHLAS FIGURE A CONTINUED
3-591
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
AMG ENABLE LIGHT OFF FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-98. 2
Outside shelter , at rear roadside ( fig . B) , disconnect AMG power cable 7A1W1 from J29.
CAUTION
T
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED . J29
3
Set up test equipment for J29 voltage measurement per fig. C.
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 ,
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P21 XP1
FIGURE B
CABLE ASSEMBLY W188
J29 DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
P1
P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150 HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE C
Le HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO WARNING NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
4
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMP to ON.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST CAUTION
LO
5
IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
At ACTS (fig . D) , set POI and CRP in sequence as shown in table . Push PRESS TO TEST and observe voltage displayed on DMM at each position .
3-592
ΡΟΙ
CRP
PRESS TO TEST
CONTINUED FIGURE D
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
AMG ENABLE LIGHT OFF FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-98. 5
-Continued.
VOLTAGE LIMITS
SWITCH CRP
LOW
HIGH
G
114
126
G
114
126
C
G
114
126
D
G
114
126
E
G
114
126
F
G
114
126
B
A
198
218
ΡΟΙ BB
le
A
UREB C
A
198
218
C
B
198
218
If all voltages are within specified limits:
a. At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to OFF . b . At J29 (fig . B) , disconnect W188P1 , and connect AMG cable 7A1W1 . c. Disconnect test equipment . d . At distribution box ( fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to ON. e. Have AMG maintainer perform AMG Antenna Amplifier 7A1A2 /7A1A3 Mast AC Mode Erection / Extension fault isolation procedure per TM 91430-603-20 . f. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
G.A
If not all voltages are within specified limits : Go to step 6.
6
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to OFF.
At J29 (fig . B) , disconnect ACTS W188P1 , and connect AMG power cable 7A1W1 . 7
8
Disconnect test equipment .
CONTINUED
3-593
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 STP
AMG ENABLE LIGHT OFF FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-98.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE (208VAC ) IS
Le
WARNING
PRESENT AT DISTRIBUTION BOX CONNECTOR WHEN UHF AMS PWR
AIR COND CS
AIR COND RS
208 VAC 400 HZ
AMPLIS ON.
9
GPFU
BATTERY INPUT POWER 28 VDC
At shelter exterior forward , disconnect W441P1 from Distribution Box A66 J31 UHF AMG PWR AMP
UHF AMG PWR AMP 208 VAC 400 HZ
(fig . E) .
10
UTILITY POWER 120 VAC
INPUT POWER 208 VAC 400 HZ
Set up test equipment for J31 voltage measurement (fig . F) .
GND CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 J2P1 P2
P1
P1J31
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
P2
-OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
FIGURE E
22
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W188
HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE F
11
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to ON .
12
At ACTS (fig . D ) , set POI and CRP in sequence listed in table . Push PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe voltage on DMM .
If all voltages are within specified limits : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If all voltages are not within specified limits : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 circuit breaker CB34 per para . 4-83.
b. Go to step 13.
13
Contact AMG by sound - powered telephone and have operator check Distribution Box 7A1A1 ENABLE light of antenna mast amplifier under test.
3-594
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-98.
13
AMG ENABLE LIGHT OFF FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
-Continued
If amplifier ENABLE light is on: R 4302-
b. Disconnect all test equipment .
LD c. Connect cable W441P1 to A66J31 UHF AMG PWR AMP (fig . E ) . CRAS
REE
a . At distribution box ( fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to OFF
d. At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to ONe. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If amplifier ENABLE light is off:
a . At Distribution Box A66 , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to OFF b . Disconnect all test equipment . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
TION 66
3-595
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-99.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR- UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER AC POWER OUTPUT FAULT ISOLATION
DIST
Re ANTENNA CONTROL A41
Re
B
D
H
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
ROA
DSI
DE
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In. Wrench , Spintight , 3/8 In . Multimeter, Digital , 8125A- AQ - O Switch Assembly, AC Line Test Cable Assembly , W 101
Cable Assembly , W106 Cable Assembly, W107 Cable Assembly , W 150
EPPINPUTFIER THANKS AIRCOND ROADSIDE 1
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to OFF.
AIRCOND CORNSION
SECUREPER RADIG RELAYTERM OFF DISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIDE CURIOSON ON OFF L
To: COMPUTER WRIDERS
2
At lower shielding gasket (fig . B) , remove two screws (3) , flat washers ,
BOTERY POWER
VOICEbry PWEKCommeSPLY BIT
and nuts .
CAS FILTER
PRINTER OFF
CRYOC HONNINGTIME LATERY POWERSUPPLY STEO KRY1O PROSA O BUT7 T-3 O 2040501 NETSECUREP COMEDIN มา DIE A FORBET CONTROL FWRSPLY WELRADIOTEA 1917 B ON OPY DFT T RADEN HEATERS CONTROON CONTROL CONVERTER DE DFF STILITYPOWER 1200C40042 EXTERI INTERHAL 08 OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICALLIFY WEIGHT:170LBS
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-596
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER AC POWER OUTPUT FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-99.
3
Remove five self-locking nuts ( 2) , and flat washers .
4
Remove 13 screws ( 1 ) , lockwashers , and flat washers . Remove shield .
5
Disconnect W469P1 from J30 .
A
J18
J20
J17 J19 J16
.
UNIT
J22
J10
J21 J23
J28
J30
J14
J5
JB
J11 FIGURE B
-ALe
WARNING
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO PATRIOT SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN
CAUTION
6
LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
Set up test equipment for J30 voltage measurement per fig . C.
CABLE ASSEMBLY W107
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P21 J2P1 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY P2 P1 J1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
-OF
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
P1J30
HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE C
CONTINUED
T
3-597
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-99 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER AC POWER OUTPUT FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
Le
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO
WARNING NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNITto ON
7
DO NOT CHANGE POIOR CRPSETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT. CAUTION
8
At ACTS (fig . D), set POland CRPin sequence shown in table . Push PRESS TO
TESTfor each position and observe voltage
ΡΟΙ
SWITCH ΡΟΙ
B
C C
CRP EAAB
A
VOLTAGE LIMITS
А
LOW
HIGH
114
126
198
218
198
218
198
218
CRP
OPO
PO
displayed on DMM .
PRESS TO TEST
FIGURE D
If all voltages within specified limits :
Go to step 9. If one or more voltages outside specified limits : a. Replace circuit breaker CB 19 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 22. 9
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNITto OFF.
10
Disconnect test equipment .
11
Connect W469P 1 to J30 (fig . B) .
CONTINUED
3-598
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UNITOFR
3-99.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER AC POWER OUTPUT FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Le TESTIN
R TERM
DUE TO OVERHEAD POSITION , TWO PEOPLE ARE NEEDED TO SAFELY
WARNING REMOVE , INSTALL , OR SERVICE ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT.
I.
12
At Antenna Control Unit A41 ( fig . E ) , loosen four captive screws and pull unit out of rack.
80
ANTENNA
ANTENNA POSITION AC DC O POWER
ANTENNA SELECT 123 BITE
STO
P
TEST
H AMS EADING
ON ON ON
O
ANTENNA STOWSTOW 8 8 8 STOP FAULT ROTATE CCWCW
AMS HEADING FIGURE E
13
At rear of antenna control unit ( fig . F) , disconnect W469P2 from J4.
EI J4
J2
ال
J3 J7
J6
J5
J8
FIGURE F
14
Set up test equipment for W469P2 voltage measurement per fig . G.
J2P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W469
CABLE ASSEMBLY W101
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106
J2
P2J1
P2
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY P2 J1
|
རྔ P1
OF
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO ANTENNA CONTROL , P2 UNIT J4 HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
T
FIGURE G
CONTINUED
3-599
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER AC POWER OUTPUT FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
3-99 .
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT WARNING DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT. L
15
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNITto ON
DO NOT CHANGE POIOR CRPSETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION
16
At ACTS ( fig . D) , set POland CRPin sequence shown in table . Push PRESS TO TEST for each position and observe voltage displayed on DMM .
If all voltages within specified limits : a. At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNITto OFF.
b. Disconnect test equipment . c. Replace Antenna Control Unit A41 per para 4-41 .
d . Go to step 17.
If one or more voltages outside specified limits :
Call Intermediate Maintenance . 17
Install lower shielding gasket (fig . B) and secure with five flat washers and selflocking nuts (2 ).
18
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and screws ( 1 ) .
19
Install two flat washers , screws (3) , and nuts.
20
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNITto ON
21
At antenna control unit (fig . E) , observe AC POWERindicator.
If AC POWERindicator is on: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If AG POWERindicator is off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-600
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
UNIT CR 3-99 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR-UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT CIRCUIT BREAKER AC POWER OUTPUT FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
TING.DO 22
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON.
23
At antenna control unit (fig . E) , observe AC- POWER indicator.
MINALS
I.
If AC POWER indicator is on : Go to step 24.
If AC POWER indicator is off:
TESIS
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
24
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNITto OFF.
25
Disconnnect test equipment .
26
Connect W469P1 to J30 (fig . B ).
27
Install lower shielding gasket and secure with five flat washers and self-
OFF
28
locking nuts (2 ) .
28
Install 13 flat washers , lockwashers , and nuts ( 1 ) .
29
Install two flat washers , screws (3) , and nuts .
30
At distribution box (fig . A) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNITto ON
31
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-601
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-100 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 28VDC- POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1 / PS2 FAULT ISOLATION
BRUTERINE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 RO
AD
SI
DE
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Wrench , Spin - Tight Socket , 3/8 In . Multimeter, Digital , 8125A- AQ - O Switch, Assembly, AC Line Test Cable Assembly W 109
Cable Assembly W106 Cable Assembly W150
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
If COMMO PWR SPLY trips : a. Perform Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE PWR- 28VDC-
EPPINPUT P UNSAMS FWNAMPL AIRCOND POEDSE
COMMO PWR SPLY circuit breaker tripped fault isolation
AIRDIRESIDE COND
per para 3-139.
SECUREPUR PORTED RADO ALLOYTEAM ON OFF OFF DEF DISPLAY CONTES ROADSCRE OFF 財麵 DR T DFF COMPUT MODEWS
ARTERY POWER
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
FWESPLY ON OFF
ய FILTER DET
TWIC GUNNING TIME BATTERY ARTI POWER O NETSECUREFOR A AF B OFF OFF WEL PER CENTRO C D . OFF CONTROLT TELEPE WEATERS to STIITYPOWER INTEGRAL
品
1
ON
DANGER 208 VOLTS MECHANICALLIFT WESENT DARS
If COMMO PWR SPLY does not trip : FIGURE A
Go to step 2.
CONTINUED
3-602
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
PS2FA 3-100 .
2
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 28VDC- POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1 / PS2 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At distribution box, observe POWER SUPPLY STATUS- PS 1 / PS2.
If PS1 and PS2 are both off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If PS1 and PS2 are both on :
Go to step 5.
If only PS1 is on: a. Replace Power Supply A25 Power Supply PS1 per para 4-26. 466
b. Go to step 3 .
If only PS2 is on : a. Replace Power Supply A25 Power Supply PS2 per para 4-26 . b. Go to step 3.
At distribution box (fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS 1 / PS2
If PS1 and PS2 are both off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If either PS1or PS2is on :
a. Replace Distribution Box A66 Relay Assembly A2 per para 4-72. b. Go to step 4 .
4
At distribution box (fig . A) , observe POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1/ PS2
If PS1 and PS2are both off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If either PS 1or PS2is on :
a. Replace Power Supply A25 Chassis per para 4-30. b. Go to step 14 .
5
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMMO PWR SPLYto OFF
6
At distribution box (fig . B ) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
7
Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers.
CONTINUED
3-603
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-100 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 28VDC- POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1 / PS2 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
8
Remove five self- locking nuts ( 2 ) and flat washers . Remove bottom shielding gasket (4) .
9
At distribution box ( fig . C ) , disconnect W57P1 from J13.
FIGURE B
J21
J15
J6
37
J12
ول
J13
314
J5
J10
3 8 5 33 3
J22
J18
O
J20
J17 J19 J16
OOO
OOO
D
曲
J23
J28
J8
J11
-A-
FIGURE C
Le WARNING
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO PATRIOT SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN CAUTION
10
LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
Set up test equipment for J13 voltage measurement per fig . D.
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W109 I
J1
P1
J13
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P1 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 /
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2
P1 هم
J20
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P2
Юд -OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
CABLE CABLE ASSEMBLY ASSEMBLY W113 W13 | J2P2 J2
HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-O
FIGURE H
16
At RWCIU (fig . 1 ) , disconnect W 13P2 from J5.
CONTINUED
3-732
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-132.
RADAR WEAPON CONTROL INTERFACE UNIT POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
19 19 30
8 B
9 e
O
O
O OF
O FIGURE I 17
Connect ACTS W113J2 to W 13P2 and W113J1 to ACTS W 106P2.
Le
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS
TAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT . WARNING AT DIGI
18
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set RWCIU to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
TABLE
HIGH
CRP
LOW
ΡΟΙ
AB
19
114
126
E
114
126
E
126
E
114
C
218
A
198
B
218
A
198
C
218
B
198
C
A
At ACTS (fig . G) set POI and CRP switches per Table B in the sequence listed . Press PRESS TO
TEST for each setting and observe DMM indication .
B
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH mmm
LATION
CONTINUED
3-733
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-132.
19
RADAR WEAPON CONTROL INTERFACE UNIT POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued -Continued
If all voltages are within specified limits:
a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set RWCIU to OFF. b . Disconnect test equipment c. Replace RWCIU per para 4-122.
d. Go to step 20. If any voltage is outside specified limits : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
20
At RWCIU (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws and pull unit out on slides.
21
Observe PS1 ON ( fig . C) .
If PS1 ON is on: Go to step 22.
If PS1 ON is off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
22
At RWCIU , push unit in on slides and secure with four captive screws (fig . C) .
23
At distribution box (fig . D ) , install shielding gasket and secure with two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
24
Install five self- locking nuts (2) and flat washers.
25
Install 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
26
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-734
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 LATION
3-133 .
GENERATOR CONTROL A64 FAULT ISOLATION
0000
GENERATOR
78
CONTROL A64
C נ
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
Switch Assembly , AC Line Test Multimeter , Digital , 8125A -AQ -O Cable Assembly , W106 Cable Assembly , W150 Cable Assembly , W103 Cable Assembly , W109 Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In .
Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In . Screwdriver , Flat Tip, 1/4 In . Wide , 8 In.
BORDINGTIME EPP PATPACE
PARTER
RADES DISPLAY/CONTARBRATESSE 1
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A), set PWR DIST
To: UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
BUTERY FONER POWERSUPPLY (O ROADSIDE BOTCECUREPR AFT OFF PURBEST commo BEL TERM UNITPUB CONTROL FLY DO ON CONTROL CONVER TELEPROSTER
TEXT
NTALITYPOULE VOICE PERSPIT
EXTERNAL
DANGER 208 VOLTS BECHARICE WEIGHT172LASLUFT CONTINUED
FIGURE A
3-735
3-133 .
GENERATOR CONTROL A64 FAULT ISOLATION
2
G
Continued
At distribution box (fig . B ) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
O
O
О
O 3
312
J16
2
122
J21
J23
J28
314
FIGURE B
3
Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat washers.
4
Remove five nuts (2 ) and flat washers and remove shielding gasket (4).
LO
5
Disconnect W75 from J27.
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL WARNING MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED.
CAUTION
6
3-736
Connect test equipment for A66 J27 voltage measurements as indicated in figure C.
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
GENERATOR CONTROL A64 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-133.
uts CABLE ASSEMBLY W 109
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106
P1
J1 P21
J2P1
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
J27
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
P2
P1 J1 /
-OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE C
Le
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL
WARNING MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
7
At distribution box (fig . A) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
8
At AC line test switch assembly (ACTS ) (fig . D) , set POI and CRP to positions listed in table . Press PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe digital multimeter (DMM ) .
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC) SWITCH HIGH
CRP
LOW
ΡΟΙ
ABGA
114
126
D
114
126
D
114
126
D
114
126
G
с
CONTINUED
3-737
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-133.
GENERATOR CONTROL A64 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
G
! 8
-Continued
If voltages measure between low and high limits as given in table: ΡΟΙ
CRP
Go to step 9. If a voltage does not measure between low and high limits as given in table : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 CB9 per para 4-81 .
PRESS TO TEST
b. Go to step 21 .
FIGURE D
9
At distribution box (fig . A) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
10
At test set up ( fig . C) , disconnect W 109 from A66J27 and from W 106P2.
11
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , connect W75 to J27.
12 Place shielding gasket (4 , fig . B ) , in position and install two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers, and nuts.
13
Install five self- locking nuts ( 2 ) and flat washers .
14
Install 13 screws (3 ) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
AVOID DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT . SUPPORT GENERATOR CONTROL WHEN REMOVING CAPTIVE SCREWS .
CAUTION
15 At Generator Control A64 ( fig . E ) , release four captive screws and pull panel out to access rear connectors .
CONTINUED
3-738
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-133.
GENERATOR CONTROL A64 FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
GENS ON LINE NO. 1 LAMP NO.2 TEST
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL BATTLE SHORT
SUM FAULT OVERVOLTAGE SUM FAULT FAULT RESET
VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL
BATTLE SHORT ።
PHASE A OFF -
PHASE B 1 PHASE C
FUEL BEN TRLR
GENERATOR POWER ECS TURBINES RADAR OFF OFF OFF COMM
COMM
ON
ON
ON
ia
FIGURE E D
O
O
At rear of generator control panel (fig . F) , disconnect W47 from J5.
O
O
O 16
" J2
0 J4
0 J5 151
О ال
O
O
о
O O
O
O
FIGURE F TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN WARNING MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GD STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION
Connect test equipment for voltage measurement at W47P1 as
17 indicated in Figure G. CONTINUED
3-739
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-133.
GENERATOR CONTROL A64 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
GE
2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106
CABLE ASSEMBLY W47 P1
P21
P2
OH
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
22
J2P1 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY P1 11 /
CABLE ASSEMBLY W103
HI
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64 O LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE G
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH WARNING CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
18
At distribution box (fig . A) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
Le
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL
SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN WARNING MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
19
At ACTS (fig . D ) , set POI and CRP to positions listed in table . Press PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe digital multimeter ( DMM ) .
If all voltages measure between limits as given in table : a. Set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
b. Disconnect test equipment . c. Replace Generator Control A64 per para 4-66. d . Go to step 20.
3-740
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-133 .
19
GENERATOR CONTROL A64 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued If any voltage does not measure between limits as given in table : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
20
At generator control ( fig . E ) , setOFF /PHASE A /PHASE B PHASE C switch to each phase position and observe the VOLTAGE TO NEUTRAL meter.
If meter indicates 114 to 126VAC in each phase position: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If meter does not indicate 114 to 126VAC in each phase position : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
21
At generator control ( fig . E) , setOFF PHASE A PHASE B PHASE C switch to each phase position and observe theVOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL meter.
011 If meter indicates 114 to 126 VAC in each phase position : DIGIT a . At distribution box ( fig . A) , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY toOFF . b. Disconnect test equipment .
c. Connect W75 to J27 (fig . B) . d . At distribution box (fig . B ) , place bottom shielding gasket in position and install two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers and nuts.
e. Install five self-locking nuts (2) and flat washers .
LETY f. Install 13 screws (3) , lockwashers and flat washers . g. SetPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY toON . h. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If meter does not indicate 114 to 126 VAC in each phase position :
=
STS
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-741
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134.
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION
AMBIENT
DISTRIBUTION
AIR CONTROL
BOX A89
PANEL A72 RECEIVERTRANSMITTER BITE INDICATOR PANEL A51
( BEHIND A88 )
COMPUTER-TOCOMMUNICATIONS
RT- 524 A88
INTERFACE PROCESSOR A99 mund
HATEDHEN
o
Loc
E
ROA
DSI
ID
BS
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
R CU
DE POWER SUPPLY A 100
POWER SUPPLY A25
RADIO FREQUENCY AMPLIFIER A105 DATA LINK TERMINAL RACK
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In . Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 10 In. Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In . Pliers , Slip - Joint 8 In . Cable Assembly W102
Cable Assembly W106 Cable Assembly W 108 Cable Assembly W148
Cable Assembly W150 Multimeter , Digital , 8125A- AQ - O Switch , Assembly , AC Line Test
CONTINUED
3-742
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-134 .
The Computer- to - Communications Interface Processor A99 , Power Supply A100, and Radio Frequency Amplifier A105 must be secured to equipment rack in order to actuate their interlocks .
NOTE
PUTERT UNICATO TERFACE
ESSOR
1
At Power Supply A 100 (fig . A) ,
e
observe PS1 through PS5 lamps and NON - INTERRUPT indicators . At Computer-to - Communications Inter-
indicator .
a
PINOW SUPP FAU O TE L L S NON PS EPRSRR2UPPST3PSY4 PS5T CILLATO R I A L I LAM TES P T PS6 GNMENT
face Processor A99 (fig . B) , observe SUMMARY FAULT
If all indicators are off: Return to procedure that brought you to this
FIGURE A paragraph . NCY 6
If one or more indicators are on : Go to step 2 .
(+) ALFERGATE MASTER DET
อ
e
由
STAC
PROPLATION ECSBELAYREQUESTLESC
O
©
TIME OFDAY O
FAULT KEYGR TEES TEXT
O
DEF
BAY PROCESSER CONTRO
AUTOBYING FOR
MATEOSECAL
EGET
15/C
THE CONTRO OPERATE CLCOUT (DADBET
ICSA
+
FIGURE B
LPP(POTP 2
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . C) , observe DATA LINK TERM circuit
୮
AROADSIDE COD breaker .
If circuit breaker is OFF :
CORD CURESION
ZOVOC LAR LITERY POWER POWERSUPPLY TEXT
SECUREPR BEL TERM REPLAY CONTROL GOADSIGN CHOSCINE DET To MODENS
a. SetDATA LINK POWER
TERM to ON . b. Go to step 3.
PUR SPLE
GA FILTER
BOARDES
BUTRECIBE PR
OFF OFF COMO -- DISPLAY PETPLY BELLADNIOTERR 4 t 29 00 WISTPOWON CONTROL OPF G OFF LIGIT CONTROL TELEPREN ROARSIDE CONTRO CONVERTEDE TE DEF UTILITYPOWER BUT OFF EXTERNAL ERECT 011 DANGER 208 VOLTS
WEIGHT130 LIFT
If circuit breaker is ON : CONTINUED Go to step 4.
FIGURE C
3-743
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134. 3
DF
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION-Continued At distribution box (fig . C ) , observe DATA LINK TERM circuit breaker.
If circuit breaker is ON Go to step 4. If circuit breaker is OFF a . Perform Distribution Box A66 Data Link Term circuit breaker fault isolation per para 3-78. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
4
At BITE Indicator Panel A51
D&C STATUS (fig . D) , observe COMP P /S indicator .
MS1 CETDISPLAY
EXT ALERT
TEST
MS1 P&SOUTDATA
If indicator is on : Go to step 5. If indicator is off:
MS!
Go to step 7. &SYS RESET 5
BASKET I POWER
COMPUTER LOAD DEVICECONTROL SELECT MASS MASS STORAGE STORAGE UNIT 1 UNIT2 RECOVERY NON TACTICAL BRIGHTRESS STORAGE UNIT 1 PERIPHERALS
1001 STRAP
PROG HALT
BASKET 1 CLOCK ST GOOD
BASKET 2POWER
BEST BASKET2 CLOCK COMPUTERSTATUS ENBOS ALERT ERA
COMP P/S
At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 (fig . E), observe FANS FIGURE D
CURBSIDE AFTindicator .
If indicator is on: оSTATUS
a. Perform Hood Status and Fan lights fault isolation per para
3-148.
HOOD ZVON CLOSED A NC. СБ O FWD AFFCS RS RS FWD
о
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL O о EQPT ROADSIDE FANSCURBSIDE AIRFLOW TEMP FWD AIR FLOWFLAPPERVALVE FWO NORMALLYCLOSED AFT OPENONLYWHENOUTSIDE AFT LOY TEMPFREEZING ORBELOW
O TEST POINTS
GHO
LAMP TEST
FWD о
O
00
b. Return to procedure that brought you to
this paragraph . FIGURE E
If indicator is off: a . Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94 .
b. Go to step 6.
6
At BITE indicator panel (fig . D) , observe COMP P /Slamp .
If indicator is on:
Go to step 7 . If indicator is off:
CONTINUED Go to step 8.
3-744
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed 3-134 .
7
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
At Power Supply A25 ( fig . F) , observe DLT circuit breaker.
A87 RT-524 AND KY57 WCC ON ON
If circuit breaker is ON :
OFF OFF A88 UHF RT-524 AND KY57 DLT ANT CONT ON ON ON
Go to step 9. If circuit breaker is OFF .
OFF
OFF
@
Go to step 8. 8
OFF
Set DLT to ON .
FIGURE F
If DLT does not trip : Go to step 9.
If DLT trips : a . Perform Power Supply A25 Circuit Breaker DLT tripped fault isolation per para 3-19. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
9
At Power Supply A 100 (fig . A) , observe NON - INTERRUPT lamp .
If indicator is off: Go to step 10. If indicator is on : Go to step 12.
10
Observe PS1 through PS5 indicators .
If any indicator is on : a . Replace defective A 100 power supply as listed in table A per
para 4-118.1 . b. Go to step 67.
TABLE
A
POWER SUPPLY REPLACED FAULT INDICATOR ON A 100PS1 PS1
A100PS2 PS2
A100PS3 PS3
A100PS4 PS4
A100PS5 PS5
CONTINUED If all indicators are off: Go to step 11 .
3-745
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134 .
11
DA
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At Power Supply A 100 (fig . A) , observe PS6 indicator . If indicator is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If indicator is off:
Go to step 39.
12
At Power Supply A25 ( fig . F ) , set DLT to OFF .
13
Remove access door to data link terminal (DLT) rack by removing hinge pins.
14
At Power Supply A 100 (fig . A) , loosen four captive screws , and pull unit out on its slides .
15
At rear of Power Supply A 100 (fig . G ) , disconnect W256P1 from J9. ( EI) (J9)
16
(JIO)
(J3)
(J5) (J4)
(J2)
O (JII )
At distribution box (fig . C) , plug digital 888
multimeter ( DMM ) power cord into UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ outlet . Set INTERNAL to ON .
FIGURE G
CAUTION
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GD STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINAL OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
17
Set up test equipment for W256P1 voltage measurement as shown in fig . H. CABLE ASSEMBLY W 106
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
P1 احمد
P1
J1/
J1 P21
CABLE ASSEMBLY W256 J2
P1
P2
-OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
CABLE ASSEMBLY W102
HI
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO A 100J9
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
CONTINUED FIGURE H
3-746
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ed
3-134 .
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION
Continued
DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR
WARNING TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
18
At Power Supply A25 (fig . F) , set DLTto ON
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
誉
pins.
CAUTION outont
19
At AC line test switch assembly (ACTS) (fig . i) , set POlto A and CRP to B. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM .
If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4 VDC: CRP
OPO
ΡΟΙ
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4 VDC :
Go to step 20.
PRESS TO TEST 20
At Power Supply A25 (fig . F) , set DLTto OFF. FIGURE I
ד 21
Disconnect test equipment (fig . H ) .
22
Connect W256P1 to J9 (fig . G ) .
Slide power supply into rack and secure with 23 four captive screws (fig . A) .
24
At Receiver -Transmitter RF524 A88 (fig . J) , label and disconnect front
panel cables .
25
Loosen thumbscrews on mounting clamps
and pull unit from mounting housing .
CONTINUED
FIGURE J
3-747
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134.
26
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
DA
At Distribution Box A89 (fig . K) , remove TB1 12 screws, lockwashers and flat washers . Remove cover.
27
Connect DMM HI probe to TB 1-7 and LO probe to TB 1-8.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT . DO NOT TOUCH Le TERMINAL BOARD INVOLVED WARNING
WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER FIGURE K
WHILE DLT IS SET TO ON .
28
At Power Supply A25 ( fig . F ) , set DLT to ON. If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4 VDC : a. Set DLT to OFF .
b . Disconnect probes from TB1 (fig . K) . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance. If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4 VDC :
Go to step 29. 29
Set DLT to OFF .
30
Disconnect probes from TB 1 .
31
Install Distribution Box A89 access cover and secure with 12 screws , lockwashers, and flat washers .
32
Install Receiver- Transmitter RT- 524 A88 by carefully sliding unit into mounting
O
Θ
housing (fig . J) . Secure in place with mounting clamps , tighten thumbscrews and connect cables labeled in step 24. O
O 333
34
3-748
At Power Supply A25 (fig . F) , loosen four captive screws and pull unit out .
At rear of power supply (fig . L) , disconnect W48P1 from J2.
FIGURE L
CONTINUED
Tived
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134 .
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GD STRAP BETWEEN LOAND GDTERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION
35
Set up test equipment for J2 voltage measurement as shown in fig . M.
CABLE ASSEMBLY W148
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2J1 J2P1
P1
J2
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
28 VDC POWER SUPPLY A25 P2
OF
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
22
P1
J1 /
HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE M
Le
WARNING
36
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
At Power Supply A25 ( fig . F) , set DLTto ON
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
At ACTS (fig . 1) , set POIto Gand CRP to H Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM . 37
If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4 VDC: CONTINUED Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-749
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134. 37
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
DA
-Continued
ཀ
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4 VDC : a . At Power Supply A25 ( fig . F) , set DLTto OFF.
b. Disconnect test equipment (fig . M ) . c. Replace A25 subassembly per para 4-30. d. Set DLTto ON e. Go to step 38.
38
At Power Supply A 100 (fig . A) , observe NON - INTERRUPT indicator. If indicator is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If indicator is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
39 Set and hold LAMP TEST to ON Observe PS1 through PS6 and NON - INTERRUPT indicators .
If all indicators are on : Go to step 62. If all indicators are off:
Go to step 40. If some but not all indicators are off: Call Intermediate Maintenance . 40
At Radio Frequency Amplifier A 105 ( fig . N) , set POWER to ON
41
Observe POWER indicator . FAULT FAULT RESET
If POWER indicator is
POWER O POWER ON
on :
a. Replace A 100 subassembly per para 4-118.
FIGURE N
b. Go to step 42. If POWERindicator is off:
CONTINUED Go to step 43.
3-750
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134 . 42
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION -Continued At Power Supply A 100 ( fig . A) , set and hold LAMP TEST to ON . Observe PS1 through PS6 and NON- INTERRUPT indicators . If all indicators are on :
a . Install access door to DLT rack. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all indicators are off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
43
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . C) , set DATA LINK TERM to OFF .
44
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . O) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
1
O
A
O OO
0-00
16
123 128
2
FIGURE O
45
Remove 13 screws ( 4 ) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
46
Remove five self- locking nuts (3) and flat washers . Remove shielding gasket ( 2 ) .
47
Disconnect W437P1 from J7.
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GD STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINAL OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED . CAUTION
Set up test equipment for J7 voltage measurement as shown in fig . P.
CONTINUED
48
3-751
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134.
DAT
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
J2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W108
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2J1 XP1
P1
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
P2
P1
J1/
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150 HI
LO
||
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE P
Le
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL
WARNING MULTIMETER WHILE DATA LINK TERM IS SET TO ON.
49
At distribution box ( fig . C) , set DATA LINK TERM to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED. DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT . CAUTION
50
At ACTS ( fig . I ) , set POI and CRP to positions indicated in table B. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM . TABLE
SWITCH ΡΟΙ
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC) CRP
LOW
HIGH
E
114
126
E
114
126
E
114
126
A
198
218
198
218
198
218
EAAB
ABCBU U
C
B
B
CONTINUED
3-752
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134.
50
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION
Continued
-Continued
If all voltages are within specified limits : a. At Distribution Box A66 (fig . C) , set DATA LINK TERM to OFF. b. Disconnect test equipment .
c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If any voltage is not within specified limits : a. Replace A66CB17 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 51 .
51
At distribution box (fig . C) , set DATA LINK TERM to OFF.
52
Disconnect test equipment .
53
At distribution box (fig . D) , connect W437P1 to J7.
54
At distribution box (fig . O) , install shielding gasket and secure with five self- locking
OTTU DICT
nuts and flat washers .
55
Secure gasket with 13 screws , lockwashers , and flat washers .
56
Secure with two screws , flat washers , and nuts .
57
Set DATA LINK TERM to ON (fig . C).
58
At radio frequency amplifier (fig . N) , observe POWER indicator .
If indicator is on:
a . Install access door to DLT rack. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph
If indicator is off:
a . Replace A66 relay A2 per para 4-72 . b. Go to step 59.
59
At distribution box ( fig . C) , set DATA LINK TERM to ON.
CONTINUED
T
3-753
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-134.
60
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION— Continued
DAT
At radio frequency amplifier (fig . N) , observe POWER indicator . If indicator is on : a . Install access door to DLT rack . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If indicator is off: a . Install access door to DLT rack . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
61
At computer-to - communications interface processor ( fig . B ) , momentarily set RESET to the on (up) position , and observe KEY GEN FAULT indicator .
If indicator is flashing : Notify battery maintenance officer ( BMO) of fault in key generator TSEC /KG -30 .
If indicator is not flashing : Go to step 62.
62
Observe SUMMARY FAULT indicator.
If indicator is on: Go to step 64. If indicator is off: a. Perform DLT self-test ( loopback) per TM 9-1430-600-10-1 .
b. Go to step 63.
63
Determine if DLT self-test was successful .
If DLT has passed self- test : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If DLT has failed self-test: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-754
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
Ued
3-134.
64
DATA LINK TERMINAL INITIALIZATION FAULT ISOLATION -Continued Determine if Weapons Control Computer (WCC) is available for diagnostic tests .
If WCC is available: Go to step 65.
1. If WCC is not available : a. Wait for WCC availability . b. Go to step 65.
65
Request Battery Maintenance Officer's ( BMO's ) permission to go off - line and run fire platoon maintenance control system ( FP -MCS) diagnostic program and test number sequence (MCS- RLUD- DLT) per TM 9-1425-602-12 .
If permission is given :
Load and run FP- MCS diagnostic program and test number sequence erato (MCS-RLUD-DLT) per TM 9-1425-602-12 .
If permission is not given : Perform BMO's instructions per tactical standard operating procedure .
66
At Power Supply A 100 ( fig . A) , observe PS1 through PS5 indicators .
If any indicator is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If all indicators are off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-755
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RA 3-135 .
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL -1 , -2 , OR -3 RADIO RECEIVER R- 1329 A6 , A18 , OR A31 POWER FAULT ISOLATION
A6
RADIO RECEIVER R1329
A 18
A3
A31
2
ORE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 RO
AD
SI
DE
A7
A 19
A32
RADIO RECEIVER T-983
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 6 In . Multimeter, Digital , 8125A- AQ-O Switch , Assembly , AC Line Test Cable Assembly W106
Cable Assembly W116 Cable Assembly W 150
This is a multiple application procedure for Radio Receiver R- 1329 A6, A18 , or A31 power fault isolation .
1
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set
AIRCOND ROADSIO
appropriate NOT SECURE PWRRADIO RELAY TERM to OFF (see AIRCOND CURESION
table A). TABLE
A
ARTERY POWER
SECURE PR PRINTER RELAYWADIOTERM th ON OR ON OFF OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY CONTROL BOADSIDE CONSIDE ON OFF 055 TWCULATU ON OR OFF QEF COMPUTER MOUENS ON OR OFF OFF DAS COMMO FILTER UINT PWNSPET ON OFF 3930
RADIO RELAY TERM
RADIO RECEIVER
RONNINGTIME ETER STE S RET Z
LIVOC POWERSUPPLY 7137 BIT
BOTSECUREPOFE CURUTION MAS FOR
ROADSIDE SWO ANS ON FN OFY 814 ZIVIC RADIO FORBEST PING RELAYTEAM PLY CONTR 1 2 ON 3 0% DR ON DEF OFF OFF OFF OFF ESU TELEPH 80ABSIB BRY CONVERTER TERM HEGERS CONYMOU CONTRO O DFF SIFF DFF 9705 DILISTPOWER MASTFRECE 4000Z $201 EXTERIAL ARTETRAL ON
= G
EPPINPUTPWS URFAMS PWRAMP
G
NOTE
DANGER 208 VOLTS 123
3-756
MECHANICALLIFT WEIGHT 178LBS A31 A 18 FIGURE A A6
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
A6A
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL -1 , -2 , OR -3 RADIO RECEIVER R- 1329 A6, A18 ,
3-135 .
OR
A31 POWER FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At Radio Receiver A6 , A18 , or A31
2
MULT PEAK RCVR SIG
RCVR CHANNEL 390
32 CH PCM RCVR MULTSIG 24 CHPCM DOUBLER FDM OSC OWVDC XMTR +12 REFLDUPLPWR -12VDC
ANT
RCVR CHANNEL 400 390 380
(fig . B) , disconnect cables as shown in table B. RECEIVER ALARMS HIGH ACONPOWER SIGNAL LOW SYNC SIGNAL TABLE
BANDI FROM XMTR
B
XMTR CHANNEL 320 3102 300
XMTR DUPL
OF FROM XMTR
RADIO RECIEVER
ANT
A6
W455P1
W454P1
A18
W458P 1
W457P1
A31
W461P 1
W460P1
FIGURE B
XA66 3
At Radio Transmitter A7 , A 19, or A32 (fig . C) , disconnect cable as shown in table C.
XMTR CHANNEL 310
PCM O PWR REFL PWR 12CH24CHPCM DRIVEROUT FOM MULTO 12VDC 28VDC DOUBLEROSC 600VDC INPUT
TABLE
AIR FILTER
HIGH
PWR OUT
TRANSMITTER ACPOWER ON RESET LOWPOWER ALARMSSYNC OVERHEAT OFI 00-800
320 XMTRTUNE 310 300
RADIO TRANSMITTER
PWR OUT
A7
W454P2
A19
W457P2
A32
W460P2
PWR PEAKOUTPUSH FOR DRIVER FOR PULL OUTPUT
BANDI
C
ㄴ
FIGURE C
4
At equipment rack (fig . D ) , loosen four captive screws and pull rack out on its slides .
At rear of radio receiver (fig . E ) , disconnect cable from PWR IN as shown in table D.
TABLE
A
5
d:
D
A 18
A31
W56P1
W51P1
W50P1
C
A6
FDM VIDEO PCMO TMG
FIGURE D
OW
COMB OW CONTINUED
PWR IN
T
FIGURE E
3-757
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-135.
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL -1 , -2 , OR -3 RADIO RECEIVER R- 1329 A6 , A18 , OR A31 POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
RA A3
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN WARNING
MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GD STRAP BETWEENLO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION
6
Set up test equipment for voltage measurement as shown in fig . F. CABLE ASSEMBLY W106
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1
P1
P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W50, W51 , W56
CABLE ASSEMBLY W116
P2J1
J2
P1
P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150 HI
LO
NORMALLY P1 CONNECTED TO PL RADIO RECEIVER PWR IN
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE F
WARNING
7
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
At distribution box (fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM -1 , -2 , or 3 to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
8
CONTINUED
T
3-758
At AC line test switch (fig . G ) , set POI and CRP in sequence shown in table E.
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL -1 , -2 , OR -3 RADIO RECEIVER R- 1329 A6 , A18 , OR A31 POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-135 .
-Continued
8
ITAL TABLE
E
UTLET LOW
HIGH
A
C
114
126
A
B
114
126
EENLO
POI
CRP PAO
ΡΟΙ
CRP
ра
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH
1.
PRESS TO TEST
PressPRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on digital multimeter for each setting .
9
FIGURE G If voltages are within specified limits : a. At distribution box ( fig . A) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 1 , 2 , or 3 to OFF . b. Disconnect test equipment .
c. Replace radio receiver per para 4-12. d. Go to step 10.
If voltages are not within specified limits : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
Insure that receiver and transmitter front panel cable is NOTE
10
connected per orders of the day.
At radio receiver (fig . B ) , observe AC POWER indicator .
IfAC POWER indicator is on: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfAC POWER indicator is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-136.
DELETED
3-137.
DELETED
3-138.
DELETED
3-759
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-139.
· DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR 28VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
COMMO PWR SPLY
DIST CIRC
At
two
lo 100
$6
C
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
ROA
DSI
DE POWER SUPPLY A25
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 4 In . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In. Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In.
1
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON,
EPPINPUTPER UNIAMS PWRAMPL
SECUREPWB RADIO F OR BELY 2 ONTERM ая OFF OFF OFF
AIRROADSIDE COND
DISPLAY CONTROL ROADSIDE CURBSIDE mi OFF DET BWCH MEAIU ON DIF OFF COMPUTER ODENS 08 ON OFF OFF GAS E VORG FILTER COMMO UNIT PERSPUT D ON OFF OFF
If COMMO PWR SPLY remains ON:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
АМ СОМО CURBSIDE
BAZTERY POWER
If COMMO PWR SPLY
BUNNINGTIME
PRINTER ON OFF
KATERY POWER
ZZYBC POWERSUPPLY STATUS TEST T:
STS BRI-2 C RET D NO NOTSECURE POR CURSSION BIS AFT ROADSIDE BUS 257 FWD FWD ON ON ON ON OFF OFF 啡 28130 A COMMO BRADID BISPL FWSPLY PWADIST CONTROL RELAYTERM RSTFR SPLYBR DN ON ~ ON DIFE OFF OFF 811 U ANT OFF TELEPHTERONE LIGHT CONTROL CONVER BOADSIDE HEATERS CONTROL ON DN GET OFF arr OFF WELLITYPOWEN MASTERECT 1201 400-7 EXTERIORL INTERNAL ON p 07 OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICALLIFE PETOMY 1781S
trips:
Go to step 2. FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-760
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
R3-139 .
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR
28VDC - COMMO PWR SPLY
CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
2
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ) , remove
two screws (2 ), flat washers and nuts .
3
At shielding gasket , remove 13 screws ( 1 ) , lockwashers and flat washers that secure gasket to shelter
4
Remove five self-locking nuts (3) and flat washers that secure gasket to distribution box . Remove gasket .
2 3
5
At distribution box J13 (fig . B ) , disconnect W57P1.
ولا
JIB
330 ال 6
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
A FIGURE B
If COMMO PWR SPLY trips:
a . Replace distribution box CB26 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 7.
IfCOMMO PWR SPLY remains ON : Go to step 8.
7
Set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON .
IfCOMMO PWR SPLY trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IF COMMO PWR SPLY remains ON : Go to step 23.
8
Set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF .
9
At distribution box J13 (fig . B) , connect W57P1 .
CONTINUED
3-761
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-139.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR
28VDC COMMO PWR SPLY
CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
10
At Power Supply A25 (fig . C) , A87 RT-524 ANDONKY57 WCC ON
loosen four captive screws and pull power supply out .
OFF OFF A88 RT-524 AND KYS7 DUT ANTUHF ONCONT ON ON OFF
Θ
J4
J1
OFF
OFF
35
32 FIGURE C
©
O
O
• 11
At rear of power supply (fig . D) , disconnect W57P2 from J1 .
FIGURE D
12
At distribution box (fig . A) , setCOMMO PWR SPLY toON .
IfCOMMO PWR SPLY trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If COMMO PWR SPLY remains on :
Go to step 13.
2 13
Set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF .
3 14
At Power Supply A25 J1 ( fig . D ) , connect W57P2 ,
15
Remove 20 screws ( 1 , fig . E) , flat washers , and lockwashers . Remove access cover (2).
16
17
At Power Supply A25PS1 (3) J1 ( 4) , disconnect A25P1.
5
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to ON.
FIGURE E
CONTINUED
3-762
DIS OR
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
RS3-139 .
17
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR - 28VDC COMMO PWR SPLY CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
-Continued
If COMMO PWR SPLYtrips : Go to step 19.
If COMMO PWR SPLY remains on : a. Replace Power Supply A25PS1 per para 4-26. b. Go to step 18.
18
At distribution box (fig . A), set COMMO PWR SPLYto ON
If COMMO PWR SPLYremains on: Go to step 23.
If COMMO PWR SPLYtrips:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
19
At Power Supply A25PS1 (3 , fig . E) J1 (4) , connect A25P1 .
20
At Power Supply A25PS2 (6) J1 (5) , disconnect A25P3.
21
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set COMMO PWR SPLYto ON
If COMMO PWR SPLYtrips : a . Replace Power Supply A25 subassembly per para 4-30.
b. Go to step 22. If COMMO PWR SPLYremains on :
a. Replace Power Supply A25PS2 per para 4-26 . b. Go to step 22 .
22
Set COMMO PWR SPLYto ON
If COMMO PWR SPLYremains on: Go to step 23.
If COMMO PWR SPLY trips :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box (fig . B) , install shielding gasket by installing five 23
CONTINUED
nuts (3) and flat washers .
3-763
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-139.
COMMO PWR SPLY DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 NOT SECURE PWR - 28VDC CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION--Continued
24
At shielding gasket, install 13 screws ( 1 ) , lockwashers, and flat washers.
25
At distribution box (fig . B ) , install two screws (2 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
26
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
S
1
3-764
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WARSP
SINGLE RADIO RELAY TERMINAL FAULT ASSESSMENT
3-140 .
Po 000
0:474
ROA
DSI
DE
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 3
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 2
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL 1 A31
A6
A 18
RADIO RECEIVER R - 1329
A32
A7
A19
RADIO TRANSMITTER T-983
A8
A20
A33
KEY GENERATOR TSEC / KG -27
A35
A 10
A22
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065
A36
A11
A23
MULTIPLEXER TD- 660
NOMENCLATURE
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
At faulty RRT rack , observe indicators as listed in following table : 1
TABLE
A
INDICATOR
REF . DES UNIT
AC POWER
A6 /A18 /A31 Radio Receiver R- 1329
AC POWER
A7 /A19 /A32 Radio Transmitter T-983
115VAC POWER 50-
A8 /A20 / A33 Key Generator TSEC / KG - 27
400 -A
A11 /A23 /A36
115VAC -50-400POWER
A10 /A22 /A35
115VAC -50-400POWER
Multiplexer TD - 660
Data Buffer TD- 1065
CONTINUED
3-765
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-140 .
SINGLE RADIO RELAY TERMINAL FAULT ASSESSMENT
Continued ASIN
1
-Continued
If all RRT power indicators on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If both Multiplexer TD-660 and Data Buffer TD- 1065 power indicators off: Go to step 2.
If either Multiplexer TD - 660 or Data Buffer TD - 1065 power indicator off: Go to step 3.
If not all Radio Receiver R - 1329 , Radio Transmitter T- 983 and Key Generator TSEC / KG - 27 power indicators off:
Go to step 4.
If all Radio Receiver R - 1329 , Radio Transmitter T- 983 and Key Generator TSEC / KG- 27 power indicators off:
Go to step 5.
2
Notify Battalion Maintenance Officer ( BMO) and request permission to perform off-line secure power (red ) fault isolation .
If permission received : a . Perform off- line secure power (red ) fault isolation per para 3-155.
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If permission not received : Implement BMO's instructions per tactical standard operating procedures (TSOP ) . 3
Notify BMO and request permission to perform on - line secure power (red ) fault isolation .
If permission received : a . Perform on- line secure power (red) fault isolation per para 3-154. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If permission not received : Implement BMO's instructions per TSOP .
CONTINUED
3-766
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-140 .
4
SINGLE RADIO RELAY TERMINAL FAULT ASSESSMENT- Continued
Notify BMO and request permission to perform on - line secure power (black) fault isolation .
If permission received : a. Perform on - line secure power (black) fault isolation para 3-156.
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If permission not received : Implement BMO's instructions per TSOP.
Notify BMO and request permission to perform off- line not secure power (black) fault 5
isolation .
If permission received : a . Perform off - line not secure power (black ) fault isolation per para 3-157 b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If permission not received :
1
Implement BMO's instructions per TSOP.
W
3-767
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-141 .
POWER SUPPLY A25 WCC CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
PO
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 MEMORY UNIT A3 WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 MEMORY UNIT A2
CENTRAL PROCESSOR UNIT A95A9
COB
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
ROA
DE
DSI
SI
B UR
DE
C
POWER SUPPLY A25 SIGNAL DISTRIBUTION BOX A95A7 - POWER DISTRIBUTION BOX A95A8 ACCESS COVER
WEAPON CONTROL COMPUTER A95 INPUT /OUTPUT DIGITAL DATA PROCESSOR A13
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In. Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In . Pliers , Electrical Connector
1
At Power Supply A25 (fig . A) , set WCC to ON.
If WCC trips: A87 ANDRT-524 CONKYST WCC ON
Go to step 2 .
OPF OFF ATA88524 DIT ANYU14CONT ANDRYST ON ON DN OFF
OFF
If WCC does not trip :
OFI
Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you tothis FIGURE A
V.
paragraph.
CONTINUED
3-768
RUNT
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-141 .
POWER SUPPLY A25 WCC CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE (208VAC) IS PRESENT IN WEAPON CONTROL
WARNING
2
COMPUTER WHEN COMPUTER IS ON.
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
EPPINPUTPR UBE AMS PWWAMPL
AIRCONSIDE COND 1550 BATTERY POWER
RUNNINGTIME SYS ABT-3 BAT-2 MAT:3
BATTERY POWER
28VDC POWERSUPPLY STUUS
LAMP TEST ON OFF
O
AIRROADSIDE COND
SECUREPWB PRINTER PADIO RELAYTERM ON ON ON OR OFF OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY CONTROL ROADSIDE CURBSIDE DR ON OFF OFF RCIU BLAU ON ON OFF OFF COMPUTER MODENS ON ON OFF OFF GAS VOICE FILTER COMMO UNET PWBSPLY ON ON OFF OFF
NOT SECUREPWR CUBBSIDE ROADSIDE FANS AFT FWD FWO FANS AFT ON ON ON OR OFF 05F OFF OFF 28YDC RADIO FWN DIST DISPLAY COMMO RELAYTERM UNITPWR SPLYON CONTROLON PWR SPLYON 2 3 ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF UBF OFF OFF OFF ANT TELEPHONE BAD LERK LIGHT CONTROL BOADSIDE TERM ONIT CONVERTER HEATERS CONTROL ON ON ON ON ON OFF OLE OFF OFF OFF OFF UTHITYPOWER MASTERECT 120 400HZ EXTERNAL INTERNAL ON OK ON σεξ DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL 18S WEIGHT 178 LIFT
PUE
대
메시 FIGURE B
At WCC A95 , remove bottom left access cover by loosening 3
21 captive screws (fig . C ) . At Power Distribution Box A95A8 (fig . D) , disconnect W34P2 4
0000000
from J27.
At power supply (fig . A) , setWCC toON . 5
IfWCC trips :
Go to step 6 . IfWCC does not trip : FIGURE C
6
Go to step 20.
At power supply (fig . A) , setWCC toOFF .
At power distribution box (fig . D ) , connect W34P2 to J27. 7
CONTINUED
At power distribution box , disconnect W23P2 from J26 . 8 3-769
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-141 .
POWER SUPPLY A25 WCC CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
POV
-Continued
3 33 33 4 3 ' a
J26
J11
2
JIA
20
J12
J15
J21
AL
3
J17 J18
0
FIGURE D
9
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to ON .
If WCC trips: Go to step 10.
If WCC does not trip : a. At power supply , set WCC to OFF . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
10
At power distribution box ( fig . D) , connect W23P2 to J26.
11
At power distribution box , disconnect W54P1 from J16.
12
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to ON .
If WCC trips: Go to step 13.
IfWCC does not trip : a . At power supply, set WCC to OFF .
b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
13
At power distribution box (fig . D) , connect W54P1 to J16.
14
At WCC A95 , install bottom left access cover by securing 21 captive screws (fig . C) . CONTINUED
3-770
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ATO 3-141 .
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
Le HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE (208VAC) IS PRESENT IN POWER SUPPLY WHEN WARNING COMMO PWR SPLY IS ON.
15
At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER and COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF.
16
At power supply (fig . A) , loosen four captive screws and pull power supply out on its slides .
O O 34 35 ÖÖ Ö
At power supply (fig . E) , disconnect 17 W48P1 from J2.
O
O O
O
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set COMMO 18
PWR SPLYto ON FIGURE E
19
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to ON
可 If WCCtrips : a . Replace Power Supply A25 chassis , per para 4-30.
b. Go to step 41 . If WCC does not trip :
a. At power supply , set WCC to OFF. b. At distribution box (fig . B) , set COMMO PWR SPLY to OFF. c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
20
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to OFF.
At power distribution box (fig . D) , connect W34P2 to J27 . 21
At Computer Memory Unit A95A3W3J3 (fig . F) , disconnect A2W3P3 . 22
23
At power supply ( fig . A) , set WCC to ON.
If WCC trips:
Go to step 24.
CONTINUED If WCC does not trip : Go to step 34. 3-771
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
PO
3-141 .
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
24
At Computer Memory Unit A3W3J3 (fig . F) , connect A2W3P3
25
At Signal Distribution Box A95A7 ( fig . D ) , disconnect W29P2 from J15.
26
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to ON.
If WCC trips : Go to step 31 .
If WCC does not trip : Go to step 27. FIGURE F
27
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to OFF.
288
At signal distribution box (fig . D) , connect W29P2 to J15.
29 At Digital Computer Input /Output Processor A95A 13W3J3 ( fig . G) , disconnect A3W3P3.
30
At power supply ( fig . A) , set WCC to ON.
If WCC trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance.
If WCC does not trip : a . At power supply, set WCC to OFF .
b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
31
At signal distribution box (fig . D) , connect W29P2 to J15.
32
At signal distribution box , disconnect W26P2 from J11 .
0
FIGURE G 33
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to ON.
If WCC trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-772
CONTINUED
ON
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
POWER SUPPLY A25 CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-141 .
-Continued
33
If WCC does not trip:
a. At power supply , set WCC to OFF . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
dison 34
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to OFF .
35
At Computer Memory Unit A3W3J3 (fig . F) , connect A2W3P3 .
At Digital Computer Central Processor A95A9W3J3 (fig . H) , 36
disconnect A 10W3P3.
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to ON . 37 If WCC trips :
Go to step 38 .
IfWCC does not trip :
a. At power supply , set WCC to OFF . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance . FIGURE H
At Digital Computer Central Processor A95A9W3J3 (fig . H) connect A 10W3P3 .
MAM
38 39
At Computer Memory Unit A95A2W3J3 (fig . F) , disconnect A9W3P3 .
39
40
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to ON .
If WCC trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfWCC does not trip :
a. At power supply , set WCC to OFF .
41
b. Call Intermediate Maintenance . l ss tal ce Ins ac covers and at distribution box (fig . B) , set COMPUTER toON .
42
At power supply (fig . A) , set WCC to ON . IfWCC trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
Ctdo p : turn to not IfWC tri ted rrec Faul coes . Re procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-773
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-142 .
WCC STATUS LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION
WC CENTRAL MONOLITHIC
PROCESSOR UNIT 1
MEMORY UNIT 1 A95A2 CATHODE RAY TUBE BITE A54
INDICATOR PANEL A51 ,
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72
A95A9
MONOLITHIC MEMORY UNIT 2
CENTRAL PROCESSOR
A95A3
UNIT 2 A95A10
A73
S да E
Feco
RECOVERY STORAGE
RO
AD
SI
DE
E
ID
HARD COPY
BS
UNIT A95A6
R CU
UNIT A65 POWER DISTRIBUTION POWER SUPPLY A25
DISTRIBUTION BOX A95A8 PERIPHERAL CONTROL UNIT
COMPUTER MAINTENANCE CONTROL PANEL
A95A 14
A95A12
BOX A66
INPUT /OUTPUT PROCESSOR A95A 13
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Wrench, Spin- Tight Socket , 3/8 In. Multimeter , Digital , 8125A- AQ - O Switch , Assembly , AC Line Test Cable Assembly W106
Cable Assembly W150 Cable Assembly W 108 Cable Assembly W102
Cable Assembly W148
3-774
CONTINUED
2
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WCC STATUS LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-142 .
Jones
At Recovery Storage Unit (RSU) A95A6 (fig . A) , loosen 1
two captive screws and open access door.
0
Remove tape cassette from TTC1 and insert RSU / ECS
2
O
tape cassette in TTC 1 .
10
D&CSTATUS
JOST
Ε COMPUTERCONTROL LOADDEVICE RELECT MASS MASSSTORAGE STORAGE UNIT2 NON RECOVERY TACTICAL STORAGE PERIPHERALS WRITI O
CUTDESPLAY PAR OUTBATA BACKET I POWER BASKET I CLOCK
S1
FIGURE A BASKET2POWER EST BARKETZ CLOCK COMPUTERSTATUS
ALERT PER 3
At BITE Indicator Panel A51 (fig . B ) , set COMPUTER CONTROL LOAD DEVICE SELECT to RECOVERY STORAGE UNIT 1 .
FIGURE B
4
At Computer Maintenance Control Panel A95A 12 (fig . C) , setTTC1
LO
5
and TTC2 toPROTECT .
At BITE indicator panel (fig . B) , pressCOMP & SYS RESET and
FUNCTION WORD INPUT COMPUTER MAINTENANCE PANEL PWR SPLY TEST CLOCK OROROBOROBOB R MONITO PARITY CPU 1 MEM DATAWORD DATAWORDINPUT CPUZ PCU • aaaaaaaa CPU 3 1/OCU RSUWRITE CONTROL MODE FUNCTION WORD CONTROL TTC1 TTCZ CLOCK SINGLE LOAD PANE RUN PROTECT PROTECT HALT AUTO ENABLE ENABLE CONT 門噹
FIGURE C
observeCOMP P /S .
If indicator is on: Go to step 6.
If indicator is off: Go to step 8 .
CONTINUED
3-775
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-142.
6
WCC STATUS LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
WC
At computer maintenance control panel ( fig . D) , observe PWR SPLY TESTindicators.
NOTE
PWR SPLY TESTindicator CPU 3is not used .
If the following PWR SPLY TESTindicators are on : MEM CPU 1 PCU
15
CPU 2 1 /OCU
a. At RSU , remove RSU / ESC tape cassette from TTC 1and insert original tape cassette .
b . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If the following PWR SPLY TESTindicators are off: MEM CPU 1 PCU
CPU 2 I/OCU
Go to step 9. If MEMis off: a . Replace Monolithic Memory Unit 1 A95A2 circuit card A1 per para 102 .
b. Go to step 7.
If CPU
is off :
a . Replace Central Processor Unit 1 A95A9 power supply PS1 per para 4111 .
b. Go to step 7. If PCUis off: a . Replace peripheral Control Unit Processor A95A14
power supply PS1 per para 4-111 .
b. Go to step 7 .
3-776
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-142 .
6
WCC STATUS LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued -Continued
If CPU 2 is off : a. Replace Central Processor Unit 2 A95A 10 power supply PS1 per para 4-111 . b. Go to step 7 .
If I/OCU is off: a. Replace Input /Output Processor A95A 13 power supply PS1
per para 4-114 . b. Go to step 7.
7
At BITE indicator panel (fig . B) , observe COMP P / S.
If COMP P /S is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If COMP P /S is off: Go to step 103.
At BITE indicator panel ( fig . B ) , observe MEM ERR, INIT ERROR, and PROG ALERT . 8
If one or more indicators are on: a. Perform WCC fault isolation per para 3- 39. b. Go to step 103. EPPCIPUTPRER
BELO FEA 2
If all three indicators are off:
Trac POWER POWERSUPPLY
PRITER
MITSECUREPR
OSPLAY CONTROL CDADRIDE CHRESIM
Go to step 90.
OFF PWRBIST PLE
AECOME CURECIM
TELEP CORTBOX CONTINE COMMENTER
Coryte At Distribution Box A66 ( fig .
UTILITYPEDER AFTERIAL
D), observe POWER SUPPLY G
9
SPLY OFF
STATUS PS1 .
DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICALLU RET128 K If indicator is on:
a. Perform Distribution
FIGURE D
Box A66 28VDC POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1 / PS2 fault isolation per para 3-100.
CONTINUED b. Go to step 103.
3-777
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-142 .
9
WCO
WCC STATUS LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued -Continued If indicator is off: Go to step 10.
10
At distribution box ( fig . D) , observe COMPUTER . IfCOMPUTER is ON :
Go to step 12.
If COMPUTER is OFF :
Go to step 11 .
11
At distribution box (fig . D) , set COMPUTER to ON .
If COMPUTER trips: a . Perform Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR - COMPUTER circuit breaker tripped fault isolation per para 3-28.
b. Go to step 101 .
If COMPUTER does not trip : Go to step 12.
12
At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 ( fig .
OSTATUS WOOD CLOBED NC
E ) , observe FANS - CURBSIDE - AFT .
AMBIENT AIRCONTROLPANEL EOPT TE ARELORFLAPPERTALKE NORMALLYCLOSED DREWONLYWHENOUTSIDE TEMP ERFF2NGORBELOW
O ROADSEN FANSCURSSON гео T
O
O
If indicator is on : TEST POINTS OO O о O
GO
a . Perform hood status and fan lights fault isolation
per para 3-148. FIGURE E b. Go to step 101 . If indicator is off:
Go to step 13.
13
At Hard Copy Unit A65 (fig . F) , observe POWER indicator .
If indicator is on:
Go to step 14. If indicator is off:
Go to step 82. CONTINUED
T
3-778
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-142.
WCC STATUS LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued • Ο
O
O POWER
O ONLINE
ODN OFFC81 ON OFF
FORM FEED TESTO C82 ON M1 OFF
FIGURE F
A87 RT-524 ANDKYST WCC ON
14
At Power Supply A25 (fig . G ) , observe WCC .
OFF OFF ABS UNIF RT-824 ANDKYST ON ON OLT ANTCONT OFF
OFF
If WCC is ON :
OFF
Go to step 16.
FIGURE G
If WCC is OFF : Go to step 15.
ircut
15
At power supply , set WCC to ON.
If WCC trips : a. Perform Power Supply Assembly A25 WCC circuit breaker tripped fault
isolation per para 3-141 . b. Go to step 101 .
1
If WCC does not trip :
Go to step 16.
16
At distribution box (fig . A) , set COMPUTER to OFF .
17
At distribution box bottom shielding gasket
(4 , fig . H) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat O
washers , and nuts .
18
Remove 13 screws (3) , lockwashers , and flat
FIGURE H washers .
Remove five self -locking nuts ( 2) and flat washers . 19
Remove bottom shielding gasket (4 ) .
20
Disconnect W445P1 from J18 (fig . 1) .
CONTINUED
3-779
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
WC
3-142.
WCC STATUS LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN WARNING MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS . Le
J162 A
123
-A-
FIGURE I
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION CABLE ASSEMBLY W108
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P21
21
Connect test equipment for voltage measurements
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 /
P1J18
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P2
TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1/
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE J
CONTINUED
3-804
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-144 .
31
POWER SUPPLY A52A1 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , setDISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE toON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
32
At ACTS ( fig . E ) , setPOI and CRP in sequence shown in table C.
TABLE
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH
CRP
LOW
HIGH
POI Y G H I
114
126
J
198
218
K K
198
218
Н
218
G
198
H
K
33
C
Press PRESS TO TEST at each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM for each position .
If all voltages within specified limits : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If not all voltages within specified limits : a. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE to
OFF . b. Disconnect test equipment .
c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-805
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
POW POWER SUPPLY A62A1 FAULT ISOLATION
3-145.
10FP STATUS INDICATOR PANEL A61
POWER SUPPLY A62 BEHIND A61 PANEL
A 强
נן
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
RO
AD
SI
DE
3
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 6 In . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In .
Wrench , Box / Open End 3/8 In . Socket , Socket-Wrench 1/4 In . Drive - 3 /8 In . Handle , Socket Wrench , Ratchet 1/4 In . Drive. Gloves , Leather Multimeter, 8125A- AQ-O Switch Assembly, AC Line Test
Cable Assembly W106 Cable Assembly W 150 Cable Assembly W 104 Cable Assembly W156 Cable Assembly W132
TIME OFDAY
THON WEAPON 913CON ALERS STATE CONTOL CONTROS
1
At FP Status Indicator Panel A61 (fig . A) , set LAMP BRIGHTNESS fully clockwise for
ATTACK WARNINGS ATTし LAMP BRIGHTNESS
MSL INVENTORY
LS1 LS2 LS3 L54 L$5 LS6 157 LSB
OPER STBY OPER STAT OPER STBY OPEN STRY OPER STBY OPER STRY OPER STRY OPER STAY
OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER OPER
FUEL FUEL FUEL FUEL FUEL FUEL FUEL FUEL
maximum brightness . OGL ODL DDL DOL
If all FP status indicator panel lights are off: Go to step 2 .
CONTINUED FIGURE A
3-806
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-145. 1
POWER SUPPLY A62A1 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Continued
SURD ΞΗΝ
If not all FP status indicator panel lights are off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
ANE
2
At FP status indicator panel (fig . A) , observe digital indicators .
If all FP status indicator panel digital indicators are off: Go to step 15.
If not all FP status indicator panel digital indicators are off: a . Replace power supply A62A1 per para 4-55. b. Go to step 3 . 3
Observe FP status indicator panel digital indicators .
If all FP status indicator panel digital indicators are on : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If not all FP status indicator panel digital indicators are on: Go to step 4. SECUREFRE RESTTERR
4
PRENTER OFF
AIRCOND ROADSIDE
DISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIDE CURBSIDON OFF
CURESION
ON
BATENS PANER
Ta VOICE COMES FORSPLY : DITT 817
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- CURBSIDE to OFF .
P WINGTOWE WINTERT FEWERSUPP TES? US LANK T POWER 837-2 ART3 口 NOTSECURSP CISARTIDE ROADSTOR AT DR OFF Zarc EADER THEDIST BELATERN T CONTROL COMNE PLY 20 ON A ST Of Off DNT-ART CONVERTER TELEPHONE CONTROL BOALSIOR HEATERS CONTROL ON 24 GO 877 OTESTYPOWIA 120C 400NZ EXTERNAL MASTERECT INTERNAL ON 25% DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICA WEIGHT373L DEES FIGURE B
B
5
At FP status indicator panel (fig . C), release four rotary stud fasteners at top of panel . Release latch and lower panel.
CONTINUED FIGURE C
3-807
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-145 .
POWER SUPPLY A62A1 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
45 PC
POWER SUPPLY SURFACES MAY BE HOT. USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES La WARNING
6
WHEN TOUCHING POWER SUPPLY OR CONNECTORS .
At Power Supply Assembly A62 ( fig . D ) , disconnect wiring harness connector A62P3 from power supply A62A1 J1 ( 1 ).
A
ន០
EI
E3
O 2 AFIGURE D ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST Le
BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE WARNING MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED.
CAUTION
7
Connect test equipment for voltage measurements per fig . E.
J2> AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1/
CABLE ASSEMBLY W132
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1
P3
POWER SUPPLY A62 P1
P2
HI
-09
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE E 8
At distribution box, set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400HZ -INTERNAL to ON .
3-808
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-145.
POWER SUPPLY A62A1 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
GLOR
WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL CURBSIDE to ON . 9
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
At ACTS (fig . F) , set POI and CRP in the sequence listed in table A. Press PRESS TO 10
TEST for each setting and observe DMM .
TABLE
A
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH
CRP
LOW
HIGH
ΡΟΙ
ABBO
114
126
B
198
218
C
198
218
D
198
218
D
1
C
If all voltages within specified limits :
E
OPO
ΡΟΙ
CRP
Ο PRESS TO TEST
FIGURE F
Call Intermediate Maintenance
If not all voltages within specified limits : a . At distribution box , set DISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE to OFF . b . Disconnect ACTS , DMM and ACTS cables W132 , W106 and W150 . c. Replace Power Supply subassembly on A62 per para 4-54 .
d. Go to step 11 .
At FP status indicator panel (fig . A) , observe digital indicators . 11
If all digital indicators are on : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If not all digital indicators are on:
CONTINUED
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-809
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-145.
POWER SUPPLY A62A1 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
PO
12
At distribution box, set DISPLAY /CONTROL - CURBSIDE to OFF .
13
At FP status indicator panel (fig . C) , release four rotary stud fasteners . Release latch and lower panel .
POWER SUPPLY SURFACES MAY BE HOT. USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES WARNING WHEN TOUCHING POWER SUPPLY OR CONNECTORS.
14
At power supply ( fig . D) , disconnect W4P41 from power supply connector J1 (2).
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED.
CAUTION
15
Connect test equipment for voltage measurements per fig . G.
J2> AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1/
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 1 P2
P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W4
CABLE ASSEMBLY W101 J2
P41
اند
P2
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO POWER SUPPLY, A62J1 P41
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150 HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE G
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO PATRIOT SYSTEM UTILITY WARNINGS
OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS . HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT.
16
At distribution box (fig . B) , set UTILITY POWER- 120VAC 400 HZ- INTERNAL to ON.
17
Set DISPLAY /CONTROL - CURBSIDE to ON.
CONTINUED
3-810
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
POWER SUPPLY A62A1 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-145.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
leas
CAUTION
LOVE 18
At ACTS ( fig . F) , set POI and CRP in the sequence listed in table B. Press PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe DMM .
TABLE
B
18 VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH
A WEE B NE
C C
HIGH
CRP
LOW
DAAB
ΡΟΙ
114
126
Α
198
218
198
218
Α
198
218
If all voltages within specified limits : a . At distribution box , set DISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE to OFF b. Disconnect ACTS , DMM and ACTS W104 , W106 and W150 .
c. Replace power supply subassembly on A62 per para 4-55 .
d . Go to step 19. If any voltage not within specified limits :
Go to step 19 .
At FP status indicator panel (fig . A) , observe status indicators . 19
If all status indicators are on : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If any status indicators are not on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box ( fig . B) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL CURBSIDE to OFF . 20
At Power Supply A62 , disconnect ACTS W104 from W4P41 and from ACTS W106P2 . 21
Connect W4P41 to power supply connector A62J1 (2 , fig . D) .
CONTINUED
22
3-811
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-145.
POWER SUPPLY A62A1 FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
P At FP status indicator panel (fig . C) , latch panel and secure by tightening four rotary
23
stud fasteners .
24
At distribution box (fig . H) , remove
CAU
two screws , flat washers and nuts(1).
25
At shielding gasket, remove 13 screws , lockwashers and flat
000
washers (3) securing gasket to distribution box .
26
-A-
Remove five self- locking nuts and flat washers (2 ) securing gasket to
FIGURE H distribution box . Remove gasket.
27
Disconnect W4P40 from distribution box A66J16.
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINAL AT NG WARNI DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
Set up test equipment for
28
voltage measurements at A66J16 per fig . I.
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY 01 ,
CABLE ASSEMBLY W156
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2J1
J16
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P1
P2
HI
At distribution box (fig. B) ,
29
set DISPLAY /CONTROLCURBSIDE to ON.
-09
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE I
エー CONTINUED
T
3-812
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-145.
POWER SUPPLY A62A1 FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
QUITE
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION
กว่า
30
At ACTS ( fig . F) , set POI and CRP in the sequence listed in table C. Press PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe DMM . TABLE
C VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH CRP
LOW
Y
HIGH
ΡΟΙ
J
114
126
K G
K
198
218
HI
K
198
218
Н
G
198
218
Н
If all voltages within specified limits :
OF
1
A
Call Intermediate maintenance
If any voltage outside specified limits: a. At distribution box , set DISPLAY /CONTROL - CURBSIDE to OFF . b. Disconnect ACTS , DMM , and ACTS W156 , W106 and W 150. c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-813
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-146.
DIS
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 LAMP TEST FAULT ISOLATION
J
[
ROA
DSI
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
DE
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In . Multimeter , Digital , 8125A - AQ - O
1
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , set and hold LAMP TEST to ON. If all distribution box indicators are on :
a. Release LAMP TEST .
brought you to this paragraph . If any distribution box indicators are off:
NOWCOND BOASSION
POWER [
OFF DEPLAY: SOKIRE COFISSI
NOTSECOMEPART THAS 108
"
To:To:]
OFE
96
HEADLINE BALS
A COND
Lenn
Go to step 2.
[2 ]
SECUREFOR REWFEM
b. Return to procedure that
PVC ARLAYTEAM2 41 20 OFE 8F7 HEAPERE CONTRE Epoten De DI
200
TWRPLE
EXTER
GRIES
FORD OF 2
DANGER 208 VOLTS
Observe all indicators . MECHANICALLUT WEIGHT578LO
If all indicators are off:
FIGURE A
a. Release LAMP TEST. b. Go to step 3.
CONTINUED
3-814
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 LAMP TEST FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-146 .
-Continued
2
If any indicators are on :
a . Release LAMP TEST . b. Replace indicators that were off per para 5-62.
c. Go to step 7.
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL Le WARNING MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
PORTER NETSECURIP 3
front panel.
1
O
4
DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL LI
Loosen 32 captive screws (fig . B) and lower
At large safety shield (fig . C) , loosen eight captive screws ( 1 ) and remove shield .
S
6
8
FIGURE B
LO
5
At LAMP TEST switch (2), connect digital multimeter (DMM) HI probe to 1-2 . At terminal board TBI (2 , fig . D ) , connect DMM LO probe to TB 1-1 .
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE (208VAC) IS PRESENT IN WARNING DISTRIBUTION BOX WHEN INTERLOCK SWITCH PLUN-
GER IS SET TO CHEAT POSITION . 2
6
Pull interlock switch plunger ( 1 ) out to
FIGURE C
cheat position and observe voltage display on DMM .
CONTINUED
T
3-815
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-146. 6
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 LAMP TEST FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
CC
Continued
ACTU
ENCLOSL
( 1
2
FIGURE D
If voltage indication is between 26.6 and 29.4 VDC: a . Push interlock switch plunger ( 1 ) in to remove power.
b. Disconnect DMM and probes . c. Install large safety shield ( fig . C ) and secure with eight captive screws ( 1 ) . d . Replace Distribution Box A66 Relay Assembly A2 per para 4-72 . e. Go to step 7. If voltage indication is not between 26.6 and 29.4 VDC : a . Push interlock switch plunger ( 1 ) in to remove power . b. Disconnect DMM and probes . c. Replace Distribution Box A66 switch S1 per para 4-86. d. Go to step 7 .
7
At distribution box (fig . A) , set and hold LAMP TEST to ON.
If all indicators are on : a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If any indicators are off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-816
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147 .
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION
MAN
LIGHT PANEL
ACTUATOR SWITCH S1 AND ENCLOSURE BLACKOUT SWITCH A4
BLACKOUT SWITCH S2 (TOP) AND BLACKOUT
STATION NO.3
A85
A49
(INSIDE ABOVE DOOR)
CURTAIN
DS1
DS2
DS3
DS4
DS5
P
BB d
Goo
1 C
RO
AD
SI
DE
BSI
DE
CUR
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL
GENERATOR CONTROL A64
PANEL
BLACKOUT
DISTRIBUTION
CURTAIN
BOX A66
TRANSFORMER A111 (BEHIND ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL PANEL)
LIGHTING CONTROL
PANEL A71
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
Multimeter , Digital , 8125A - AQ - O Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In. Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 10 In. Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In. Switch , Assembly , AC Line Test
CONTINUED
T
3-817
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMP
3-147.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION
Continued
-C 1
Determine if a fault was detected during emplacement.
If a fault was detected :
Go to step 2. If a fault was not detected : Go to step 3 .
2
Determine if prime power has been applied to the engagement control station ( ECS) .
If prime power has been applied :
Go to step 3. If prime power has not been applied : a . Perform ECS power up per TM 9-1430-600-10-1 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
EPPIKPOTPWK HT AMS PWRAMPL
SECURE PWR RADIO 1 ON RELA DRTERM3 ON OFF OFF OFF
AIRROADSIDE COND
BISPLAY CONTROL 8OADSIOE CURBSIDE ON ON OFF OFF AWCIU ALIU ON To:OFF To:] OFF COMPUTER MODEMS ON ON OFF To OFF EAS VOICE FRIES COMMO UNIT PWRSPLY ON ON OFF
If all three circuit breakers are ON .
AIRCOND CORBSIDE
Go to step 5. BATTERY POWER
If any of the three are OFF .
PRINTER ON
RUNNINGTIME SYR RATS ANY-2
LETERY POWER
221BC LAND POWERSUPPLY TEST RUS
1.40
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A), observe PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY DISPLAY /CONTROL and LIGHT CONTROL .
2
3
NOTSECUREPWR CURBSIDE ROADSIDE TWO RAS AFT FWD FANS AFT ON ON ON BEF OFF OFF Off ZBYDC WX010 PWRDIST DISPLAY/ сомно SELWYTERM UNITFWR SPLY ON CONTROLON PWRSPLYOR 2 ON 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF URFANT TELEPONEK E CONTROL ROADSID LIGHT HEATERS CONTROL UNET CONVERTER TERMON ON ON DN OFF AFF OFF OFF OFF UTILITYPOWER MASTERECT 3205AC 4002 EXTERNAL INTERNAL D OFF 0FT
DANGER 208 VOLTS a. Set those that are OFF to ON.
MECHANICAL LES WEIGHT 178 LIFT
b. Go to step 4.
4
FIGURE A
Observe circuit breaker (s) set to ON in step 3.
If no circuit breaker has tripped : Go to step 5.
If PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY has tripped : a. Perform para 3-91 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CONTINUED
3-818
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147.
4
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Continued
If DISPLAY /CONTROL has tripped :
a. Perform para 3-89.
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If LIGHT CONTROL has tripped :
a. Perform para 3-37. b. Go to step 5 .
Ө 5
LIGHTING CONTROL PANEL
At Lighting Control Panel A71 (fig . B ) , observe POWER ON lamp .
NORMAL
Go to step 44 .
If lamp is off: Go to step 6.
O
If lamp is on :
POWER ON
OFF MAINTENANCE
MAX
MIN
AISLE LAMPS FIGURE B
Set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to MAINTENANCE . 6
7
Observe aisle lights DS1 through DS5 .
If any aisle lights are on: Go to step 8.
00 If all aisle lights are off: Go to step 17.
SE
8
At Light Panel A49 and A85 (fig . C) , observe
EA
CR
IN
lights and adjust if necessary using INCREASE .
00
If lights on both are off:
O
FIGURE C
Go to step 9.
If light on either is on :
a. At Lighting Control Panel A71 replace DS1 lamp per para 5-54 . b. Go to step 15 .
CONTINUED
3-819
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPA
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-147.
-Con Le
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL
WARNING MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
9
At man station no . 3 , raise and secure operators seat in the upright position .
10
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
11
At environmental control panel ( fig . D ) ,
At li
ม loosen four captive screws , release latch , and lower panel .
12
At Transformer A111 ( fig . E ) , remove four screws ( 1 ) , lockwashers , and flat washers . Remove safety shield ( 2 ).
9 0 0 TB1-1
2
+
DANGER,
FIGURE D
FIGURE E
13
Connect digital multimeter ( DMM ) HI probe to TB 1-2 , and LO probe to TB1-1 .
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120 VAC) IS PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO WARNING NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT.
14
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . If DMM indicates 114 to 126 VAC: a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
b . Disconnect test equipment . c. Replace Transformer A111 per para 4-123. d. Go to step 16.
3-820
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
14
-Continued If DMM does not indicate 114 to 126 VAC: a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b. Disconnect test equipment .
c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
15
At lighting control panel (fig . B ) , observe POWER ON lamp .
If lamp is on : a. Set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to NORMAL .
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lamp is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
16
At lighting control panel (fig . B ) , observe POWER ON lamp .
If lamp is on : a. Set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to NORMAL .
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lamp is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box (fig . A) , observe LIGHT CONTROL . 17
IfLIGHT CONTROL is ON : Go to step 18. IfLIGHT CONTROL has tripped :
m ng for . nel (fig . B) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to 3-3 par a. At Perli rol7pa ghti coant b.
NORMAL c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
Le WARNING
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN
MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS . CONTINUED
18
At distribution box ( fig . A) , setLIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
3-821
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 COMP 3-147.
19
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . F) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers and nuts .
At TE
4
A FIGURE F
20
Remove 13 screws (4) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
21
Remove five self- locking nuts (3) , and flat washers . Remove shielding gaskets ( 2 ) .
23
Connect the AC line test switch assembly (ACTS , fig . G ) and other test equipment per fig . H.
CRP
க
Disconnect W444P1 from J15.
140
ROO
ΡΟΥ
22
PRESS TO TEST
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1/
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P21 P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W107 P1
J15
FIGURE G DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P1
P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150 〇 元
HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE H
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC ) PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT WARNING TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT . CONTINUED
24
3-822
At distribution box (fig . A) , setLIGHT CONTROL toON .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147 .
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT . CAUTION
At ACTS (fig . G) , set POI and CRP in the sequence listed (Table A) . Press PRESS TO 25 TEST for each setting and observe DMM . TABLE
A
ΡΟΙ
CRP
INDICATION
D
114 to 126 VAC
A
E
114 to 126 VAC
A
If all voltages are within specified limits: Go to step 35.
If all voltages are not within specified limits : Go to step 26.
26
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
27
Disconnect test equipment .
28
Connect W444P1 to J15 (fig . F).
Install shielding gasket and secure with five self -locking nuts and flat washers . 29
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL 30
31
Secure gasket with 13 screws, lockwashers , and flat washers .
E BATTL SHORT WATTLE SHORT
E L TONEUTRA PHASEVOLTAG PHASE PHASE A OFF-
PHASE C
GENS ON SUM FUEL LBE FAULT TAGE So OVERVOL #NDE1 LAMP FADLE TEST FAULT ALBEY GENERATOR POWER BADAR ECS OFF TUBBINESOFF OFF COMM
COMM Secure with two screws , flat
ON
ON
washers , and nuts .
FIGURE H 32
Set LIGHT CONTROL to ON,
33
At Generator Control A64 (fig .
CONTINUED H) , set selector switch to PHASE B. and observe VOLTAGE PHASE TO NEUTRAL meter .
3-823
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147 .
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
COMF 33
-Continued
At re
If meter indicates 114 to 126 VAC:
the
a. Replace A66 CB22 per para 4-82. b. Go to step 34. If meter does not indicate 114 to 126 VAC: a. Replace A66 FL3 per para 4-75. b. Go to step 34.
34
Observe aisle lights DS1 through DS5.
If lights are on :
ARNE
a . At lighting control panel (fig . B ) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCEto NORMAL b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lights are off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
35
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF, disconnect test equipment, and connect W444P1 to J15 (fig . F) .
36
Install shielding gasket and secure with five self-locking nuts , (3 , fig . F) and flat washers .
37
Secure gasket with 13 screws (4) , lockwashers , and flat washers .
38
Secure with two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers , and nuts .
39
At man station no . 3 , raise and secure operator's seat in the upright position .
40
At environmental control panel (fig . D) , loosen
O
O
four captive screws , and lower panel.
O
01 10
Ꮻ lod 1001
3-824
10110
1001
TB 1-
[ ® ]
TB2
FIGURE I CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-147.
41
At rear of Lighting Control Panel A71 ( fig . I ) , connect DMM probes to TB1 and TB2 in the sequence listed (Table B) . TABLE
B
HI PROBE
LO PROBE
INDICATION
TB2-2
114 to 126 VAC
TB2-1
TB1-2
114 to 126 VAC
TB2-1
TB 1-3
114 to 126 VAC
TB2-1
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC ) IS PRESENT WHEN LIGHT Le WARNINGS •
CONTROL IS SET TO ON . TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
42
After each connection , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON (fig . A) , and set LIGHT CONTROL before changing DMM probe connection . Observe DMM . to OFF If all voltages are within specified limits :
a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b . Disconnect DMM probes . c. Replace Lighting Control Panel A71 per para 4-91 .
d. Go to step 43.
If any voltage is not within specified limits:
a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF · b . Disconnect DMM probes . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . Observe aisle lights DS1 43 through DS5 .
l MAL OFF MAINTENANCE to ng lighti a. At ts are If ligh on : contro panel (fig . B) , set NOR
NORMAL . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lights are off : Call Intermediate Maintenance . CONTINUED
3-825
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMP 3-147.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION_
Continued BillAt a
44
At lighting control panel (fig . B) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to NORMAL
45
At lighting control panel (fig . B) , set
46
Observe aisle lights DS2 through DS5.
Μου
ligh
B
AISLE LAMPS to MAX
Co
pro
If only one light is off in any fixture : a . Replace the light that is off per para 5-65 .
b. Go to step 47. If both lights are on or off in any fixture :
Go to step 47. 47
Observe the white lights in DS1 through DS5 . If they are all on :
Go to step 69.
If only some are on :
Go to step 48. 48
Observe the white light in DS1.
If it is on : Go to step 62.
S
If it is off: a . Replace light per para 5-65.
b. Go to step 49. 49
Observe the white light in DS1 .
If it is on: a . At lighting control panel (fig . B) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to NORMAL b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If it is off: Go to step 50.
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL WARNING MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
CONTINUED 50
3-826
to OFF At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-147.
At aisle light DS1 (fig . J) , remove eight mounting screws and flat washers . Lower
51
light assembly.
52
Connect DMM HI probe to TB 1-1 and LO
3
probel to TB1-2 .
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC) WARNING
IS PRESENT WHEN LIGHT CONTROL IS SET TO ON . O
53
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . Observe DMM . -G
If DMM indicates 114 to 126 VAC: FIGURE J a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
b. Disconnect DMM Probes . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If DMM does not indicate 114 to 126 VAC:
Go to step 54 .
54
Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
Disconnect DMM probes , raise light assembly DS1 (fig . J) , and secure with eight 55
screws and flat washers .
At man station no. 3, raise and secure operators seat in the upright positon . 56
At environmental control panel (fig . D) , loosen four captive screws , release latch , and 57
lower panel . At rear of lighting control panel (fig . 1) , connect DMM HI probe to TB2-6 , and LO probe 58 to TB1-2 .
IS HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC ) IS PRESENT WHEN LIGHT CONTROL Le
WARNING
SET TO ON-
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . Observe DMM .
CONTINUED
59
3-827
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147.
59
COMP
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued
九 ARNIN w
If DMM indicates 114 to 126 VAC:
등쪽
a. Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b . Disconnect DMM probes.
At LIG
c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
===
If DMM does not indicate 114 to 126 VAC:
At
a. Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
8
lov b. Disconnect DMM probes. 2
c. Replace A71S1 per para 4-92 .
d . Go to step 60 .
60
At distribution box ( fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . Observe the white light in DS1 .
If light is on : a . At lighting control panel (fig . B) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to NORMAL . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph.
1 If light is off: a . Replace Lighting Control Panel A71 per para 4-91 .
b . Go to step 61 .
61
Observe white light in DS 1 .
If light is on: a. At lighting control panel (fig . B ) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to NORMAL . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If light is off :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
62
Observe aislelights DS2 through DS5.
If all lights are off: Go to step 63. If all lights are not off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-828
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL G MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN WARNIN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
63
At man station no . 3 , raise and secure operators seat in the upright position and set LIGHT CONTROL ( fig . A) to OFF.
64
At environmental control panel (fig . D) , loosen four captive screws , release latch , and lower panel .
65
At rear of lighting control panel (fig . 1 ) , connect DMM HI probe to TB2-4 and LO probe to TB 1-2 .
ING HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120VAC ) IS PRESENT WHEN LIGHT CONTROL IS WARN Le SET TO ON .
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . Observe DMM . 66
If DMM indicates 114 to 126 VAC:
a. Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM probes .
c. Call Intermediate Maintenance . If DMM does not indicate 114 to 126 VAC : a. Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM probes .
c. Replace A71S1 per para 4-92 . d. Go to step 67.
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . Observe aisle lights DS2 67
through DS5 . tsgh : ntrol panel (fig . B) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to are If all tingon co At li a . ligh
NORMAL . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all lights are off: a. Replace Lighting Control Panel A71 per para 4-91 .
CONTINUED
b. Go to step 68. 3-829
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147.
COM
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
At B 68
Observe aisle lights DS2 through DS5.
(fig
anc If all lights are on :
a . At lighting control panel ( fig . B ) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to
Dis WE
NORMAL . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CC
G
If all lights are off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
69
Open shelter door and observe red light in DS1 .
oo
LI
Q
If light is on: 000
If light is off:
Go to step 70. 70
000
Go to step 78.
At Actuator Switch S1 (fig . K) , manually hold Ο
switch plunger to the on ( up) position . Observe red light in DS1 .
O
If light is on: a . Replace Actuator Switch S1 per para 5-66 .
FIGURE K b. Go to step 71 . If light is off:
Go to step 72.
71
Open shelter door and observe red light in DS1 .
If light is on: a . At lighting control panel (fig . B) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to NORMAL . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If light is off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
72
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
CONTINUED
3-830
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
73
At Enclosure Blackout Switch A4 TB1
(fig . L) , remove eight screws (2) , and remove cover ( 1 ) .
Disconnect white /black lead from
o O O O O
O
74
W61 at TB 1-2 , and temporarily connect it to TB 1-6. 2
75
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON , and observe red light in DS1 . FIGURE L If light is on :
a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b. Reconnect white / black lead to TB 1-2. c. Replace Actuator Switch S1 per para 5-66 . d . Go to step 76 .
If light is off: a. Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
b. Reconnect white / black lead to TB 1-2. c. At Enclosure Blackout Switch A4 (fig . L) , install cover , and secure with eight screws . d . Replace DS1 per para 5-65. e. Go to step 77. 76
Observe red light in DS1 . If light islig onhti : ng control panel (fig . B) , set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to a. At
NORMAL . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If light is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
77
Observe red light in DS1 .
If light is on a. At ligh:ting control panel (fig . B) , set NORMAL OFF
E
MAINTENANC
to NORMAL . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this
CONTINUED
paragraph . 3-831
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMF
3-147.
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION
Continued
Atre 77
-Continued .
thro
If light is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
78
At lighting control panel ( fig . B ) , adjust AISLE LAMPSfrom MINto MAX Observe aisle lights . If aisle light intensity is adjustable : Go to step 80.
If aisle light intensity is not adjustable : a. Replace Lighting Control Panel A71 per para 4-91 . b. Go to step 79. 79
Adjust AISLE LAMPS from MINto MAX Observe aisle lights .
If aisle light intensity is adjustable :
a. Replace Lighting Control Panel A71 per para 4-91 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph.
If aisle light intensity is not adjustable : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
80
Adjust AISLE LAMPS for desired illumination , and set NORMAL OFF MAINTENANCE to NORMAL.
81
At rear of shelter, close blackout curtain but leave shelter door open . Observe aisle lights DS2 through DS5.
If lights are on : Go to step 82.
If lights are off:
Go to step 88. 82
Open blackout curtain and observe DS2 through DS5.
If lights are on: Go to step 84.
If lights are off: a . Replace Blackout Switch S2 per para 5-67.
b. Go to step 83.
3-832
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147 .
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
83
At rear of shelter , close , and then open blackout curtain . Observe aisle lights DS2 through DS5 .
If lights come on and then go off : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lights do not come on and then go off : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At Light Panel A49 ( fig . C) , adjust INCREASE for proper illumination . Observe lights . 84
If lights are on and adjustable : Go to step 86 .
If lights are on but not adjustable , or off:
a . Replace Light panel A49 per para 4-52 . b. Go to step 85 . At Light Panel A49 ( fig . C ) , adjust INCREASE for proper illumination , and observe 85
lights . If lights are on and adjustable : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lights are off or not adjustable : Call Intermediate Maintenance . At Light Panel A85 ( fig . C ) , adjust INCREASE for proper illumination , and observe 86 lights .
If lights are on and adjustable : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lights are on but not adjustable , or off : a. Replace Light Panel A85 per para 4-52 .
b. Go to step 87 . t ne gh Pa l A85 ( fig . C ) , adjust INCREASE for proper illumination , and observe At Li 87 lights :
If lights are on and adjustable : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lights are off or not adjustable :
CONTINUED
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-833
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
COMP
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION- Continued B
3-147 .
88
Ca -Co
At Blackout Switch S2 ( fig . M ) , manually hold switch plunger to in position . Observe aisle lights DS2 through DS5 .
If all lights are on :
a . Release switch . b . Replace Blackout Switch S2 per para 5-67.
At 18 A
c. Go to step 93 . If all lights are off:
a. Release switch . b . Go to step 89 . FIGURE M
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL WARNING MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
89
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
1 90
At Enclosure Blackout Switch A4 ( fig . L ) , remove eight screws (2 ) , and remove cover ( 1 ) .
91
Connect DMM HI probe to TB1-5 , and LO probe to TB 1-7.
La WARNING
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE ( 120 VAC) IS PRESENT WHEN LIGHT CONTROL IS SET TO ON.
92
At distribution box (fig . A) , set LIGHT CONTROL to ON . Observe DMM . If DMM indicates 114 to 126 VAC: a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF .
b. Disconnect DMM probes. c. Install Enclosure Blackout Switch A4 cover and secure with eight screws (fig . L) .
d . Replace Blackout Switch S2 per para 5-67 .
e. Go to step 93.
3-834
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-147 .
92
COMPARTMENT LIGHTING FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Continued . If DMM does not indicate 114 to 126 VAC : a . Set LIGHT CONTROL to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM probes .
c . Replace Actuator Switch S1 per para 5-66. d. Go to step 93.
93
At Blackout Switch S2 (fig M) , manually hold switch plunger to in position . Observe aisle lights DS2 through DS5 . If all lights are on :
a. Release switch . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all lights are off :
a . Release switch . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-835
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION
3-148 .
HOOD At A
ENVIRONMENTAL CONTROL PANEL
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
C
ROA
DSI
DE FAN DOOR
A1
FAN DOOR A56
A75 -A110
A60 A3 A112
A79
A50 A68 Personnel Required .
Two
AIR DOOR
Tools and Equipment Required .
AIR DOOR
Multimeter, Digital , 8125A- AQ - O Switch Assembly , AC Line Test Cable Assembly W101
Cable Assembly W106 Cable Assembly W107 Cable Assembly W11 Cable Assembly W148 Cable Assembly W150 Adapter, Test P 159 Screwdriver, Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In . Screwdriver, Cross Tip , No. 2 , 4 In. Wrench , Box / Open End , 11/16 In. Wrench , Box / Open End , 3/8 In . Wrench , Box /Open End , 11/32 In. Wrench , Spin - Tight Socket , 3/8 In .
T
3-836
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-148.
At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 ( fig . A. ) , observe 28V ON indicator . 1
If 28V ON is on : Go to step 2 .
If 28V ON is off: a. Perform A72 STATUS 28V ON lamp off fault isolation per para 3-38.
b. Go to step 2 .
Momentarily set and hold
2
OSTATUS
O
Note any panel lamps that are off.
20V ON
HOOD CLOSED
LAMP TEST in the up position .
O FWCSD AS FWD
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL AMBIENT Ο PANEL FLOW AIREOPT TEMP AIR FLOWFLAPFER VALVE HIGH NORMALLYCLOSED OUTSIDE ONLYWHENORBELOW OPEN Σαν TEMPFREEZING
ROADSIDE FWD AFT
FANS CURBSIDE FWD AFT
O
CS AFT RS AFT
TEST POINTS
6 GNO O
LAMP TEST
FWD
If all panel lamps are on :
O
a. Release LAMP
FIGURE A TEST . b. Go to step 3.
If some but not all panel lamps are off:
C
a. Release LAMP TEST. b. Replace any panel lamps that were off per para 5-54.
c. Go to step 3 .
If all panel lamps are off: a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3
Set selector switch to NORMAL .
If HOOD CLOSED lamp is on: Go to step 6.
If HOOD CLOSED lamp is off: p 4 Go ste 0 ., A60 , A68 , A79 , or A112 ) , momentarily close hood and orto , A5 At any Air Do (A3 4
observe HOOD CLOSED indicator (fig . A) . If HOOD CLOSED is on: a. Open hood and latch in fully open position . b. Verify that HOOD CLOSED indicator is off.
CONTINUED
c. Go to step 31 . 3-837
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148.
4
HOOD
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At ar
-Continued
If HOOD CLOSED is off: a. Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94. b. Go to step 5 .
5
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe HOOD CLOSED indicator.
IfHOOD CLOSED is on : a. Open hood closed in step 4 and latch in fully open position .
b. Verify that HOOD CLOSED is off. c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . IfHOOD CLOSED is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
6
Set selector switch (fig.A) to RS AFT .
If HOOD CLOSED is on : 1
Go to step 7.
If HOOD CLOSED is off:
Go to step 10.
7
At aft roadside Air Door A3 , observe hood position .
If hood is fully open : a . Replace Air Door A3 per para 4-7 .
b. Go to step 8. If hood is not fully open: a. Open hood fully.
b. Go to step 9.
8 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe HOOD CLOSED indicator.
If HOOD CLOSED is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If HOOD CLOSED is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-838
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe HOOD CLOSED indicator . 9 If HOOD CLOSED is on :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If HOOD CLOSED is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
10
Set selector switch (fig . A) to CS AFT .
If HOOD CLOSED is on:
Go to step 11 . If HOOD CLOSED is off:
Go to step 14.
11
At aft curbside Air Door A3 , observe hood position .
If hood is fully open :
a. Replace Air Door A112 per para 4-7. b. Go to step 12 . If hood is not fully open :
a. Open hood fully. b. Go to step 13.
At ambient air control panel , observe HOOD CLOSED indicator . 12
If HOOD CLOSED is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If HOOD CLOSED is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At ambient air control panel , observe HOOD CLOSED indicator . 13
If HOOD CLOSED is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If HOOD CLOSED is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CONTINUED
3-839
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148.
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
HOOD 14
At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , set selector switch to CS FWD .
am
If HOOD CLOSED is on:
Go to step 15.
If HOOD CLOSED is off: Go to step 17.
15
At forward curbside Air Door A68 , observe hood position .
Se
If hood is fully open : a. Replace forward curbside Air Door A68 per para 4-7. b. Go to step 16.
If hood is not fully open : a . Open hood fully . b. Go to step 16 .
16
At ambient air control panel , observe HOOD CLOSED .
If HOOD CLOSED is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If HOOD CLOSED is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
17
Set selector switch (fig . A) to RS FWD . If HOOD CLOSED is on : Go to step 18.
If HOOD CLOSED is off:
Go to step 20 .
18
At forward roadside Air Door A50, observe hood position .
If hood is fully open : a. Replace Forward Roadside Air Door A50 per para 4-7.
b. Go to step 19.
If hood is not fully open: a. Open hood fully.
b. Go to step 19.
3-840
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
19
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe HOOD CLOSED indicator .
If HOOD CLOSED is on :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If HOOD CLOSED is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
20
Set selector switch ( fig . A) to FWD.
21
At forward Air Doors A60 and A79 , observe hood positions .
If both hoods fully open :
Go to step 23. If both hoods not fully open :
a. Open hoods fully. b. Go to step 22.
22
At ambient air control panel , observe HOOD CLOSED indicator .
If HOOD CLOSED is on : Go to step 23.
If HOOD CLOSED is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
EPPINPUTPR
AIRCOND ESADSIDE
23
At Distribution Box A66 (fig.B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
AIRCOND CURBSIDE
BATERY
24
At forward curbside Air Door A68,
SECURE P PRINTER TERM RELBADIOOPP OFF DEF BISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIN CURBSIDE OFF ALBU OFFTo: COMPUTED MODERS OFY OFF PRICE FILTER Com FVBSPLY DR
LEVOC A LOTTERY POWER POWERSUPPLY TEST O D T2 T-1 D O NOTSECUREPR CURBSIDE ROADSIDE FWO ON 2T 00 AFT C OFF OFF OFF EDC COMM PUR DIST BISPLA BEL TERM SPLY CONTARL PR SPLTON 1 ON 3 OFF OFF OFF NFANT OFF TELEPHOOFF LinDAY LIGHT CONTROL CONVERTER ROADSIDE DEALERS CONTROL ON 09 OFF OU OFF UTILI POWEZR 120TYC40 EXTERNAL RAST OFF OFF OFT DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL WEIGHT 178LASLIFT
close hood.
FIGURE B
CONTINUED
3-841
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148.
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
25
HOO
At environmental control panel (fig . C), loosen four captive screws , release latch and lower panel .
FIGURE C
8
Le WARNING
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT. DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST
BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
26
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set UTILITY POWER - 120VAC 400HZ INTERNAL to ON .
27
At terminals A68 TB 1-3 and TB 1-5 (fig . D) , connect DMM probes and observe DMM indication . If DMM indication is 0.0002K
or less:
a. Disconnect DMM probes and power cord .
FIGURE D
3-842
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
27
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Continued b. At forward curbside Air Door A68 , open hood.
c. Replace forward small Air Door A79 per para 4-7. d . Go to step 29. If DMM indication is greater than 0.0002KM: a . Disconnect DMM probes and power cord . b. At forward curbside Air Door A68 , open hood. c. Replace forward small Air Door A60 per para 4-7. d. Go to step 28.
28
At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
29
At ambient air control panel , observe HOOD CLOSED ( fig . A) .
If HOOD CLOSED is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If HOOD CLOSED is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box , observe ROADSIDE FANS FWD and AFT and CURBSIDE FANS130
FWD and AFT. If all four FANS are on :
Go to step 32.
If any FANS are off: a. Set any FANS that are OFF to ON. b. Go to step 31 .
Observe ROADSIDE FANS- FWD and AFT and CURBSIDE FANS FWD and AFT
31 If all four FANS remain on: Go to step 32.
NS pse: Distribtuon Box A66 fan circuit breaker If an FA tri orm rf th a.yPe tripped fault isolation paragraph (s) indicated in table A.
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CONTINUED
3-843
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HOOD
3-148.
31
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued
32
A
3
TABLE
CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED
PARAGRAPH
ROADSIDE FANS - FWD
3-83
ROADSIDE FANS - AFT
3-84
CURBSIDE FANS - FWD
3-85
CURBSIDE FANS - AFT
3-86
At 8AHV
At
At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , observe four FANS indicators .
If all four FANS indicators are on:
a. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94 . b. Go to step 33. If only CURBSIDE FANS - AFT is on: Go to step 34.
If only ROADSIDE FANS - AFT is on : Go to step 125.
If both CURBSIDE FANS - FWD and ROADSIDE FANS - FWD are on : Go to step 230.
If only ROADSIDE FANS - FWD is on :
Go to step 277 .
If only CURBSIDE FANS - FWD is on: Go to step 338.
33
Observe all four FANS indicators .
If all four FANS indicators are off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If any FANS indicators are on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED T
3-844
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT. DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST WARNING BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
34
At distribution box (fig . B) , set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ
35
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , connect DMM HI probe to TEST POINTS - 2 and
INTERNAL to ON.
LO probe to TEST POINTS · GND. Observe DMM indication . If DMM indicates 26.6 - 29.4 VDC: a . Disconnect DMM . b. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94 . c. Go to step 36. If DMM does not indicate 26.6 · 29.4 VDC : a . Disconnect DMM . b. Go to step 37. 36
Observe FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT (fig . A) .
If FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At aft curbside Fan Door A110 , determine if fan motor is running . 37
If fan motor is running : Go to step 94. If fan motor is not running : Go to step 38 .
At distribution box , observe CURBSIDE FANS AFT. 38
If CURBSIDE FANS AFTtripped :
a. Fault isolate A66 CB 10 per para 3-86 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CURBSIDE FANS AFTIS ON
CONTINUED
Go to step 39. 3-845
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148.
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
HOOD
At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , set selector switch to CS AFT.
Con
39
E At curbside aft Air Door A 112 , close hood and observe STATUS - HOOD CLOSED at
40
ambient air control panel ( fig . A ) . If STATUS- HOOD CLOSED is on:
a . Open curbside aft Air Door A 112 hood . b. Go to step 41 .
If STATUS - HOOD CLOSED is off: a. Open curbside aft Air Door A 112 hood . b. Go to step 66.
41
At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
42
At curbside aft Fan Door A110 , access connector J3 as follows:
a. Unlatch access door (8 , fig . E) , release
2
flexible side panels ( 9) from door and fold back.
1
b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ) . c. Remove screw ( 7 ) , nut ( 6 ) , and flat washer (5 ) that holds folding door stay to access door. d. Remove four screws (2) and flat washers (3). Remove fan door and weather shield . 5 e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan-door assembly.
19
J2
FIGURE E
DO NOT ALLOW REMOVED CABLE TO FALL BACK INTO SHELTER . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT . CAUTION
J1
f.
J3
Slide fan -door outward (fig . F) to
access attached cables and disconnect W81P1 D
from A 110 J3. FIGURE F
3-846
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
43
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
Connect AC line test set (ACTS ) per fig . G.
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1/
CABLE ASSEMBLY W181
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1
J3
TEST ADAPTOR P159
FAN DOOR A110
FIGURE G
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS CAUTION
44
PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
At ACTS (fig . H) , set POlto B and CRP to D and press PRESS TO TEST while a second person observes FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT at ambient air ΡΟΙ
CRP
control panel (2 , fig.A) .
If FANS CURBSIDE AFT is on:
PRESS TO TEST Go to step 47.
If FANS CURBSIDE- AFT is off:
FIGURE H
Go to step 59.
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY 45
to OFF. At Fan Door A110 (fig . F) , disconnect ACTS W181 . Disconnect P159 from ACTS .
46
Connect W81P1 to Fan Door A110 connector J3 (fig. G).
47 Push fan door back into shelter but do not install unit . 48
At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws , 49
release latch and lower panel .
CONTINUED
3-847
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148.
HOOD
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Atd 50
At ambient air control panel (fig . 1), disconnect W80P 1 from J1 .
33
At a
51
Connect test equipment per fig. J.
J2
J1
J3
J7
B
J2> AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 /
P1
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72
122
e
CABLE ASSEMBLY W148
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1
J6
P2
09 一 〇
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
HI
LO
b
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE J FIGURE I
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST Le WARNING
BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ - INTERNAL to ON. 52
At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to H and CRP to A. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM 53
indication .
If DMM indicates 0.0002K
or less:
a. Disconnect ACTS W48 from A72 J1 (fig . 1).
b. Disconnect ACTS W 106 , W148 and W 150, ACTS and DMM . c. Connect W80 P1 to A72 J1 (fig. 1 ).
d . Raise environmental control panel ( fig . C ) , and tighten captive screws . e. Replace Fan Door A110 per para 4-2.
f. Go to step 54. If DMM indicates greater than 0.0002KM : a. Disconnect ACTS W148 from A72 J1 ( fig . 1 ) .
b. Disconnect ACTS W 106 , W148 and W 150 , ACTS and DMM . c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94.
d. Go to step 56.
3-848
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
54
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
55
At ambient air control panel , observe FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT (fig . A) .
If FANS- CURBSIDE - AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
56
Install Fan Door A110 ( fig . E) as follows :
a. Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall . b. Install 11 screws (4) around air- door frame .
c. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws (2 ) and flat washers (3 ). d . Install screw ( 7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) holding door stay to access door. e. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door.
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON . 57
58
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT.
If FANS- CURBSIDE - AFT off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS -CURBSIDE - AFT on:
Call Intermediate Maintenance . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF . 59
60
At Fan Door A110 (fig . G ) , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , ACTS and P159 .
61
Connect W81P1 to Fan - Door A110 J3.
62
Install Fan Door A 110 ( fig . E) as follows :
a. Push fan dcor assembly back into shelter wall . b. Install 11 screws (4) around air-door frame. c. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws (2) CONTINUED and flat washers (3 ).
3-849
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 HOOD
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-148 .
-
62
-Continued
At AQ
indica
d . Install screw (7 ) , nut ( 6) and flat washer (5 ) holding door stay to access door . e. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door.
63
Replace Air Door A1 12 per para 4-7.
64
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
65
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - CURBSIDE AFT
If FANS - CURBSIDE AFT is off : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
E
is on: If FANS - CURBSIDE AFT Call Intermediate Maintenace .
66
At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
67
At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws , release latch and lower panel .
R
68
At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect W80P 1 .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED . LO CAUTION
69
Connect test equipment for voltage measurements per fig . J.
L
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST
WARNING BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
70
At distribution box, set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZINTERNAL to ON. CONTINUED
71
3-850
Set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON-
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to F and CRP to B. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM
72
indication . If DMM indicates 26.6-29.4VDC : Go to step 75.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6-29.4VDC : a . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF . b . At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , W 150, ACTS and DMM .
c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94. d. Go to step 80.
73
At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
At ambient air control panel , observe FANS - CURBSIDE - AFT . 74
IfFANS -CURBSIDE -AFT is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfFANS - CURBSIDE - AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
75
At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
76
At ACTS J1 , disconnect ACTS W150 and connect P 159 to J1 .
77
Set POI to F and CRP to G (fig . H) .
At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON. 178
At ACTS (fig . H) , press PRESS TO TEST while observing HOOD CLOSED indicator at 79
ambient air control panel (fig . A) . If HOOD CLOSED is on : Go to step 82.
If HOOD CLOSED is off: a. At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to
OFF . b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 ,
CONTINUED
W 106 , ACTS , P159 and DMM . T
3-851
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148.
79
HOOD
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94.
Con
d. Go to step 80.
fig.
80
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
81
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS- CURBSIDE - AFT . If FANS- CURBSIDE - AFT off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
82
At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
83
At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect ACTS W148 from J1 and from ACTS W 106.
84
Connect W80P 1 to A72J1 .
85
Raise environmental control panel (fig . C) and secure by tightening four captive screws .
86
At curbside aft Fan Door A 110 ( fig . F) , access J3 (fig . G) as follows: a. Unlatch access door (8 , fig . F) , release flexible side panels (9) from door and fold back.
b. At top of door, remove three screws ( 1 ). c. Remove screw ( 7 ) , nut (6 ) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to access door.
d . Remove four screws ( 2 ) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan door and weather shield. e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan door assembly.
DO NOT ALLOW REMOVED CABLE TO FALL BACK INTO SHELTER . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT . CAUTION
f. Slide fan door (fig . F) outward to access attached cables and disconnect W81P1 from A110J3.
T
3-852
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
87
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION — Continued
Connect ACTS per fig. K.
J2> AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
CABLE ASSEMBLY 106 P1 P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W181 J3
FAN DOOR A110
FIGURE K
88
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION
At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to B and CRP to C and press PRESS TO TEST while second 89
person observes HOOD CLOSED at ambient air control panel ( fig . A) .
If HOOD CLOSED is on : a. At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
b . At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , P159 and ACTS . c. Connect W81P1 to A110J3 (fig . G) , but do not install unit . d. Replace Air Door A1 12 per para 4-7. e. Go to step 90 .
If HOOD CLOSED is off: a. At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF. b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , P 159 and
ACTS . c. Replace Fan Door A110 per para 4-2 . d. Go to step 92 .
At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON. 90
At ambient air control panel , observe FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT. 91
- CURBSIDE- AFT is on : If FANS Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-853
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 HOOD
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
3-148.
8-0
-Continued
91
If FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT is off: a. Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall. b. Install 11 screws ( 4 , fig.E ) around air door frame. c. Replace fan door weather sheild and secure with four screws ( 2 ) and flat washers (3) . d . Install screw ( 7 ) , nut (6) and flat washer (5 ) holding door stay to
access door . e. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door. f. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . 92
92
93
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS CURBSIDE- AFT. If FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
94
At Fan Door A 110 , swing air filter cover (8 , fig . E) back and forth to determine if plunger that operates switch S1 is stuck . If fan door switch plunger is stuck:
Go to step 95.
If fan door switch plunger is free: Go to step 100. 95
At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and CURBSIDE FANS AFT to OFF.
96
At Fan Door A 110 ( fig . E) , access switch plunger as follows:
a . Unlatch access door ( 8 fig . F ) , release flexible side panels ( 9) from door and fold back.
b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ). c. Remove screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to access door.
CONTINUED d . Remove four screws (2 ) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan door and weather shield .
3-854
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
96
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued
e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan door assembly . f.
Slide fan door outward to access cover (fig . L) and remove four screws and flat washers . Remove cover.
g . Attempt to free plunger .
COVER
の DANGE
PLUNGER
SCREWS AND FLAT WASHERS H/2" (10°)
FIGURE L
If fan door plunger is free : Go to step 97.
If fan door plunger is stuck :
a. Replace Fan Door A110 per para 4-2. b . Go to step 98.
97
Install Fan Door A 110 as follows :
a. Install access cover (fig . L) and secure with four screws and flat washers .
b. Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall . c. Install 11 screws (4 , fig . E) around air door frame. d . Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws (2)
and flat washers (3 ). e. Install screw ( 7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) holding door stay to
access door . f. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door and fasten flexible side
CONTINUED
panels to door .
3-855
TM 9-1430-00-20-1 HOOD
3-148. 98
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and CURBSIDE FANS- AFT
06 -Co
to ON.
99
At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS- CURBSIDE - AFT. If FANS-CURBSIDE - AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- CURBSIDE- AFT is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
107 At
100 At distribution box, set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
108 AT
101 At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws , release latch and lower panel .
102 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect W80P 1 from J1 .
109 DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
110 CAUTION
103 Connect test equipment for voltage measurement per fig . J.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST WARNING BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
104 At distribution box , set UTILITY POWER - 120VAC 400 HZ - INTERNAL to ON.
105 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
106 At ACTS (fig . H ) , set POI to E and CRP to B. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM indication .
If DMM indicates 26.6 - 29.4VDC:
Go to step 109.
3-856
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148.
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
106 -Continued If DMM does not indicate 26.6
29.4VDC:
a. At distribution box (fig . B) , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM . c . Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94. d. Go to step 107.
107 At distribution box ( fig . B ) , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
108 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS CURBSIDE AFT .
IfFANS CURBSIDE -AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfFANS CURBSIDE -AFT is on:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
109 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
110 At ACTS J1 , disconnect ACTS W 150 and DMM.
111 At distribution box, set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
112 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to E and CRP to D. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe FANS CURBSIDE -AFT on ambient air control panel (fig . A) .
IfFANS CURBSIDE -AFT is on: Go to step 115.
IfFANS -CURBSIDE -AFT is off: a . At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR
CONTINUED
SPLY to OFF . 3-857
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HOOD
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-148 .
-Col
112 -Continued b . At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , ACTS and adapter P 159 .
c. Connect W80P 1 to A72J1 . d . Raise environmental control panel and secure with four captive screws (fig . C) . e. Replace Fan Door A110 per para 4-2. f. Go to step 113.
113 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
114 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - CURBSIDE - AFT .
C
If FANS- CURBSIDE - AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS - CURBSIDE - AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
115 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
116 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect ACTS W148 from J1 and from ACTS W 106 .
117 Connect W80P 1 to A72J1 (fig . 1) .
118 Disconnect W98P1 from A72J2 (fig . 1).
119 Connect ACTS W111 to A72J7 and to ACTS W106P2.
120 Connect ACTS W111 to ACTS W 106P2 .
121 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
122 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to A and CRP to B.
123 Press PRESS TO TEST and at ambient air control panel , observe FANS-CURBSIDE - AFT .
T
3-858
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
123 -Continued IfFANS -CURBSIDE -AFT is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfFANS -CURBSIDE -AFT is on: a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF . b . At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W111 , W106 , P 159 and ACTS .
c. Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94. d. Go to step 124.
124 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON and observe FANSCURBSIDE -AFT at ambient air control panel . IfFANS -CURBSIDE -AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfFANS -CURBSIDE -AFT is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance . C
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST Le ING WARN
BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
125 At distributon box , set UTILITY POWER - 120VAC 400 HZ - INTERNAL to ON .
126 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , connect DMM HI probe to TEST POINTS - 4 and DMM LO probe to TEST POINTS - GND .
If DMM indicates 26.6 - 29.4VDC : a. Disconnect DMM . b. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94.
c. Go to step 127.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6
29.4VDC :
a. Disconnect DMM . b. Go to step 128. CONTINUED
3-859
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
HOOD
127 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT .
3-Con a. Unl
If FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT is off:
bad
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
b. At f If FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT is on :
c. Re
ac
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
d. R 128 At roadside aft Fan Door A1 , determine if fan motor is running .
e. R If roadside aft fan is running : Go to step 183. If roadside aft fan is not running : Go to step 129.
CAUTI
129 At distribution box (fig . B) , observe ROADSIDE FANS -AFT .
If ROADSIDE FANS- AFT tripped :
a . Fault isolate A66 Roadside Fans - Aft per para 3-84. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragaraph . If ROADSIDE FANS -AFT remains on : Go to step 130.
130 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , set selector switch (5 ) to RS AFT .
131 At roadside aft Air Door A3 , close hood and observe HOOD CLOSED indicator at ambient air control panel .
If HOOD CLOSED is on :
a. At roadside aft Air Door A3, open hood. b. Go to step 132. If HOOD CLOSED is off: a. At roadside aft Air Door A3, open hood. b . Go to step 154 .
132 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
133 At roadside aft Fan Door A1 , access connector J3 as follows :
3-860
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
133 -Continued a. Unlatch access door ( 8 fig . E ) , release flexible side panels (9) from door and fold back . b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ) . c. Remove screw ( 7 ) , nut ( 6) and flat washer ( 5) that holds folding door stay to access door. d . Remove four screws ( 2 ) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan - door and weather shield .
e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan -door assembly.
DO NOT ALLOW REMOVED CABLE TO FALL BACK INTO SHELTER . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT .
CAUTIONe f. Slid fan door (fig . F) outward to access attached cables and disconnect W84P1
from A1J3 . 134 At Fan Door A1 (fig . F) connect ACTS W181 to J3 and to ACTS W106 .
C
135 Connect ACTS W106P1 to ACTS J2 and connect P159 to ACTS J1 .
136 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION 137 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to B and CRP to D and press PRESS TO TEST while second
person observes FANS- ROADSIDE - AFT at ambient air control panel (fig . A) .
If FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT is on: Go to step 138.
If FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT is off: a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR
LYnto . , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , ACTS and SPFa orFA1 b. At DoOF
P159 .
CONTINUED
T
3-861
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
HOOD
137 -Continued c. Connect W84P1 to Fan Door A1J3 (fig . G ) .
ARNING d . Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall (fig . E ) . e. Install 11 screws (4) around air door frame . Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws
146 At di
(2 ) and flat washers (3). g . Install screw (7) , nut ( 6 ) and flat washer ( 5 ) holding door stay
147 At A
f.
indi
to access door. h . Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door. i.
Replace Air Door A3 per para 4-7.
j.
Go to step 152 .
138 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
139 At Fan Door A1 (fig . G ) , disconnect ACTS W181 from J3 and ACTS W 106.
140 At ACTS, disconnect P 159 . 1
141 Connect W84P1 to Fan Door A1J3 ( fig . G ) .
142 Push fan door back into shelter but do not secure in place.
143 At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws , release latch and lower panel.
144 At ambient air control panel ( fig . 1 ) , disconnect W83P1 from J2 .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION AC LINE J2> TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 145 Connect test equipment per fig . M.
CABLEBLY ASSEM W148
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1
ENT AIRAMBI CONTROL PANEL A72 P1
CABLE Y ASSEMBL W150
P2
HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE M
3-862
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT. DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE WARNING
MEASUREMENTS .
146 At distribution box ( fig . B) , set UTILITY POWER - 120VAC 400 HZ INTERNAL to ON .
147 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to H and CRP to A. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM indication . If DMM indicates 0.0002K
or less :
a . Disconnect ACTS W148 at A72J2 (fig . 1). b . Disconnect ACTS W106 , W148 , W150 , ACTS and DMM. c. Connect W83P1 at A72J2 . d . Raise environmental control panel (fig . C) and tighten four captive screws .
e. Replace Fan Door A1 per para 4-2 . f. Go to step 148.
If DMM indicates greater than 0.0002K
:
a. Disconnect ACTS W148 from A72J2 (fig . 1) . b. Disconnect ACTS W 106 , W148 , W150 , ACTS and DMM . c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94 . d. Go to step 150 .
148 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
149 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT .
If FANS - ROADSIDE -AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfFANS - ROADSIDE - AFT is on:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
150 Install Fan Door A1 ( fig . E ) as follows :
a. Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall . b. Install 11 screws (4) around air- door frame . c. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws (2)
CONTINUED
and flat washers (3).
3-863
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD S
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
150 -Continued d . Install screw ( 7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5 ) holding door stay
RNING
to access door. e. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door and fasten flexible side panels to door. 】 【
151 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
160 At dis
152 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT.
161 At d If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT is off:
162 At F
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
ind If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
153 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON,
154 At ambient air control panel , observe FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT
If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT is off:
1
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragaraph .
If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
155 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
156 At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws .
157 Release latch and lower environmental control panel .
158 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect W83P1 .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED . CAUTION CONTINUED
159 Connect test equipment for voltage measurement per fig . J.
3-864
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
Le NING WAR
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
160 At distribution box (fig . B) , set UTILITY POWER - 120VAC 400 HZ -INTERNAL to ON .
161 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
162 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to F and CRP to B. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM
indication . If DMM indicates 26.6
29.4VDC :
Go to step 165.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 · 29.4VDC : a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
b. At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , W 150, ACTS and DMM . c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94 .
d. Go to step 163.
163 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
164 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT .
If FANS -ROADSIDE -AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS -ROADSIDE -AFT is on:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
165 At distribution box (fig.B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
166 At ACTS J1 , disconnect ACTS W 150 and connect P159 to J1 .
CONTINUED 167 Set POI to F and CRP to G (fig . H) .
T
3-865
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD ST
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Conti
168 At distribution box ( fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
d. Remc
169 At ACTS (fig . H) , press PRESS TO TEST while observing HOOD CLOSED indicator at
e. Remo
ambient air control panel (fig . A) .
If HOOD CLOSED is on : Go to step 171 .
If HOOD CLOSED is off: a. At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
UTION
b . At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , ACTS, P159 and DMM . 1. S c . Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94.
fr d . Go to step 170 .
77 Com 170 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON. 78 At
171 At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , observe FANS ROADSIDE- AFT.
If FANS ROADSIDE - AFT is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS ROADSIDE AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
179 172 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
173 At ambient air control panel ( fig . J ) , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , ACTS , P 159 and
DMM .
174 Connect W83P1 to A72J1 (fig . 1 ) .
175 Raise environmental control panel ( fig . C ) and secure by tightening four captive screws .
176 At roadside aft Fan Door A1 (fig . E ) , access J3 ( fig . G ) as follows : a . Unlatch access door (8 , fig . E) , release flexible side panels ( 9) from door and fold back . b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ) . D
c. Remove screw (7 ) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to access door.
3-866
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
176 -Continued d. Remove four screws (2 ) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan door and weather shield . e. Remove 11 screws ( 4 ) around air door frame on fan door assembly .
DO NOT ALLOW REMOVED CABLE TO FALL BACK INTO SHELTER . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT .
CAUTION
f. Slide fan door ( fig . F) outward to access attached cables and disconnect W84P1
from A1J3.
177 Connect test equipment per fig . K.
178 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
179 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to B and CRP to C and press PRESS TO TEST while second person observes HOOD CLOSED at ambient air control panel (fig . A) .
ED is on : If HOOD CLOS a . At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , P 159 ,
ACTS and DMM . c. Connect W84P1 to A1J3 (fig . G) , but do not install unit .
d . Replace Air Door A3 per para 4-7 . e. Go to step 180.
ED OOD CL If H is bo offx: , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF. tion ribu stOS a. At di
b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , P 159 ,
ACTS and DMM . c. Replace Fan Door A1 per para 4-2 .
CONTINUED
d. Go to step 182 . 3-867
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
HOOD S
180 At distribution box (fig . B ) , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY toON .
At EAFan D
a. Unlat back
181 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - ROADSIDE AFT .
b. At to IfFANS ROADSIDE AFT is on:
c. Rem ថ្មី
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfFANS ROADSIDE AFT is off:
acc
d. Ren
a . Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall .
e. Re
b. Install 11 screws (4) around air door frame.
1. Sli
c. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws ( 2 ) and
wa
flat washers (3).
9. Af
d . Install screw (7) , nut (6 ) and flat washer ( 5) holding door stay to access door. e. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door. f. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
182 At distribution box ( fig . B ) , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
183 At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , observe FANS ROADSIDE AFT .
a
IfFANS ROADSIDE -AFT is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfFANS ROADSIDE -AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
184 At Fan Door A1 , swing air filter cover ( 8 , fig . E) back and forth to determine if plunger that operates switch S1 is stuck.
If fan door switch plunger is stuck: Go to step 185.
If fan door switch plunger is free: Go to step 190.
185 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and ROADSIDE FANS -AFT to OFF . D
CONTINUE
3-868
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148.
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
186 At Fan Door A1 ( fig . E) , access plunger as follows:
a. Unlatch access door ( 8 , fig . E) , release flexible side panels ( 9) from door and fold back. b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ) . c. Remove screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to
access door. d . Remove four screws (2 ) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan door and weather shield . e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan door assembly . f. Slide fan door outward to access cover (fig . L) , and remove four screws and flat washers . Remove cover. g. Attempt to free plunger using long - nose pliers . If fan door plunger is free: Go to step 187 . If fan door plunger is stuck :
( 1 ) Replace Fan Door A1 per para 4-2. (2) Go to step 188.
187 Install Fan Door A 1 as follows: a. Install access cover (fig . L) and secure with four screws and flat washers .
b. Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall . c. Install 11 screws ( 4 , fig . E ) around air door frame . d. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws (2 ) and flat
s re l sc wash (3)w. (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) holding door stay to access door . taler e. Ins f.
Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door and fasten flexible side panels to door .
DE FANS- AFT 188 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and ROADSI
to ON.
189 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT.
If FANS- ROADSIDE AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- ROADSIDE - AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
T
3-869
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION
HOOD ST
-Continued
-Cont
190 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
191 At environmental control panel ( fig . C ) , loosen four captive screws , release latch and lower panel .
192 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect W83P1 from J2 .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED . LO AND GD
At
198 At
CAUTION
193 Connect test equipment for voltage measurement per fig . M.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE L
199
WARNING MEASUREMENTS .
to ON' 194 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ INTERNAL
195 Set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
196 At ACTS (fig . H) , set ΡΟΙ pol to E and CRP to B. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM indication .
I
3-870
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
196 -Continued If DMM indicates 26.6-29.4VDC:
Go to step 199. If DMM does not indicate 26.6
29.4VDC :
a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM . c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94 . d. Go to step 197 .
197 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
198 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - ROADSIDE -AFT .
If FANS -ROADSIDE -AFT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
ΓΙ
If FANS - ROADSIDE - AFT is on:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
199 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
200 At ACTS J1 , disconnect W150 .
201 Connect P 159 to J1 .
202 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS T WILL RESULT.
N PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPME
CAUTION
203 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to B and CRP to C and press PRESS TO TEST and observe FANS - ROADSIDE -AFT at ambient air control
CONTINUED
panel (fig . A) . 3-871
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD ST
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
-Conti 203 -Continued If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT is on :
Rem
a. At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
1. Slide b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148, W106 , P 159 and ACTS . c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94. d. Go to step 204. If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT is off: a . At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF. b . At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , P 159 and ACTS. 08 Dis 88
c. Connect W83P1 to A72J2 (fig . 1) . d . Raise environmental control panel (fig . C) and tighten four captive
209 Co
screws . e. Replace Fan Door A1 per para 4-2. f. Go to step 204.
204 At distribution box ( fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
205 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT.
210
If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
206 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
207 At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , access cables as follows :
a . Unlatch access door (8 , fig . E) , release flexible side panels (9) from door and fold back . b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ).
c. Remove screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer ( 5) that holds folding door stay to
access door. d . Remove four screws ( 2 ) and flat washers (3 ) . Remove fan door and weather shield.
3-872
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
1
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
207 -Continued e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan door assembly . f. Slide fan door assembly ( fig . F ) out of shelter .
DO NOT ALLOW REMOVED CABLE TO FALL BACK INTO SHELTER . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT . CAUTION
208 Disconnect W93P1 from A75J3 (fig . G).
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1
209 Connect test
equipment per fig . N.
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
CABLE ASSEMBLY W181 J3
FAN DOOR A75
TEST ADAPTOR P159
FIGURE N
210 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
211 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to A and CRP to B. Press PRESS TO TEST while second person at ambient air control panel observes FANS -ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS-
CURBSIDE - FWD (fig . A). If both FANS - ROADSIDE -FWD and FANS -CURBSIDE - FWD
are off: Go to step 263. If FANS -ROADSIDE -FWD and FANS -CURBSIDE -FWD are not CONTINUED both off:
Go to step 212.
3-873
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD ST
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
212 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
DMM 213 At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , disconnect ACTS W181 from A75J3 (fig . F) At distri Ju
and from ACTS W106P2 .
214 At ACTS , disconnect P 159 from J1 .
215 At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , connect W93P1 to A75J3 (fig . F ) , but do
UTION
not install unit .
216 At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws , release
22 AtAQ
latch and lower panel .
indic 217 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect W78P1 from J3.
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION
218 Connect test equipment for voltage measurement per fig . O.
CABLE ASSEMBLY W148
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2 P2Y
J3
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 P1
HI
-09
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
P2
HO
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 ,
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE O
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST WARNING
BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS.
D
CONTINUE
219 At distribution box (fig . B) set UTILITY POWER- 120VAC 400 HZINTERNAL to ON.
3-874
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
220 Set DMM POWER to ON.
221 At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
DO NOT CHANGE SETTING OF POI AND CRP SWITCHES WHEN PRESS TO TEST SWITCH IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
222 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to E and CRP to B. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM , indication .
If DMM indicates 26.6 - 29.4VDC : Go to step 225.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 - 29.4VDC : a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF. b. At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM . c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94 .
d. Go to step 222 . 223 Install forward curbside Fan Door A75 (fig . E) as follows :
a. Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall . b. Install 11 screws ( 4) around air door frame . c. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws ( 2) and flat
l sc aler st s re d. In sh wa (3)w. (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) holding door stay to access door . e. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door and fasten flexible side panels to door.
224 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLYto ON.
- FWD and FANS225 At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , observe FANS ROADSIDE
CURBSIDE- FWD. If both FANS- ROADSIDE- FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE- FWD
CONTINUED
f:rn to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . are tu Reof
3-875
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 3-148 .
HOOD ST
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Conti 225 -Continued IfFANS -ROADSIDE -FWD and FANS -CURBSIDE FWD are not both off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
226 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
227 At ACTS , disconnect ACTS W150 and DMM .
33 At dis
228 Install P 159 at ACTS J1 .
234 At an
W78
229 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
235 Dis
=
DO NOT CHANGE SETTING OF POI AND CRP SWITCHES WHEN PRESS TO TEST SWITCH IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT.
CAUTION
230 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to E and CRP to F. Press PRESS TO TEST while observing FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD at ambient air control panel (fig . A) .
IfFANS - ROADSIDE - FWD is on : Go to step 233.
B
If FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD is off:
a . At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , P159 and ACTS .
c. Connect W78P1 to A72J3. d . Replace Fan Door A75 per para 4-2. e. Go to step 231 .
231 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
232 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT and FANS- CURBSIDE- FWD .
3-876
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
232 -Continued If both FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT and FANS- CURBSIDE- FWD are off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- ROADSIDE- AFT and FANS- CURBSIDE- FWD are not both off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
233 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
234 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect ACTS W148 from J3 and connect W78P1 to A72J3 .
235 Disconnect W79P1 at Ambient Air Control Panel A72J6 .
236 At ACTS , disconnect P159.
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION
CABLE ASSEMBLY W148
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 | P2
237 Connect test equipment for voltage measurement
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
-09 -OF
per fig . P.
J2> AC LINE TEST SWITCH LY ASSEMB J11
J6
HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE P
AL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRIC R UST E LUGGED E T E M I T L INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN B P M MU
WARNING MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
CONTINUED 238 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set UTILITY POWER- 120VAC 400 HZ-
INTERNAL to ON.
3-877
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 3-148 .
HOOD S
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
239 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLYto ON
DO NOT CHANGE SETTING OF POIAND CRPSWITCHES WHEN PRESS TO TESTSWITCH IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
247 At AC
obse 240 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POlto F and CRPto B. Press PRESS TO TESTand observe DMM indication . If DMM indicates 26.6
29.4VDC :
Go to step 243. If DMM does not indicate 26.6 · 29.4VDC : a . At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLYto OFF
b. At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106, W 150 , ACTS and DMM . c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94. d. Go to step 241.
249 241 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLYto ON
242 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS ROADSIDE FWDand FANS CURBSIDE FWD
IF FANS ROADSIDE FWD and FANS CURBSIDE FWDare both off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If FANS ROADSIDE FWD and FANS CURBSIDE FWDare not both off : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
243 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLYto OFF
244 At ACTS , disconnect W 150 and DMM .
245 Connect test adaptor P 159 to ACTS J1 . D
CONTINUE
246 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLYto ON
3-878
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
247 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to F and CRP to H and press PRESS TO TEST while observing FANS - CURBSIDE - FWD at ambient air control panel .
If FANS - CURBSIDE - FWD is off: Go to step 250. If FANS-CURBSIDE - FWD is on : a. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , P 159 and ACTS . c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94 .
d. Go to step 248.
248 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
249 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe both FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS-
CURBSIDE - FWD . If both FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS - CURBSIDE - FWD are off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS - CURBSIDE - FWD are not both off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
250 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
251 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect ACTS W 148 from A72J6 and from ACTS W 106.
252 Connect W79P1 to A72J6.
253 At environmental control panel (fig . C), raise panel and secure by
CONTINUED
tightening four captive screws .
3-879
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HOOD ST 3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
254 At forward roadside Fan Door A56 , access cable as follows :
-Conti
a. Unlatch access door ( 8 , fig . E) , release flexible side panels (9) from door and fold back . b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ) . c. Remove screw (7) , nut ( 6) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to access door. d. Remove four screws (2) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan door and weather shield . e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan door assembly . f. Slide fan door assembly out of shelter .
DO NOT ALLOW REMOVED CABLE TO FALL BACK INTO SHELTER . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT .
259 At
CAUTION
8
255 At rear of Fan Door A56 ( fig . G ) , disconnect W82P1 from A56J3.
256 Connect ACTS W181 to A56J3 and to ACTS W106P2 .
257 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLYto ON
DO NOT CHANGE POIOR CRPSETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
258 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POIto B and CRP to D and press PRESS TO TEST while second person observes both FANS ROADSIDE FWD and FANS CURBSIDE FWDat ambient air control panel ( fig . A) . If both FANS ROADSIDE FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE
FWDare off: a. At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT
D
CONTINUE
PWR SPLYto OFF
T
3-880
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
258 -Continued b. At Fan Door A56 , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , P 159 and ACTS . c. Connect W82P1 to A56J3 (fig . F) , but do not install unit . d . Replace Air Door A50 per para 4-7. e. Go to step 259.
If FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE- FWD are not both off: a . At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At Fan Door A56 , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , P 159 and ACTS . c. Replace forward roadside Fan Door A56 per para 4-2 .
d. Go to step 261 .
259 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
260 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe both FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS-
CURBSIDE - FWD .
If both FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE - FWD are off: a. Push Fan Door Assembly A56 (fig . E) back into shelter wall . b. Install 11 screws (4) around air door frame . c. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four
screws (2) and flat washers (3). d . Install screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) holding door stay to access door. e. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door. f. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE- FWD are not both off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
261 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
CONTINUED
3-881
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
HOOD ST
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued Atdistrib
262 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe both FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS-
At ambie
CURBSIDE- FWD.
CURBS
If both FANS- ROADSIDE- FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE - FWD are off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . If FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE - FWD are not both off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
263 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
264 At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , disconnect ACTS W181 , W106 , P 159 and ACTS . Do not reconnect W93 to A75J3 at this time .
265 At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws , release latch and lower panel .
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE
WARNING MEASUREMENTS . 270
B
266 At distribution box (fig . B) , set UTILITY POWER - 120VAC 400 HZ- INTERNAL to ON.
267 Using access provided by lowered environmental control panel , connect DMM probes to forward curbside Air Door A68 terminals TB1-1 and TB 1-3 and observe DMM indications .
If DMM indicates 0.0002K
or less :
Go to step 273.
If DMM indicates more than 0.0002KM: a. Disconnect DMM probes . b. At forward curbside Fan Door A75 (fig . F) , connect W93P1 to A75J3 . Do not install fan door at this time .
c. Replace forward curbside Air Door A68 per para 4-7. d. Go to step 268.
3-882
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
268 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
269 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS- ROADSIDE- FWD and FANSCURBSIDE- FWD. If FANS- ROADSIDE- FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE- FWD are both off:
a . Push Fan Door Assembly A75 back into shelter wall (fig . E) . b. Install 11 screws (4) around air door frame. c. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws (2 ) and flat washers (3) . d . Install screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) holding door stay to access door. e. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door. f. At environmental control panel (fig . C) , raise panel and secure by
tightening four captive screws . g . At distribution box , disconnect DMM power cord . h. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- ROADSIDE- FWD and FANS- CURBSIDE- FWD are not both off:
Go to step 270.
270 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
271 At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , disconnect W93P1 from A75J3 (fig . F) .
tal control panel , connect DMM probes 272 Using access provided by lowered environmen s al TB 1-1 and TB 1-4 and observe DMM to curbside foward Air Door A68 termin
indications .
If DMM indicates 0.0002K
or less :
Call Intermediate Maintenance . s more than 0.0002KS : If DMM indicate a. At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , connect W93P1 to A75J3 (fig . F) .
b. Push Fan Door A75 back into shelter wall (fig . F). c. Install 11 screws (4) around air door frame. CONTINUED
3-883
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HOOD ST 3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Contin 272 -Continued d . Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws (2 ) and flat washers (3). e . Install screw (7) , nut (6 ) and flat washer (5 ) holding door stay to
f.
access door. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door and fasten flexible side
276 At Air
a. Low
panels to door . g . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
b. Re
c. Re 273 At Air Door A79 , access terminal board TB1 as follows (fig . E) :
d. Re
e. R a. Lower access cover (8 , fig . E) by releasing catch in middle of folding door stay.
1. S
b. Release flexible side panels (9) . c. Remove bottom screw (7) of folding door stay.
7 At
d . Remove four screws ( 1 ) from top of air door. e. Remove eight screws (2 ) from air door. f. Slide air door outward to reach terminal board TB1 ( fig . F ) .
274 At distribution box (fig . B) , disconnect DMM power cord .
For measurement described in step 275 , DMM may be operated on
NOTE
internal battery.
275 At Air Door A79 , connect DMM probes to TB1-1 and TB 1-3 and observe DMM indication .
If DMM indicates 0.0002K
or less :
a. Disconnect DMM probes.
b. Go to step 276.
If DMM indicates more than 0.0002KM: a. Disconnect DMM probes .
b. Replace Air Door A79 per para 4-7.
T
3-884
ED
CONTINU
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
275 -Continued
c. At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , connect W93P1 to A75J3 (fig . G ) . Do not install fan door at this time . d. Go to step 268 .
276 At Air Door A60, access terminal board TB1 as follows : a. Lower access cover ( 8 , fig . E) by releasing catch in middle of folding door stay.
b. Release flexible side panels (9) . c. Remove bottom screw (7) of folding door stay.
d. Remove four screws ( 1 ) from top of air door. e. Remove eight screws (2) from air door . f. Slide air door outward to reach terminal board TB 1 (fig . F) .
277 At Air Door A60 , connect DMM probes to TB 1-1 and TB 1-3 and observe DMM indication .
If DMM indicates 0.0002K
Γ
or less:
a. Disconnect DMM probes . b. Go to step 272 .
If DMM indicates more than 0.0002KM: a. Disconnect DMM probes.
Door A60 per para 4-7. b. Replace Air c. At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , connect W93P1 to A75J3 (fig . G).
Do not install fan door at this time.
d. Go to step 268 . ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST
RNING BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE WALa MEASUREMENTS . AL to ON 278 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ- INTERN
279 At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 (fig . A) , connect DMM Hlprobe to TEST POINTS- 1 and LOprobe to TEST POINTS GND. Observe DMM indication . CONTINUED
3-885
1
TM 9-1430-600-203-148 .
HOOD S
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
279 -Continued
Remov
flat wa If DMM indicates 26.6 - 29.4VDC :
todist
a. Disconnect DMM . b. Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94 .
287 Disco
tion E c. Go to step 280.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 · 29.4VDC :
a. Disconnect DMM . b. Go to step 281 .
280 At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 (fig . A) , observe FANS ROADSIDE -FWD .
281 At forward roadside Fan Door A56 , determine if fan motor is running .
If fan motor is running : Go to step 316.
If fan motor is not running : Go to step 282. 282 At distribution box (fig . B ) , observe ROADSIDE FANS FWD .
IfROADSIDE FANS FWD tripped :
a. Fault isolate ROADSIDE FANS FWD per para 3-83. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfROADSIDE FANS FWD is on : Go to step 283.
283 At distribution box, setROADSIDE FANS FWD to OFF .
284 At distribution box (fig . Q) , remove two screws , flat washers and nuts ( 2 ) .
285 At shielding gasket , remove 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers ( 1 ) that secure gasket to shelter . ED
CONTINU
3-886
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
286 Remove five self- locking nuts and flat washers (3) that secure gasket to distribution box . Remove gasket.
287 Disconnect W433P1 from distribu-
A
tion box J4 (4) .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT CAUTION
JIB
ال REMOVED .
J14 -AFIGURE Q
288 Connect test equipment for voltage measurements per fig . R.
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 /
CABLE ASSEMBLY W107
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1
J4
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P1
P2
1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
HI LO DIGITALETER MULTIM 8125A -AQ-0
FIGURE R
WARNING Le
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN TS
MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMEN
.
289 At distribution box , set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZCONTINUED INTERNAL to ON.
3-887
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
HOOD ST 3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
23 At ACTS
each se ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DO NOT TOUCH CABLE CONNECTORS OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER WHEN WARNING MEASURING VOLTAGES .
290 At distribution box (fig . B) , set ROADSIDE FANS- FWD to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
291 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI and CRP to positions indicated in table A. Press PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe voltage displayed on DMM .
TABLE
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH
A B C B
C с
LOW
HIGH
CRP
EEEAAB
ΡΟΙ
A
114
126
114
126
114
126
198
218
198
218
Α В
198
218
294
If all DMM indications are within specified limits : Go to step 294.
If any DMM indication is outside specified limits : a . Replace A66 CB 12 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 292.
292 At distribution box , set ROADSIDE FANS- FWD to ON.
ED
CONTINU
T
3-888
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
293 At ACTS , set POI and CRP in the sequence listed in table A. PushPRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe DMM indication .
If all DMM indications are within specified limits:
a. At distribution box , set ROADSIDE FANS FWD to OFF . b. Disconnect ACTS W107 , W106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM . c. At distribution box (fig . Q) connect W433P 1 to distribution box connector J4. d . At distribution box , install shielding gasket by installing five selflocking nuts and flat washers (3 , fig . Q) that secure gasket to distribution box . e. At shielding gasket , install 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers
f.
(1 ) that secure gasket to shelter . At distribution box , install two screws , flat washers and nuts (2 ).
g . SetROADSIDE FANS FWD toON . h. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If any DMM indication is outside specified limits : a. At distribution box , set ROADSIDE FANS -FWD to OFF .
b. Disconnect ACTS W107 , W106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
294 At distribution box , set ROADSIDE FANS FWD to OFF .
295 Disconnect ACTS W107 from distribution box J4 (fig . Q) and from ACTS W 106P2 .
AL to OFF 296 At distribution box (fig . B ) , setUTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ INTERN
and disconnect DMM power cord .
297 Connect W433P1 to distribution box J4 (fig . Q) .
298 At distribution box , install shielding gasket by installing five self-locking nuts and flat washers (3 , fig . Q) that secure gasket to distribution box . 299 At shielding gasket , install 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers ( 1 ) that secure
gasket to shelter.
CONTINUED
3-889
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
HOOD ST 3-148.
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
300 At distribution box , install two screws , flat washers and nuts (2 , fig . Q).
301 At forward roadside Fan Door A56 , access cables as follows :
XUTION a. Unlatch access door (8 , fig . E) , release flexible side panels ( 9) from door and fold
At ACT
back .
push F
b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ) . c. Remove screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to access door . d. Remove four screws (2) and flat washers (3 ) . Remove fan door and weather shield . e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan door assembly . f. Slide fan door assembly (fig . F) , out of shelter .
DO NOT ALLOW REMOVED CABLE TO FALL BACK INTO SHELTER . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT .
CAUTION
302 At rear of Fan Door A56 ( fig . F ) disconnect W18P 1 from A56J1 .
303 Connect test
equipment for voltage measurements per fig . S.
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1/
CABLE ASSEMBLY W18
CABLE ASSEMBLY W101
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 1 P2
J2
P1
306 P1
P2
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO A56J1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150 HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE S
For measurements described in following step 304 , DMM may be operated on NOTE internal battery power.
ED
CONTINU
304 At distribution box , set ROADSIDE FANS FWDto ON.
3-890
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
305 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI and CRP in the sequence listed in table B. At each setting , push PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM indication . TABLE
B
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH CRP
LOW
HIGH
ΡΟΙ ABC
114
126
E
114
126
E
114
126
E
C
If all DMM indications are within specified limits :
Go to step 306.
If any DMM indication is outside specified limits : a. At distribution box , set ROADSIDE FANS- FWD to OFF .
b. Disconnect ACTS W101 , W106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance . 306 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set ROADSIDE FANS - FWD to OFF .
307 At forward roadside Fan Door A56 (fig . F) , disconnect ACTS W101 from W18P1 and
ACTS W 106.
308 Connect W18P1 at fan door J1 , but do not install fan door at this time .
309 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
l control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws , release latch , and
310 At environmenta
lower panel .
311 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1) , disconnect W79P1 from A72J6 . CONTINUED
312 Connect test equipment per fig . P.
3-891
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
HOOD S 3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
016 At forwa
313 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to H and CRP to A. Push PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM
plunge indication . If DMM indicates 0.0002K or less : a. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106, W150 , ACTS and DMM . b. Connect W79P1 to A72J6 . c. Replace Fan Door A56 per para 4-2.
At d
d. Go to step 314.
toO If DMM indicates more than 0.0002KN. a. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , W150 , 318At
ACTS and DMM . b. Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94.
a.
c. Push Fan Door A56 assembly back into shelter wall . b.
d. Install 11 screws (4 , fig . F) around air door frame . e. Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws ( 2) and
f.
flat washers (3). Install screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) holding door stay to
access door . g. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door and fasten flexible side panels to door . h. Go to step 328.
314 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and ROADSIDE FANS - FWD
to ON.
315 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD .
If FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD is off: a. At environmental control panel (fig . C) , raise panel and secure by
tightening four captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-892
ED
CONTINU
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
316 At forward roadside Fan Door A56 , swing air filter cover back and forth to determine if plunger operating switch S1 (fig . L) is stuck .
If fan door switch plunger is stuck: Go to step 317.
If fan door switch plunger is free : Go to step 322.
317 At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and ROADSIDE FANS - FWD to OFF .
318 At Fan Door A56 (fig . E ) , access switch plunger as follows :
a. Unlatch access door ( 8 , fig . E) , release flexible side panels (9) from door and fold
back . b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ). c. Remove screw (7) , nut (6 ) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to
acce vedoor. moss d. Re four screws (2) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan door and weather shield .
e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan door assembly. f. Slide fan door outward to access cover (fig . L) and remove four screws and flat
washers . Remove cover.
g. Attempt to free plunger .
If fan door plunger is free : Go to step 319 .
If fan door plunger is stuck : (1 ) Replace Fan Door A56 per para 4-2 . (2) Go to step 320.
319 Install Fan Door A56 as follows :
a. Install access cover (fig . L) and secure with four screws and flat washers .
b. Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall .
c. Install 11 screws (4, fig . E) around air door frame . d . Replace fan door weather shield and secure with four screws (2)
CONTINUED
and flat washers (3 ).
3-893
1
TM 9-1430-600-203-148 .
HOOD ST
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
27-Conti
319 -Continued e. Install screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5 ) holding door stay to access door . f. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door and fasten flexible side panels to door.
320 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and ROADSIDE FANS- FWD to ON
321 At ambient air control panel , observe FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD.
If FANS- ROADSIDE FWD is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If FANS- ROADSIDE- FWD is off: 328 At
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
329 A
322 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
323 At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws and lower panel .
324 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect W79P1 from control panel J6.
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST WARNING BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED .
CAUTION
325 Connect test equipment for voltage measurement per fig . P.
326 At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ- INTERNAL to ON.
327 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to E and CRP to B. Push PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM indication .
3-894
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
327 -Continued
If DMM indicates 26.6 - 29.4VDC : Go to step 330.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 -29.4VDC :
a . At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF . b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , W150, ACTS and DMM . c. Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94 .
d . Go to step 328 .
328 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
329 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS ROADSIDE FWD .
IfFANS ROADSIDE FWD is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfFANS ROADSIDE FWD is on:
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
330 At distribution box , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
331 At ACTS , disconnect ACTS W 150 and DMM .
332 Connect P 159 to ACTS J1 .
333 At distribution box , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
334 At ACTS (fig . H) , setPOI to E and CRP to D. PushPRESS TO TEST and observe FANS ROADSIDE FWD at ambient air control panel .
DE FWD is off: IfFANS ROADSI a. At distribution box , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 ,
CONTINUED
W106 , ACTS and P159.
3-895
1
TM 9-1430-600-203-148 .
HOOD ST
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
334 -Continued
ARNING
c. Replace ambient air control panel per para 4-94. At distri
d. Go to step 337.
At amb
If FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD is on : a. At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF.
DMM
b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , ACTS and P159 . c. Connect W79P1 to A72J6 (fig . 1 ). d . Raise environmental control panel (fig . C) and secure by tightening four captive screws . e. Replace Fan Door A56 per para 4-2 . f. Go to step 335 .
335 At distribution box (fig . B) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
341 336 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , observe FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD .
If FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD is on :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
337 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON.
338 At ambient air control panel , observe FANS - ROADSIDE - FWD .
If FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS- ROADSIDE - FWD is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
D
CONTINUE
T
3-896
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST Le G WARNIN BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS . 339 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ INTERNALTO ON
340 At ambient air control panel (fig . A) , connect DMM HIprobe to TEST POINTS 3and DMM LOprobe to TEST POINTS GND Observe DMM indication .
If DMM indicates 26.6 - 29.4VDC : a. Disconnect DMM . b. Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94 .
c. Go to step 341 .
If DMM does not indicate 26.6
29.4VDC :
a. Disconnect DMM . b. Go to step 342 . 341 At ambient air control panel , observe FANS CURBSIDE FWD
If FANS CURBSIDE FWDis on: e Call Intermediate Maintenanc .
If FANS CURBSIDE FWDIS off: h Return to procedure that brought you to this paragrap .
342 At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , determine if fan motor is running .
If fan motor is running : Go to step 369 . If fan motor is not running :
Go to step 343. 343 At distribution box (fig . B ) , observe CURBSIDE FANS FWD-
E S FWD tripped : If CURBSID FAN a. Fault isolate CURBSIDE FANS FWD Circuit breaker per CONTINUED
e aph . b. pa Retu rarn 85.procedur that brought you to this paragr 3-to
3-897
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 3-148 .
HOOD ST
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
343 -Continued NING
If CURBSIDE FANS FWDis ON
At dist
Go to step 344.
344 At distribution box , set CURBSIDE FANS- FWD to OFF.
345 At distribution box ( fig . Q) , remove two screws , flat washers and nuts (2 ) .
346 At shielding gasket , remove 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers ( 1 ) that secure UTION
gasket to shelter .
At A
TES
347 Remove five self- locking nuts and flat washers (3) that secure gasket to distribution box . Remove gasket .
348 Disconnect cable assembly W432P1 from distribution box J3 ( 5 ) .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED . CAUTION
J2 349 Connect test equipment for voltage measure-
CABLE ASSEMBLY W107
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1
J3
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY P1
P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
IO
ments per fig . T.
HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE T ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DIGITAL MULTIMETER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS .
D
CONTINUE
350 At distribution box (fig . B) , set UTILITY POWER- 120VAC 400 HZINTERNAL to ON.
3-898
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
-Continued 3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION
ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD IS PRESENT . DO NOT TOUCH CABLE CONNECTORS OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER WHEN Le MEASURING VOLTAGES . WARNING
351 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set CURBSIDE FANS FWD to ON .
IS SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST AND DO NOT CHANGE ΡΟΙ P CR PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
in the sequence listed in table C. Push PRESS TO and CRP 352 At ACTS (fig . H ) , set POI ΡΟΙ TEST for each setting and observe DMM indication .
TABLE
C
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC) SWITCH HIGH
CRP
LOW
ΡΟΙ
ABC
114
126
E
114
126
E
198
218
198
218
C
wwwAA
114
126
E
218
B
198
C
А
B
If all DMM indications are within specified limits :
Go to step 355 .
If any DMM indications is outside specified limits : a. Replace A66 CB14 per para 4-81 . b. Go to step 353 . to ON
353 At distribution box , set CURBSIDE FANS FWD
for
354 At ACTS , set pol and CRP in the sequence listed in table C. Push PRESS TO TEST PO d! observe DMM indication . each setting an
If all DMM indications are within specified limits : a. At distribution box , set CURBSIDE FANS FWD to OFF b. Disconnect ACTS W107 , W106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM .
CONTINUED
I
3-899
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HOOD ST 3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
62-Conti
354 -Continued
c. Remc
c. At distribution box (fig . Q ) , connect W432P 1 to distribution box J3.
acce d . Install shielding gasket by installing five self- locking nuts and flat washers (3 , fig . Q) that secure gasket to distribution box .
d. Rem
e . At shielding gasket , install 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers
e. Ren
1. Slic
(1 ) that secure gasket to shelter . f.
At distribution box , install two screws , flat washers and nuts (2 ) .
g . Set CURBSIDE FANS- FWD to ON. h. Go to step 374.
CAUTION
If any DMM indication is outside specified limits : a . At distribution box , set CURBSIDE FANS- FWD to OFF. b . Disconnect ACTS W107 , W 106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM .
At
c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
di
f 355 At distribution box , set CURBSIDE FANS- FWD to OFF .
356 Disconnect ACTS W107 from distribution box J3 (fig . Q) and from ACTS W 106P2 .
357 At distribution box , set UTILITY POWER 120VAC 400 HZ- INTERNAL to OFF and
365 disconnect DMM power cord .
358 Connect W432P1 to distribution box J3.
359 At distribution box (fig . Q ) , install shielding gasket by installing five self- locking nuts and flat washers (3) that secure gasket to distribution box.
360 At shielding gasket , install 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers ( 1 ) that secure gasket to shelter .
361
At distribution box , install two screws , flat washers and nuts (2 ).
362 At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , access cables as follows:
a. Unlatch access door (8, fig . E ) , release flexible side panels (9 ) from door and fold back. b. At top of door, remove three screws ( 1 ).
3-900
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
362 -Continued
c. Remove screw (7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to access door. d. Remove four screws (2 ) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan door and weather shield . e. Remove 11 screws (4) around air door frame on fan door assembly.
f. Slide fan door assembly out of shelter.
DO NOT ALLOW REMOVED CABLE TO FALL BACK INTO SHELTER . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE MAY RESULT . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT IF GROUND STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGIAL MULTIMETER IS NOT REMOVED . CAUTIONS
•
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 J2P1 AC LINE TEST SWITCH LY ASSEMB P1 J1 /
363 At rear of fan door, disconnect W17P1 from
fan-door J1 (fig . F) .
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
per fig . U.
J2P1
P2
LY NORMALTED CONNEC TO FAN DOOR احد A75J1 -09 -OE
364 Connect test equipment for voltage measurement
CABLE ASSEMBLY W17
CABLE ASSEMBLY W101
HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
365 At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set CURBSIDE FANS -FWD to ON .
FIGURE U
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT. CAUTION
ents
For measurem
described in step 366 , DMM may be operated on internal
NOTE
battery power .
366 At ACTS , press POI and CRP in the sequence listed in table D. At each setting push PRESS TO TEST and observe DMM
CONTINUED
indication .
3-901
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 3-148 .
HOOD ST
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
70 At distr
366 -Continued "OFF .
TABLE
D
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC)
SWITCH
371 At Fan
LOW
ΡΟΙ
CRP
HIGH
E
114
126
a. Unl
A
ba b. At
B
E
114
126
E
114
126
C
c. Re a
If all DMM indications are within specified limits : a. At distribution box , set CURBSIDE FANS - FWD to OFF.
d. R
b . At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , disconnect ACTS W101 , W106 ,
e. P
W 150 , ACTS and DMM .
1. S
c. Replace Fan Door A75 per para 4-2.
9. d . Go to step 367 .
If any DMM indication is outside specified limits : a. At distribution box , set CURBSIDE FANS - FWD to OFF. b. Disconnect ACTS W101 , W106 , W150 , ACTS and DMM . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
367 At distribution box , set CURBSIDE FANS- FWD to ON.
368 At ambient air control panel , observe FANS- CURBSIDE - FWD .
37
If FANS- CURBIDE- FWD is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If FANS-CURBSIDE- FWD is on :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
369 At forward curbside Fan Door A75 , swing air filter cover (8 , fig . E) back and forth to determine if plunger that operates switch S1 is stuck.
If fan door switch plunger is stuck: Go to step 370. D
CONTINUE
If fan door switch plunger is free: Go to step 375.
3-902
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
370 At distribution box , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and CURBSIDE FANS FWD to OFF .
371 At Fan Door A75 ( fig . E) , access switch plunger as follows :
a. Unlatch access door ( 8 , fig . E) , release flexible side panels (9) from door and fold back . b. At top of door , remove three screws ( 1 ) . c. Remove screw (7) , nut ( 6) and flat washer (5) that holds folding door stay to access door. d . Remove four screws (2 ) and flat washers (3) . Remove fan door and weather shield .
e. Remove 11 screws ( 4 ) around air door frame on fan door assembly . f. Slide fan door outward to access cover (fig . L) and remove four screws and flat washers . Remove cover . g . Attempt to free plunger .
If fan door plunger is free : [
Go to step 372.
If fan door plunger is stuck : (1 ) Replace Fan Door A75 per para 4-2. (2) Go to step 373.
372 Install Fan Door A75 as follows :
a. Install access cover (fig . L) and secure with four screws and flat washers .
b. Push fan door assembly back into shelter wall .
c. Install 11 screws (4 , fig.Er) around air door frame . d . Replace fan door weathe shield and secure with four screws (2) and flat washers (3).
e. Install screw ( 7) , nut (6) and flat washer (5) holding door stay to access door. f. Install three screws ( 1 ) at top of fan door and fasten flexible side panels to door .
373 At distribution box , setPWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and CURBSIDE
FANS FWD to ON .
CONTINUED
3-903
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
HOOD ST 3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
-Contir
374 At ambient air control panel ( fig . A) , observe FANS CURBSIDE FWD
IfFANS CURBSIDE FWD is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
IfFANS CURBSIDE FWD is off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
375 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
376 At environmental control panel (fig . C) , loosen four captive screws , release latch and
lower panel . 377 At ambient air control panel (fig . 1 ) , disconnect W78P1 from control panel J3.
381 At
378 Connect test equipment per fig . V.
pa
CABLE ASSEMBLY W148
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1
J3
02 > AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1/
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72
TEST ADAPTOR P159
FIGURE V
379 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON .
DO NOT CHANGE POI AND CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
380 At ACTS (fig . H) , set POI to E and CRP to D. Push PRESS TO TEST and observe FANS CURBSIDE - FWD at ambient air control panel .
IfFANS -CURBSIDE -FWD is on:
a. At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
3-904
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-148 .
HOOD STATUS AND FAN LIGHTS FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
380 -Continued
b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , P 159 and ACTS . c . Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94 . d . Go to step 381 .
If FANS -CURBSIDE - FWD is off: a . At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to OFF .
b. At ambient air control panel , disconnect ACTS W148 , W106 , P 159 and ACTS . c. Connect W78P 1 to ambient air control panel J3 (fig . 1). d . Replace Fan Door A75 per para 4-2 . e. Go to step 382 .
381 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON and at ambient air control panel , observe FANS -CURBSIDE - FWD .
If FANS -CURBSIDE - FWD is on: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If FANS -CURBSIDE - FWD is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
382 At distribution box , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY to ON and at ambient air control
panel , observe FANS - CURBSIDE - FWD .
If FANS-CURBSIDE - FWD is on:
e Call Intermediate Maintenanc .
SIDE - FW If FANS-CURB l D is off: a. At environmenta control panel (fig . C) , raise panel and secure by
tightening four captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-905
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
R
ROADMA
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION
3-149 .
AtDistrib observe
Pa
000
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72
Set B
ROA
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
DSI
DE GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64
POWER SUPPLY A25
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Switch Assembly , AC Line Test Multimeter , Digital , 8125A - AQ- O Cable Assembly W102 Cable Assembly W106
10
Cable Assembly W 108 Cable Assembly W 109
Cable Assembly W148 Cable Assembly W150 Pliers , Electrical Connector Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In . Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 4 In .
B
Wrench , Spin - Tight Socket , 3/8 In.
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL BATTLE SHORT BATTLE SHORT
At Generator Control Panel
COMM
PHASE B PHASE PHASE C A OFF O
G
1
TO NEUTRAL PHASEVOLTAGE
GENS ON SUM FAULT FUEL LINE LTAGE SUM GEN O LAMP OVERVO TEST FAIRT RESET FAULT THE GENERATOR POWER ECS TURBINES RADAR OFF OFF OFF COMM
ON
A64 (fig . A) , verify that
ON
ON
GENERATOR POWER - ECS is set to OFF .
FIGURE A D
CONTINUE
3-906
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-149 .
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B ) ,
2
observe BATTERY POWER . EPPPUS.Put UNEANS IfBATTERY POWER is on :
A COND
SECUREP PRINTER TIDO RELAYTERM J BEF DISPLAY CONTRO ROADSIONON CURNSIDE
Go to step 4. AIR COND CONNSIDE
SOTERY POWER
COMFOTER OH VOICE FWCOMINSPLY
Go to step 3.
ออ
If BATTERY POWER is off:
78VDC BOTERY POWERSUPPLY TEST $30US LAMP 515 шет POWIA ON OFF 2 口 SECUREP BUT COMSUN ROADSION A4 AST AFF 100 ON N सरAVOC अर OFFRASIO IST D FMRDISPER COMM ALL -TERM CONTWO 701SPLY ON ON ON OFF OFF ART WOO CONTROL Rift! ROADSIDE MENTAS CONTROL 21 B Der S 255 2FF STILITYPOWER Ok 129 400HZ EXTERNAL CASTRERECT 941 DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICALLIT WEIGHT LOS 3
Set BATTERY POWER to ON.
FIGURE B IfBATTERY POWER remains on :
Go to step 4. Y POWER trip s If BATTER a. Perform Distribution : Box A66 EPP INPUT PWR- BATTERY POWER
Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation per para 3-152. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
4
Observe DISPLAY /CONTROL .
If DISPLAY /CONTROL is on : Go to step 6.
If DISPLAY /CONTROL is off : Go to step 5.
5
Set DISPLAY /CONTROL to ON .
If DISPLAY /CONTROL remains on :
Go to step 6.
TROL tripso: x 66 OT ECURE PWR -28VDCLAY /C m ON If DI S N A B Distribution Perfor a. SP DISPLAY /CONTROL Circuit Breaker Tripped Fault Isolation
89.edure that brought you to this paragraph . r pa rnra etu 3-oc to pr Re b. p CONTINUED
3-907
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ROADMAR
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-149 .
At distri andPOV
At Power Supply A25 (fig . C) , observe A87
ATA87$24 WCC ANDKY57 ON ON
RT-524 AND KY57 .
OFF OFF UHE AT-A8B524 OLT ANTCONT ANDKYST ON ON ON
6
IfA87 RT- 524 AND KY57 is on:
OFF
OFF
OFF
Go to step 8.
IfA87 RT-524 AND KY57 is off:
FIGURE C
Go to step 7.
At power supply (fig . C) , set A87 RT - 524 AND KY57 to on : 7
At EC
IfA87 RT - 524 AND KY57 remains on: Go to step 8 .
IfA87 RT-524 AND KY57 trips : a . Perform 28VDC Power Supply A25 Circuit Breaker A87 RT- 524 and KY-57 Tripped Fault Isolation per para 3-17 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . At distribution box (fig . B ) , observe BATTERY POWER and POWER SUPPLY STATUS 8
(PS1 and PS2) indicator lamps . If all three lamps are off: Go to step 27.
If any lamp ( s ) on : Go to step 9.
Hold LAMP TEST (fig . B ) to ON , and observe BATTERY POWER and POWER SUPPLY 9
STATUS ( PS1 and PS2) indicator lamps .
If all three lamps are on: a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Go to step 11 .
If BATTERY POWER lamp is off: a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Replace lamp A66DS1 per para 5-54. c. Go to step 10.
If POWER SUPPLY STATUS ( PS1 or PS2 ) is off: a . Release LAMP TEST. D
b. Replace lamp A66A 1DS1 / DS2 per para 5-54 . c . Go to step 10.
3-908
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-149.
10
At distribution box (fig . B ) , holdLAMP TEST to ON and observe BATTERY POWER and POWER SUPPLY STATUS ( PS1 and PS2) indicator lamps .
If all lamps are on: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If any lamp (s) is off: Go to step 12.
At ECS vehicle cab , check VHF voice communications . 11
If VHF voice communications operational : Go to step 12.
If VHF voice communications not operational :
Go to step 51 .
At distribution box , observe BATTERY POWER lamp . 12
If BATTERY POWER lamp is on :
Go to step 14. If BATTERY POWER lamp is off: a. Replace Distribution Box A66 Relay Assembly A2 per
para 4-72 . b. Go to step 13.
At distribution box , observe BATTERY POWER lamp . 13
IfBATTERY POWER lamp is on , fault is corrected :
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfBATTERY POWER lamp is off:
e Call Intermediate Maintenanc .
At distribution box , observe 28VDC -POWER SUPPLY STATUS lamps . 14
If both lamps are on :
CONTINUED Go to step 16.
3-909
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
ROADMA ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-149 .
b. Go to step 15. OO
At distribution box , observe 28VDC15
POWER SUPPLY STATUS lamps .
AMBIENT AIRCONTROL PANEL O FANS SEOPT AIRFLOW TEMP ROADSOF CURBSIDE F80 FWD VALVE AIRFLOWFLAPPER HIGH NORMALLYCLOSED AFT AFT OUTSIDE LOY OPEN ONLYWHENORBELOW TEMPFREEZING
OSTATUL
ZBV HOOD CLOSED NC. AS CS CS AFT O FWD RS -AKT FWO
O
00
!O
If both lamps are on , fault is O
corrected : Return to procedure that
FIGURE D
brought you to this paragraph .
If both lamps are not on :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 ( fig . D) , 16
A
observe 28V ONlamp . If 28V ONlamp is on: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If 28V ON lamp is off:
3
Go to step 17.
J16
320
4 TAI J28 ME 17
At distribution box (fig . B) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL to OFF.
5
A-
FIGURE E 18
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . E) , remove two screws , flat washers , and nuts (2 ) .
19
At shielding gasket , remove 13 screws , lockwashers , and flat washers ( 1 ) that secure gasket to shelter.
20
Remove five self-locking nuts and flat washers (3) that secure gasket to distribution box . Remove gasket. D
CONTINUE
21
3-910
Disconnect W76P1 from J10 (4).
At exte
At DM
cable .
switc
Set L ਨੂੰ setu
LAN TEST
TEST POINTS
B
If both lamps are not on : a. Replace Distribution Box A66 Relay Assembly A2 per para 4-72 .
B
-Continued
14
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-149 .
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
8125A DIGITAL MULTIMETER INPUT 22
At extension cable , connect DMM power FLTR VAC VDC cable .
POWER ON
GD POWER
23
+1.1999 RANGE 10 100 1000
At DMM (fig . F) , press VDC and RANGE - 100 switches and set POWER switch to ON.
HTR 1/2A
INSTR 1/BAY LOWTEMP POWER
100 %
FIGURE F 24
Set up test equipment for voltage measurement per fig . G.
CABLE ASSEMBLY W109
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1
P1
J2> AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
P1
J10 DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
P2
11 /
HI
-09
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-O
FIGURE G
At distribution box (fig . B) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL to ON. 25
DO NOT CHANGE SETTING OF POI OR CRP WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . EQUIPMENT DAMAGE WILL RESULT . CAUTION
26
At AC Line Test Switch (ACTS , fig . H) , set POIto C and CRP to E. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe voltage displayed on DMM (fig . F) .
CONTINUED
3-911
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
ROADMA
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At Dist
B
3-149 .
panel
-Continued
26
safety If DMM indication is 26.6 to 29.4VDC :
eight
b. Disconnect DMM , ACTS , and ACTS W 106, W109 and W 150.
CRP
At ex
DMM
2
ΡΟΙ
ОРО
S
a. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL to OFF .
c. At Distribution Box A66 connector J10
At D
RAN
(fig . E) , connect W76P 1 .
toC
d . Install shielding gasket and secure
PRESS TO TEST
[
with five self-locking nuts and flat At
washers (3 , fig . E) .
FIGURE H
CO
e . Install 13 screws , lockwashers and
TE
flat washers ( 1 , fig . E ) securing gasket
C
to shelter . f.
Install two screws , flat washers and nuts (2 , fig . E ) .
g . Go to step 73. If DMM indication is not 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a . At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM , ACTS , and ACTS W106 , W 109 and W 150. c. Call Intermediate Maintenance . At ECS vehicle cab , check VHF voice communications .
27
If VHF voice communications are operational :
a . At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER to OFF . b. Go to step 28. If VHF voice communications are not operational :
a. At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to OFF . 門
૧
b. Go to step 39.
28
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . 1 ) , release 32 captive
screws and lower panel . FIGURE I
3-912
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-149 .
INTERLOCK ACTUATOR 29
At Distribution Box A66 panel (fig . J ) , remove large safety shield by releasing eight captive screws .
30
At extension cable , connect DMM power cable .
31
At DMM (fig . F) , press VDC , RANGE - 100 and set POWER to ON .
FIGURE J 32
At Distribution Box A66 , connect DMM test leads to TB1-7A (fig . K) (LO ) and CB29-4 (fig . L) (HI ) .
TB1-7A
85
CB29 FIGURE K
FIGURE L
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE (208VAC) IS PRESENT WHEN INTERLOCK PLUNGER A66S2 IS PULLED OUT . AVOID CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL
WARNING TERMINALS .
At distribution box (fig . J) , pull out interlock actuator of A66S2 . 33
At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER to ON and observe DMM indication . 34
If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4VDC: a . At distribution box , set BATTERY POWER to OFF .
b. Disconnect DMM and DMM test leads .
CONTINUED
3-913
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
ROADMA
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-149 .
At distri
(PS1 an
-Continued c. At distribution box panel (fig . J) , install safety shield and
34
secure with eight captive screws . d . Replace Distribution Box A66 Relay Assembly A2 per para 4-72 . e. At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER to ON.
f.
Go to step 35.
b. Go to step 36.
B
a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER to OFF .
At di
=
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4VDC :
Ate
At distribution box (fig . B) , observe the following lamps : At
35
BATTERY POWER POWER SUPPLY STATUS - PS1 and PS2 If all three lamps are on , fault is corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all three lamps are not on :
At distribution box (fig . L) , disconnect DMM test lead ( HI) from CB29-4 and connect to 36
CB29-3 . At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to ON. 37
If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a. At distribution box , set BATTERY POWER to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM and DMM test leads . c. Replace Distribution Box A66 circuit breaker CB29 per para 4-82. d . Set BATTERY POWER to ON. e. Go to step 38.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a . At distribution box , set BATTERY POWER to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM and DMM test leads . c. At distribution box panel (fig . J) , install safety shield and secure with eight captive screws . d . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-914
ED
CONTINU
B
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-149 .
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , observe BATTERY POWER and POWER SUPPLY STATUS 38 (PS1 and PS2) indicator lamps .
If all three lamps are on :
a . Fault corrected . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all three lamps are off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box (fig . 1 ) , release 32 captive screws and lower panel . 39
40
At extension cable , connect DMM power cable .
At DMM ( fig . F) , press VDC , RANGE - 100 and set POWER to ON . 41
Le
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGE (208VAC ) IS PRESENT WHEN INTERLOCK PLUNGER A66S2 IS PULLED OUT . AVOID CONTACT WITH ELECTRICAL
WARNING
TERMINALS .
43
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . J) , pull out interlock actuator of A66S2 .
At Distribution Box A66 (fig.M ) , connect DMM test
DMM LO to FL2 - ( lower terminal)
31
leads to Filter FL2 as follows :
Θ FL3D O FL2 LOAD O LOงAD D C อ Θ
• OFLIO O LOAD N O O O O Θ
O
42
B
? Θ
A
O
O
Ο
DMMHI to FL2 + (upper terminal ) e
FIGURE M At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER to ON . 44
If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a. Set BATTERY POWER to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM and DMM test leads . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
CONTINUED
3-915
1
TM 9-1430-600-20-
ROADMA
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3-149 .
At distri
-Continued
to CB25
44 If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a. Set BATTERY POWER to OFF . b. At distribution box , disconnect DMM and DMM test leads .
LINE
CB25
c. Go to step 45 . LOAD
45
At Distribution Box A66 panel (fig.N ) , remove safety shield by releasing two round captive nuts . At distribution box , connect DMM test
46
leads as follows :
47
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to ON .
B
DMM LO to TB1-7 (fig . M ) DMM HI to CB25 - LOAD ( fig . N)
FIGURE N
At fo
B If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4VDC :
P a. Set BATTERY POWER to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM and DMM test leads . c. At distribution box panel (fig . N , install safety shield by securing two
round captive nuts . d . Replace Distribution Box A66 Filter FL2 per para 4-76 . e . Set BATTERY POWER to ON. f. Go to step 48.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4VDC : Go to step 49.
At distribution box (fig . B ) , observe BATTERY POWER and POWER SUPPLY STATUS 48
(PS1 and PS2 ) indicator lamps .
If all three lamps are on :
a . Fault is corrected . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all three lamps are off:
Call Intermediate Maintenance . D
CONTINUE
3-916
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3-149 .
At distribution box (fig . N ) , disconnectHI DMM test lead from CB25 - LOAD and connect 49
to CB25 - LINE . IF DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4VDC :
a. Set BATTERY POWER to OFF . b. Disconnect DMM and DMM test leads . c. Replace Distribution Box A66 CB25 per para 4-83. d. Go to step 50.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4VDC :
a . Disconnect DMM and DMM test leads . b. At distribution box , install safety shield and secure with two round captive nuts . c. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER to ON and observe the 50
following lamps : BATTERY POWER
POWER SUPPLY STATUS PS1 and PS2
D
If all three lamps are on:
a. Fault is corrected . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all three lamps are off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
51
SetBATTERY POWER to OFF .
At distribution box (fig . E) , remove two screws , flat washers and nuts (2). 52
At shielding gasket , remove 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers ( 1 ) that secure 53 gasket to shelter . Remove five self - locking nuts and flat washers (3) that secure gasket to distribution 54
box . Remove gasket .
55
Disconnect W73P1 from J11 (5) .
CONTINUED At extension cable , connect DMM power cable . 56
3-917
0-1
TM 9-1430-600-2
9.ROADM
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
3-149 .
At DMM (fig . F) , press VDC and RANGE- 100 and set POWER to ON. 57
CAUTION
ER INPUT CABLE W150P2 WILL NOT FIT ON DIGITAL MULTIMET D FROM LO AND S VE P LO AND HI UNLESS GD STRA IS REMO TERMINAL At A
for e
CAUTION
GD TERMINALS .
Set up test equipment for voltage measurement per fig . O. 58
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W108
P1
20
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
J1
P2
པ1 /
اشم
P1
-OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
HI
YJ11 LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
FIGURE O
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to ON. 59
ED
CONTINU
3-918
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-149.
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT. CAUTION
160
At ACTS (fig . H ) , press POI and CRP switches as indicated . Press PRESS TO TEST for each set of positions given in table A , and observe the DMM voltage indications .
TABLE
A
VOLTAGE LIMITS
SWITCH CRP
LOW
HIGH
ΡΟΙ
29.4
D
26.6
A
29.4
E
26.6
B
F
26.6
29.4
C
If all voltages are within specified limits : a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER to OFF . b. Disconnect ACTS W108P1 from J11 . c. Connect W73P1 to J11 . d. Install shielding gasket and secure with five self - locking nuts and flat
washers (3 , fig . E) . e. Install 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers ( 1 ) securing gasket to
f.
shelter . Install two screws , flat washers and nuts (2) .
g . Go to step 61 .
If all voltages are not within specified limits : a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set BATTERY POWER to OFF .
b. Disconnect ACTS W108J2 from J11 . c. Disconnect DMM , ACTS and ACTS W108 , W106 and W150. d . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At ACTS W 106 P2 (fig . O ) , disconnect ACTS W108J1 . 61
At Power Supply A25 (fig . P) , release four captive screws and pull
CONTINUED
62 unit out on slides .
3-919
0-1
TM 9-1430-600-2
ROADM
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
3-149 .
9
Disconnect W73P2 from power supply J4, at rear of
63
RT524 WCC ANDXY57 ON ON A87 OFF UHF RT524 ANTCONT ANDKYS? ON ON ON DLT A88 OFF OFF OFF
unit .
Set up test equipment for voltage measurement
64
-Co
I
A
per fig . Q.
A
J2 J4
FIGURE P
J2 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P1 P2) > J1
P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W73
CABLE ASSEMBLY W102 P2
P2
8
J1 /
NORMALLY CONNECTED TO 28VDC POWER SUPPLY A25J4
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
8
HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0
FIGURE Q
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to ON. 65
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
At ACTS (fig . H) , press POland CRP switches as indicated . Press 66
PRESS TO TEST for each set of positions given in table B , and observe the DMM voltage indications .
3-920
ED
CONTINU
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-149 .
66
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued B
TABLE
VOLTAGE LIMITS
SWITCH
ΡΟΙ
CRP
LOW
HIGH
A
D
26.6
29.4
B
E
26.6
29.4
C
F
26.6
29.4
If all voltages are within specified limits : a . At distribution box (fig . B ) , setBATTERY POWER toOFF . b. At W73P2 , disconnect ACTS W102J2 . c. At Power Supply A25J4 (fig . P) , connect W73P2 . d. Go to step 67 .
If all voltages are not within specified limits : a . At distribution box (fig . B) , setBATTERY POWER toOFF . b. At W73P2 , disconnect ACTS W102J2 . c. Disconnect DMM , ACTS and ACTS W102 , W106 , and W150. d . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
67
At ACTS W106P2 , disconnect ACTS W102J1 .
68
At power supply J2 (fig . P) , diconnect W48P 1 .
Set up test equipment for voltage measurement per fig . R. 69
CABLE ASSEMBLY W148
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 J2P1 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1 /
P1
J2 28VDC POWER SUPPLY A25
P2
-09 -OE
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
P1
HI
LO
DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-0 FIGURE R
CONTINUED
3-921
0-1
TM 9-1430-600-2
ROADMA
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
3-149 .
-Conti
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to ON. 70
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TEST IS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
At ACTS (fig . H ) , set POI to A and set CRP to B. Press PRESS TO TEST and observe 71 DMM indication . If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to OFF .
b. At power supply (fig . P. ) , disconnect ACTS W148P1 . c. Disconnect DMM , ACTS and ACTS W102 , W106 and W 150. d. At power supply J2 (fig . P) , connect W48P1 . e. Call Intermediate Maintenance . If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a. At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set BATTERY POWER to OFF .
b. At 28VDC Power Supply A25J2 (fig . P ) , disconnect ACTS W148P1 . c. Disconnect DMM , ACTS and ACTS W106 , W148 and W150. d. Replace power supply subassembly per para 4-30 . e. Go to step 72. At ECS vehicle cab , check VHF voice communications . 72
If VHF voice communications are operational : a. Fault is corrected . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If VHF voice communications are not operational : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
Notify Battery Maintenance Officer and request permission to perform Ambient Air 73
Control Panel A72 Lamp Test fault isolation .
UED
CONTIN
T
3-922
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-149.
73
ROADMARCH DC POWER FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
-Continued If permission is granted : a . Perform Ambient Air Control Panel A72 Lamp Test fault isolation per para 3-150. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If permission is not granted : Execute Battery Maintenance Officer's instructions per tactical standard operating procedures .
3-923
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 3-150 . AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 /GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64 LAMP
50. AMBIEN TEST
TEST FAULT ISOLATION
At Am
GENERATOR CONTROL AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72
PANEL A64
A72
ONIa
强
E MAD
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 ROA
DSI
DE
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Q
Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 4 In . Wrench , Spin - Tight Socket , 3/8 In. Switch Assembly , AC Line Test Multimeter , Digital 8125A - AQ - 0 Cable Assembly W 106 Cable Assembly W150 Cable Assembly W 109 Pliers , Electrical Connector
EFFINPUT PW
1
At Distribution Box
ASTCOND ROADS/DL
A66 (fig . A) , set PWR DIST UNIT
AINCOND CURESIDE
PWR SPLY to ON.
BATTERY POWER
SECUREPAR PRINTER RELAY TERM OFF BUSPLAY CONTRO ROADLIGE TUNASION 874
MODEMS VOICE COMMO PAXSPLY ON 2
Set BATTERY POWER to ON.
FISTER
ZEYIC LETERY POWER POWERSIZZLY
HOW T இ
B
401SECURE P Conesaxs 163 SMO
FIND OFF 817ELS 20 35 06 OPS 鈉 OFF HERERS CONTR
ZBYC COMMO FW DIST DISPLA SPLY CONTROL PWBSPLY 0*་ ONTROL WRIT CONVERTED T OH BY 120VAC4042 AL EXTERN L INTERNA ON OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
EDHARICAL LIF WUDIT154(8
ED
CONTINU
FIGURE A
3-924
ESS
扫
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-150.
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 / GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64 LAMP TEST FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
3
At Ambient Air Control Panel A72 (fig . B ), observe 28V
00
ONlamp .
AMBIENTAIRCONTROLPANEL O SEOPT ATEMPFLOW ROADSIDE FANSCURADOR A FLOWFLAPPERVALVE MEN NORMALLYCLOSED OPENONLYWHENONBELOW OUTSIDE LOT ART TEMPFREEZING
STATUS
HOOD CLOSED 45 O FNDes FWD
If 28V ONlamp is on :
TESTPOINTS O
Go to step 4.
O
O
FIGURE B If 28V ONlamp is off: Go to step 25.
GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL
BATTLE SHORT BATTU SHORT
VOLTAGE PHASETO NEUTRAL
PHASE PHASE OFF-
PHASE
ON SUM FUEL GENS LE AGE FAULT OVERVOLT LAMP SUM FAULT TEST ALBET FAULT TILI GENERATORPOWER BADAN ECS TURBINESOFF OFF DFF COMM
COMM ON
ON
ON
FIGURE C
At Generator Control Panel A64 (fig . C) , set and hold LAMP TEST switch up and 4
observe all panel lamps .
If all lamps are on :
a. Release LAMP TEST. b. Go to step 6.
If not all lamps are off:
a . Release LAMP TEST .
b. Replace faulty panel lamps per para 5-54 .
c. Go to step 5 .
If all lamps are off: a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Go to step 11 .
CONTINUED
3-925
0-1
TM 9-1430-600-2
AMBIEN AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 /GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64 LAMP
3-150 .
TEST F
Continued
TEST FAULT ISOLATION At generator control panel (fig . C) , set and hold LAMP TEST up and observe all panel
Atgen
5
lamps . If all lamps are on: a . Release LAMP TEST · b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
Chec
If all lamps are not on : a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At ambient air control panel ( fig . B) , set and hold LAMP TEST on and observe all panel 6
lamps . If all lamps are on : a. Release LAMP TEST . At 8AM
b. Go to step 8.
If not all lamps are off: a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Replace faulty panel lamps per para 5-54 .
c. Go to step 7 .
If all lamps are off: a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Replace Ambient Air Control Panel A72 per para 4-94 .
c. Go to step 7.
At ambient air control panel , set and hold LAMP TEST on and observe all panel lamps . 7
If all lamps are on : a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If all lamps are not on : a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance . ED
CONTINU
T
3-926
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-150.
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 / GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64 LAMP TEST FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
8
At generator control panel (fig . C) , observe BATTLE SHORT lamp.
If BATTLE SHORT is on :
Go to step 9. If BATTLE SHORT is off: Go to step 10.
9
Check to see if battle short condition has been authorized .
If battle short condition authorized : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If battle short condition not authorized : a. Replace Generator Control Panel A64 per para 4-66. b. Go to step 24.
10
At generator control panel , observe SUM FAULT and FUEL lamps (fig . C) .
If SUM FAULT or FUEL lamp is on :
a . Notify electrical power plant operator that lamp is on. b. After lamp(s) is off, return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If SUM FAULT and FUEL lamps are off:
Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
11
At distribution box ( fig . A) , verify that COMMO PWR SPLY is set to ON .
12
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . D ) , remove two screws , flat washers and nuts (2) .
OOO
0.00
1
2
3
CONTINUED
FIGURE D
3-927
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 3-150 . AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 /GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64 LAMP
50 AMBIE TEST
ww
TEST FAULT ISOLATION - Continued s At distribution box bottom shielding gasket (fig . D) , remove 13 screws , lockwasher
13
WARNIN
and flat washers (1 ). Remove five self-locking nuts and flat washers (3) and remove bottom shielding 14
gasket . At
At distribution box (fig . A) utility outlet , connect DMM power cable and set 120VAC 15 400HZ INTERNAL to ON.
At DMM (fig . E ) , set POWER
の INPUT
16
to ON and press VAC and
CAUTI
+1.1999] VOC FLTR 10RANGE100 1000 POWER ON GD ON-OFF POWER HTA 2A INSTR 1/BAY LOW TEMP POWER
RANGE - 1000 .
17
の 8125A DIGITAL MULTIMETER
At distribution box (fig . A) , set PWR DIST UNIT PWR SPLY and DISPLAY / CONTROL to OFF .
FIGURE E
At distribution box connector 18
J27 (4 , fig . D) , disconnect W75P1 .
19
Set up test equipment for voltage measurement as shown in fig . F. J2
CABLE ASSEMBLY W109
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2J1 P1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY P1
J27
P2
J1 / -09
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
HI LO DIGITAL MULTIMETER 8125A-AQ-O
FIGURE F
UED
CONTIN
3-928
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-150.
AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 /GENERATOR CONTROL PANEL A64 LAMP TEST FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
TO AVOID PERSONAL INJURY DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WARNING
WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DMM DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
20
At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL to ON .
TO AVOID EQUIPMENT DAMAGE DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SWITCH SETTINGS WHILE PRESS TO TEST SWITCH IS PRESSED . CAUTION
At ACTS (fig . G) , set POI to E and CRP to F. Push PRESS TO 21 TEST and observe DMM indication .
If DMM indicates 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a. At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL to OFF.
ΡΟΙ
CRP n
b. Disconnect ACTS W 109J2 from J27. c. Connect W75P1 to J27. PRESS TO TEST
d . Replace Generator Control Panel A64 per para 4-66 .
FIGURE G
e. Go to step 22.
If DMM does not indicate 26.6 to 29.4VDC : a. At distribution box (fig . A), set DISPLAY /CONTROL to OFF .
b . Disconnect ACTS W109J2 from J27 (4 , fig. D). c. Connect W75P1 to J27. d . Install distribution box bottom shielding gasket . Install five nuts and flat
sbu er wash (3, figbo . D). tion ri x , install 13 screws , lock washers and flat washers dist e. At
f.
D)o. screws , lockwashers , flat washers and nuts (2 , fig . D) . figl . tw , al ( 1st In
g. Go to step 25. CONTINUED
3-929
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 R CONTROL PANEL A64 LAMP 3-150 . AMBIENT AIR CONTROL PANEL A72 / GENERATO
$1. SHELT
TEST FAULT ISOLATION - Continued At distribution box (fig . A) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL to ON.
22
At generator control panel (fig . C) , set and hold LAMP TEST in the up position and 23
observe panel lamps .
If all A64 lamps are on : a. Release LAMP TEST . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
RO
a . Release LAMP TEST . b. Call Intermediate Maintenance . At generator control panel (fig . C) , observe BATTLE SHORT . 24
If BATTLE SHORT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If BATTLE SHORT is off: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At distribution box ( fig . A) , observe BATTERY POWER lamp .
25 If BATTERY POWER is on : a. Perform Distribution Box A66 Power Supply PS1 DC output fault isolation per para 3-130 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfBATTERY POWER is off: a. Perform Distribution Box A66 28VDC output fault isolation per para 3-131 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-930
AD
If all A64 lamps are off:
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-151 .
SHELTER INTERIOR TEMPERATURE -TOO HOT /COLD FAULT ISOLATION
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL PANEL A69 (CURBSIDE )
AIR CONDITIONER CONTROL PANEL A70 (ROADSIDE )
3 RO
AD
SI
DE
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
口
D
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
Pliers , Electrical Connector Switch Assembly , AC Line Test Multimeter , Digital , 8125A -AQ - O Cable Assembly W106 Cable Assembly W150
Cable Assembly W129
CONTINUED
3-931
0-1
TM 9-1430-600-2
51. SHELTE -Contin
SHELTER INTERIOR TEMPERATURE -TOO HOT /COLD FAULT ISOLATION
3-151 .
-Continued
At Dist There are two identical but independent air conditioner systems : Air Conditioner A 120 with Air Conditioner Control Panel A69 , and Air Conditioner A118 with Air Conditioner Control Panel A70 . Under normal conditions , only
verify t COND
SIDE C ON.
one system is required for cooling .
AIR CONDITIONER
HEATER CONTROLS O
NOTE
At Air Conditioner Control Panel
COOL
A69 or A70 (fig . A) not under test, set MODE SELECTION
OFF
1
SWITCH to OFF . RUN INDICATOR LIGHT
At control panel under test , set MODE SELECTION SWITCH to
2
WARMER COOLER TEMPERATURE CONTROL
HIGH HEAT
MODE SELECTION SWITCH
6 Set
Se
FIGURE A H 8
desired function : COOL , LOW HEAT , or HIGH HEAT . Set TEMPERATURE CONTROL to
LOW HEAT
8 At
extreme position of COOLER or
ap
WARMER . If airflow temperature indicates that air conditioner is operating : a. Adjust TEMPERATURE CONTROL for desired temperature .
WARN W
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If airflow temperature indicates that air conditioner is not operating .
Go to step 3.
3
Observe RUN INDICATOR LIGHT .
If RUN INDICATOR LIGHT is on : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If RUN INDICATOR LIGHT is off: Go to step 4 .
4
Press RUN INDICATOR LIGHT .
If RUN INDICATOR LIGHT comes on : Call Intermediate Maintenance . If RUN INDICATOR LIGHT remains off: Go to step 5.
3-932
D
CONTINUE
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-151 .
SHELTER INTERIOR TEMPERATURE -TOO HOT /COLD FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
AIRCOND ROADSIDE SIDE circuit breaker is set to ON.
AIRCURBSIDE COND If circuit breaker is ON: BATERY POWER
Go to step 6 .
28YDC RUNNINGTIME LAMP HATTERY POWERSUPPLY TEST STATUS ETS MAT-4 POWER ON ABT-2 881 2 OFF NOT SECURE WR CURBSIDE ROADSIDE FWD SAMS AFT טוחRS AFT ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 28VDC COMMO RADIO FWNDIST BISPLAY RELDTERM UNITPWR CONTROL EWASPLY SPLYON ON 3 ON ON 2 ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF Off UHF ART DELI TELEPHONE LIGHT CONTROL ROADSIDE UNIT CONVERTER TEAM REATENS CONTROL ON OR OR ON ON SOFF OFF OFF OFF OFF 8TILITYPOWER MASTDUERECT 120C 409HZ EXTERNAL INTERNAL ON OR OFF OFF OFF
DE
口
verify that appropriate AIR COND ROADSIDE or CURB-
SECUREPWR PRINTER RADIO RELAYTEAM ON OR 1 ON 3 ON OFF OFF OFF DFF DISPLAY COUTU AGADSIDE CUS SIDE ON ON OFF OFF INCU REAIU ON OFF OFF COMPUTER MODEMS ON OR OFFTo OFF GAS VOICE COMO FILTER UNIT PWRSPET ON 17 ON
GE
EPPINFUT PWR URFAMS PWERAMPL
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ) ,
飽含
5
If circuit breaker is OFF: DANGER 208 VOLTS MECHANICAL WEIGHT 178 LESLIFT
Go to step 13.
6
Set AIR COND to OFF.
7
Set EXTERNAL to ON.
FIGURE B
At Distribution Box A66 exterior (fig . C) , disconnect W21P1 or W22P1 from 8
appropriate AIR COND CS or RS.
TO PREVENT POSSIBLE ELECTRICAL SHOCK HAZARD , DIGITAL MULTIMEWARNING TER MUST BE PLUGGED INTO SYSTEM UTILITY OUTLET WHEN MAKING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENT .
DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT
AIR COND RS
GPFU
AIR COND CS
208 VAC 400 HZ
UHF AMG PWR AMP 208 VAC 400 HZ
BATTERY INPUT POWER 28 VDC
IF GD STRAP BETWEEN LO AND GD TERMINALS OF DIGITAL MULTIMETER CAUTION
UTILITY POWER 120 VAC
INPUT POWER 208 VAC 400 HZ
IS NOT REMOVED .
GND
9
Set up test equipment (fig . D) for AIR COND voltage measurement as follows:
CABLE ASSEMBLY W129
CABLE ASSEMBLY W106 P2 P1 AC LINE TEST SWITCH ASSEMBLY J1
P1
CABLE ASSEMBLY W150
FIGURE C
AIR COND CS OR AIR COND RS DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 P2
HI LO DIGITALETER MULTIM 8125A-AQ-0
CONTINUED
FIGURE D 3-933
0-1
TM 9-1430-600-2
E
UR SHELTER INTERIOR TEMPERAT
3-151 .
51. SHELTER -Continu
-TOO HOT /COLD FAULT ISOLATION
-Continued
-Conti
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ( 120 AND 220VAC ) ARE PRESENT DURING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR L
G
WARNIN
TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE
ARNING
10
3
MEASUREMENTS . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set appropriate AIR COND to ON.
DO NOT CHANGE POI OR CRP SETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT .
CAUTION
11
At AC line test switch (ACTS ) (fig . E) , set POI and CRP to sequence listed in table . Press PRESS TO TEST for each setting and observe DMM .
At
for
ΡΟΙ
ΡΟΙ
CRP
ABC ABC
HIGH
LOW
198
218
B
198
218
C
198
218
A
D
114
126
114
126
D
114
126
D
CRP
OPO
VOLTAGE LIMITS (VAC) SWITCH
PRESS TO TEST
FIGURE E
If all voltages are within limits of table : a. At distribution box (fig . B ) , set appropriate AIR COND to OFF. b . Disconnect test equipment ( fig . D ) . c. Connect W21P1 or W22P1 to appropriate AIR COND CS or RS (fig . C) . d . Call Intermediate Maintenance .
If any voltage is outside limits of table : a . Replace either CB30 ( curbside ) or CB31 ( roadside ) per para 4-83 .
D
CONTINUE
3-934
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-151 .
SHELTER INTERIOR TEMPERATURE -TOO HOT/COLD FAULT ISOLATION
-Continued 11
-Continued
HAZARDOUS VOLTAGES ( 120 AND 220VAC) ARE PRESENT DURING WARNING TESTING . DO NOT TOUCH CONNECTORS INVOLVED WITH TESTING OR TERMINALS AT DIGITAL MULTIMETER DURING VOLTAGE MEASUREMENTS . b . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set AIR COND ROADSIDE or CURBSIDE to ON c. Go to step 12 .
DO NOT CHANGE POIOR CRPSETTINGS WHEN PRESS TO TESTIS PRESSED . DAMAGE TO EQUIPMENT WILL RESULT . CAUTION
At ACTS (fig . E) , set POI and CRP to sequence listed in table . Press PRESS TO TEST
12 for each setting and observe DMM .
If all voltages are within limits of table : a. At distribution box (fig . B) , set appropriate AIR COND to OFF. b. Disconnect test equipment (fig . D) . c. Connect W21P1 or W22P1 to appropriate AIR COND CS or RS (fig . C) .
d . At distribution box (fig . B) , set AIR COND to ON. e. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If any voltage is outside limits of table : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At distribution box (fig . B) , set AIR COND to ON. 13
ND t (fig trip .: A) , adjust TEMPERATURE CONTROL for desired nol do CO If AI l es ntro a .RAt co pane
mperature . edure that brought you to this paragraph . Return to proc b. te
a. Perform Distribution Box A66 EPP INPUT PWR AIR COND curbside or If AIR COND trips : roadside circuit breaker tripped fault isolation per para 3-79 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-935
0-1 TM 9-1430-600-2 3-152 . DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 EPP INPUT PWR-BATTERY POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISTRIBU TRIPPED
TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
At Distribu
Po 100
00
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
RO
AD
SI
DE POWER SUPPLY A25
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 10 In . Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 3/8 In . Wide , 8 In .
|P
Wrench , Spin -Tight Socket , 3/8 In.
Re
Di
GUNNING TIME
1
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , set BATTERY POWER to ON
IfBATTERY POWER does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this
AIRNOADSCONDIDE
CONS AIRCURBSIDE 1666 BATTERY POWER
SECURE PWR PAINTER NADIO RELYTERM 7 08 ON OFF OFF OFF BES DISPLAY CONTROL ROADSIDE CURSSION DW OFF OFF 二 創 OR OFF OFF COMPUTER DES OK OFF GAS VOICE FILTER SPLY UNIT FWCOMMO 0: OFF OFF
SYS ART2 BATS FWB
BATER POWERT O
MOADSIDES 883
CAMP R SUPPLY TEST POWESTRUS NOTSECURE PAR CONCERT AFT FWD
.. ?
EPTINPUTPOR Γ PWR UNEAMS AMPL
OFF OFF TH COWN PWWDANY CENTR O POR PL BELOKADIDTERM 34 ON ON ON EF OFF OT 85 HON TERM TELEPRTER OL CONTR CONVE NOAD METESIDERS CONTROL UNT OFF UTILIOFFTY POWER MASTENEST C EXTERNAL INTERNA120ML 400%7 OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANICAL LIT WEIGHT 178125 paragraph .
FIGURE A IfBATTERY POWER trips:
UED
Go to step 2.
3-936
CONTIN
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-152.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 EPP INPUT PWR-BATTERY POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER
TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B ) , remove two screws ( 1 ) , flat washers and nuts . 2
0
A
0
0-00 FOO
JIT
3
-A-
2
FIGURE B Remove 13 screws (4) , lockwashers , and flat washers . 3
Remove five self- locking nuts ( 3) and flat washers . Remove shielding gasket ( 2 ) . 4
5
Disconnect W73P1 from J11 .
6
At distribution box (fig . A) , set BATTERY POWER to ON .
IfBATTERY POWER does not trip : Go to step 9.
If BATTERY POWER trips : a. Connect W73P1 to J11 (fig . B ). b. Install shielding gasket and secure with five self-locking nuts and flat
ers . th s shre wacu c. Se wi 13 screws , lockwasher and flat washers. d. Secure with two screws , flat washers and nuts. e. Replace Distribution Box A66 CB25 per para 4-83 .
CONTINUED
f. Go to step 7 . 3-937
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 3-152 . DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 EPP INPUT PWR- BATTERY POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER
2 DISTRIBU TRIPPED
TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued At rear
At distribution.box (fig . A) , set BATTERY POWER to ON. 7
If BATTERY POWER does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If BATTERY POWER trips : a . Replace Distribution Box A66 filter FL2 per para 4-76 .
b. Go to step 8.
Set BATTERY POWER to ON. 8
If BATTERY POWER does not trip : Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
To At d
If BATTERY POWER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
Set BATTERY POWER to OFF . 9
At distribution box (fig . B ) , connect W73P1 to J11 . 10
Install shielding gasket and secure with five self- locking nuts and flat washers . 11
Secure with 13 screws , lockwashers and flat washers . 12
Secure with two screws , flat washers and nuts . 13
At Power Supply A25 ( fig . C) , loosen four captive screws and pull power supply out on 14 its slides .
A87 RT-524 AND KYST WCC ON ON
OFF OFF A88 UHF RT-524 ANT CONT ANDONKY67 DLT ON ON
OFF
OFF
OFF
ED
FIGURE C
3-938
CONTINU
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-152.
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 EPP INPUT PWR-BATTERY POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At rear of Power Supply A25 ( fig . D ) , disconnect W73P2 from J4.
→
15
J4
J3
J5 J2
FIGURE D
16
At distribution box (fig . A) , set BATTERY POWER to ON.
If BATTERY POWER does not trip : a. Set BATTERY POWER to OFF .
b. Replace Power Supply A25 chassis per para 4-30.
c. Go to step 17.
If BATTERY POWER trips : ப
Call Intermediate Maintenance . At distribution box (fig . A) , set BATTERY POWER to ON. 17
WER does not trip : If BATTERY PO Fault corrected . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If BATTERY POWER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-939
-20-1
TM 9-1430-600 3-153 .
ANTENN
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 INPUT POWER FAULT ISOLATION
At Ante
A41 (fi AClam
ANTENNA MAST MONITOR PANEL A139
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41
22
Set
10
LIO!
8
808
O
20:0:707
28 נון 3
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
[
ROA
DSI
DE
POWER SUPPLY A25
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required
None
ED
CONTINU
3-940
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
-Continued ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 INPUT POWER FAULT ISOLATION
3-153 .
At Antenna Control Unit ANTENNA POSITION
A41 (fig . A) , observe 80
DC AC о О POWER
AC lamp .
ANTENNA SELECT BITE 123
ST
ANTENNA
1
OP
AM HEADI NG S
If lamp is on : ON ON Go to step 6.
If lamp is off:
-ANTENNA STOW TOWAT 1 2 FAULT STOP FAULT ROTATE CCW CW
AMS HEADING Go to step 2 .
FIGURE A Set POWER to ON.
2
IfPOWER trips : a. Perform para 3-158. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfPOWER does not trip: Go to step 3.
3
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B) ,
EPPIMPOTPWR UNFAMS PWRAMPL
set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT
AIRCOND ROADSIDE
to ON . IfUHF ANT CONTROL
AIRCOND CUNGSIDE
UNIT trips:
a. Perform para 3-32 .
LOTTER POWERY b. Return to procedure that brought you to this ph paragra .
28YBC BURNINGTIME BATTERY POWERSUPPLY SECUREPWR STOTUS POWER PRINTER ON SYS MBT-3 BADIORELAYTEAM O ANT 3 DFF ON 2 ON он OFF OFF OFFTo : 15 NOTSECURE PWR CURBSIDE ROADSIDE FLIS AFT FAS AFT DISPLAY/CONTROL FWD FWD ON ON BOADSIDE CURBSIDONE OFF OFF OFF OFF SYDC COMMO OFF MADIO OFF PWERDIST DISPLAY RELAYTEAM PWNSPLY CONTROL UNITPW SPLY AWCIU ALAJU ON 1 2 ON 3 ON ON OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF URFANTOL TELEPHONE- TERM OFF OFF LIGHT CONTR ROADSIDE UNIT CONVERTERON HEATERS CONTROL COMPUTER MODEMSON ON ON ON ON OFF BU OFF OFF Y OFF UTILIT POWER OFF MAST ERECT 120C40042 EXTERNAL GAS VOICE INTERNAL FILTER ON ON COMMO UNIT PWBSPLY OFF оп ON OFF & T OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
MECHANI LIFT WEIGHT CAL178LBS
FIGURE B IfUHF ANT CONTROL UNIT does not trip : Go to step 4.
At antenna control unit (fig . A) , set ANTENNA SELECT to BITE . 4
5
Observe ANTENNA POSITION .
G IN la EeNpN eA er l Un NTR AM acov nna IfAa. roAD lA eps ntHE it A41 ANTENNA POSITION nt CoS CONTINUED
indicator A1 per para 4-41. b. Go to step 17. 3-941
0-1
TM 9-1430-600-2
ANTENNA
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 INPUT POWER FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
3-153 .
-Contir
-Continued 5 If ANTENNA does not overlap AMS HEADING: a. Perform para 3-99 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At antenna control unit (fig . A) , observe DC lamp . 6
If lamp is on :
66
A87 RT-524 AND KYS7 WCC ON
Go to step 9.
Chec
If lamp is off : OFF OFF A88 UHF RT-524 CONT AND KYST DLT ANTON ON ON
Go to step 7.
At Power Supply A25 (fig . C) , set UHF ANT CONTROL to
7
OFF
OFF
OFF
FIGURE C
ON. If UHF ANT CONTROL
At c
trips : a. Perform para 3-20 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this
paragraph . If UHF ANT CONTROL does not trip : Go to step 8.
At Antenna Mast Monitor Panel A 139 (fig . D ) , set and hold LAMP TEST to the up 8
position . Observe panel lamps .
ANTENNA MAST MONITOR PANEL ROADSIDE CURBSIDE BOTH ALARM OFF
11 SWAY0 INDICATOR
ALARM RESET
O EMAST SELECTOR
FAULT AMP
O LAMP TEST
el
e
FIGURE D ED
CONTINU
T
3-942
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-153 .
8
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 INPUT POWER FAULT ISOLATION- Continued -Continued
If lamps are on : a. Release LAMP TEST .
b. Replace Antenna Control A41 chassis per para 4-41 . c. Go to step 18 .
If lamps are off: a . Release LAMP TEST.
b. Perform para 3-116.
c. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
9
Check orders for the day for antenna mast group (AMG ) mode.
If AMG is in power amplifier mode ( unbypassed ) : Go to step 10 .
If AMG is not in power amplifier mode (bypassed ) : Go to step 13.
10
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to ON.
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL trips:
a . Perform para 3-159 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL does not trip : Go to step 11 .
Contact AMG via sound - powered telephone , and have operator check the power 11
distribution unit (PDU ) panel for the ENABLE lamp of antenna mast amplifier under
test.
If lamp is on :
Go to step 12 .
If lamp is off: a. Perform para 3-98 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
CONTINUED
3-943
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 A CONTROL UNIT A41 INPUT POWER FAULT ISOLATION - Continued NN 3 TE 15 . AN 3-
ANTENN
At anter -Continued 12
If la act AMG operator via sound - powered telephone , and have nton: a .mp Cois operator perform Antenna Mast Monitor Panel 1 /6 /8A139 FAULT-AMP lamp on fault isolation per TM 9-1430-603-20 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lamp is off: Go to step 13.
At antenna control unit ( fig . A) , set ANTENNA SELECT to faulty radio relay terminal 13
(RRT) antenna .
Observe ANTENNA POSITION . 14
If ANTENNA rotates to azimuth defined per orders of the day: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If ANTENNA does not rotate to azimuth defined per orders of the day: a . Replace Antenna Control Unit A41 ANTENNA POSITION indicator A1
per para 4-41 . b . Go to step 15.
At antenna control unit (fig . A) , set ANTENNA SELECT to faulty RRT antenna . 15
Observe ANTENNA POSITION . 16
If ANTENNA rotates to azimuth defined per orders of the day: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If ANTENNA does not rotate to azimuth defined per orders of the day: e Call Intermediate Maintenanc .
At antenna control unit (fig . A) , observe AC lamp . 17
If lamp is on : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
UED
CONTIN If lamp is off : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-944
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-153 .
18
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 INPUT POWER FAULT ISOLATION- Continued
At antenna control unit ( fig . A) , observe DClamp .
If lamp is on : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If lamp is off: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
미
3-945
-20-1
TM 9-1430-600
4. ON-LINE
3-154 .
ON- LINE SECURE POWER (RED ) FAULT ISOLATION -Conti
RRT- 1 RRT-2 RRT-3
0..
AtR (fig .
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065 A35 ROA
MULTIPLEXER TD-660 A36
DSI
DE
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065 A22
MULTIPLEXER TD-660 A11
MULTIPLEXER TD-660 A23 DATA BUFFER TD- 1065 A10
Personnel Required .
Two
None
Tools and Equipment Required .
At RRT- 1 , open access door and observe Multiplexer TD- 660 A36 POWER lamp 1
131
(fig . A) and High Speed Data Buffer TD - 1065 A36 POWER lamp ( fig . B) . 7E47 © OOUT O
50 400 A
ဝင်
If both POWER lamps are on:
OPENFORAUDO
Go to step 2.
If multiplexer POWER lamp is off:
FIGURE A a . Perform Multiplexer A36 fault isolation per para 3-117. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this
TEST ALICH FOR ALARM LEY100 WULLER 01 1/24115VACDO400 1/28 POWER ON OFF
WORTER007 FRAME
0
の CAUTION REPLACETWSCOVER G SY BEFOREOPERATIN
paragraph .
FIGURE B ED
CONTINU
3-946
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-154.
1
ON-LINE SECURE POWER (RED ) FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
-Continued
If high speed data buffer POWERlamp is off: a. Perform Data Buffer A35 fault isolation per para 3-119.
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At RRT- 2 , open access door and observe Multiplexer TD- 660 A23 POWERlamp 2
(fig . A) and High Speed Data Buffer TD - 1065 A22 POWERlamp ( fig . B) .
If both POWERlamps are on: Go to step 3 .
If multiplexer POWERlamp is off: a. Perform Multiplexer A23 fault isolation per para 3-117 .
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If high speed data buffer POWERlamp is off: a. Perform Data Buffer A22 fault isolation per para 3-119. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
amp At RRT-3, open access door and observe Multiplexer TD-660 A11 POWERl 3
p (fig . A) and High Speed Data Buffer TD - 1065 A 10 POWERlam (fig . B) .
If both POWERlamps are on: Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If multiplexer POWERlamp is off : a. Perform Multiplexer A11 fault isolation per para 3-117 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
p If high speed data buffer POWERlam is off : a. Perform Data Buffer A 10 fault isolation per para 3-119. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-947
-20-1
TM 9-1430-600 3-155 .
$5 OFF-LINE
OFF-LINE SECURE POWER (RED ) FAULT ISOLATION
-Conti RADIO RELAY TERM - 1 (RRT- 1 )
RADIO RELAY TERM -2 (RRT- 2)
RADIO RELAY TERM -3 (RRT-3)
2 POD
100
At Di
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065 A10 00
MULTIPLEXER TD-660 A11
RAD
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
J
MULTIPLEXER TD-660 A36
ROA
DSI
DE
DATA BUFFER TD- 1065 A35 MULTIPLEXER TD-660 A23
DATA BUFFER TD - 1065 A22
Personnel Required .
Two
None
Tools and Equipment Required
13
At completion of this procedure close any access door ( s) that may have NOTE
CUT O O
been opened .
O
00 a
1
At RRT-1 , observe Multiplexer TD- 660 A36 POWER indicator (fig . A) and Buffer TD-
FIGURE A
04 DUT
TEST ALISH ARRANTY: 08 :0 CO
1065 A35 POWER indicator (fig . B ) .
KC
POWER CON
ON REPLAE CECAUTI OPERA105TINGCOVERUNIT BEFOR ED
CONTINU
FIGURE B
3-948
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
OFF- LINE SECURE POWER ( RED ) FAULT ISOLATION
3-155.
-Continued
1
If both POWER indicators are on : Go to step 3 .
If both POWER indicators are off : Go to step 2 .
RADIO RELAY TERM - 1 to ON .
COLOR
does not trip :
a. Perform RRT- 1 Distribution Box A66 secure
COMNET FRIWURST PARSPLY OFF
power output fault
MECHANICAL WEIGHT 172345SIFS
ALT 20 FANS
100
ૐ
If RADIO RELAY TERM -1
ASADSIDE
CESSOR POWS THALT 日
G
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . C ) , set
2
20000 DECONEPIER PRINTSA RADED HELMTERM ON OFF DISPLAY CORICOL O CARESION ERCIS BLO
Of
彰
616HIR
RECORBUR CONTROL
競 OH OFF A The en ROADSHE BRIT CONVERTER RRUS COUTONO CORTROL Ox OFF Cort POSIXPONTS N EXTERRA
DANGER 208 VOLTS isolation per para 3-111 .
FIGURE C b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
Y TERM - 1 trips : IfRADIO RELA a. Perform Distribution Box A66 secure power radio relay terminal - 1
tripped fault isolation per paragraph 3-15 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . At RRT- 2 , observe Multiplexer TD -660 A23 POWER indicator (fig . A) and Data Buffer 3
TD- 1065 A22 POWER indicator (fig . B ) . If both POWER indicators are on: Go to step 5 .
If both POWER indicators are off:
Go to step 4. At distribution box (fig . C) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 2 to ON . 4
IfRADIO RELAY TERM 2 does not trip : a. Have maintainer perform RRT -2 Distribution Box A66 , secure power output fault isolation per para 3-111 .
CONTINUED
3-949
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 N 3-155 . OFF-LINE SECURE POWER ( RED ) FAULT ISOLATIO -Continued
ON-LINE N
ed
-Continu 4
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
OTRANSMITT T-983 A32-
2 trips : If RADIO RELAY TERM a. Perform Distribution Box A66 secure power radio relay terminal - 2 A19-
tripped fault isolation per para 3-15. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At distribution box (fig . C) , set RADIO RELAY TERM - 3 to ON. 5
If RADIO RELAY TERM 3 aoes not trip : a. Have maintainer perform RRT - 3 Distribution Box A66 , secure power output fault isolation per para 3-111 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
LAY TERM 3 trips : If RADIO REm a . Perfor Distribution Box A66 secure power radio relay terminal - 3
tripped fault isolation per para 3-15 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
3-950
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ON- LINE NOT SECURE POWER (BLACK ) FAULT ISOLATION
3-156 .
RADIO RECEIVER R- 1329 A6 A18
A31
RADIO TRANSMITTER T-983
A32A19-
A7-
A8 A20 A33 KEY GENERATOR
RRT - 1
ROA
DSI
TSEC /KG-27
RRT-2
DE
RRT-3
Two
Personnel Required .
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
At RRT- 1 observe the power-on indicators listed in table A. 1
TABLE
A FIGURE REFERENCE
INDICATOR COMPONENT NOMENCLATURE
A
AC POWER B
Radio Receiver R- 1329 A31 Radio Transmitter T -983 A32 Key Generator TSEC / KG - 27 A33
AC POWER 115 VAC POWER
C
50-400
CONTINUED
T
3-951
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 ON -LINE NOT SECURE POWER (BLACK ) FAULT ISOLATION -Continued 3-156 .
ON-LINE
22
-Continued
MULT PEAK RCYS SIG
ACVR CHANNEL 390
RCVR SIG 32 CHPCM 24 CHPCM MULT FOR DOUBLER OSC 12 VOC XMTADUPL REFL PWR 12 VDC
1
ANT
MO
If all three power- on indicators are on:
COMPC HCVB CHANNEL 400 390 380
Go to step 2.
If Radio Receiver AC POWER indicator (fig . A) is off: a. Perform RRT- 1 Radio
AC POWER ON
RECEIVER ALARMS HIGH LOW SYNC SIGNAL SIGNAL
BAND FROM XMTR
IMIREL CHANN 320 310 300
Receiver
doTransmit
Generator XMTK DUPL
OFF
FIGURE A
Receiver A31 power fault isolation per para 3-135. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this
XMTRCHANNEL 310
REFLPWR 12CH24 PCM CH PCM FWAOUT FOM DRIVER 12 VOC MULO DOUBLER · 28VDC OSC 600 VOC
0 INPUT
XMTATUNE paragraph . If Radio Transmitter AC POWER indicator ( fig . B ) is
310 300-
AIR FILTER LOW
AC POWER ON/RESET
off:
HIGH
TRANSMITTER ALARMS W LO POWER 226 SYNC O OFF
FORBUT PEAK PUSHFOR DRIVER POLLFOR OUTPUT
BAND I
OVERHEAT
OFF a. Perform Radio Trans-
FIGURE B
mitter A32 power fault
347
isolation per para 3-106.
2 b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
FIGURE C
If Key Generator 115 VAC POWER 50-400 ~ indicator
(fig . C) is off: a. Perform Electronic Key Generator A33 power fault isolation per para 3-122 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At RRT - 2 , observe power - on indicators as listed in table B.
UED
2
3-952
-Conti
CONTIN
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-156 .
ON -LINE NOT SECURE POWER (BLACK ) FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
-Continued
2
TABLE
B INDICATOR
FIGURE REFERENCE
COMPONENT NOMENCLATURE
AC POWER
A
AC POWER
B
115 VAC POWER
C
Radio Receiver R - 1329 A18 Radio Transmitter T-983 A 19 Key Generator TSEC / KG - 27 A20
50-400 ~
If all three power - on indicators are on : Go to step 3 . If Radio Receiver A 18AC POWER indicator (fig . A) is off:
a. Perform RRT- 2 Radio Receiver A 18 power fault isolation per
para 3-135. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If Radio Transmitter A 19AC POWER indicator (fig . B) is off: a. Perform RRT-2 Radio Transmitter A 19 power fault isolation
. ure that brought you to this paragraph . rnra tupa oc6ed b. pe Rer to3pr10
If Key Generator A20 115 VAC POWER 50-400 ~ indicator (fig . C)
a.f:Perform RRT- 2 Key Generator A20 power fault isolation per is of
b. Re 122 rarn pr 3-to patu . ocedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At RRT-3 , power- on indicators listed in table C. 3
TABLE
C FIGURE REFERENCE
INDICATOR COMPONENT NOMENCLATURE
A
AC POWER Radio Receiver R - 1329 A6 Radio Transmitter T- 983 A7
Key Generator TSEC / KG - 27 A8
AC POWER 115 VAC POWER
B
C
50-400 ~
cators are on : If all three power-on rin e dihat rou ght you to this paragraph . b t Return to procedu
CONTINUED
3-953
0-1
TM 9-1430-600-2 3-156 .
3
ON - LINE NOT SECURE POWER (BLACK ) FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
OFF-LINE
-Continued If Radio Receiver A6 AC POWER indicator (fig . A) is off : a. Perform RRT -3 Radio Receiver A6 power fault isolation per para 3-135 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If Radio Transmitter AC POWER indicator (fig . B ) is off: a. Perform RRT - 3 Radio Transmitter A7 power fault isolation per
para 3-106 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If Key Generator A8 115 VAC POWER 50-400 ~ indicator (fig . C) is off: a. Perform RRT - 3 Key Generator A8 power fault isolation power
NOME
per para 3-122. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
oRecei
Trans
3белега.
3-954
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
OFF-LINE NOT SECURE POWER (BLACK ) FAULT ISOLATION
3-157.
DISTRIBUTION C
BOX A66 ROA
DSI
DE
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL -3
NOMENCLATURE
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL - 1
RADIO RELAY TERMINAL-2
A31
A 18
A6
A32
Radio Receiver R- 1329
A19
A7
Radio Transmitter T- 983
A33
A20 A8
Key Generator TSEC / KG- 27
Two Personnel Required . t Tools and Equipmen Required .
None
CHUM
10
ACPOWER
RECEIVER ALARMS
BAND S
If all three indicators are on: 110
Go to step 3.
PUT
ANISHIN If all three indicators are off: ACPOWER
TRANSMITTER ALARMS
PUSH 14 PULLYOR esthit
SAND1
Go to step 2.
@
1
At Radio Relay Terminal ( RRT ) 1 observe radio receiver, radio transmitter and key generator AC POWER indicators (fig . A).
FIGURE A CONTINUED
3-955
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 3-157 . OFF -LINE NOT SECURE POWER (BLACK ) FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
3. OFF-LINE -Contin
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 1 to ON . 2
Box A66 not secure power output fault
AIRNONDSIDE COND
COND AIRCORESIDE
isolation per para 3108 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
RY BATE POWER
SECURE PWR PRINTER RADIO RELAYTLEN ON SON ON . ON OFF OFF OFF OFF DISPLAY CONTROL ROADSIDE CURBSIDEON ON DFF OFF BLRIU WWCSU ON ON OFF OFF COMPUTER MODEMS ON OFF CAS VOICE FILTER PWRCOMMO SPLY UNIY ON ON OFFT OFF
RUNNINGTIME SAITERT POWER STS 403 C AT3400
ZYSC POWERSUPPLY
LAMP TEST
OFF HOTSECUREPWR CHLESIBE MOADSIDE ANS FANS AFT FWD 00 8 ON 011 DFF OFF OFF 28YDC COMMO DIST DISPL PWRHITFWB RELAYRADIOTERM FURSPLT CONTROL SPLY 2 3 ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF URF ANT OFF DFF ONETER BACKTEAMHAT L TELEPH CONTRO LIGHT ROADSIDE CONVER UNIT HEATERS CONTROL ON ON ON ON GET OFF OFF OFF DU UTILITYPOWER MANEERECT EXTERNAL AL 40082 INTERN120C ON DEF OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
口
trip : a. Perform Radio Terminal - 1 Distribution
EPPINPUTPER AMS FWBUHF AMPL
G
If circuit breaker does not
MECHANICA WEIGHT 178L LIFTBS
If circuit breaker trips :
FIGURE B m a. Perfor Radio Relay Terminal 1 , 2 , or 3 Not Secure Power Circuit Breaker Tripped fault isolation per para 3-16. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At RRT- 2 , observe radio receiver , radio transmitter , and key generator AC POWER 3
lamps (fig . A) .
If all three indicators are on : Go to step 5 .
If all three indicators are off: Go to step 4 .
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 2 to ON. 4
r does not trip : If circuit breake a . Perform Radio Relay Term - 2 Distribution Box A66 not secure power
output fault isolation per para 3-108 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If circuit breaker trips : a . Perform Radio Relay Terminal - 2 not secure power circuit breaker
tripped fault isolation per para 3-16. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . At distribution box (fig . B ) , set RADIO RELAY TERM 3to ON 5
3-956
ED
CONTINU
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-157.
5
OFF- LINE NOT SECURE POWER ( BLACK ) FAULT ISOLATION —Continued
-Continued
If circuit breaker does not trip : a. Perform Radio Relay Terminal - 3 Distribution Box A66 NOT SECURE
POWER OUTPUT Fault Isolation per para 3-108. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If circuit breaker trips : a. Perform Radio Relay Terminal 1,2 , or 3 Not Secure power circuit
breaker tripped fault isolation per para 3-16 . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragrpah .
E
3-957
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT
8. ANTENNA ISOLATION
3-158 . ISOLATION
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41
At Distrib
ANT COL
WARNING CONNECTING PANEL A26
At an
capti hang
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
ROA
DSI
DE
At a
eig CO
Personnel Required .
Di
Two
a
Tools and Equipment Required . Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 1/4 In . Wide , 10 In. ย
At Antenna Control Unit A41 (fig . A) , set POWER to ON. 1 If POWER does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If POWER trips:
Go to step 2.
AC
POWER
ANTENNA
ANTENNA POSITION
DC
HEA P AMS DING
STO ON
ON
ANTENNA SELECT BITE ANTENNA STOW2 STOP
FAULT
ROTATE CCW CW ED
AMS HEADING FIGURE A
3-958
CONTINU
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT
3-158 .
ISOLATION - Continued EPPINPUTP PWRAMP: At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ) , set UHF
2
AdROADSIConnDE
ANT CONTROL UNIT to OFF .
SECUREPR PRINTER RADIO OFF DRY DEP OFF BISPLAY/CONTRot ROXOSIDE COROSIDE OFF песто
AXCONS CHRESUL
OFF OFF COMPUTER MODEMS
DUE TO OVERHEAD POSITION ARTERT
TWO PERSONS ARE REQUIRED
13004
L
ORF FRICEO FILTER COMM URIT PSPLY OFF NEO
WARNING TO REMOVE , INSTALL , OR SERVICE ANTENNA CONTROL
TOVOC TARP TERY POWERSUPPLY TEXT D 1O ㅁT-2 O NOTSECUREPH CHORSIDE ROADSIDE FLES MT ΓΙΑ 08 AST ON OFF OFF OFFRADIO OFF FORDIST CONTROL FORSPLY Co EPLY 2 0 OFF OFF ory OFF DANT CONVER TELEPROSETER EBOADSIDE LIGHT CONTROL ON 群 OFF BI HISLITYPOWER MAST ERECT 12UNG40042 EXTERNAL INTERRAL 0 OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS
RUNINGTIME
MECHANICAL WEIGHT1785.8SLIFT
UNIT .
FIGURE B
At antenna control unit (fig . A), loosen four captive screws , pull unit out, and allow to
3
2
hang from cables .
J2
At antenna control unit (fig . C) , loosen eight rotary stud fasteners ( 1 ) and remove
4
cover (2 ). Disconnect A41P1 from A1J1 at rear of 5
antenna position indicator .
At distribution box (fig . B) , set UHF ANT 6
CONTROL UNIT to ON .
7
At antenna control unit (fig . A) , set POWER to ON. J1
If POWER does not trip : FIGURE C
1. Replace antenna position indicator
A41P1 م
A41A1 per
و
para 4-41.
2. Go to step 25. If POWER trips :
Go to step 8. on box (fig . B) set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to OFF. ti bu , At distri 8
At antenna control unit (fig . C) , connect A41P1 to A1J1 .
CONTINUED
9
T
3-959
0-1 TM 9-1430-600-2 R TRIPPED FAULT 3-158 . ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKE
8. ANTENN ISOLATIO
ISOLATION - Continued s Replace top access cover and secure with eight rotary stud fastener . 10
-Cont
Disconnect W467P1 from J1 .
11 At distribution box (fig . B ) , set UHF ANT CONTROL UNIT to ON. 12
At antenna control unit (fig . A) , set POWER to ON. 13
18 At a
If POWER does not trip : 19 Dis
Go to step 14.
99
If POWER trips :
20 At
Go to step 18. At antenna control unit , set POWER to OFF . 14
15
Connect W467P1 to J1 (fig . C) .
At Connecting Panel A26 (fig . D) , disconnect 7A1W11P1 from J4. 16
CP4
O O O
O O CP2
CP6 B
CP1
J4
0.0
J1
CP7
CP5 J2
CP3
CP8
FIGURE D
17
At antenna control unit ( fig . A) , set POWER to ON.
T
If POWER does not trip :
DUE TO OVERHEAD POSITION TWO PERSONS ARE REQUIRED TO La WARNING REMOVE, INSTALL , OR SERVICE ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 .
a . At antenna control unit install unit back into rack and ED
CONTINU
secure four captive screws . b. Set POWER to OFF .
3-960
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT A41 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT
3-158 .
ISOLATION_Continued
-Continued
17
c . At Connecting Panel A26 (fig . D ) , connect 7A1W11P1 to J4 .
d . Request AMG operator to fault isolate curbside synchro control circuits .
If POWER trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
18
At antenna control unit ( fig . C) , connect W467P1 to J1 .
19
Disconnect W360 P1 from J2.
20
At antenna control unit ( fig . A) , set POWER to ON .
If POWER does not trip :
Go to step 21 .
If POWER ac trips: e A41 antenna control subassembly per para 4-41 : a . Repl
b . Go to step 25 . At antenna control unit (fig . A) , set POWER to OFF . 21
22
Connect W360 P1 to J2 ( fig . C) .
At connecting panel (fig . D ) , disconnect 7A1W2 P1 from J1 . 23
At antenna control unit (fig . A) , set POWER to ON . 24
If POWER does not trip :
NG
WARNI
Le
D ED TO S DUE TO OVERHEA POSITION TWO PERSON ARE REQUIR REMOVE , INSTALL , OR SERVICE ANTENNA CONTROL UNIT .
a. At antenna control unit (fig . A) , install unit back into rack and secure four captive screws .
to OFFl. b Set POWERng c. At connecti pane (fig . D) , connect 7A1W2P1 to J1 . d. Request AMG operator to fault isolate roadside
CONTINUED
synchro control circuits . 3-961
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 NA CONTROL UNIT A41 POWER CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT N E 8 T 15 AN . 3-
T DISTRIBU R BREAKE
ISOLATION - Continued -Continued 24
If POWER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At antenna control unit (fig . A) , set POWER to ON . 25
IfPOWER does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If POWER trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
LD
RO
E
3-962
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 EPP INPUT PWR- UHF AMS PWR AMPL CIRCUIT
3-159 .
BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
口
0
-00
J29
DISTRIBUTION
100
BOX A66
[ RO
AD
SI
DE
Personnel Required .
Two None
Tools and Equipment Required .
AIRCOND ROADSION
UHF AMS PWR AMPL to ON . ACKCOND CURBSIDE
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL
BATPOWERYER does not trip : Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
रTo:1 COMPUTER DN VOICE FATER PWNSPLY ba G
TEVEC AURRINGTHAT BATERY POWERNOPPLY POWER SUS TEST STS MT3 N NOTSECVELFW CURRSIST HOADSIDE HAS AFT IND O AUT AST ON 013 OFE OFF REVOC COUNS RADIO PREDIST CREP FURSPLY CONTROL RELAYTEG UNITFW ON D8 3 OFF OFF UNFART CONSEN TELTEREPHON CONTROL CIAS CONTRO 群 DIY OFF W BRASTYPOWER 124AD0AZ EXTERNAL INTERNAL เอ
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A), set 1
SECUREPAR PRINTER BADI RELAYTERM ON en en OFF BISPLAY/CONTROLREARDAY CURRSIDE DIY
DANGER 208 VOLTS
10
EPFIMPOTFRE FREAMPL
2201:
FIGURE A
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL CONTINUED
trips : Go to step 2. 3-963
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 BUTION BOX A66 EPP INPUT PWR -UHF AMS PWR AMPL CIRCUIT 9 RI 15 ST 3. DI
ROUTING
BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION - Continued At J29 , disconnect antenna mast group (AMG ) power cable 7A1W1 .
RRT-
2
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to ON . 3
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL does not trip : Have AMG maintainer perform AMG Antenna /Amplifier 7A1A2 / 7A1A3 MAST AC MODE Erection / Extension Fault Isolation per TM 9-1430-603-
20. If UHF AMS PWR AMPL trips : Go to step 4.
Connect AMG power cable 7A1W1 to J29. 4
At Distribution Box A66 exterior (fig . B ) , disconnect W441P1 from UTILITY POWER 120
5
AIR COND CS
AIR COND RS
GPFU
208 VAC 400 HZ
VAC . At distribution box ( fig . A) , set UHF AMS PWR
UHF AMG PWR AMP 208 VAC 400 HZ
BATTERY INPUT POWER 28 VOC
6
AMPL to ON .
UTILITY POWER 120 VAC
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL does not trip :
INPUT POWER 208 VAC 400 HZ Call Intermediate Maintenance . GND
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL trips :
FIGURE B
a. Replace Distribution Box A66 CB34 per para 4- 83. b. Go to step 7.
Set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to ON. 7
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL does not trip : a. Set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to OFF . b. Connect W441P 1 to UTILITY POWER 120 VAC (fig . B). c. Set UHF AMS PWR AMPL to ON. d . Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If UHF AMS PWR AMPL trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-964
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
ROUTING LOGIC RADIO INTERFACE UNIT FAULT ASSESSMENT
3-160.
RRT-4
RRT-3
RRT-2 RRT- 1
O ΕΠΕΙ
沖
RO
DE
BSI
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
AD
SI
CUR
DE COMMUNICATIONS DIGITAL DATA PROCESSOR A46
[
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
None
At Communications Digital Data Processor (RLRIU) A46 (fig . A) , observe RLRIU 1
lamp is on : Go to step 2.
10to
If RLRIU POWER
RLRIU
BITE CLOCK
OOO
POWER lamp .
ER MAST RESET OPCODE ADDRESS DATA 10: 596 0.7E
LAMPT TES
POWER DATA PO BUFFER MODEM AMP Ο ROM 1
EXECUTE CONTINUE COMMAND READ ROM 2
ROM 3 LOCAL ESS ADDR
If RLRIU POWER
lamp is off:
AR CLEMAN AR D CLE ENTRY COM
RLRIERU POW
6 5
Go to step 4 .
2
At RLRIU (fig . A) , press MASTER RESET , and
observe ROM 1 , ROM 2 , ROM 3 , CLOCK and RLRIU 1 LEDs .
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-965
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 E UNIT FAULT ASSESSMENT - Continued ROUTING LOGIC RADIO INTERFAC 3-160 .
ROUTING
Notify battalion maintenance officer ( BMO ) about the status of the RLRIU LEDs , and At any
your assessment . Request permission to go off-line and run MCS - RLUD .
keyge
3 lamps
If permission is not given : Execute BMO's instructions .
If permission is given : a. Deactivate fire platoon (FP) per TM 9-1425-602-12 . b. Load maintenance control system (MCS) and run RLUD - RLRIU 8
2 diagnostic per TM 9-1425-602-1 .
Give
requ roa
c. Go to step 13.
At Distribution Box A66 ( fig . B ) , 4
set RLRIU to ON.
If RLRIU trips : Go to step 12.
If RLRIU does not trip :
AIRROADSI CORDDE 777777 AIRCURBCONSIDED
Go to step 5. WASTERY POWER
At RLRIU (fig . A) , listen for the LO
5
sound of a blower.
SECURE FWRELAYRADIOTERM ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF
PRINTER OR OFF
DISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIDE CURBSIDEON ON OFF OFF ALKIU AWCIU ON OW OFF OFF COMPUTER MODEMS ON ON OFF OFF CAS VOICE FILTER COMMO URIT PWRSPLY ON ON OFFT OFF
RUNNINGTIME ENTER POWERT SYS MAT-1 ANT-3 BET-2 0 O
EPPINPUTPWR URFAMS PWTAMPL
ZWYDC POWER SUPPLY
LAMP TEST CA OFF
NOTSECURE PW CURBSIDE FAMS AFT ROADSID FANS E AFT ON 01 OFF OFF OFF OFF ZYSC DISPLAY FORDIST PLY CONTROL RELRADIOTERM RTPUR SPLY ON ON 1 2 3 DEF OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF THEART TELEPHONE 1IGHT CONTROL CONVERTER TER ROADSIDE HEATERS CONTROL URETON ON ON OFF OFFITY ER OFF OFF MAST ERECT POW UTIL 120C4D0NZ EXTERNAL INTERNAL ON OFF OFF DANGER 208 VOLTS FAD
0
MECHANI WESENT CAL178 LIFT LBS If sound is present : Go to step 6 .
FIGURE B
If sound is not present : Go to step 7. Give BMO your assessment , and request permission to go off- line and run MCS 6
RLUD -RLRIU .
If permission is not given : Execute BMO's instructions .
If permission is given :
2 a. Deactivate FP per TM 9-1425-602-1 . b. Load MCS and run RLUD - RLRIU diagnostic per TM 9-1425-602-12 .
UED
c. Go to step 13.
3-966
CONTIN
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-160 .
ROUTING LOGIC RADIO INTERFACE UNIT FAULT ASSESSMENT -Continued
At any RRT, observe radio receiver , radio transmitter , 7
key generator , data buffer , and multiplexer power lamps (fig . C ) .
If all power lamps are off:
Ma 008
Go to step 8.
RECEIVER ALABUS
LCPOWER
If some power lamps are on: Go to step 9.
Give BMO your assessment of RRT power fault and
の
8
request permission to go off-line and perform TRANSMISTER
BAND
POWER
roadside aft control fault isolation .
If permission is not given : Execute BMO's instructions .
ว
O &LADV
If permission is given :
an E
1/4 C
a . Deactivate FP per TM 9-1425-602-12. b. Have maintainer perform roadside aft
SLIONREPLACETHECROsa PENATIONWEST
control fault isolation per para 3-92.
Observe data buffer and multiplexer power lamps.
Ues
9
%90
c. Go to step 13.
If both power lamps are off:
00000 Q
OPENFORAUD GAINBEAST
FIGURE C Go to step 10.
If both power lamps are not off: Go to step 11 . Give BMO your assessment of red power control fault . Request permission to go off10
line and perform RLRIU power control fault isolation .
If permission is not given : Execute BMO's instructions. If permission is given : 2 c Radio Interface Unit Power -1gi iner pe te in orm-1Ro 02Lo taF 6g ut va rfM in aavce 5ti ma b. H P per T De a. 9 42 .
Control fault isolation per para 3-114.
CONTINUED
c. Go to step 13. 3-967
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 3-160 . ROUTING LOGIC RADIO INTERFACE UNIT FAULT ASSESSMENT -Continued
DATA LIN
Give BMO your assessment of RLRIU power fault . Request permission to go off- line
11
and perform RLRIU input power fault isolation .
If permission is not given : Execute BMO's instructions .
If permission is given : tivate FP per TM 9-1425-602-12 . a. Deac b. Have maintainer perform Routing Logic Radio Interface Unit A46 Input Power fault isolation per para 3-107 . c. Go to step 13. Give BMO your assessment of RLRIU fault . Request permission to go off- line and perform Distribution Box A66 SECURE PWR - RLRIU circuit breaker tripped fault 12
isolation . If permission is not given : Execute BMO's instructions .
If permission is given : te FP bu 25-602-12. ron a TM 9ti m Di orva rfti x 14 stri pe b.. De Peac A66 SECURE Bo PWR - RLRIU circuit breaker 10
tripped fault isolation per para 3-35 . c. Go to step 13.
Determine if fault has been corrected . 13
If fault corrected : a. Notify BMO that you are ready to activate FP .
b. Activate FP per TM 9-1425-602-12 . c. Return to operations .
If fault not corrected : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-968
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-161 .
DATA LINK TERMINAL FAULT ASSESSMENT
COMPUTER -TO-COMMUNICATIONS INTERFACE PROCESSOR A99
Ena
E
ID
BS
R CU
RO
AD
POWER SUPPLY A 100
SI
DE DISTRIBUTION BOX A66
POWER SUPPLY A25
Two
Personnel Required .
None
Tools and Equipment Required .
0
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . A) , set DATA LINK TERM to ON. 1
If DATA LINK TERM trips : Go to step 5.
If DATA LINK TERM remains ON : Go to step 2.
A CONS
BETERY POWER
ZAVIC LAMP KUTERY POWER POWERSUPPLY TEST
BET-2 D D GOTSECUREFO CUR983SO FORSIDE TWO F182 ALES MT Do offKADIO γένος DISPL WEDIST CENTROE UNITPUR RELAYFLAM PL O 04 BER DFT OFF OFF CONTR UNFANTOL TELEP RTER CONVEHONE LIGHT ROADSIDE WEATERS CONTROL ON OFF ATHLITY POWER EXTER INTERKE129L 400A ON
OFF
AST OFF
CO
NO
AIRCOND ACADSIDE
SECURE P PRINTER ALL2RadnoTEAM ON GR FGI T OFP OFF OFF Y OL RISPLA /CONTR CHREIBE ors TOPCA BLAU ON OFF COMPUTER MASTLE AUS DEF OFF VICEO PRZEDT COM PABSPLY OUT
UD
LPPINPUTPUS FWRAMPL
DANGER 208 VOLTS
NICAL LIFTLUS MECHA WEIGHT170
FIGURE A
CONTINUED
3-969
-20-1
TM 9-1430-600 3-161 .
DATA LINK
ENT - Continued DATA LINK TERMINAL FAULT ASSESSM -Continue
At Power Supply A25 ( fig . B) , open access door and setDLT toON .
If
2 A87 RT-524 WCC AND ONKY57 ON
Notify all beperfor
IfDLT trips : OFF OFF A88 RT-524 ANTUHF CONT ANDONKY57 DLT ON ON
Go to step 5.
Deactiva
IfDLT remainsON : OFF
OFF
OFF
Go to step 3. Decide
FIGURE B At Power Supply A 100 (fig . C) , remove DLT access door and setLAMP TEST to up position . Release LAMP TEST and observe status ofPOWER SUPPLY FAULT LEDs . 3
If any POWER SUPPLY FAULT LED is on : POWER SUPPLY FAULT Go to step 5. PS2
NON INTERRUPT
A PS4
R PS3
©
R PS1
LAMP TEST
A PS5
If allPOWER SUPPLY FAULT
OVERCURRENT
LEDs are off:
C
Go to step 4. FIGURE C
ns Processor A99 (fig . D) , pressFAULT RESET .
io At Computer-to - Communicat
Release switch , then observe and record status ofFAULT lamps .
4
FAULT LAMPS
O
1)
อ PALABAN
Θ
∞
88
→ O
88
פן
FAULT -RESET-
Θ
о
O
O
O
FIGURE D Give Battalion Maintenance Officer ( BMO) your assessment of DLT corrective 5
maintenance required . Await instruction from BMO. If DLT off-line corrective maintenance is not authorized :
ED
CONTINU
Execute BMO's instructions per tactical standard operating procedure .
3-970
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
DATA LINK TERMINAL FAULT ASSESSMENT
3-161 .
Continued
-Continued
5
If DLT off-line corrective maintenance is authorized :
Go to step 6. e Notify all crewmen at active launch stations that off- line corrective maintenanc is to 6
be performed . Deactivate Fire Platoon ( FP ) per TM 9-1425-602-12 .
7
Decide appropriate action requested . If Distribution Box A66 DATA LINK TERMcircuit breaker tripped corrective
8
don na te ti esbu orem re main : Box A66 DATA LINK TERMcircuit breaker tripped rfnc stri Diqu Pe a. te
fault isolation per para 3-78 . p A2 9 . 5 DLTcircuit breaker tripped corrective maintenance ste Go b. we r to ly If Po Supp
m 28VDC Power Supply A25 DLTcircuit breaker tripped fault rf Pe a. es dor te requ :
isolation per para 3-19. pA b. we Go 9 .100 power fault corrective maintenance requested : ste r to ly If Po Supp
a. Perform data link terminal initialization fault isolation per para 3-134 .
ns mmunicatio omputer to Interface Processor A99 power fault If C epCo b Go to st 9. e corrective maintenanc is requested : 2 d a. Loa MCS and run RLUD - DLT diagnostic per TM 9-1425-602-1 .
b. Go to step 9 . Determine if fault is corrected : 9
If fault corrected : Go to step 10.
If fault not corrected : te nce . Maintena Call Intermedia
10
0 Initialize DLT per TM 9-1430-600-1 .
CONTINUED
3-971
-20-1
TM 9-1430-600
POWER SUF FAULT ISOL
DATA LINK TERMINAL FAULT ASSESSMENT -Continued
3-161 .
11
Notify crewmen at all launch stations that you are ready to activate FP.
12
Notify BMO that you are ready to activate FP .
13
2 Activate FP per TM 9-1425-602-1 . Close access door , replace DLT access door and return to operations .
14
3-972
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
POWER SUPPLY A58 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED
3-162 .
FAULT ISOLATION
DISTRIBUTION BOX A66 ROA
DSI
DE
POWER SUPPLY A58
CONTROL-KEYBOARD A57
Personnel Required .
Two 0
Tools and Equipment Required .
r Screwdrive , Flat Tip , 3/16 In . Wide , 6 In. r Screwdrive , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 8 In. Key, Socket Head , Hexagon 5/32 In. Gloves , Leather
CAUTION HIGH CURRENT ER RE BEONNE CTION MAINAC CBPOWBEFOMUST DISC OFFAT
4/
32 JI S OVCEBCIAL
AT E1 E2 E3
1
At Power Supply A58 (fig . A) , release 30
CB1
459
captive screws and remove access cover .
A A
の CONTINUED FIGURE A
T
3-973
-20-1 TM 9-1430-600 D CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED POWER SUPPLY A58 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEA 3-162 .
22. POWER SU FAULT IS
FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
3 At power
POWER SUPPLIES MAY BE HOT. DO NOT TOUCH . La G WARNIN
At power supply ( fig . A) , observe CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD . 2
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD is ON: a. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
At po
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD is OFF :
Go to step 3.
AD to ON . At power supply ( fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHE 3
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD does not trip : a . Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
A
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : Go to step 4.
POWER SUPPLIES MAY BE HOT . USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN Le NING DISCONNECTING AND CONNECTING CABLES . WAR
9
J3 J2 AL
Disconnect W1P6 (fig . B) from J3 by
A
4
releasing two captive screws .
UED
CONTIN
FIGURE B
3-974
POWER SUPPLY A58 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED
3-162 .
FAULT ISOLATION - Continued
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON. 5
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD does not trip : Go to step 7.
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : a. Replace power supply subassembly per para 4-61 . Do not install
bottom access cover . b. Go to step 6 .
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON. 6
CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD does not trip :
If
a . Install access cover by securing 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips :
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to OFF . 7
Connect W1P6 to J3 by securing two captive screws (fig . B) . 8
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . C) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE to OFF. 9
At bottom of Control - Keyboard A57 (fig.D ) ,
PE PUTP ANS
open access cover. BOASSION
SCORE W WELIGARIDTERM ON Off DISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIGN
Als cou CYRESE
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO ORS CONNECT , LOOSEN
ARTERY POWER
OFF
ber VOICE COMBO PAXSPLE
Tol
SCREWS EVENLY .
ERVIC ATERY POWERSOPAL POWER
PRINTER DH
ON BIT
100 TEST
et S ROLLADOS
HOTCLEAREPAC CARESIDE FMD 201 OFF OH MI 2RVDC XELRFEAR1 UNITPRE DISPLE CONTROL FAT D De OFF ~ FF UN ART OFF Cheecered CONTROL OR ON COF Bel THITYPOWER BUS OPP SITI HON EXTERNAL INTERRAC ON 255 pr DANGER 208 VOLTS AT
G
loosen three captive screws and
Gi
10
ICALSIT MECAN WANT178LES CAUTION
FIGURE C
ct P1 from At shelter wall , disconne 11
CONTINUED
W1J1 and P2 from W1J2 .
3-975
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
82 POW 3-162.
POWER SUPPLY A58 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED
FAL FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
119 12
At distribution box ( fig . C) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL -ROADSIDE
to ON .
13
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON .
CAUT If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD does not
trip : P2
Go to step 14.
If CB1 5 AMP
P2
P1
OVERHEAD trips :
22
FIGURE D
Call Intermediate Maintenance .
14
At power supply ( fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to OFF.
15
At distribution box (fig . C) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE to OFF
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CONNECTOR , SECURE SCREWS EVENLY . CAUTION
16
At control - keyboard ( fig . D ) , connect P1 to W1J1 on shelter wall .
17
At distribution box (fig . C) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- ROADSIDE to ON.
18
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON.
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD does not trip : a. Replace A57 Circuit Card Assembly A4 per para 4-59.
b. Go to step 19. If CB1-5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : a. Replace A57 Signal Data Converter A3 per para 4-60.2 . b. Go to step 25.
3-976
CONTINUED
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
P3-162 .
POWER SUPPLY A58 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION -Continued
19
At distribution box (fig . C ) , setDISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE toOFF .
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CONNECTOR , SECURE SCREWS EVENLY .
CAUTION
20
At Control - Keyboard Assembly A57 (fig . D) , connect P2 to W1J2 on shelter wall .
At distribution box ( fig . C) , setDISPLAY /CONTROL ROADSIDE toON . 21
At power supply assembly (fig . A) , setCB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD.toON . 22
IfCB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD remainsON : a. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfCB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : a. Replace A57 Keyboard Transmitter A1 per para 4-60.1 .
b. Go to step 23. At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD toON . 23
IfCB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD remainsON : a . Install bottom access cover and secure by tightening 30 captive
screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
IfCB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : r a. Replace A57 Keyboard Transmitte A1 per para 4-60.1 .
b. Go to step 24.
At power supply , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON . 24
IfCB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD remains ON : a. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws (fig . A) . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this
CONTINUED
paragraph .
T
3-977
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 3-162 .
POWER SUPPLY A58 CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
24
-Continued
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON:
25 If CB15 AMP OVERHEAD remains ON: a. Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips :
a . Replace A57 keyboard transmitter A1 per para 4-60.1 . b. Go to step 26. At power supply ( fig . A) , set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON . 26
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD remains ON: a . Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : a . Replace control - keyboard subassembly on A57 per para 4-60 .
b. Go to step 27.
27
At power supply, set CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD to ON .
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD remains ON: a . Install access cover and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 5 AMP OVERHEAD trips : Call Intermediate Maintenance .
3-978
$163. PC
IS
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-163.
POWER SUPPLY A77 CB1 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION
CONTROL-KEYBOARD A76
Po
18 0088
POWER SUPPLY A77 (BEHIND PANEL)
DISTRIBUTION
C
BOX A66
ROA
DSI
DE
Personnel Required .
Two
Tools and Equipment Required .
Screwdriver , Cross Tip , No. 2 , 10 In . Screwdriver , Flat Tip , 3/16 In . Wide , 8 In. Key, Socket Head , Hexagon 5/32 In . Gloves , Leather
1
At Power Supply A77 (fig . A) , loosen 30 captive screws ( 2 ) and remove access panel (3) .
1
A
33
J2 ال
E1 E2 E3 J3 JZ JI
2
BOTTOM VIEW
CONTINUED
A-
FIGURE A
3-979
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
HOO
163. POW ISOL
POWER SUPPLY A77 CB1 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPPED FAULT
3-163 .
ISOLATION -Continued
6 At pr
WARNING
POWER SUPPLIES MAY BE HOT . DO NOT TOUCH .
At power supply ( fig . A) , observe CB1 . 2
If CB1 is ON : a . Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws .
S
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph . ∞
181 C If CB1 is OFF : Go to step 3 . 19
Set CB1 to ON.
3
110
If CB1 does not trip : a . Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws .
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 trips : Go to step 4.
Le
CA
POWER SUPPLIES MAY BE HOT. USE PROTECTIVE GLOVES WHEN
WARNING CONNECTING OR DISCONNECTING CABLES .
4
Loosen two captive screws ( 1 ) and disconnect W 10P35 from J3.
5
Set CB1 to ON.
If CB1 does not trip : Go to step 7.
If CB1 trips: a . Replace power supply subassembly (on A77) per para 4-61 , but do not install access panel . ED
b. Go to step 6 .
3-980
CONTINU
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-163 .
POWER SUPPLY A77 CB1 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION--Continued
6
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB 1to ON
If CB1does not trip :
a . Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB 1trips :
Call Intermediate Maintenance . EPPINPUTPWR URFANS PWRAMPL
7
Set CB 1to OFF
8
Connect W 10P35 to J3 and secure
AIRROADSIDE COND
with two captive screws .
AIN CONO CURBSIDE 9
At Distribution Box A66 (fig . B ) , set DISPLAY /CONTROL- CURBSIDETO
BUTTERY POWER
SECUBEPWR RELAYRADIOTERM ON 2 ON 3 ON OFF OFF Off DISPLAY/CONTROL ROADSIDE CURBSIDEON OR OFF AWCS BLAIU ON COMPUTER ON VOICE COMMO PWRSPLY
OFF.
OFF
MODEMS OFF GAS FILTER UNIT ON OFF
PRINTER
OFF
28VOC RUNNINGTIME BATTERY POWER SUPPLY LAMP TEST STS ART-1 POWER ON RAT-3 ART-Z OFF O NOT SECUREPWR CUNDSIDE BOADSIDE FANS AFT FWD FWD FANS AFT ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF 28VOC BADID PWRDIST DISPLAY/ PWRSPLY COMMO RELY TERM UNITPWR CONTROL SPLY ON 2 3 ON ON ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF UNFANT OFF OFF OFF BAXTELEPHONE LIGHT CONTROL ROADSIDE UNST CONVERTER TERM HEATERS CONTROL OM ON ON ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF QU UNLITYPOWER ERECT 120C 400HZ EXTERNAL MAST INTERNAL ON ON OFF OFF
DANGER 208 VOLTS 10
At bottom of Control - Keyboard
LIFT MECHANICAL WEIGHT 178LAS
A76 (fig.C ) , loosen three captive screws ( 2 ) and open access
FIGURE B
cover ( 1 ).
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CONNECTORS , LOOSEN SCREWS EVENLY .
CAUTION
Disconnect P1 from W 10J1 , 11
and P2 from W 10J2 .
12
P1
At distribution box (fig . B) , set DISPLAY /CONTROLCURBSIDEto ON
-P2
2
FIGURE C
CONTINUED
3-981
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 3-163. POWER SUPPLY A77 CB1 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT
3-163.
ISOLATION
-Continued ON
CB 1
21 to
At power supply (fig . A) , set
13
CB1
122
does not trip :
If
Go to step 14. CB1
If
trips :
Call Intermediate Maintenance . OFF
CB1 Set
14
to
OFF
DISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE to
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set
15
2
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CONNECTOR , TIGHTEN SCREWS EVENLY .
TION
16
At control - keyboard ( fig . C) , connect P1 to W 10J1 . ON
DISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE to
17
At distribution box (fig . B ) , set CB1
18
At power supply ( fig . A) , set
ON to
CB 1
If
does not trip :
a. Replace A76 Circuit Card Assembly A4 per para 4-59. b. Go to step 19 . CB1 If
trips:
a . Replace A76 Signal Data Converter A3 per para 4-60.2 . b. Go to step 25. OFF
DISPLAY /CONTROL CURBSIDE to
19
At distribution box (fig . B) , set
TO PREVENT DAMAGE TO CONNECTOR , TIGHTEN SCREWS EVENLY . CAUTION
NUE
CONTI
20
3-982
At control-keyboard (fig . C) , connect P2 to W 10J2 .
TM 9-1430-600-20-1
3-163 .
POWER SUPPLY A77 CB1 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION— Continued
21
At distribution box ( fig . B ) , set DISPLAY / CONTROL- CURBSIDETO ON
22
At power supply ( fig . A) , set CB1to ON
If CB1 does not trip : a . Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws. b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB 1trips : a . Replace A76 Keyboard Transmitter A1 per para 4-60.1 . b. Go to step 23.
23
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1to ON
If CB1 does not trip :
a . Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws . b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 trips: a. Replace Control - Keyboard Assembly A76 subassembly per para 4-60 .
b. Go to step 24 .
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1to ON 24
If CB1 does not trip : a. Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws .
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 trips: Call Intermediate Maintenance .
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 to ON. 25
If CB1 does not trip : a . Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws .
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB 1 trips : e A76 a . Replac Keyboard Transmitter A1 per para 4-60.1 .
CONTINUED
b. Go to step 26.
T
3-983
TM 9-1430-600-20-1 3-163 .
POWER SUPPLY A77 CB1 5 AMP CIRCUIT BREAKER TRIPPED FAULT ISOLATION-Continued
Order of th
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 to ON. 26
If CB 1 does not trip : a . Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws . rial:
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
ROBI
or Gener The A If CB 1 trips : a. Replace Control - Keyboard Assembly A76 subassembly per para 4-60.
b. Go to step 27.
27
At power supply (fig . A) , set CB1 to ON.
istribut
be dis intena
If CB1 does not trip : a . Install access panel and secure with 30 captive screws .
b. Return to procedure that brought you to this paragraph .
If CB1 trips :
Call Intermediate Maintenance . 1
3-984
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
JOHN A. WICKHAM , JR . General, United States Army Chief of Staff Official: ROBERT M. JOYCE Major General, United States Army The Adjutant General
Distribution : To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-32 , Maintenance requirements for PATRIOT Missile System .
Section III ,
Organizational
PUBLICATION
TM 9-14 BEEXACT PAGE NO
6
12
13-19
21-2
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
SOMETHING
THEN.. JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT, FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL.
WRONG
WITH THIS PUBLICATION ?
FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADDRESS ) CDR , 1st Bn , 65th ADA ATTN :
SP4 John Doe
Key West ,
FL
33040
DATE SENT 14 January 1979
PUBLICATION DATE
PUBLICATION TITLE
PUBLICATION NUMBER
Unit of Radar Set
AN/MPQ - 50 Tested at the HFC TM 9-1430-550-34-1 BE EXACT. PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS
PAGE NO
FIGURE NO
PARAGRAPH
IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:
TABLE NO
"B " Ready Relay K11 is shown with two # 9 contacts . That contact which is wired to pin 8 of relay K16
9-5
9-19
7 Sep 72
should be changed to contact #10 .
Multimeter B indicates 600 K ohms to 9000 21-2
21-2
step 1C
Reads : K ohms .
Multimeter B indicates 600 K ohms
Change to read : minimum . Circuit being checked could measure infinity . r ete tim son Mul can read above 9000 K ohms and still be Rea :
E L P M A S
correct .
NOTE TO THE READER :
Your comments will go directly to the writer responsible for this manual , and he will prepare To help him in the reply that is returned to you . his evaluation of your recommendations , please explain the reason for each of your recommendations , unless the reason is obvious .
All comments will be appreciated, and will be given Handwritten comments are immediate attention . ble accepta . e For your convenienc , blank "tear out " forms , preprinted, addressed, and ready to mail, are included
in this manual .
SIGN HERE PRINTED NAME , GRADE OR TITLE , AND TELEPHONE NUMBER SP4 John Doe , Autovon 222-222
PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE .
RM79 2028-2 DA , FO JUL
PS --IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR ON RECOMMENDATI MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS
PUBLICATIC
BE EXACT PAGE
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
SOMETHING
WRONG
WITH THIS PUBLICATION?
FROM : (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADDRESS) THEN.. JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT, FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL'
PUBLICATION DATE
PUBLICATION NUMBER
BE EXACT.
PAGE .NO
PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS PARAGRAPH
FIGURE NO
DATE SENT
TABLE NO
PUBLICATION TITLE
IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:
SIGN HERE . PRINTED NAME , GRADE OR TITLE , AND TELEPHONE NUMBER
DA 1, FORM 2028-2 JUL 79
PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE .
P.S.--IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS .
REVERSE OF DA FORM 2028-2
PUBLICATION
BE EXACT PAGE
LINE D ATE PERFOR NG ALO R TEA
FILL IN YOUR UNIT'S ADDRESS
FOLD BACK DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
POSTAGE AND FEES PAID DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY DOD 314 OFFICIAL BUSINESS PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $ 300
Commander U. S. Army Missile Command
ATTN : DRSMI -SNPM Redstone Arsenal , AL
35898
USMAIL
RECOMMENDED CHANGES TO EQUIPMENT TECHNICAL PUBLICATIONS
SOMETHING WRONG WITH THIS PUBLICATION ? FROM: (PRINT YOUR UNIT'S COMPLETE ADDRESS) THEN.. JOT DOWN THE DOPE ABOUT IT ON THIS FORM, CAREFULLY TEAR IT OUT, FOLD IT AND DROP IT IN THE MAIL!
PUBLICATION DATE
PUBLICATION NUMBER
BE EXACT.
PAGE .NO
.PIN-POINT WHERE IT IS PARAGRAPH
FIGURE NO
TABLE NO
PUBLICATION TITLE
IN THIS SPACE TELL WHAT IS WRONG AND WHAT SHOULD BE DONE ABOUT IT:
PRINTED NAME , GRADE OR TITLE , AND TELEPHONE NUMBER
FORM DA 1 JUL 79 2028-2
DATE SENT
PREVIOUS EDITIONS ARE OBSOLETE .
SIGN HERE.
P.S.--IF YOUR OUTFIT WANTS TO KNOW ABOUT YOUR RECOMMENDATION MAKE A CARBON COPY OF THIS AND GIVE IT TO YOUR HEADQUARTERS.
1
…………… .ལུ ……………………
AINTE
LINE D ATE PERFOR NG ALO R TEA
OPERANANCE
ATE RPSTL ERMEDI INTNTE ZATIONAL MAI ORGANINANCE NANCE MAINTE 9-1425-800-34 0-1426-800-12
OTHER
REVERSE OF DA FORM 2028-2
FILL IN YOUR UNIT'S ADDRESS
ITEM JOSR MA
FOLD BACK DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
POSTAGE AND FEES PAID DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY DOD 314
USMAIL
OFFICIAL BUSINESS PENALTY FOR PRIVATE USE $ 300
Commander U. S. Army Missile Command
ATTN : DRSMI -SNPM ne sto Arsenal , AL Red
35898
1
FBD -ID
IX
DESCRIPTION SYSTEM X &ESIGNATIONS DPARAMETERS X PAINTING &MARKING X A GUIDE USER SOFTWARE A / CA X AAB GROUP DISPLAY &CONTROL & COMPUTER CONTROL WEAPON A / CA AAA COMPUTER CCOMMAND & OORDINATION AAAE /ACAE & OWER P INTERLOCKS H , ARD UNIT CONTROL PERIPHERAL STORAGE ,MASS UNIT COPY A /CAD AAAD C STORAGE & OMPUTER UNIT RECOVERY MAINTENANCE PANEL AAAC ACAC / CONTROL UNIT INPUT OUTPUT / AAAB /ACAB MEMORY UNIT MONOLITHIC UNIT PROCESSOR CENTRAL UNIT /ABK AAE INTERFACE CONTROL WEAPON / RADAR AACC /ADTERMINAL LINK DATA ACCA / AACA UNIT INTERFACE /RADIO LOGIC ROUTING /ACCB CB AA S ODEMS M &,V-UHF COMMUNICATION AAD STATION CONTROL ENGAGEMENT ABH SET RADAR CONTROL OUTPUT / UNIT ABA INPUT UNIT ABI UNIT INTERFACE MTR TRIGGER &X GEN GROUP & GROUP SYSTEM HADAR ANTENNA STEERING GROUP BEAM CONTROL UNIT ABF PROCESSOR ABC ETRANSMITTER - XCITER ABD AMPLIFIER DTRANSMITTER &F- INAL RIVER ABEA CONTROL UNIT INPUT OUTPUT / GENERATOR WAVEFORM ABEB ABEC EXPANSION PULSE ABEG LENS END FRONT END ABEK COMPARATOR FRONT RADAR SEARCH /TRACK IF ABEE RECEIVER CANCELLER GROUP SIDE LOBE ABEF ABED ECCM PROCESSOR ABEJ DIGITAL TRACK ACTIVE PROCESSOR ABEM -VIAMISSILE CORRELATION PROCESSOR ABEH ABEL POWER DC ABBA CONTROL INPUT OUTPUT / ABBB PROCESSOR 1SIGNAL DIGITAL SIGNAL PROCESSOR 2SIGNAL DIGITAL ABBC PROCESSOR GROUP &3SIGNAL PROCESSOR DIGITAL ABBD TESTS CROSSOVER ABG SYSTEM IFF CENTRAL ACD X & OORDINATION CINFORMATION GROUP MAST AG ANTENNA AFA NS GROUP RELAY COMMUNICATIO ROUND MISSILE AD . STATION LAUNCHING TEST SET LAUNCHING STATION EQUIPMENT &MAINTENANCE SUPPLY BATTALION X TRAINING OPERATOR X DESTRUCTION
A
IM
X
X X
X
X X X
X X 9-4935-600-14 X
X
9-1430-602-10-1 /-2 9-1430-602-20 9-1430-603-20 9-1430-604-20 9-1410-600-14 9-1440-600-20 9-4935-603-12 9-4935-600-14
9-4935-600-14
9-1410-600-14
9-1430-601-34-23 9-1430-601-34-24
X X 9-1430-603-10 9-1430-604-10 9-1410-600-14 9-1440-600-10 9-4935-603-12
9-1430-601-34-5 9-1430-601-34-6 9-1430-601-34-7 9-1430-601-34-8 9-1430-601-34-9 9-1430-601-34-10 9-1430-601-34-11 9-1430-601-34-12 9-1430-601-34-13 9-1430-601-34-14 9-1430-601-34-15 9-1430-601-34-16 9-1430-601-34-17 9-1430-601-34-18 9-1430-601-34-19 9-1430-601-34-20 9-1430-601-34-21 9-1430-601-34-22
X
9-1430-601-34-3 9-1430-601-34-4
X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X
X X X
X
9-1425-604-14-3 9-1425-604-14-4 9-1425-604-14-5 9-1425-605-14 9-1425-606-14 9-1425-607-14 9-1425-608-14 /-2 9-1430-600-20-1 9-1430-601-20-1 /-2
9-1425-604-14-3 9-1425-604-14-4 9-1425-604-14-5 9-1425-605-14 9-1425-606-14 9-1425-607-14 9-1425-608-14 9-1430-600-10 9-1430-601-10
9-1425-604-14-3 9-1425-604-14-4 9-1425-604-14-5 9-1425-605-14 9-1425-606-14 9-1425-607-14 9-1425-608-14
9-1425-604-14-2
9-1425-604-14-2
9-1425-604-14-2
X X X AAAA /ACAA X X X X X X
9-1425-604-14-1
X
OTHER
9-1430-602-24P /-2 9-1430-602-34-1 9-1430-603-34-1 /-2 9-1430-603-24P 9-1430-604-34-1 /-2 9-1430-604-24P 9-1410-600-24P 9-1440-600-24P 9-1440-600-34-1 /-2 LO9-1440-600-14 9-4935-603-24P 9-4935-603-34-1 /-2 9-4935-600-24P 9-6920-600-14 43-0002-23
9-1430-600-24P LO9-1430-600-14 /-2 9-1430-600-34-1 9-1430-601-34-1 9-1430-601-24P /-2
ORGANIZATIONALINTERMEDIATE OPERATION & MAINTENANCE RPSTL MAINTENANCE MAINTENANCE 9-1425-600-34 9-1425-600-12 9-1425-600-12 TB9-1425-600-14 TB9-1425-600-14 TB9-1425-600-14 9-1425-601-14 9-1425-601-14 9-1425-601-14 9-1425-602-34 9-1425-602-12 9-1425-602-12 9-1425-603-14 9-1425-603-14 9-1425-603-14
BSME MR LS AMG CRG ECS RS ICC
9-1425-604-14-1
X
X X
X X X
ITEMS MAJOR
MANUALS PATRIOT
9-1425-604-14-1
X
X
XX
X
XXX
COVERAGE xxx
UNIVE
RSITY OF
MINN
ESOT
A
3 1951 TOO 406 424 N
O LOLO
UNIVERSITY OF MINNESOTA
3 1951 TOO 406 424 N
Oxford Esselte